Revit Architecture 2009

Metric Tutorials

240A1-050000-PM04A

April 2008

©

2008 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved. Except as otherwise permitted by Autodesk, Inc., this publication, or parts thereof, may not be reproduced in any form, by any method, for any purpose. Certain materials included in this publication are reprinted with the permission of the copyright holder. Disclaimer THIS PUBLICATION AND THE INFORMATION CONTAINED HEREIN IS MADE AVAILABLE BY AUTODESK, INC. "AS IS." AUTODESK, INC. DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES, EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE REGARDING THESE MATERIALS. Trademarks The following are registered trademarks or trademarks of Autodesk, Inc., in the USA and other countries: 3DEC (design/logo), 3December, 3December.com, 3ds Max, ActiveShapes, Actrix, ADI, Alias, Alias (swirl design/logo), AliasStudio, Alias|Wavefront (design/logo), ATC, AUGI, AutoCAD, AutoCAD Learning Assistance, AutoCAD LT, AutoCAD Simulator, AutoCAD SQL Extension, AutoCAD SQL Interface, Autodesk, Autodesk Envision, Autodesk Insight, Autodesk Intent, Autodesk Inventor, Autodesk Map, Autodesk MapGuide, Autodesk Streamline, AutoLISP, AutoSnap, AutoSketch, AutoTrack, Backdraft, Built with ObjectARX (logo), Burn, Buzzsaw, CAiCE, Can You Imagine, Character Studio, Cinestream, Civil 3D, Cleaner, Cleaner Central, ClearScale, Colour Warper, Combustion, Communication Specification, Constructware, Content Explorer, Create>what's>Next> (design/logo), Dancing Baby (image), DesignCenter, Design Doctor, Designer's Toolkit, DesignKids, DesignProf, DesignServer, DesignStudio, Design|Studio (design/logo), Design Your World, Design Your World (design/logo), DWF, DWG, DWG (logo), DWG TrueConvert, DWG TrueView, DXF, EditDV, Education by Design, Exposure, Extending the Design Team, FBX, Filmbox, FMDesktop, Freewheel, GDX Driver, Gmax, Heads-up Design, Heidi, HOOPS, HumanIK, i-drop, iMOUT, Incinerator, IntroDV, Inventor, Inventor LT, Kaydara, Kaydara (design/logo), LocationLogic, Lustre, Maya, Mechanical Desktop, MotionBuilder, Mudbox, NavisWorks, ObjectARX, ObjectDBX, Open Reality, Opticore, Opticore Opus, PolarSnap, PortfolioWall, Powered with Autodesk Technology, Productstream, ProjectPoint, ProMaterials, Reactor, RealDWG, Real-time Roto, Recognize, Render Queue, Reveal, Revit, Showcase, ShowMotion, SketchBook, SteeringWheels, StudioTools, Topobase, Toxik, ViewCube, Visual, Visual Bridge, Visual Construction, Visual Drainage, Visual Hydro, Visual Landscape, Visual Roads, Visual Survey, Visual Syllabus, Visual Toolbox, Visual Tugboat, Visual LISP, Voice Reality, Volo, Wiretap, and WiretapCentral The following are registered trademarks or trademarks of Autodesk Canada Co. in the USA and/or Canada and other countries: Backburner, Discreet, Fire, Flame, Flint, Frost, Inferno, Multi-Master Editing, River, Smoke, Sparks, Stone, and Wire All other brand names, product names or trademarks belong to their respective holders. Third Party Software Program Credits ACIS Copyright© 1989-2001 Spatial Corp. Portions Copyright© 2002 Autodesk, Inc. Flash ® is a registered trademark of Macromedia, Inc. in the United States and/or other countries. International CorrectSpell™ Spelling Correction System© 1995 by Lernout & Hauspie Speech Products, N.V. All rights reserved. InstallShield™ 3.0. Copyright© 1997 InstallShield Software Corporation. All rights reserved. PANTONE® Colors displayed in the software application or in the user documentation may not match PANTONE-identified standards. Consult current PANTONE Color Publications for accurate color. PANTONE Color Data and/or Software shall not be copied onto another disk or into memory unless as part of the execution of this Autodesk software product. Portions Copyright© 1991-1996 Arthur D. Applegate. All rights reserved. Portions of this software are based on the work of the Independent JPEG Group. RAL DESIGN© RAL, Sankt Augustin, 2002 RAL CLASSIC© RAL, Sankt Augustin, 2002 Representation of the RAL Colors is done with the approval of RAL Deutsches Institut für Gütesicherung und Kennzeichnung e.V. (RAL German Institute for Quality Assurance and Certification, re. Assoc.), D-53757 Sankt Augustin. Typefaces from the Bitstream® typeface library copyright 1992. Typefaces from Payne Loving Trust© 1996. All rights reserved. Printed manual and help produced with Idiom WorldServer™. WindowBlinds: DirectSkin™ OCX © Stardock® AnswerWorks 4.0 ©; 1997-2003 WexTech Systems, Inc. Portions of this software © Vantage-Knexys. All rights reserved. The Director General of the Geographic Survey Institute has issued the approval for the coordinates exchange numbered TKY2JGD for Japan Geodetic Datum 2000, also known as technical information No H1-N0.2 of the Geographic Survey Institute, to be installed and used within this software product (Approval No.: 646 issued by GSI, April 8, 2002). Portions of this computer program are copyright © 1995-1999 LizardTech, Inc. All rights reserved. MrSID is protected by U.S. Patent No. 5,710,835. Foreign Patents Pending. Portions of this computer program are Copyright ©; 2000 Earth Resource Mapping, Inc. OSTN97 © Crown Copyright 1997. All rights reserved. OSTN02 © Crown copyright 2002. All rights reserved. OSGM02 © Crown copyright 2002, © Ordnance Survey Ireland, 2002. FME Objects Engine © 2005 SAFE Software. All rights reserved. ETABS is a registered trademark of Computers and Structures, Inc. ETABS © copyright 1984-2005 Computers and Structures, Inc. All rights reserved. RISA is a trademark of RISA Technologies. RISA-3D copyright © 1993-2005 RISA Technologies. All rights reserved. Portions relating to JPEG © Copyright 1991-1998 Thomas G. Lane. All rights reserved. This software is based in part on the work of the Independent JPEG Group. Portions relating to TIFF © Copyright 1997-1998 Sam Leffler. © Copyright 1991-1997 Silicon Graphics, Inc. All rights reserved. The Tiff portions of this software are provided by the copyright holders and contributors “as is” and any express or implied warranties, including, but not limited to, the implied warranties or merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose are disclaimed. In no event shall the

copyright owner or contributors of the TIFF portions be liable for any direct, indirect, incidental, special, exemplary, or consequential damages (including, but not limited to, procurement of substitute goods or services; loss of use, data, or profits; or business interruption) however caused and on any theory of liability, whether in contract, strict liability, or tort (including negligence or otherwise) arising in any way out of the use of the TIFF portions of this software, even if advised of the possibility of such damage. Portions of Libtiff 3.5.7 Copyright © 1988-1997 Sam Leffler. Copyright © 1991-1997 Silicon Graphics, Inc. Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted without fee, provided that (i) the above copyright notices and this permission notice appear in all copies of the software and related documentation, and (ii) the names of Sam Leffler and Silicon Graphics may not be used in any advertising or publicity relating to the software without the specific, prior written permission of Sam Leffler and Silicon Graphics. Portions of Libxml2 2.6.4 Copyright © 1998-2003 Daniel Veillard. All Rights Reserved. Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a copy of this software and associated documentation files (the “Software”), to deal in the Software without restriction, including without limitation the rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish, distribute, sublicense, and/or sell copies of the Software, and to permit persons to whom the Software is furnished to do so, subject to the following conditions: The above copyright notices and this permission notice shall be included in all copies or substantial portions of the Software. Government Use Use, duplication, or disclosure by the U.S. Government is subject to restrictions as set forth in FAR 12.212 (Commercial Computer Software-Restricted Rights) and DFAR 227.7202 (Rights in Technical Data and Computer Software), as applicable.

Contents

Getting Chapter 1

Started . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
Using the Tutorials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 Accessing Training Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 Understanding the Basics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 Navigating the User Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 Performing Common Tasks in Revit Architecture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17

Express Workshop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 Chapter 2 Express Workshop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Creating Details with Revit Architecture . . . . . Create a Detail with Imported DWG Data . Model-Based Detailing . . . . . . . . . . . . Keynoting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Drawing Sheets with Revit Architecture . Project Sheet Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . Project Detail Sheet Layout . . . . . . . . . Project Title Sheet Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 . 28 . 31 . 38 . 41 . 42 . 47 . 51

Developing Your Designs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55 Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Creating the Project . . . . . . . . . Adding Project Levels . . . . . . . . Creating a Column Grid . . . . . . . Adding Beams . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Braces . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Foundation . . . . . . . . Changing Structural Member Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58 . 60 . 64 . 72 . 77 . 82 . 85

v

Linking the Structural Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87 Adding Floors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92 Adding a Roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98 Adding a Curtain Wall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104 Creating an Entrance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107 Creating a Drop Ceiling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113 Creating Multi-Level Stairs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123 Creating a Wall with a Non-Uniform Height . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130 Adding Entourage and Site Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134 Adding a Service Core to the Building Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142 Modifying a Floor and Adding Railings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146

Documenting Your Projects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153 Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
Creating Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Duplicating Plan Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Elevation and Section Views . . . . . . . Creating Callout Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying View Tag Appearance . . . . . . . . . . Setting Visibility and Graphics Options in Views . . . . Creating a View Template . . . . . . . . . . . . . View Range and Plan Regions . . . . . . . . . . . Using Filters to Control Visibility . . . . . . . . . Masking Portions of a View . . . . . . . . . . . . Working with Visual Overrides . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Drawing Sheets in a Project . . . . . . . . . . Creating Drawing Sheets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Views to Sheets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying the Building Model from a Sheet View . Creating and Modifying a Title Sheet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155 . 155 . 159 . 166 . 172 . 175 . 176 . 179 . 182 . 184 . 187 . 192 . 192 . 196 . 201 . 202

Chapter 5

Tagging and Scheduling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
Tagging Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Sequentially Placing and Tagging Rooms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tagging Doors and Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tagging Other Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Defining Schedules and Color Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Window Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Project Parameters to a Window Schedule . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Unit-Based Door Schedule with a Filter . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Room Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Scheduling Rooms from a Program List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Room Color Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Material Takeoff . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Scheduling Shared Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Shared Parameter File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Shared Parameters to a Family . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Placing, Tagging, and Scheduling a Family with Shared Parameters . Scheduling Uniformat Assembly Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Scheduling Uniformat Assembly Codes and Descriptions . . . . . . . Exporting Project Information with ODBC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Exporting Schedule Information to Microsoft Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207 . 207 . 213 . 217 . 220 . 221 . 226 . 228 . 230 . 232 . 238 . 246 . 249 . 249 . 251 . 254 . 258 . 258 . 260 . 260

Chapter 6

Annotating and Dimensioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263
Changing the Base Elevation of a Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263 Relocating a Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265

vi | Contents

Dimensioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Automatic Wall Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Controlling Witness Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating an Office Standard Dimension Type from Existing Dimensions . Creating Text Annotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Text Notes to the Floor Plan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. 270 . 270 . 279 . 281 . 286 . 289 . 290

Chapter 7

Detailing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297
Creating a Detail from a Building Model . . . . Detailing the View . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Detail Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Text Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Detail Components . . . . . . . . Adding Keynotes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Line-based Detail Components . Modifying a Keynote Database . . . . . . . Creating a Drafted Detail . . . . . . . . . . . . . Importing a Detail into a Drafting View . . Creating a Reference Callout . . . . . . . . Creating a Detail in a Drafting View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297 . 298 . 304 . 308 . 310 . 312 . 314 . 319 . 320 . 321 . 321 . 323

Chapter 8

Finishing the Sheets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339
Using Note Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Note Block . . . . . . Using Drawing Lists . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Drawing List . . . . . Using Legends . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Symbol Legend . . . . Creating a Component Legend . Using Revision Tracking . . . . . . . . Setting Up a Revision Table . . . Sketching Revision Clouds . . . . Tagging Revision Clouds . . . . . Working with Revisions . . . . . Importing from Other Applications . . Importing Image Files . . . . . . Importing Text Documents . . . Importing Spreadsheets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339 . 339 . 345 . 345 . 347 . 347 . 351 . 356 . 356 . 358 . 360 . 361 . 367 . 368 . 368 . 369

Chapter 9

Using Dependent Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371
Using Dependent Views in Documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 373 Using Dependent Views for Floor Plan Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 373 Using Dependent Views for Elevation Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 384

Viewing and Rendering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 389 Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 391
Rendering an Exterior View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Applying Materials and Textures to the Building Model . Adding Trees to the Site . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Perspective View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating the Exterior Rendering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rendering an Interior View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding RPC People . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating the Interior Perspective View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 391 . 392 . 399 . 403 . 407 . 411 . 412 . 415

Contents | vii

Creating the Interior Rendering . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating and Recording Walkthroughs . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Walkthrough . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Changing the Walkthrough Path and Camera Position . Recording the Walkthrough . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. 419 . 424 . 425 . 428 . 430

Chapter 11

Creating Solar Studies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 431
Creating Views for Solar Studies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Solar Study - Courtyard View . . . . . . . . Creating a Solar Study Section Cutaway View . . . . . Creating a Solar Study Plan Cutaway View . . . . . . Saving Solar Study Settings and Previewing Animations . . Creating Solar Studies - Summer and Winter Solstice . Previewing Solar Study Animation . . . . . . . . . . . Exporting Solar Studies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Exporting the Study as AVI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Exporting a Study as PNG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating an Internal Plan Solar Study . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating an Internal Plan Study . . . . . . . . . . . . Re-orienting the Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Mirroring the Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Orienting to True North . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rendering Interior Shadow Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rendering an Interior View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 431 . 432 . 433 . 435 . 437 . 438 . 439 . 440 . 440 . 443 . 444 . 444 . 447 . 447 . 448 . 454 . 454

Chapter 12

Presentation Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 457
Adding a Floor Plan View to the Analytique . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Preparing a Floor Plan for the Analytique . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using Advanced Model Graphics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding the Floor Plan to a Sheet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding an Elevation View to the Analytique . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Preparing the Elevation Analytique . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding the Presentation Elevation View to the Presentation Sheet . Adding Section Views to the Analytique . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Preparing a Section View for the Analytique . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Shadows and Silhouettes to a Section View . . . . . . . . . Adding the Presentation Section to the Analytique . . . . . . . . . Working with a Presentation View Template . . . . . . . . . . . . Working in a Callout Analytique . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating 3D Cutaways with Section Boxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Cutaway Isometric Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Cutaway Perspective Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Annotating the Analytique . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 458 . 459 . 460 . 462 . 466 . 467 . 469 . 471 . 472 . 476 . 478 . 481 . 484 . 491 . 492 . 499 . 503

Importing and Exporting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 505 Chapter 13 Importing SketchUp Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 507
Importing a SketchUp Model as a Mass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 508 Creating a Building from Mass Faces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 510

Using Advanced Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 523 Chapter 14 Curtain Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 525
Flat Curtain System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 525 Creating an Entrance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 525 Adding Mullions to the Curtain System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 536

viii | Contents

Curved Curtain System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding a Curved Curtain System . . . . . . . Adding a Custom Curtain Panel . . . . . . . . Adding Mullions to the Curved Curtain Panel Additional Curtain Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . Sloped Glazings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Storefront System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Curtain System by Lines . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. 539 . 539 . 541 . 544 . 548 . 548 . 550 . 552

Chapter 15

Roofs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 557
Creating Roofs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating an Extruded Roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Gable Roof from a Footprint . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Roof with a Vertical Penetration from a Footprint . Creating a Hip Roof from a Footprint . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Shed Roof from a Footprint . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Slope Arrows to a Shed Roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Aligning Roof Eaves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Mansard Roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Low Slope Roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Fascia, Gutters, and Soffits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Roof Fascia . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Gutters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Soffits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 557 . 557 . 562 . 565 . 567 . 571 . 572 . 574 . 576 . 578 . 586 . 587 . 588 . 590

Chapter 16

Area

Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 593

Using Area Analysis Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 593 Creating Area Schemes and Plans . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 593 Creating Area Schedules and Color Fill Area Plans . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 600

Chapter 17

Massing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 603
Using Massing Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Massing Elements to a Building Model . . . . . . . . . . Using Massing Tools to Cut Geometry from the Building Model . Using Swept Blends . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using Mass Family Files in a Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating New Mass Family Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Loading and Placing New Mass Families . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Joining Mass Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using Mass Elements with Design Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Mass Elements in Design Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Building Components from Mass Elements . . . . . . . . . . Creating Walls by Picking Faces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Floors by Picking Masses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Mass Study Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Roofs by Picking Faces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Curtain Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Editing Elements Created from Massings . . . . . . . . . . . . . Controlling Mass/Shell Visibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 603 . 604 . 610 . 611 . 616 . 616 . 618 . 621 . 624 . 624 . 627 . 628 . 631 . 634 . 638 . 640 . 644 . 649

Chapter 18

Grouping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 653
Creating, Modifying, and Nesting Groups . Creating and Placing a Group . . . . Modifying a Group . . . . . . . . . . Nesting Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . Working with Detail Groups . . . . . . . . Creating a Detail Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 653 . 653 . 661 . 665 . 668 . 668

Contents | ix

Using Attached Detail Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 671 Saving and Loading Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 674 Saving and Loading Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 674

Chapter 19

Site . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 677
Using Site Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Toposurface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Property Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying Contour Visibility and Site Settings . Creating Topographic Subregions . . . . . . . . Grading the Toposurface . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding a Building Pad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Site Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tagging Site and Parking Components . . . . . Creating Parking Space Schedules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 677 . 678 . 684 . 689 . 690 . 698 . 703 . 706 . 710 . 713

Chapter 20

Sharing Projects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 717
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using Worksharing in a Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Understanding Worksharing Fundamentals . . . . . . . Enabling Worksharing and Setting Up Worksets . . . . Working Individually with Worksets . . . . . . . . . . . Using Worksets with Multiple Users . . . . . . . . . . . Borrowing Elements from the Worksets of Other Users . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 717 . 718 . 718 . 722 . 726 . 729 . 734

Chapter 21

Creating Multiple Design Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 739
Creating Multiple Design Options in a Project . Creating the Structural Design Options . . Creating the Roof System Design Options . Managing Design Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 739 . 740 . 750 . 757

Chapter 22

Project Phasing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 761
Using Phasing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 761 Phasing Your Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 762 Using Phase-Specific Room Tags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 768

Chapter 23

Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 771
Linking Building Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Linking Building Models from Different Project Files . Repositioning Linked Building Models . . . . . . . . Controlling Linked Building Model Visibility . . . . . Managing Linked Building Models . . . . . . . . . . . Sharing Coordinates Between Building Models . . . . . . . Acquiring and Publishing Coordinates . . . . . . . . Relocating a Project with Shared Coordinates . . . . . Working with a Linked Building Model . . . . . . . . Managing Shared Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Scheduling Components of Linked Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 772 . 772 . 781 . 784 . 786 . 789 . 789 . 791 . 795 . 796 . 797

Customizing Project Settings and Templates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 801 Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 803
Modifying System Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 803 Modifying General System Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 803 Specifying File Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 805

x | Contents

Specifying Spelling Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying Snap Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying Project Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating and Applying Materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating and Applying Fill Patterns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Controlling Object Styles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying Line Patterns and Styles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying Annotations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Specifying Units of Measurement, Temporary Dimensions, and Detail Level Options . Modifying Project Browser Organization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating an Office Template . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Choosing the Base Template . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying Project Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Loading and Modifying Families and Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying Views and View Templates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying Import/Export Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Setting up Shared and Project Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Named Print Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. 807 . 808 . 811 . 811 . 815 . 817 . 820 . 825 . 827 . 828 . 831 . 831 . 832 . 837 . 839 . 842 . 843 . 845

Contents | xi

xii

Getting Started

1

2

Introduction

1

This introduction helps you get started with the Revit Architecture 2009 tutorials and presents the fundamental concepts of the product, including:
■ ■ ■ ■

how Revit Architecture works. the terms used when working with the product. how to navigate the user interface. how to perform some common tasks in the product.

Using the Tutorials
In this lesson, you learn how to use the Revit Architecture tutorials, including where to find the training files and how to create a new Revit Architecture project from a template file.

3

The Contents tab of the Revit Architecture Tutorials window displays the available tutorial titles. Expand a title for a list of lessons in the tutorial. Expand a lesson title for a list of exercises in the lesson. NOTE You may find it helpful to print a tutorial to make it easier to reference the instructions as you work in Revit Architecture. The tutorials are also available in PDF format by clicking Help menu ➤ Documents on the Web in Revit Architecture.

Accessing Training Files
Training files are Revit Architecture projects, templates, and families that were created specifically for use with the tutorials. In this exercise, you learn where the training files are located, as well as how to open and save them.

Where are the training files located?
Training files, by default, are located in C:\Documents and Settings\All Users\Application Data\Autodesk\RAC 2009\Training. Training files are grouped into 3 folders within the training folder:

Common: generic files often used to teach a concept. These files are not dependent on imperial or metric units. Common file names have a c_ prefix. Imperial: files for users working with imperial units. Imperial file names have an i_ prefix. Metric: files for users working with metric units. Metric file names have an m_ prefix.

■ ■

NOTE Depending on your installation, your training folder may be in a different location. Contact your CAD manager for more information. IMPORTANT Content used in the tutorials, such as templates and families, is located and accessed in the training files location. Although this content may be installed in other locations on your system, all content used in the tutorials is included in the training files location to ensure that all audiences access the correct files.

What is a training file?
A training file is a Revit Architecture project that defines a building information model and views of the model that are used to complete the steps in a tutorial. Many tutorials include a Training File section that references the training file to be used with the tutorial. In other tutorials, you create a project from a template, rather than opening an existing training file. Open a training file 1 Click File menu ➤ Open. 2 In the left pane of the Open dialog, scroll down, and click the Training Files icon. 3 In the right pane, double-click Common, Imperial, or Metric, depending on the type of training file.

4 | Chapter 1 Introduction

4 Click the training file name, and click Open. Save a training file 5 To save a training file with a new name, click File menu ➤ Save As. In many cases, the work you do in a project during a tutorial exercise becomes the starting point for the next exercise. In many tutorials, you create a project or modify an existing project, save the changes, and use the saved version of the file to begin the next exercise or lesson. 6 Complete the information in the Save As dialog:

For Save in, select the folder in which to save the new file. You can save the file in the appropriate Training Files folder or in another location. Note where you save the file so you can open it for additional exercises as required. For File name, enter the new file name. A good practice is to save the training file with a unique name after you have made changes. For example, if you open c_settings.rvt and make changes, you should save this file with a new name such as c_settings_modified.rvt. For Files of type, verify that Project Files (*.rvt) is selected, and then click Save.

Create a project from a template 7 To create a project from a template, rather than using an existing training file, click File menu ➤ New ➤ Project.

8 In the New Project dialog, under Create new, select Project. 9 Under Template file, verify the second option is selected, and click Browse.

Accessing Training Files | 5

2D and 3D view. and how to perform some common tasks in the product. and residential. the hierarchy of elements. the numbers or characteristics that define these kinds of relationships are called parameters. Building information modelling (BIM) delivers information about project design. you learn what Revit Architecture is and how its parametric change engine benefits you and your work. The Revit Architecture parametric change engine automatically coordinates changes made anywhere—in model views.rte. the operation of the software is parametric. What is meant by parametric? The term parametric refers to the relationships among all elements of the model that enable the coordination and change management that Revit Architecture provides. If you move the partition. As you work in drawing and schedule views. quantities. drawings. the parameter is one of association or connection. hence. In this case. the floor or roof remains connected. scope. and open Metric\Templates. Understanding the Basics In this lesson. and plans. 13 Click OK. You do not have to intervene to update drawings or links. and click Open. 11 In the Choose Template dialog. the relationship of equal spacing is maintained. drawing sheets. In this case. every drawing sheet. What is Revit Architecture 2009? The Revit Architecture platform for building information modelling is a design and documentation system that supports the design. 6 | Chapter 1 Introduction . the parameter is not a number but a proportional characteristic. In mathematics and mechanical CAD. how to navigate the user interface. You learn the terminology. schedules. you will use the default template. click Training Files. and customize the project as necessary. and schedule is a presentation of information from the same underlying building model database. The edge of a floor or roof is related to the exterior wall such that when the exterior wall is moved. The following are examples of these element relationships: ■ The outside of a door frame is a fixed dimension on the hinge side from a perpendicular partition. Windows or pilasters are spaced equally across a given elevation. and schedules required for a building project. ■ ■ How does Revit Architecture 2009 keep things updated? A fundamental characteristic of a building information modelling application is the ability to coordinate changes and maintain consistency at all times.10 In the left pane of the Choose Template dialog. 12 Select DefaultMetric. Revit Architecture collects information about the building project and coordinates this information across all other representations of the project. and phases when you need it. This capability delivers the fundamental coordination and productivity benefits of Revit Architecture: Change anything at any time anywhere in the project. sections. the door retains this relationship to the partition. Templates are available for specific building types: commercial. These relationships are created either automatically by the software or by you as you work. construction. review the Revit Architecture templates. You begin with the fundamental concepts on which Revit Architecture is built. and Revit Architecture coordinates that change through the entire project. If the length of the elevation is changed. For most tutorial projects. Each template contains predefined settings and views appropriate for the corresponding building type. In the Revit Architecture model.

The first is the capturing of relationships while the designer works. ■ This implementation provides flexibility for designers. you can define new parametric elements in Revit Architecture. and keynotes are annotation elements. For example. levels. For example. tags. For example. windows. filled regions. Examples include detail lines. Datum elements help to define project context. windows. View-specific elements display only in the views in which they are placed.When you change something. The second is its approach to propagating building changes. dimensions. tags. They help to describe or document the model. and roofs are model elements. Understanding the Basics | 7 . Revit Architecture uses 2 key concepts that make it especially powerful and easy to use. doors. dimensions. For example. ■ ■ There are 2 types of model elements: ■ Hosts (or host elements) are generally built in place at the construction site. walls and roofs are hosts. and 2D detail components are view-specific elements. grids. Revit Architecture immediately determines what is affected by the change and reflects that change to any affected elements. The result of these concepts is software that works like you do. ■ There are 2 types of view-specific elements: ■ Annotation elements are 2D components that document the model and maintain scale on paper. walls. Element behavior in a parametric modeler In projects. doors. Revit Architecture uses 3 types of elements: ■ Model elements represent the actual 3D geometry of the building. For example. Details are 2D items that provide details about the building model in a particular view. For example. and 2D detail components. Model components are all the other types of elements in the building model. and cabinets are model components. and reference planes are datum elements. without requiring entry of data that is unimportant to your design. programming is not required. They display in relevant views of the model. Revit Architecture elements are designed to be created and modified by you directly. If you can draw.

from geometry to construction data. or bottom of foundation. Revit Architecture classifies elements by categories. top of wall. some terms are unique to Revit Architecture. Understanding the following terms is crucial to understanding the software. 8 | Chapter 1 Introduction . section views. and so forth). they are implied by what you do and how you draw. In other cases. Level: Levels are infinite horizontal planes that act as a reference for level-hosted elements. This information includes components used to design the model. industry-standard terms familiar to most architects. Often. The context is determined by how you draw the component and the constraint relationships that are established with other components. you can explicitly control them. Having only one file to track also makes it easier to manage the project. Most often. Understanding Revit Architecture 2009 terms Most of the terms used to identify objects in Revit Architecture are common. and ceilings. you must be in a section or elevation view. Revit Architecture makes it easy for you to alter the design and have changes reflected in all associated areas (plan views. The project file contains all information for the building design. elevation views. views of the project. Level 2 work plane cutting through the 3D view with the corresponding floor plan next to it Element: When creating a project.In Revit Architecture. floors. However. You create a level for each known story or other needed reference of the building. To place levels. you add Revit Architecture parametric building elements to the design. first floor. for example. and types. you use levels to define a vertical height or story within a building. families. Project: In Revit Architecture. by locking a dimension or aligning 2 walls. you do nothing to establish these relationships. schedules. such as roofs. and drawings of the design. for example. the project is the single database of information for your design—the building information model. By using a single project file. the elements determine their behavior largely from their context in the building.

A type can also be a style. Instance: Instances are the actual items (individual elements) that are placed in the project and have specific locations in the building (model instances) or on a drawing sheet (annotation instances). If you have used any other product that follows these conventions. categories of model elements include walls and beams. such as a A0 title block or a 910 x 2110 door. In the steps that follow. Family: Families are classes of elements in a category. the user interface is labeled. floors. making it easy to understand what each button represents. you navigate and become familiar with the user interface. such as default aligned or default angular style for dimensions. They are not available for loading or creating as separate files. 6-panel colonial doors could be considered one family. ceilings. you can create different types of walls with different compositions. and levels. identical use. and similar graphical representation. Revit Architecture uses standard Microsoft® Windows® conventions. Different elements in a family may have different values for some or all properties. In the following illustration. For example. However. For example. A type can be a specific size of a family. ■ Type: Each family can have several types. but the set of properties—their names and meaning—is the same. System families include walls. dimensions. specifically its clear user interface. although the doors that compose the family come in different sizes and materials. Families are either component families or system families: ■ Component families can be loaded into a project and created from family templates. roofs. Even the toolbar buttons are labeled. the behavior of a wall is predefined in the system.Category: A category is a group of elements that you use to model or document a building design. You can use the predefined types to generate new types that belong to this family within the project. System families can be transferred between projects. Navigating the User Interface | 9 . For example. You can determine the set of properties and the graphical representation of the family. A family groups elements with a common set of parameters (properties). learning Revit Architecture is much easier. Navigating the User Interface One of the advantages of Revit Architecture is its ease of use. ■ ■ ■ Revit Architecture predefines the set of properties and the graphical representation of system families. The Revit Architecture window is arranged to make navigation easy. Categories of annotation elements include tags and text notes.

This creates a new project based on the default template. TIP The view opened and the view names are dependent on the template on which the project is based. 10 | Chapter 1 Introduction . The Title Bar 2 Place the cursor at the top of the user interface. the Level 1 floor plan view is the default open view. By default.Start a new project 1 On the Standard toolbar. In addition. new projects are numbered consecutively until saved with a new name. The title bar contains the name of the project and the view that is currently open. click (New).

The toolbar buttons represent common commands. The Toolbar 4 Click Window menu ➤ Toolbar. Another time-saving tool for selecting commands is to place the cursor in the drawing area and right-click. While working in the drawing area. and View. The Options Bar 5 Click Modelling menu ➤ Wall. There are several toolbars across the top of the window beneath the menu bar. A shortcut menu displays a list of available commands. Navigating the User Interface | 11 . You can control the visibility of the toolbars and turn the text labels on or off using the Window ➤ Toolbar menu. The Options Bar is context-sensitive and varies depending on the tool or selected component.The Menu Bar 3 The menu bar across the top of the window includes standard menu names such as File. the shortcut key for Zoom in Region is ZR. which are listed on the menu. Click View menu ➤ Zoom. Edit. You can use the toolbar grips to resize and move each toolbar. Many of the commands have shortcut keys. depending on the function you are performing and what is currently selected. you type the required key combination to perform the command. For example. The bar beneath the toolbars contains wall design options.

When you select the Door tool. For example. The Type Selector is a context-sensitive drop-down list. a door type is specified. The design options available on the Options Bar are now applicable to doors.6 Click Modelling menu ➤ Door. 8 Click Modelling menu ➤ Wall. On the left side of the Options Bar. the door type that displays in the Type Selector is the door type that will be added to the building model. Select the drop-down list to view the list of doors. 12 | Chapter 1 Introduction . select the drop-down list to see the walls that are available. You can use the Type Selector in 2 ways: ■ You can select an element type before you add the element to the building model. The list of elements in the Type Selector is identical to the elements listed in the Families branch of the Project Browser under the respective category. the Type Selector displays a list of doors available in the project. The Type Selector 7 The drop-down list on the left side of the Options Bar is called the Type Selector. when you add a door. 9 In the Type Selector.

There are 10 tabs in the Design Bar. In the drawing area.■ You can use the Type Selector to change an element type after it has been added to the building model. The Design Bar is located on the left side of the interface. you can select any element and then change its type using the Type Selector. containing buttons grouped by function. The Show Design Bars dialog displays. You can control which tabs display by selecting them in the Show Design Bars dialog. The Design Bar 10 Click Window menu ➤ Design Bars. Navigating the User Interface | 13 . immediately below the Type Selector.

14 | Chapter 1 Introduction . select Views (all). In the Project Browser. ■ ■ ■ ■ Basics tab: commands for creating most basic building model components View tab: commands for creating different views in the project Modelling tab: commands to create model elements Drafting tab: commands for adding annotation symbols and creating sheet details for construction documents Rendering tab: commands for creating rendered images Site tab: commands for adding site components and producing site plans Massing tab: commands for creating conceptual designs with masses Room and Area tab: commands for making room and area schemes and plans Structural tab: commands for adding structural components to the project Construction tab: commands for creating construction industry information ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ To access the commands in a tab. TIP You can control the visibility of each tab by right-clicking on the Design Bar and selecting the tab from the shortcut menu.11 Click OK. The Project Browser 12 To the right of the Design Bar is the Project Browser. The respective commands display on the Design Bar. Each tab contains frequently used commands that are also available from the menu bar. click the tab in the Design Bar.

To open a view. The browser is dockable. Navigating the User Interface | 15 . family category (doors. schedules. Expand or collapse the browser list by clicking the + or – next to the name. scroll through the sorting options available for the Project Browser. and groups of your current project: ■ ■ Right-click in the browser to add. sheets. ■ ■ ■ 13 In the Type Selector. The browser is organized by view type (floor plans. windows).You can use the Project Browser to quickly manage the views. You can also drag and drop from the browser into the drawing area. so you can reposition it by dragging the Project Browser title bar to a new location. and groups. walls. double-click its name. reports. and rename views. 3D). families. making it easy to add a family or group to the project or add a view to a sheet. elevations. delete. and group name. families.

the status bar provides information regarding what you should do next. The Status Bar 16 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. In this case. 17 Place the cursor near the center of the drawing area.14 Click Settings menu ➤ Browser Organization. 16 | Chapter 1 Introduction ." TIP The tooltip that displays is identical to the note in the status bar. 15 In the Browser Organization dialog. After creating a browser organization scheme. Do not click. click Cancel. you can instantly change the sorting within the Project Browser by selecting the scheme in the Type Selector. You can create and modify Project Browser organization schemes for views and sheets. The cursor displays as a pencil. In the bottom left corner of the window. click Wall. it tells you to "Click to enter wall start point.

Make sure you place the cursor over the elevation directional arrow. notice that the name of the highlighted element is Views : Elevation : West. You can select a topic on the Contents tab. TIP You can control the level of tooltip assistance using Settings menu ➤ Options. Click the Help button. regarding selected elements in a view. search for all instances of a word or phrase on the Search tab. press F1 for context-sensitive help. it will be easier to work in Revit Architecture and focus on the lessons of each tutorial. You can control the status bar visibility from the Window menu. Performing Common Tasks in Revit Architecture In this exercise. When you place the cursor over an element. you can use the status bar and TAB to switch between elements and select the desired element. In the status bar. it highlights and the status bar displays the element name. You can use this tri-pane. Help is available online at all times during a Revit Architecture session. After you are familiar with these tasks. Tooltips: To see tooltips. click Modify to end the Wall command. Performing Common Tasks in Revit Architecture | 17 . Elevations : Elevation : Elevation 5. The elevation symbol consists of two parts: the main symbol and the elevation directional arrow (a triangle). The status bar also provides information. 20 Press TAB. or save commonly used pages on the Favorites tab. You can access context-sensitive help in the following ways: ■ Dialogs: Many dialogs include Help buttons.18 On the Design Bar. Toolbar: From the toolbar. If no Help button displays. Revit Architecture 2009 Help 21 Click Help menu ➤ Revit Architecture 2009 Help. rest the cursor over the Toolbar button until the tooltip displays. you learn to perform some of the common Revit Architecture tasks that are included in the tutorials. context-sensitive help is available for many parts of the user interface. press F1 for help. in conjunction with tooltips. When attempting to select a specific element in a complex or crowded view. HTML help window to search for information and quickly display it to read or print. There are several tools that help you find information. You can also press SHIFT+F1. ■ ■ ■ 22 Close the Revit Architecture Help window. Windows: From any window. 19 Place the cursor over the elevation symbol arrow on the left side of the drawing area. click on the Standard toolbar. find a keyword on the Index tab. and notice that the highlighted element switches to the main elevation symbol. and then click a specific menu command or button for help. It highlights when the cursor is over it. and the topic specific to the dialog opens. In addition.

click the drop-down menu next to the Zoom command to display the zoom options. 5 On the View toolbar.Use zoom commands to adjust the view In the tutorials. the view zooms out from the building model. 1 Click File menu ➤ Open. There are several ways to access zoom options. click Training Files. The 3D isometric view displays: 3 Click View menu ➤ Zoom to display the zoom menu. you may be asked to zoom to a specific region of a view or to zoom to fit the entire building or floor plan in the view. In the following steps. 18 | Chapter 1 Introduction . 4 Click Zoom Out (2x). you open a training file and practice adjusting the view with the different zoom commands. and open Metric\m_Cohouse.rvt. 2 In the left pane of the Open dialog. For example. In the drawing area. you are instructed to use a zoom command to adjust the viewable area in the window. The zoom menu lists the zoom options and their shortcut keys. Understanding how to adjust the view will make it easier to work with the building model in the window.

on the View toolbar. SteeringWheels provide 2D and 3D navigation tools. The cursor becomes a magnifying glass. the view zooms in on the selected area. 6 Click Zoom To Fit. Zoom is also available using SteeringWheels. Performing Common Tasks in Revit Architecture | 19 . use a zoom menu command or the toolbar option to zoom out. . 9 If you use a mouse that has a wheel as the middle button. Revit Architecture uses the largest snap increment that represents less than 2mm in the drawing area. 8 Click the upper left corner and lower right corner of the region to magnify. the wheel follows the cursor around the drawing area. As you move the mouse. click Settings menu ➤ Snaps. 7 Click in the drawing area. When you release the mouse button. click The Full Navigation wheel displays in the drawing area.NOTE Clicking the Zoom icon itself activates the Zoom In Region command. If you do not have a wheel mouse. The cursor displays a pivot point for the Zoom tool. 11 Move the cursor over the Zoom wedge of the wheel so that it highlights. and type the shortcut ZR to zoom in on a region. Use the wheel mouse to zoom out to see the entire building again. this is referred to as a crossing selection. NOTE As you zoom in and out. 10 To display SteeringWheels. you can roll the wheel to zoom the view. 12 Click and hold the mouse button. To modify or add snap increments. The view of the building model is sized to fit the available window.

called drag controls. press ESC. Similar controls. and click Help. These are the drag controls. click the pull-down menu on the Full Navigation wheel. and then using the Zoom tool again. as shown. When drawing or modifying a building model. and select the wall. it is important to understand how to adjust the size of components in the drawing area. Resize elements using drag controls 16 In the Project Browser. You can change the pivot point by releasing the mouse button. Small blue dots. 20 | Chapter 1 Introduction . display at the ends of selected lines and walls in a plan view. expand Views (all). 15 To exit the wheel. and click the SteeringWheels tab.13 Drag the cursor down or left to zoom out. Cnst. expand Floor Plans. moving the wheel to the desired location. display along the ends. Notice the small blue dots that display at both ends of the wall. click Settings menu ➤ Options. zoom in on the upper-left corner of the floor plan. referred to as shape handles. For more information about SteeringWheels. bottoms. 17 Type ZR. To define settings for SteeringWheels. and tops of selected walls in elevation views and 3D views. and double-click 2nd Flr. 14 Drag the cursor up or right to zoom in.

and on the Tools toolbar. for example. and click again to specify the ending position. click to specify the starting position. In this case. as shown. such as Move and Copy. Move an element 20 Scroll the view down so you can see the couch and table in the floor plan. you want to move the table closer to the wall.18 Click and drag the left control. 21 Select the Craftsman02 table. click (Move). Performing Common Tasks in Revit Architecture | 21 . The table moves down. to lengthen the wall. After selecting the element to move. 22 Click the lower-left endpoint of the table. 19 Click in the drawing area to deselect the wall. and the lower-left corner is placed at the move endpoint. Some commands. require 2 clicks to complete the command. 23 Click next to the lower wall. moving the cursor to the left horizontally.

and click again to end it. click Lines. or press CTRL+Z. In this example. Move.Another way to move an element is to select it and drag it to a new location. Some commands. 28 Click in the drawing area to start the line. stay active or current until you choose another command or end the current command. NOTE To quickly undo the previous action. All commands are canceled up to and including the selected command. such as the Lines command. click the Undo command. The table and plant are returned to their original locations. The Undo command allows you to reverse the effects of one or more commands. All changes you make to a project are tracked. End a command 27 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. Notice that the Lines command is still active and you could continue to draw lines. 24 Select the plant. and drag it on top of the table. select the second item in the list. you decide that you prefer the table in its original position. Undo commands 25 On the Standard toolbar. click the drop-down menu next to (Undo). 22 | Chapter 1 Introduction . on the Standard toolbar. Selecting the second item in the list will undo the last 2 actions. 26 On the Undo menu.

Performing Common Tasks in Revit Architecture | 23 . use one of the following methods: ■ ■ ■ Choose another command. click Modify. 30 Close the file without saving your changes.29 To end the command. On the Design Bar. Press ESC twice.

24 .

Express Workshop 25 .

26 .

Express Workshop 2 The Express Workshop tutorials focus on specific areas of functionality. you will have a basic understanding of the design and documentation tools. illustrating how building components work together. this tutorial uses imperial units only. but for training purposes. as well as some of the best practices that help you efficiently design and develop an architectural building project. Create a detail callout and reference a drafting view. with parametric tags that automatically track and display detail view and drawing sheet placement. Insert a Callout and create a model-based detail view. Use detail components to define an assembly. you will create building assembly details by performing the following tasks: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Create a drafting view detail by importing a DWG file. highlighting powerful features that are integral to the most common architectural workflows. NOTE Revit Architecture is available in both imperial and metric versions. and annotate building assemblies. When you have finished these tutorials. Creating Details with Revit Architecture Revit Architecture provides intuitive native tools to create. In this tutorial. or referenced as a drafting view. In Revit Architecture. details are either based upon the geometry of the building model as a detail view. Use keynotes to annotate a detail. Each tutorial demonstrates tools you can use to complete tasks that are common to an overall workflow. 27 . detail.

enter Window Head Detail. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. import a DWG detail.Create a Detail with Imported DWG Data In this exercise. and reference a drafting view. click Drafting View. scroll until the folder is displayed. for Name. you will create a drafting view. ■ Open Common\Express Workshop\Detailing folder\c_express_workshop_details_start. 3 In the Scale list. If necessary. and click OK. verify 1 1/2''= 1'-0'' is selected. create a reference callout. 2 In the Drafting View dialog. Create a drafting view 1 On the View tab of the Design Bar. click Training Files. 28 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop .rvt. In the left pane of the Open dialog.

Create a reference callout 8 In the Project Browser. displaying the extents of the detail. NOTE The drafting view you have created is a container into which you have not yet added any graphical information.dwg. 7 Type ZE to zoom out to the extents of the model. and navigate to Express Workshop\Detailing\ew_window_head_detail. located directly to the left of the drawing area. select Black and White. 9 Type ZR.In the Project Browser. click Training Files. Create a Detail with Imported DWG Data | 29 . which is the keyboard shortcut for the Zoom in Region command. 10 In the drawing area. The model zooms out. drag the cursor to draw a rectangle around the Level 1 section area. as shown. 6 In the Colors field list. and click Open. The drawing area is still blank. The cursor displays as a magnifying glass.). expand Sections (Wall Sections) view heading and double-click Wall Section 1. 5 In the left pane of the Import/Link CAD Formats dialog. Import a drawing detail 4 Click File menu ➤ Import/Link ➤ CAD Formats. the new drafting view is listed under Drafting Views(Detail-Sim.

click Callout. 13 Click Reference other view. 12 On the Options Bar. Select Drafting View: Window Head Detail. 11 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 14 In the drawing area.The view displays to the specified area. 30 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop . click 2 points to specify opposite corners of the callout bubble as shown. in the Type Selector. select 1 1/2” = 1’-0”. and in the Scale list. to activate the view selection list. select Detail View: Detail.

2 On the Options Bar. The model view displays the linked Window Head Detail drafting view in the drawing area. select Callout. 16 Close the Window Head Detail drafting view. Model-Based Detailing | 31 . c_express_workshop_details_start. Next you will create a detail view and add detail components. select Detail View: Detail. click 2 points to specify opposite corners of the callout bubble as shown. select 1 1/2” = 1’-0”. you will create a detail view defined by a callout.The reference callout is created. Create a detail view 1 On the View tab of the Design Bar. adjust the detail view display settings. linked to the Window Head Detail drafting view 15 In the drawing area. and in the Scale list. Model-Based Detailing In this exercise. Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. in the Type Selector. double-click the reference callout tag head. and then add detail components and detail groups to build a model-based detail assembly. 3 In the drawing area.rvt.

32 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop . enter Wall Base 1. under Detail Views (Detail). 4 Right-click Detail 0. select the Wall Base 1 Callout to expose grips. 7 Drag the grip closest to the Callout Head as shown. Adjust display settings 9 In the Project Browser. for Name. and click Rename. under Detail Views(Detail). 5 In the Rename View dialog. 6 In the drawing area. click Modify to clear the selection. double-click Wall Base 1.The new detail view is listed as Detail 0 in the Project Browser. and click OK. 8 On the Design Bar.

The region you defined with the callout bubble displays in the drawing area. Model-Based Detailing | 33 . 11 Click the boundary of the view crop region to display grips for both regions. bordered by a solid line. This is the view crop region. 10 Move the cursor over the boundary of the view crop region to display a dashed line indicating the boundary of the annotation crop region.

right-click. select As Underlay. for Display Model. 13 On the View Control Bar. and click View Properties. 16 Click OK. under Graphics. 14 In the drawing area. and click OK. The model elements in the view display as half-tones. 34 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop . 15 In the Element Properties dialog.12 Drag the annotation crop region grips as shown. The view and annotation crop regions are no longer visible. allowing you to see the difference between the model geometry and any added detail components. click (Hide Crop Region).

17 On the View Control Bar.Detail components and detail groups Model based details are created using the model geometry as a background. verify that the view detail level is set to Medium. and press ENTER. select Gypsum Wallboard-Section : 5/8”. you can accurately place detail components based on the model component assembly. Model-Based Detailing | 35 .Brick on Mtl. click the lower-right endpoint of the Basic Wall:Exterior . the endpoints of the detail components may become visible. 19 In the Type Selector. NOTE The detail component is created passing outside of the crop region. 20 In the drawing area. typical details can easily be placed. By including the model geometry at a medium or fine level of detail. Stud. By grouping detail components. Directly above the drawing area. 18 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. the Type Selector displays the detail components that are pre-loaded in the model. 21 Move the cursor up slightly. type 1' 6''. on the Options Bar. click Detail Components. If the crop region is enlarged.

26 Right-click Typical 8" Metal Stud NLB Wall. 25 In the Project Browser. add the following detail components as shown. and click Create Instance. as shown. 36 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop . ■ ■ ■ ■ Plywood-Section1 : 3/4" Rigid Insulation-Section : 1'' Resilient Flooring-Section Resilient Topset Base-Section: 6'' 24 On the Design Bar. expand Groups ➤ Detail. click Modify to end the command. Typical construction details have been saved as assemblies by grouping detail components. 23 Using the same method.22 Press ESC twice to end the command. 27 Click the top-left corner of the 12'' concrete foundation wall to place the detail.

■ ■ Typical 12" Foundation.28 Press ESC to end the command. Typical Standard Brick Base Model-Based Detailing | 37 . select the same top-left corner of the 12'' concrete foundation wall used previously.4" Slab detail. 29 Repeat this process for the following: NOTE For each detail group.

You can customize this list. or instructions within a construction documentation package. 2 In the left pane of the Open dialog. Keynoting detail components 1 Click File menu ➤ Keynoting. click Training Files. select Keynote Tag : Keynote Text. or create a series of text files specific to a building or project type.30 Type ZE to zoom the view extents. you will add and modify keynotes to further develop the detail. Keynoting In this exercise you will keynote detail components by element. click Keynote ➤ Element. consistent means of identifying building assembly components. The text files can then be referenced into a Revit Architecture project. The Keynoting feature in Revit Architecture provides a simple. see Modifying a Keynote Database on page 319. 4 On the Options Bar.rvt. Leader. and Free End are selected. special notes. and verify that Horizontal. click Browse. For more information about customizing a keynote database. 38 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop . in the type selector. and open Common\Express Workshop\Detailing\c_express_workshop_RevitKeynotes_Imperial_2004.txt. map keynotes by material. 3 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. In the next exercise. c_express_workshop_details_start. and format keynote styles. and under Keynote Table. for Full Path. Revit Architecture provides a link to a central text file that contains a master list of keynote definitions. Continue to work in the Wall Base 1 view of the training file you used in the previous exercise.

9 Press ESC to end the command. place the cursor over Bricks-Section : Standard . a question mark displays. Keynoting | 39 . TIP Annotation that intersects or is outside of the annotation crop region will not be visible in the drawing area. or increase the size of the annotation crop region. If no value has been specified. 7 Click to place the leader arm. use the same method to place the keynotes as shown. 8 Click to place the tag. Either move the text inside. 6 Click the brick detail component to place the arrow end of the leader.5 In the drawing area. If you would like to complete keynoting the detail.3/8" Joint to display the value specified for the keynote parameter in the element’s properties.

Format keynote styles The keynotes previously inserted were text only. 40 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop . You will now change all keynotes to keys only.Map keynotes by material 10 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. draw a selection box that encloses the entire detail. 15 Select 07 21 00. and click OK. 13 Click to place the tag. 16 In the drawing area. navigate to Division 07_Thermal and Moisture Protection ➤ 07 21 00_Thermal Insulation.A4_R-19 Batt Insulation. 11 Click the batt insulation component to place the arrow end of the leader. 12 Click to place the leader arm. click Keynote ➤ Material. 14 In the Keynotes dialog.

You have completed the first Express Workshop lesson. Creating Details with Revit Architecture. The keynotes show the CSI Masterformat division key values. and schedules that communicate design requirements and project-specific information. Creating Drawing Sheets with Revit Architecture Revit Architecture provides the tools you need to develop drawing sheet documents. Select Keynote Tags. Click Check None.Boxed.All items within the selection display in red. legends. 17 On the Options Bar. 20 Press ESC to clear the selection. Creating Drawing Sheets with Revit Architecture | 41 . click 18 In the Filter dialog: ■ ■ ■ (Filter Selection). select Keynote Tag : Keynote Number . Only the keynotes remain selected. 19 In the Type Selector. Click OK. You can specify title blocks and place multiple views.

Add and modify a drawing list on a drawing sheet. In this lesson. update the project information element properties. In this exercise. Add and modify a keynote legend on a drawing sheet.NOTE Revit Architecture is available in both imperial and metric versions. you will create a sheet. Update drawing sheet and project information. Place views on drawing sheets. but for training purposes. this tutorial uses imperial units only. you will perform the following tasks: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Create a drawing sheet. and modify and update the project sheet title block. 42 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop . Project Sheet Layout The Project Browser displays all sheets added to a Revit project and all sheet views and schedules placed on specific sheets. Add labels to a title block.

If necessary. a title block is a container that includes placeholders for sheet-specific and project-specific information. Enter sheet specific information You can enter sheet-specific information either directly on the sheet.Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. In the Project Browser. accessed from the sheet in the Project Browser. In Revit Architecture. 2 In the Select A Title Block dialog. the new drawing sheet is listed under Sheets(all). Project Sheet Layout | 43 . or in the element properties of the title block. and the title block is displayed in the drawing area. The sheet name and sheet number can also be entered in the Sheet Title dialog. ■ Open Common\Express Workshop\Sheet Layout\c_express_workshop_sheet layout_start.rvt. select E1 30 x 42 Horizontal : Working Drawing. scroll until the folder is displayed. Create a new sheet 1 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Sheet. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 3 Click OK. click Training Files.

or in the project information Element Properties dialog. you can enter ZE to zoom out. which is the keyboard shortcut for the Zoom in Region command. In this tutorial. Enter project information Project-specific information is data common to all project sheets. enter ZR and specify a zoom region to zoom in. The cursor displays as a magnifying glass.Unnamed. when you want to change the area of the model you are working on. Click OK. For Name. and click Rename. double-click Checker. 8 On the Design Bar. 7 Enter K. roll the wheel. It can be entered or changed directly on a sheet. as shown: The display zooms to the specified area. To zoom in and out. enter A602. 9 In the Project Browser. drag the cursor to draw a rectangle. under Sheets(all). click Modify to clear the selection. right-click A602 . To pan. NOTE The sheet number and sheet name are automatically updated in the Project Browser and the title block. 6 In the Title Block. 10 In the Sheet Title dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Number. 44 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop . You can also zoom and pan using the mouse wheel. 5 In the drawing area. Smith and press ENTER. hold down the wheel and drag.4 Type ZR. Then. enter Sections/Details.

enter Design Development. 20 Click and type Project Status. select the title block. 18 On the Options Bar. Modify the title block family 14 In the drawing area.11 Click Settings menu ➤ Project Information. Smith. and zoom in on the top of the Revision Schedule. 12 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Project Issue Date. 17 On the Design Bar. Project Sheet Layout | 45 . (Left) is selected. 16 Type ZR. For Project Name. click Text. enter Freighthouse Flats. For Client Name. and verify that 19 Position the cursor at the left side of the top row as shown. displaying the E1 30 x 42 Horizontal title block. The Family Editor opens. enter 4/10/2008. in the Type Selector. For Project Status. 13 Click OK. 15 In the Options Bar. click Edit Family and click Yes to open E1 30 x 42 Horizontal for editing. select Text : 1/8''. enter J.

and verify that (Top) are selected. 46 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop . 26 In the Edit Label dialog.21 On the Design Bar. click Label. in the Type Selector. enter Project Issue Date below Project Status. 23 On the Design Bar. click (Load into Project). under Category Parameters. select Project Status and click the parameter under Label Parameters. to add 28 Using the same method. click Modify to exit the command. and click. 27 Select Wrap between parameters only. (Left) and 24 On the Options Bar. select Label : 3/16''. as shown. and click OK. add Project Issue Date parameter. 22 Using the same method. 29 On the Design Bar. as shown. 25 Position the cursor in the middle of the row as shown.

select Override parameter values of existing types. click Training Files. Create a keynote legend 1 Click File menu ➤ Keynoting.txt. and open Common\Express Workshop\Sheet Layout \c_express_workshop_RevitKeynotes_Imperial_2004. for Name. enter Keynote Legend . The viewport can be accessed and edited directly from the sheet. by adding a detail view that contains keynotes. 2 In the left pane of the Open dialog. Next you will create. 4 In the New Keynote Legend dialog. and under Keynote Table. Project Detail Sheet Layout | 47 . you will create.Project.30 In the Reload Family dialog. The title block is updated in the Freighthouse Flats project. place and modify a keynote legend. click Browse. and click Yes. Project Detail Sheet Layout As views and schedules are placed onto a sheet. a viewport displays. In this exercise. representing the view or schedule. for Full Path. and add a keynote legend and a detail view to a sheet. 3 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Keynote Legend. to a drawing sheet.

6 Expand the column widths to see all of the information. as shown. TIP Double-click the column dividers to expand the columns to fit the text. and click OK. clear Show Headers. expand Legends. on the Appearance tab. The drawing sheet is displayed in the drawing area. under Sheets (all). double-click A601 . 48 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop .Sections/Details.5 In the Keynote Legend Properties dialog. and drag Keynote Legend . Add a keynote legend 7 In the Project Browser. under Text. 8 In the Project Browser.Project to the lower-left detail area on the drawing sheet.

Modify the keynote legend display 10 Type ZR. 12 Select the left control of the schedule and drag it to the right to expand the left column width as shown. Project Detail Sheet Layout | 49 . and zoom in on the Keynote Legend . 11 Select the keynote schedule on the sheet.9 Press ESC to clear the selection. The keynote legend is visible. 13 Expand the right column width as shown and press ESC to clear the selection. displaying all keys and corresponding text for keynotes contained within the project.Project as shown.

Add a detail view 20 In the Project Browser. and click OK. 19 Click OK twice.Project. and click Properties. 50 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop . not keynotes. at the bottom of the Filter tab. and click OK.14 Zoom out and pan to include the keynote legend and the detail box to the right as shown. 15 In the Project Browser. The Keynote Legend is now blank. expand Detail Views (Detail). 18 In the Element Properties dialog. under Legends. the keynote legend has no keynote text or key values to display. enter Keynote Legend . right-click Keynote Legend . 16 In the Element Properties dialog. as shown. for View Name. for Filter.Sheet. NOTE The detail components of the Window Head detail contained on this sheet do not appear in the Keynote Legend because they are annotated with text. click Edit. select Filter by sheet. 17 In the Keynote Legend Properties dialog. and drag Wall Base 1 to the detail area between the keynote legend and the Window Head detail on the drawing sheet. Because no views containing keynotes have been placed in the drawing sheet.

The keynote legend is automatically updated. 2 In the Project Browser. and then add and update a Drawing list. Project Title Sheet Layout | 51 . under Sheets (all). Project Title Sheet Layout In this exercise. The Title sheet is displayed in the drawing area. The view remains selected. displaying all keynote text and key values present on the drawing sheet. you will add a view without a view title to the Title sheet drawing. expand Views (all) ➤ 3D Views. Add a view without a view title 1 In the Project Browser. and drag Title Sheet view to the upper-left area of the drawing sheet. as shown. double-click A0 . The view title with line displays below the viewport.Title Sheet 1.

The Title Sheet view title is no longer displayed. 5 In the Project Browser. as shown. or omit view titles from sheets. and zoom in on the drawing list. define the information to include in a view title. 3 In the Type Selector.When you place a view on a sheet. The drawing list remains selected. 4 Press ESC to clear the selection. You can specify text attributes for view titles. Revit Architecture displays a view title. Add a drawing list In Revit Architecture. by default. and drag Drawing List to the upper-right area on the drawing sheet. Press ESC to clear the selection. select Viewport : Viewport /no title mark. drawing lists are schedules that display all drawing sheets that have the Appears In Drawing List parameter selected within the sheet’s element properties. sheets that are external to Revit Architecture can also be included in the drawing list. You can also define these attributes for individual view titles on sheets. As part of a construction document set. 52 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop . 6 Type ZR. expand Schedules/Quantities.

under Sheets (all). You have completed the Express Workshop lesson Creating Drawing Sheets with Revit Architecture. and click Properties.Ceiling Plans. right-click the selected sheets.Update the drawing list 7 In the Project Browser. under Identity Data.Sections/Details and select A801 . select A602 . and click OK. 9 In the Element Properties dialog. Project Title Sheet Layout | 53 . clear Appears In Drawing List. NOTE The selected sheets do not have any views placed on them. 8 In the Project Browser. The drawing list display is updated. while pressing SHIFT. including only sheets that contain views.

54 .

Developing Your Designs 55 .

56 .

As you develop the building design. a wall or a column can be constrained to the grid. Parametric design allows you to incorporate design intent into your model. a central service core. you create a Revit Architecture project from a template provided with the software. This project will serve as the structural model and will then be linked into an architectural project for further development. 57 . a curtain wall. You create a retail building that contains 5 floors. When you constrain Revit Architecture elements to each other. and a sloped roof over one corner of the building. If the grid moves. you learn how to constrain elements and how to test the parametric relationships between them. Dimensions and other positional constraints define relationships between elements in the model. you learn how to design a building information model (BIM) in Revit® Architecture 2009. You set up the project and create the structural frame and foundation of the building. As you complete the exercises in this tutorial. the wall or column will move with it. Using this Tutorial In the first 6 exercises of this tutorial. or “flex the model” by changing parameters. it is good practice to test the constraints.Creating a Building Information Model 3 In this tutorial. After the beginning exercises. For example. you learn how to use parametric design techniques.

locate the Project Browser. but contains no geometry. with an RVT extension. you will use the default template. from the product library. select Project. South. Revit Architecture templates are available for specific building types: commercial. Explore the project with the Project Browser 6 On the left side of the drawing screen. 3 Under Template file. Create the project from the default template 1 In the drawing area. In views that display elevation markers. 2 In the New Project dialog. West. so there is no dependency on previously completed exercises. you use a template that is provided with the software.rte. Each template contains predefined settings and views appropriate for the corresponding building type. such as a door or window. you load any required family type that is not in your project. For this project. 4 In the left pane of the dialog. click Training Files. under Create new. you design inside the elevation markers. The new project opens. verify that the second option is selected. East. The project is stored as a single file. and open Metric\Templates\DefaultMetric. levels. or by opening the view in the Project Browser.subsequent exercises instruct you to open a project training file. In the drawing area in the right pane. click New. To create the project file. You can access these views by double-clicking the elevation marker arrow. 58 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . and residential. Creating the Project In this exercise. The project training files have pre-loaded family types and represent the correct state for beginning the exercise. The template file has an RTE extension and provides default project units. and click Browse. views. construction. you create the project that will store the retail building design and different views of the building. and settings. and customize the project as necessary. In practice. 5 Click OK. under Projects. Each marker corresponds to an elevation view in the project: North. notice four elevation markers.

These views are customizable: you can rename them. Save the project 11 Click File menu ➤ Save As. and families in your project. reflected ceiling plan views.rvt) is selected. Two level lines. sheets. and other properties. Level lines are finite horizontal planes that you use to define the levels (stories) of your building information model. As you complete the exercises in this tutorial. as well as change their names. You can control how often the software will prompt you to save your work. then expand Floor Plans. 14 For File name. heights. only a single floor plan view and a single ceiling plan view are created. This folder contains the Revit Architecture files that you need to complete all of the Revit Architecture tutorials. content and building model reports. 8 Under Floor Plans. verify that Project Files (*. and elevation views created in the project by the template. and delete them. and Revit Links branches that display at the same level as Views (all). The bold type indicates that the Level 1 Floor Plan view is the current view. created by the template. Ceiling Plans. display in the south elevation. will be accessible from the Project Browser. 15 For Save as type. change their properties. schedules. As you design and document your building model. Creating the Project | 59 . the view you see in the drawing area. Notice that in the top left corner of your screen. 9 Under Elevations (Building Elevation). You can add. and Elevations (Building Elevation). Schedules/Quantities. and on the General tab. 7 If necessary. Families. click to scroll down to the bottom of the list. NOTE If you create a project without a template. The views that display under each of these branches of the tree are the default floor plan views. 12 In the left pane of the Save As dialog.Floor Plan: Level 1 to indicate that the Level 1 Floor plan view is current. verify that Level 1 displays as bold. 13 In the file window.The Project Browser contains a hierarchical tree structure that you use to navigate the views. you will want to save your work frequently. delete. Sheets (all). view the Save reminder interval. double-click South. 10 In the Project Browser. notice the Legends. You can also add views to your project as you develop and document the building information model. and click Training Files. You use levels to position Revit Architecture elements in your building model. expand Views (all). double-click Metric. the software title bar contains the name of the software and Project 1. Click Settings menu ➤ Options. 16 Click Save. enter Revit Retail Building. and duplicate levels. such as schedules and legends. duplicate them. Groups.

or constrained. to each other. and double-click South. expand Elevations (Building Elevation). Adding Project Levels In this exercise. You learn how the levels are locked.17 Proceed to the next exercise. the other levels move and change with it. doors. You change the names of the 2 default levels. so that when one level moves. enter 00 Foundation. you modify the 2 default project levels and add 5 levels to the project to define the 7 vertical levels of the building model. you add the remaining 5 levels using different techniques. Modify the two default project levels 1 In the Project Browser. 2 Zoom to the level names at the right end of each level line. After you modify the two default levels. you will use the levels to position building elements such as walls. and windows within the building model. You also change the elevation of the two levels lines to the appropriate heights for the first two stories of the building. as well as the corresponding floor and ceiling plan views to create foundation and entry levels for the building. 60 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . TIP Because views list alphabetically or sequentially in the Project Browser. it is good practice to precede the level names with level numbers so the corresponding views will list sequentially in the Project Browser. When you begin designing. expand Views (all). and press ENTER. Adding Project Levels on page 60. 3 Double-click the Level 1 text.

and press ENTER. 5 In the Project Browser. view the Design Bar. right-click. 11 On the left side of the Project Browser. and press ENTER to specify the start point of the new level line. place the cursor anywhere on the Design Bar. verify that (Draw) and Make Plan View are selected. 6 Click the 00 Foundation elevation height. 15 Move the cursor to the left endpoint of the 01 Entry Level line. and press ENTER. verify that Ceiling Plan and Floor Plan are selected. click Level. The command that you use to add levels is on the Basics tab. 14 Click Plan View Types. a temporary dimension displays the height between 01 Entry Level and the cursor position. you add a level by drawing it above the 01 Entry Level. As you move the cursor. and click OK. The Design Bar provides tabs that provide quick access to many commands. notice the Level 1 floor and ceiling plan views are now named 00 Foundation. and press ESC. Use the Draw option to add a level 10 Zoom out so you can see both levels in the view. a corresponding ceiling plan and floor plan view will be created. Notice that the bar above the drawing area changes to display new tools and settings. under Floor Plans and Ceiling Plans. 3750 mm above 01 Entry Level. When you add the new level. 9 Click the 01 Entry Level elevation height. enter 0.4 Click Yes to rename the corresponding floor and ceiling plan views. which should display by default. enter 01 Entry Level. 12 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. If it does not. Next. 16 Enter 3750. not all the tabs are visible. click to specify the endpoint of the level line.) 17 Move the cursor horizontally until a dashed blue line displays alignment with the two existing levels. By default. and click Basics. and press ENTER. (You do not have to click to specify the start point. This is the Options Bar. 7 Double-click the Level 2 text. Adding Project Levels | 61 . enter -1800. and then move it up. 13 On the Options Bar. 8 Click Yes to rename the corresponding views. The Options Bar displays appropriate options and settings for every command that you select on the Design Bar.

20 Click Yes to rename the corresponding level and view. add 3 levels 3750 mm apart above 03 Level. 27 Rename the level 03 Level. and move it slightly upward. 19 Click OK. 25 Click to place the level line. verify that you have created an 02 Level ceiling plan view as well. click Rename. click (Pick Lines). click Modify to end the command. under Floor Plans. Next. Use the Pick option to add a level 22 On Design Bar. Copy levels only when you want to use them for reference. A dashed blue line indicates where the new level will be drawn. Add the remaining 3 levels 28 Using either the Draw or Pick option. Notice that the name of the level line changes to 02 Level in the current view. click Level. and rename the corresponding views. 26 Press ESC. and for Offset. using a different option. or on the Design Bar. 3750 mm above the 02 Level line. you add another level. If you create a level by copying it. enter 3750. 21 In the Project Browser. right-click Level 3. 23 On the Options Bar. and enter 02 Level. Name the levels: ■ ■ ■ 04 Level 05 Roof Garden 06 Roof NOTE Do not use the Copy command to create the levels.18 In the Project Browser. 24 Place the cursor on the 02 Level line. 62 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . the associated floor and ceiling plan views are not created.

The lock icon that displays indicates that the levels are vertically constrained. Creating a Column Grid on page 64. 31 Clear the box to redisplay the level symbol on the right side only. Verify that the levels are vertically constrained with locks before you continue on to the next exercise. and zoom to the left endpoint of the line.Display a symbol at the left endpoint of the 06 level line 29 Click the 06 Roof Level line. 30 Select the empty blue box on the left to display a level symbol at the left endpoint of the line. all the levels move. the levels are no longer constrained. as shown. Adding Project Levels | 63 . If you select a level and click its lock. Notice that by moving the top level. Test the level constraints 32 Select and drag the blue circle to the right or left to shorten or lengthen the level lines. and you can move them independently. 33 Proceed to the next exercise.

specify a start point for the grid line. until it is positioned under the top elevation marker. 64 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . By using the grid to control the placement of columns. When the grid is complete. In a later exercise. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. On the Design Bar.Creating a Column Grid In this exercise. click Grid. select (Draw). Create vertical column grid lines 1 In the Project Browser. ■ The number 1 displays inside the bubble at the endpoint of the completed grid line. you create a structural grid in the 00 Foundation floor plan view of the building model. In the following exercise. under Floor Plans. Move the cursor up. the column height changes as well. so that if the roof elevation changes. 3 On the Options Bar. Notice that the status bar prompts you to specify a start point for the grid line. you constrain the column heights to the roof level. you change the columns to round hollow steel columns. you place the building columns at the grid line intersections. double-click 00 Foundation. 4 Draw the first vertical grid line: ■ ■ In the lower left corner of the drawing area. click Modify. and specify the grid line endpoint. you ensure a level of accuracy early in your design.

You can change what displays in grid bubbles at any point in your project. Move the cursor to the right side of grid line B. Click to place the grid line. click Grid. and for Offset. Next. for Offset. for Offset. Move the cursor to the right side of grid line D. Move the cursor to the right side of grid line C. Enter A. and click to place the line. and then place the cursor on the grid line to display the location of the second grid line. 6 Offset a second vertical grid line from the first grid line: ■ On the Design Bar. and click to place the line. Creating a Column Grid | 65 . enter 7500 mm. and click to place the line. ■ ■ Move the cursor to the right side of the grid line. use the Pick option to create another vertical grid line by offsetting it a specific distance from the existing line. enter 4500 mm. On the Options Bar. enter 7500 mm. On the Options Bar. ■ 7 Add 3 vertical grid lines: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ On the Options Bar. and press ENTER.5 Change the grid bubble number to a letter: ■ ■ Double-click 1 inside the grid bubble. click (Pick Lines).

and specify the grid line endpoint. Create horizontal grid lines 9 Draw the first horizontal grid line: ■ On the Design Bar. specify a start point for the grid line just below grid line A. add horizontal grid lines to complete the grid. 11 On the Design Bar. as shown. click Grid.8 Press ESC. click (Draw) and specify an Offset of 0 mm. On the Options Bar. 10 Change the grid bubble letter to 1. 66 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . ■ The letter F displays inside the bubble at the endpoint of the completed grid line. 12 Using the Pick option and offsets of 7500 mm and 4500 mm. Move the cursor horizontally past the vertical grid line E. ■ ■ On the upper left side of the grid. click Grid.

21 Press ESC twice. The locks ensure that the grid spacing cannot be accidentally changed. click Dimension. 20 Click the 4 lock icons to lock the horizontal grid dimensions. 15 Starting with grid line A. 18 On the Design Bar. Creating a Column Grid | 67 . select grid lines C and 3. 22 While pressing CTRL. click (Aligned). 14 On the Options Bar. 19 Dimension the horizontal grid lines as shown. 17 Click all 4 lock icons on the dimension string to lock the grid bay spacing. click the drawing area to the right of the line to place the dimension.Dimension the grid and lock the grid spacing 13 On the Design Bar. select each vertical grid line just under its grid bubble. 16 When you select the last vertical grid line. click Dimension.

you ensure that the grid remains centered and the building will grow out from the center if its grid dimensions are changed. click Modify. If necessary. and press ESC. until it is closer to grid line 5. 30 In the Type Properties dialog.5mm Bubble with Gap. The pins are hidden. enter 50mm. click and drag the blue circular grip to the right. 32 Click OK twice. click and drag the blue circular grip up. adjust the position of the dimension strings by selecting and dragging them. ■ ■ Select grid line 1. 33 On the Design Bar. click the value for Center Segment. until it is closer to grid line A. select grid line 5. By pinning these central grid lines. 28 In the Type Properties dialog. click Duplicate. You must select the grid lines to redisplay the pins. Additional parameters in this dialog allow you to control the display of the grid line in both plan and section/elevation views. 29 In the Name dialog. At the bottom endpoint of the grid line. 68 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . The Center Segment parameter can be set to not display or to display in a different loaded line pattern. and press ESC. building geometry requires the need for grid lines to contain breaks or display differently. (Element Properties). click 27 In the Element Properties dialog. and select grid line A. At the left endpoint of the grid line. click Edit/New. click . 24 Press ESC. and click OK. Two pins display on the grid lines. click Modify. enter 6. 26 In the drawing area. 25 Adjust the grid: ■ ■ On the Design Bar. and select None. 31 For End Segments Length. and on the Options Bar. The following steps illustrate how to create a grid family type with a gap in the middle of the display. ■ Create a custom grid family type In some cases.23 Click Edit menu ➤ Pin Position.

Creating a Column Grid | 69 . For Place By. and in the Type Selector. and on the Options Bar. 36 On the Design Bar.5mm Bubble with Gap. ■ 41 While pressing CTRL. 42 Verify that all the grid lines are selected (red). 35 In the Type Selector. click Structural Column. The original continuous grid lines are restored. select Grid : 6. Add columns to the grid 38 On the Structural tab of the Design Bar.5mm Bubble.34 Draw a selection box to select all of the grid lines. Select and change all grids to use the newly created family type. 40 On the Options Bar: ■ Select Height and 05 Roof Garden. click Finish. click Modify. and press ESC. click (Grid Intersection). 39 In the Type Selector. 37 Select the grid lines again. select all of the grid lines. select UC-Universal Column : 305x305x97UC. select Grid : 6.

and then select the dimension value between grid lines A and B. and unlock it. select 01 Entry Level. create a 3D perspective view with a camera in which to better view the columns. click Activate Dimensions. click Camera. If it is unlocked. 52 On the Options Bar. 51 On the View tab of the Design Bar. and press ENTER. 46 On the Options Bar. select grid line A. 45 While pressing CTRL. 49 Select the dimension string and verify that it is locked. and click to specify a point beyond the last horizontal grid line to place the camera. You want to view the columns as if you were walking toward them. for From.Columns that span from the 00 Foundation level to the 05 Roof Garden level are added at the grid line intersections of the column grid. 48 On the Standard toolbar. double-click 01 Entry Level. Create a 3D perspective view of the building 50 In the Project Browser. The columns move to the new location at the intersection of the grid lines. lock it. Next. 70 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . 43 Press ESC. 44 Select the dimension string between grid line A and B. under Floor Plans. 53 Place the camera and select its target point: ■ Zoom to the lower right corner of the column grid. 47 Enter 9000. click (Undo) twice to restore the original locked grid dimension.

■ Move the cursor next to grid bubble A. and click to place the target point of the camera. The view frame is highlighted in red and its grips display. The 3D perspective view created by the camera displays. 54 Zoom out and resize the view by moving the frame grips until you can see all of the columns. Creating a Column Grid | 71 .

named 3D View 1 by default. Adding Beams on page 72. under Views (all). and click OK. Adding Beams In this exercise. 72 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . You begin by adding beams to the 01 Entry Level floor plan. 57 Proceed to the next exercise. In the Rename View dialog. and click Rename. The current view.55 Name the view: ■ In the Project Browser. When you finish adding beams. you change the height of the columns so they extend to the 06 Roof level. expand 3D Views. ■ ■ 56 Save the drawing. enter To Building. you add beams to build the structure of the building model. displays in bold under 3D Views. and then copy them to subsequent levels. Right-click 3D View 1.

Adding Beams | 73 . under Floor Plans.Add beams to the first level of the building 1 In the Project Browser. A flyout menu displays the level of detail in which you can display the elements in the current view. 3 Click the Detail Level icon . The View Control Bar offers graphical shortcuts to view settings and commands. 10 In the Project Browser. 8 While pressing CTRL. 9 On the Options Bar. verify that UB-Universal Beam : 305x165x40UB is selected. select each grid line. 4 Click Medium. 7 On the Options Bar. 5 On the Structural tab of the Design Bar. The view is currently set to Coarse. click Beam. 2 At the bottom left corner of the drawing area. double-click 01 Entry Level. double-click To Building to view all of the beams. click Finish. under 3D Views. the icon on the right side of the scale. click (Create Beam On Grid). The selected grid lines display as red. view the icons on the View Control Bar. which displays the structural elements in your view as single lines. 6 In the Type Selector.

double-click 01 Entry Level. and click Select All Instances. click Modify. The default 3D view is a southeast isometric view with hidden lines. right-click. under Floor Plans. and click OK. 17 In the Select Levels dialog. 15 Click Edit menu ➤ Copy to Clipboard. 12 On the View toolbar. click (Default 3D View). All of the beams attached to the columns display as red. press and hold SHIFT. Notice that top level beams are not connected to the columns. 13 On the Design Bar. 14 Select one of the beams. 16 Click Edit menu ➤ Paste Aligned ➤ Select Levels by Name. which only extend 74 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . select 02 Level.Copy beams from 01 Entry Level to levels 02 through 06 11 In the Project Browser. NOTE The default 3D view is not available in a perspective or camera view. The beams that you copied from the 01 Entry Level are pasted onto each subsequent level of the building. select 06 Roof.

When you created the columns. The parameter is set to 05 Roof Garden. under 3D Views. and click OK. 19 In the Element Properties dialog. The columns now extend to the top level of the building. right-click. All of the columns display as red. and click Element Properties. Adding Beams | 75 . Change the height of the columns 18 Select one of the columns. 25 In the Project Browser. under Instance Parameters. under Constraints. but it would only change the height of the single selected column. 21 With the column selected. 23 In the Element Properties dialog. You could change this parameter to 06 Roof in this dialog to change the height of the column. 20 Click Cancel. and if necessary. click 24 Press ESC. 06 Roof. you specified their height to reach only the 05 Roof Garden level. view the Top Level parameter. right-click.to the 5th level. (Element Properties). for Top Level. 22 On the Options Bar. double-click To Building. select 06 Roof. and click Select All Instances. resize the view to see the entire structure.

as lines only. double-click South.NOTE If you select the camera to resize the view. 27 At the lower left corner of the drawing area. Click Detail Level ➤ Coarse. on the View Control Bar: ■ ■ Click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line. but you want to display them in less detail. 28 Save the drawing. under Elevations. The structural elements (columns and beams) display only as lines. press ESC to exit the command before continuing. You can view the columns and beams in the elevation. 76 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . View the south elevation of the structure 26 In the Project Browser.

and press ESC to end the command. To better add the braces to the structure.29 Proceed to the next exercise. click Framing Elevation. you add braces to the 4 corners of the building structure. Adding Braces | 77 . Adding Braces on page 77. 2 On the Structural tab of the Design Bar. under Floor Plans. you create 8 framing elevation views. double-click 00 Foundation. Create framing elevation views 1 In the Project Browser. Each elevation marker aligns perpendicularly to the grid. 4 Click near the outer grid lines to place 8 elevation markers around the outside of the grid as shown. 3 On the Options Bar. Adding Braces In this exercise. verify that Attach to Grid is selected.

7 On the Design Bar. The endpoints will display when you move the cursor over them. The associated framing elevation view displays. NOTE Do not copy or array braces. 11 Using the same technique. and click to specify the endpoint of the brace. visible offsets between the beam and the brace connection points displays. so that you can see vertical columns located on grid lines A and B. press ESC twice. 8 In the Type Selector. click to specify the start point of the brace. NOTE Make sure you snap to the endpoints of the beams when adding braces to ensure proper connectivity in the building model. 9 Move the cursor to the left endpoint of the beam on 01 Entry Level. double-click the elevation marker arrow. After you add the final brace. add 4 braces on the subsequent levels of the building as shown. You must place them one by one to establish the proper connections between elements. 78 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . 10 Move the cursor diagonally to the right endpoint of the beam on 02 Level. but when placed the braces are placed. 6 Select the crop region (if necessary). and use the grips that display to adjust both sides of the view.Add braces in a framing elevation view 5 On the bottom left side of the grid. click Brace. verify that UB-Universal Beam : 305x165x40UB is selected. and when the endpoint snap displays.

The height of the roof lowers. Make sure that you use the endpoint snap to connect the brace to the beams. delete it and redraw it. enter 18000 mm.Lower the height of the roof (06 Roof) and the 04 Level to test the connectivity 12 Double-click the 06 Roof level height. IMPORTANT If the brace does not move with the level. Adding Braces | 79 . and press ENTER.

(Undo) twice to restore the original level heights. 80 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . double-click the framing elevation marker arrow. 16 On the bottom right side of the grid. click Add braces in another framing elevation view 15 In the Project Browser.13 Double-click the 04 Level height. 14 On the Standard toolbar. under Floor Plans. enter 10000 mm. and press ENTER. double-click 00 Foundation. but this time add them from right to left. 17 Add diagonal braces to the structure.

double-click 00 Foundation. 19 In the Project Browser. open the 3D view and notice the change in the size. as shown in the 3D view below. enter 12000 mm. 23 In the Project Browser. periodically open the 3D view to see that the braces are positioned as expected. click Activate Dimensions. 20 Select the dimension string between grid lines A and B. under Floor Plans. Adding Braces | 81 .Add braces in the remaining views and test the connectivity of the building model structure 18 Add braces to the structure in the remaining framing elevation views. 21 Select grid line A. 22 Click the dimension value of the first vertical grid bay (the one that you unlocked). and on the Options Bar. NOTE As you add braces. and press ENTER. and click the lock that displays to unlock it.

32 Proceed to the next exercise. 29 In the Project Browser. and drag it away from the structure. double-click South. (Undo) 3 times to restore the locked dimension. Creating a Foundation In this exercise.24 In the Project Browser. 26 In the Project Browser. you place isolated pile caps under the building columns to create a foundation system that distributes the building load to the ground. Test connectivity of the columns. under Floor Plans. The connected beams and braces resize as the columns move. and braces 27 Select one of the columns in the structure. 31 Save the drawing. under Elevations. click and roof height. 25 Change the height of the 06 Roof level to 24000 mm. beams. under 3D Views. and if necessary. grid size. Creating a Foundation on page 82. double-click {3D}. double-click 00 Foundation. 28 On the Standard toolbar. 30 Select the dimension string of the first vertical grid bay. 82 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . lock it.

In the Element Properties dialog. 7 Select 2000 x 2000 x 900mm. under View Depth. click Yes to load a new structural foundation family. for Level. and press ESC twice. 3 In the Revit dialog that displays.rfa. you add the pile caps in the 00 Foundation floor plan view. click Training Files. You learn how to access the families that are stored in libraries included with software. 4 In the left pane of the Open dialog. Verify that the pile cap family is loaded in the project 5 In the Project Browser. Load a pile cap family 1 In the Project Browser. under Extents. select Unlimited. In the View Range dialog. 9 Close the warning dialog. you must load the appropriate pile cap family into the project. click Edit. 10 Edit the 00 Foundation view range: ■ ■ ■ ■ Right-click in the view. click Foundation ➤ Isolated. and open Metric\Families\Structural\Foundations\M_Pile Cap-Rectangular. Add the first pile cap 8 At the top left of the grid. and drag it to the drawing area. and click View Properties. for View Range. expand Families. but the current depth of the view does not allow you to view it. A warning displays. double-click 00 Foundation. The pile cap has been added in the view. 2 On the Structural tab of the Design Bar. 6 Expand M_Pile Cap-Rectangular to display the available pile cap types (sizes). Click OK twice. where you must adjust the view range before you can see them. and expand Structural Foundations. Creating a Foundation | 83 . After you load the pile cap family.Before you can add the pile caps. The foundation pile cap now displays. click the intersection of grid line A and grid line 1. under Floor Plans. The M_Pile Cap-Rectangular family displays in the tree. and how to load specific families into a project.

double-click {3D} to view the complete foundation. 13 In the Project Browser. 12 Select each grid intersection to add pile caps that form the foundation. and click Create Similar. press ESC twice.Add pile caps to complete the foundation 11 Right-click the pile cap. When the final pile cap is placed. 84 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . under 3D Views.

and brace families into the project. 2 Select one of the columns. and braces that you used to create the building structure. beams. and learn how to select and change multiple structural element types to refine the building structure. Change the column type 1 In the Project Browser. double-click {3D}. You load new column. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. you change the types of the columns. Changing Structural Member Types In this exercise. Changing Structural Member Types | 85 . beam. click Training Files. and click Select All Instances.14 Close the file with or without saving it. All columns in the building model display as red. Changing Structural Member Types on page 85. under 3D Views. It is not available in a perspective or camera view. 15 Proceed to the next exercise. and open Metric\m_RRB_update_structure. In the left pane of the Open dialog.rvt. NOTE The default 3D view is the only 3D view in which the Select All Instances command is available. right-click.

19 On the Design Bar.9. 14 In the Type Properties dialog. select M_Round Bar : 25mm. 17 While pressing CTRL. click Duplicate. select M_Round Bar: 75mm. click (Default 3D View). This not the size that you want to use. 10 On the Options Bar. under Elevations (Interior Elevation). The brace type changes. you change the brace type. under Dimensions. Because the braces that you added were actually a beam type.6X15. and changing its size parameter. You need to create a new bar type by duplicating the 25mm bar type. enter 75mm. although the framing elevation displays the braces as lines only. select CHS-Circular Hollow Section-Column : 508x12. select the braces in the elevation one by one. for d. 4 On the Design Bar. Change the beam type 5 Select one of the beams. 11 In the Element Properties dialog.2X101.3 In the Type Selector. 18 In the Type Selector. In the following steps. select M_HSS-Hollow Structural Section : HSS203. click Modify to view the new beam type in the building model. and click OK twice. 86 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . click Modify. Change the brace type 8 On the Structural tab of the Design Bar. the braces as well as the beams change. 16 On the Design Bar. View the building model with the new structural element types 21 On the View toolbar. but it is the only size of its type currently available. 7 On the Design Bar. 20 Open the other building elevations and change the braces to M_Round Bar: 75mm. and click Select All Instances. click Modify. for Type. click Edit/New. 9 In the Type Selector. 13 In the Name dialog. 6 In the Type Selector. right-click. enter 75mm. click (Element Properties). double-click Elevation 1-a. and click OK. click Brace. click Modify. The building model displays the round hollow columns.5CHS. 12 In the Type Properties dialog. 15 In the Project Browser.

rvt. the structural model created in the previous exercises is linked to an architectural project containing site information. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. and open Metric\m_RRB_architectural. Linking the Structural Model | 87 . select m_RRB_structure_complete. the architectural file will be used to further develop the building information model. click Training Files. Linking the Structural Model on page 87.NOTE You may close the project with or without saving it.Origin to Origin. and click Open. 2 In the Import/Link RVT dialog. select Auto . After the files are linked. Linking the Structural Model In this exercise. 22 Proceed to the next exercise.rvt. Link the structural model 1 Click File menu ➤ Import/Link ➤ Revit. Use the Origin to Origin option to ensure proper alignment with the site in the architectural file. 3 Under Positioning.

7 On the Copy/Monitor tab of the Design Bar. After the link is established. You use the Link option because it is likely that the structural model will change. select the linked Revit model. 6 In the drawing area. you use the copy/monitor function to place the correct levels into the host project. The standard workflow when working with outside consultants is to link in the structural model. click Copy. 9 In the drawing area. select Levels 00 through 06. it is also possible to design the structural components as part of the architectural model. 88 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . select Multiple. however. while pressing CTRL. structural members. 5 On the Tools toolbar. In this case. Grids. click (Copy/Monitor).4 In the Project Browser. and walls could also be copy/monitored. 8 On the Options Bar. double-click South. and click Select Link. depending on the project. the host project is the architectural file and the linked project is the structural model. The Copy/Monitor tool allows you to establish and monitor relationships between elements in a host project and linked projects. under Elevations.

First. 11 In the Duplicate Types dialog. click Finish. Turn off visibility of the site elements To get the plans to display without the site information. click Finish mode. 18 Using the same method. Create views for each of the new levels 14 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Floor Plan. you create a view template and assign it to the new floor plans. right-click Level 1.10 On the Options Bar. Linking the Structural Model | 89 . and click Delete. you turn off the visibility of the site elements from the Foundation view. select 06 Roof (selecting all levels 00 through 06). under Floor Plans. 15 In the New Plan dialog. 16 Click OK. 13 On the Design Bar. Delete existing views 17 In the Project Browser. 12 Ignore and close any warnings that display. while pressing SHIFT. The 06 Roof floor plan opens. click OK. for Floor Plan views. delete the Level 2 floor plan.

click OK.19 In the Project Browser. double-click 01 Entry Level. for Name. 25 In the View Templates dialog. 22 Zoom to fit the drawing in the view. and click Hide in view ➤ Category. 90 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . and click Hide in view ➤ Category. 26 In the Project Browser. under Floor Plans. 20 In the drawing area. 21 In the drawing area. and click OK. select the Topography : Surface. right-click. under Floor Plans. enter Floor Plans. select Entourage: Stuart Hall 1 : Stuart Hall 1. right-click. 24 In the New View Template dialog. double-click 00 Foundation. Create a template from the current view 23 Click View menu ➤ Create View Template from View.

under Names. and click OK. Recreate the To Building camera view 30 In the Project Browser. click Camera. select Floor Plans. Linking the Structural Model | 91 . 28 In the Apply View Template dialog.Apply the view template to new views 27 Click View menu ➤ Apply View Template. under Floor Plans. 33 Click at the upper left of the grid. double-click Site. 32 Click in the road intersection at the bottom right corner of the building grid. 29 Zoom to fit the plan in the view. 34 In the 3D view that displays. 31 On the View tab of the Design Bar. adjust the borders so that the entire building is visible.

you learn some different techniques that you can use when sketching objects.rvt. Some other Revit Architecture elements. and click OK. 37 Proceed to the next exercise.35 In the Project Browser. and open Metric\m_RRB_add_floors. 92 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . you add floors to the 01 Entry Level through the 05 Roof Garden level of the building. NOTE You may close the project with or without saving it. stairs. In this exercise. right-click 3D View 1. click Training Files. such as roofs. Adding Floors In this exercise. To create floors. In the left pane of the Open dialog. expand 3D Views. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. 36 In the Rename View dialog. enter To Building. and click Rename. and railings are also created from sketches. Adding Floors on page 92. you must sketch them first in a Sketch Editor.

On the Options Bar.Add the 01 Entry Level Floor 1 In the Project Browser. click Floor. Do not lock the dimension. past the first vertical grid line. On the Sketch tab. under Floor Plans. ■ 4 Dimension the space between the left floor edge and the first vertical grid line. click (Rectangle). 2 Sketch the floor: ■ On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. ■ ■ ■ Using a crossing window. Leave this dimension unlocked. and elements in the current view display as gray. At the top left corner of the grid. Move the cursor to the left. the 01 Entry Level floor will resize with it. and click above the first horizontal grid line to place the dimension. sketch a rectangular floor inside the extents of the grid. Notice the Design Bar now displays the Sketch tab. click Lines. double-click 01 Entry Level. 3 Place a dimension between the first horizontal grid line and the left floor edge: ■ ■ On the Design Bar. If the grid changes size. and then the first horizontal grid line. You are now in the Sketch Editor. The exact dimensions of the sketched floor are not important because you resize it in the next steps. Adding Floors | 93 . select the top floor line. click Dimension.

Move the cursor to the left dimension. click Finish Sketch to create the floor. ■ 7 On the Design Bar. and change their values to 300 mm. Select the left floor edge and change the top dimension value to 300. At the top left corner of the grid. Enter 300. They display on the floor sketch. select the top floor line. and then press ESC. and click the temporary dimension value. Move the cursor to dimensions at the bottom of the grid. Select and lock the dimensions. click Modify. Do not lock the dimensions. press ENTER. The dimensions are not visible on the finished floor. 6 Resize the floor sketch by changing its dimensions: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ On the Design Bar. 94 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model .5 Dimension the bottom right corner of the grid.

This is how you could modify the floor if you needed to after creating it. The floor sketch and dimensions redisplay. 9 Because you do not need to modify the floor. double-click 02 Level. ■ 12 At the top left corner of the grid. you will add a floor to the 02 Level of the building model. IMPORTANT Make sure you select the 01 Entry Level floor lines and not the grid lines. Add the 02 Level floor 10 In the Project Browser. click (Pick Lines). You use the Pick option to create a floor from the 01 Entry Level floor geometry. On the Options Bar. click Quit Sketch. Next. and move the cursor until the dashed blue line displays in the inside of the 01 Entry Level floor. using a different sketching technique. Adding Floors | 95 . click Lines. and press ESC. enter 1500mm.8 Select the floor. Select the three remaining floor lines. and lock the dimensions. and on the Options Bar. ■ ■ Select the right vertical 01 Entry Level floor line. 11 Sketch the floor: ■ ■ On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. click Edit. on the Design Bar. The 02 Level floor sketch displays. On the Sketch tab. under Floor Plans. click Floor. and for Offset. dimension the space between the 02 Level floor and the grid as shown.

click (Align). dimension and lock the space between the 02 Level floor and the grid. 18 On the Options Bar. The cursor changes to 2 arrows to indicate that the Align tool is active. 22 Click the lock to constrain the 03 Level floor line to the 02 Level floor. double-click 03 Level. 23 Continue to align the remaining 3 floor sketch lines with the 02 Level floor. 21 Select the top 02 Level floor line. 17 On the Sketch tab. click Finish Sketch. click (Rectangle). Click the locks to constrain the floors. 19 Sketch a floor inside the 02 Level floor. The 02 Level floor is visible in the view. Add the 03 Level floor 15 In the Project Browser. click Floor. 96 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . click Lines. 16 On the Design Bar.13 At the bottom right corner of the grid. The sketched floor line is aligned with the top 03 Level floor line. The 02 Level floor displays. under Floor Plans. and a lock icon displays. 20 On the Tools toolbar. 14 On the Design Bar. and then select the top line of the 03 Level floor sketch.

and constrain the 04 Level floor to the 03 Level floor. under Floor Plans. dimension the space between the 05 Roof Garden level floor and the grid. under Floor Plans. View the floors in the 3D building model 36 In the Project Browser. 33 At the top left corner of the grid. and lock the edges. 29 Click Edit menu ➤ Paste Aligned ➤ Select Levels by Name. 28 Click Edit menu ➤ Copy to Clipboard. The 01 Entry Level floor is copied at the same location onto the 05 Roof Garden level. double-click 01 Entry Level.24 On the Design Bar. click Finish Sketch. Lock the dimensions to constrain the floor. Copy and paste the 01 Entry Level floor to the 05 Roof Garden level 26 In the Project Browser. Click the lock icons that display next to the dimensions to constrain the 05 Roof Garden level floor to the grid. 31 In the Project Browser. click Finish Sketch. and click OK. double-click {3D}. 34 At the bottom right corner of the grid. click Edit. 35 On the Sketch tab. 27 Select the 01 Entry Level Floor. dimension the space between 05 Roof Garden level floor and the grid. you could place the rectangular sketch on the 04 Level. and on the Options Bar. 30 In the Select Levels dialog. under Views ➤ 3D Views. double-click 05 Roof Garden. 32 Select the floor. Alternatively. 25 Repeat the previous procedure to create a floor on the 04 Level. Adding Floors | 97 . select 05 Roof Garden.

37 Proceed to the next exercise. and then move the cursor slightly to the right of the grid line. Add the roof 1 In the Project Browser. Click (Pick Lines). You shape the flat roof of the roof garden to have a roof drain sloping to the center structural member under the roof.rvt. double-click 06 Roof. ■ ■ For Offset. 5 Move the cursor over grid line E. 98 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . under Floor Plans. 4 On the Options Bar: ■ Clear Defines slope. click to place the roof line. click Training Files. When a blue dashed line displays. Adding a Roof In this exercise. you use the Roof by Footprint option in Revit Architecture. You edit the section of the roof slab so it stays flat across the bottom of the roof slab. and press ENTER. you add a low slope roof over the roof garden on the building. To create the roof. 3 On the Design Bar. and open Metric\m_RRB_add_roof.NOTE You may close the project with or without saving it. click Lines. You sketch the footprint (perimeter) of the roof in a plan view. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. Adding a Roof on page 98. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. click Roof ➤ Roof by Footprint. enter 1800 mm.

6 Select grid line 5. 9 Select grid line 3 to place the final roof line (blue line above). click to place the roof line. 8 Select grid line C to place another roof line (blue line to the left). move the cursor slightly below the grid line. Adding a Roof | 99 . 7 On the Options Bar. for Offset. and when the blue dashed line displays. enter 300 mm.

and then select the right portion of the roof line that you created from grid line 5. click (Trim/Extend). 11 Trim the rooflines: ■ ■ On the Tools toolbar. select the roof. ■ 12 On the Design Bar. click Finish Roof. Select the lower portion of the roof line that you created from grid line E (the part you want to keep). Continue to trim the lines until you complete the roof as shown. 100 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model .10 Press ESC. Add the roof drain 13 In the drawing area.

14 On the Options Bar. and press ENTER. 15 On the Options Bar. Adding a Roof | 101 . move the cursor down below the roof. click Modify. Create a section view 18 On the View tab of the Design Bar. The result is a roof slab which slopes down to a single point. click (Add new points to the slab shape). 19 Click above the top horizontal line of the roof. on grid D. for Elevation. enter -100 mm. click Section. 17 On the Design Bar. 16 Select the intersection of grid lines D and 4. and click to specify the section.

22 Zoom in to the upper left corner of the section. for Structure [1]. 25 Click Window menu ➤ Tile. click 27 In the Element Properties dialog. select Variable. click Modify. under Floor Plans. In section. you see that the roof slab is sloped on both faces (upper and lower). 29 In the Edit Assembly dialog. The design intent is to have the underside of the roof flat rather than sloped. 23 Click Window menu ➤ Close Hidden Windows. under Construction. 21 Double-click the section head to open the section. This command tiles the windows so the roof can be seen in section and plan views. The variable check box allows the lower face of the roof to stay flat while the upper face follows the desired slope. 102 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . and on the Options Bar. click Edit/New. double-click 06 Roof. click Edit.20 On the Design Bar. 28 In the Type Properties dialog. Modify the roof structure 26 In the plan view. 24 In the Project Browser. (Element Properties). 30 Click OK 3 times. for Structure. select the roof.

zoom in to the roof. click Modify. Host sweeps are profile driven shapes. select each edge. 33 In the warning dialog. 37 If necessary. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges. Only the family and the path of the sweep must be defined. You select the upper edge of the roof around the perimeter to define the host sweep path. click (Default 3D View). 41 Starting with the left front edge. 38 In the 3D view. click OK. moving counter-clockwise. 39 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar.Roof Edge. Add swept fascias 36 On the View toolbar. Adding a Roof | 103 . 34 Maximize the window for the 06 Roof floor plan.31 On the Design Bar. the correct profile and fascia have been defined beforehand. Delete the section view 32 In the floor plan. 35 Zoom to fit the floor plan in the window. select the section line. click Host Sweep ➤ Roof Fascia. on the View Control Bar. and press DELETE. In this case. 40 In the Type Selector. select Fascia : Fascia .

42 On the Design Bar. View the roof 43 In the Project Browser. under 3D Views. You constrain the curtain wall to the grid. 104 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . click Modify. you add a curtain wall. Adding a Curtain Wall In this exercise. so if you resize the grid. the curtain wall resizes with it. Adding a Curtain Wall on page 104. double-click To Building. NOTE You may close the project with or without saving it. 44 Proceed to the next exercise.

9 Move the cursor over grid line 1 near its endpoint. for Spacing. under Floor Plans. select 01 Entry Level. For Height. click to place the first curtain wall segment. select Horizontal Grid Continuous. and click 4 In the Element Properties dialog. 8 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ ■ ■ Click (Pick Lines). Adding a Curtain Wall | 105 . for Join Condition. for Type. 10 When a blue dashed line displays. The type is saved in the project. Add curtain wall segments 1 In the Project Browser. click Wall.rvt. select 05 Roof Garden. enter 600 mm. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. Under Horizontal Grid Pattern. Under Vertical Grid Pattern. and open Metric\m_RRB_add_curtainwall. enter 2100 mm. enter 1050 mm. Under Construction. 5 In the Type Properties dialog. and move it slightly toward the building interior. 7 In the Type Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ (Element Properties). click Training Files. enter Retail Storefront. click Edit/New. for Spacing. For Offset. 6 In the Name dialog. For Level.Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. When you duplicate a type. you copy an existing family type and change its name and parameters to create a new unique type. 3 In the Type Selector. select Curtain Wall : Storefront. click 01 Entry Level. and click OK. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Click OK twice. click Duplicate.

click (Trim/Extend). the locks ensure that the curtain wall moves with it. and trim each curtain wall segment. Trim the curtain wall segments 12 On the Tools toolbar. If you want to hide them. View the curtain wall 14 In the Project Browser. double-click To Building. click Dimension. These dimensions are not in a sketch. under 3D Views. 106 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . but opt to keep the constraints when prompted. Click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges. you can delete the dimensions. 15 On the View Control Bar.11 Select the 3 remaining outermost grid lines to create 3 more curtain wall segments that are offset 600 mm from the grid lines toward the building interior. If the grid moves. dimension both (opposite) corners of the curtain wall to the grid. and lock the dimensions. verify the view settings: ■ ■ Click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line. 13 On the Design Bar. so they remain in the view.

you replace 4 curtain wall panels with doors in the front of the building to create the main building entrance. Creating an Entrance In this exercise. click Training Files. and open Metric\m_RRB_modify_curtainwall. Creating an Entrance | 107 . 16 Proceed to the next exercise. In the left pane of the Open dialog.rvt. Creating an Entrance on page 107. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. You also modify the panels around the doors so they are solid rather than glass.NOTE You may close the project with or without saving it.

expand Elevations (Building Elevation). in the center of the 01 Entry Level. All the elements in the list are selected. 3 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics.Modify the South elevation view 1 In the Project Browser. 108 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . under Views (all). select Curtain Panels and Structural Columns. as these usually represent internal pilasters. clear one element to clear all the elements. 5 Under Visibility. and click None. 8 Zoom in to the entrance area. Do not select Columns. To better work with the curtain wall panels. 2 On the View Control Bar. 7 Click OK. click Detail Level ➤ Medium. 6 Under Visibility. click All. and double-click South. 4 On the Model Categories tab. under the element list. you want to change the view so only curtain wall panels and columns display.

If you select View ➤ Visibility/Graphics. 18 On the View Control Bar. double-click {3D}. and select the other panels around the entrance as shown. in the Type Selector. select Architectural Elevation. and click OK. Creating an Entrance | 109 . 16 On the View Control Bar. press and hold CTRL. you see that the visibility of many of the model element categories that you cleared in a previous step are selected. 17 In the Project Browser. in this case an architectural elevation. 13 Click View menu ➤ Apply View Template. 15 Zoom so you can see the entire drawing.9 On the Design Bar. click the pin to remove it from each of the panels. click Detail Level ➤ Medium. under 3D Views. 10 Select 1 panel. 14 In the Apply View Template dialog. select System Panel : Solid. 11 When all 9 panels are selected. The view template applies a collection of visibility graphics appropriate to the view it is named for. 12 With the panels selected. click Modify. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges.

19 In the Project Browser. 22 Move the cursor over the curtain wall mullion as shown. double-click To Building. 110 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . double-click South. under 3D Views. 20 In the Project Browser. under Elevations (Building Elevation). 21 Zoom to the front of the building.

27 On the Options Bar.23 Press TAB until you are notified that you have selected a grid line. 28 Select the center of the upper horizontal mullion. 32 In the Type Selector. click Curtain Grid. click Modify. 24 On the Options Bar. select M_Curtain Wall Sgl Glass. 30 On the Design Bar. 25 Select the mullion that you selected previously. and press ESC to remove the grid lines as shown. select another mullion to the right. 29 Select the center of the upper horizontal mullion to the right. 26 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. and click to select it. Creating an Entrance | 111 . and unpin it. click Add or Remove Segments. select One Segment. 31 Select the newly created curtain wall panel (press TAB to cycle through selections).

select it. click (Default 3D View). 37 Move the cursor over the bottom mullion. 112 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . and unpin it. and view the new entrance. press TAB until it is selected.33 Repeat for the next 3 panels. 34 On the View toolbar. 36 Zoom in to the first panel. 35 Zoom in to the front of the building.

39 Using the same process. remove the mullions from the 2nd. Use the same steps that you used to create the south entrance. NOTE You may close the project with or without saving it. open the North elevation. 3rd. Creating a Drop Ceiling | 113 . 40 Optionally. Creating a Drop Ceiling on page 113. Creating a Drop Ceiling In this exercise. 41 Proceed to the next exercise. and add an entrance to the north side of the building.38 Press DELETE. you create a drop ceiling on the 01 Entry Level of the building. and 4th panels.

and open Metric\m_RRB_add_drop_ceiling.rvt. double-click 01 Entry Level. select 02 Level. Display 02 Level as an underlay 1 In the Project Browser. 2 Zoom in to the lower right corner of the building. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 114 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . under Graphics. and click View Properties. under Floor Plans. 3 Right-click in the view. for Underlay. click Training Files.Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. 4 In the Element Properties dialog. 5 Click OK.

and click to complete the callout. click Callout. and click Rename. right-click Callout of 01 Entry Level.Create a callout 6 On the View tab of the Design Bar. under Floor Plans. and drag the grip down to position the callout head below the grid as shown. ■ Move the cursor horizontally below the bottom right column. 9 In the Project Browser. and click OK. Creating a Drop Ceiling | 115 . 10 In the Rename View dialog. 8 Select the callout. enter Display Area. which indicates you must draw the callout. The cursor changes to a pencil. 7 Place the callout: ■ Specify a point above the top left column. select the grip closest to the callout head.

right-click. 13 Select the section line. 116 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . 15 Double-click the section marker to view the section. as shown. click Section. 12 Draw a section line. 14 Press ESC. 16 Select the section box. and drag the top grip down to display only 01 Entry Level and 02 Level. and click Flip Section.Create a section 11 On the View tab of the Design Bar.

22 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Click (Draw). For Loc Line. 21 In the Type Selector. Lock both alignments. expand Sections (Building Section). select Basic Wall : Interior . and click OK. click Wall. select Wall faces. double-click 01 Entry Level. Creating a Drop Ceiling | 117 . 27 On the Options Bar. click (Align). click Dimension. 20 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar.135mm Partition (2-hr). 25 Press ESC twice. for Prefer. and then specify a point near the intersection of grid lines D and 4 to draw a 5000 x 5000 mm square wall inside the grid lines. and align the exterior faces of the right vertical wall and the bottom horizontal wall with the 02 Level underlay. and click Rename. select Finish Face: Exterior. Click (Rectangle). 24 On the Tools toolbar. Draw interior walls 19 In the Project Browser. right-click Section 1. ■ 23 Select the bottom corner of the overhead floor.17 In the Project Browser. 26 On the Design Bar. enter Section Display Area. 18 In the Rename View dialog. under Floor Plans.

click Ceiling. 31 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. under Sections (Building Section). 34 Press ESC to exit ceiling mode. 29 Dimension the space between the exterior face of the top horizontal wall and the grid.28 Dimension the space between the exterior face of the left vertical wall and the grid.) 36 Press ESC twice. Notice that the walls extend to the floor. and lock the dimension. 118 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . 33 Click inside the newly placed walls to place a ceiling in that space. double-click Section Display Area. double-click 01 Entry Level. 38 On the View Control Bar. select Compound Ceiling : 600 x 600mm Grid. Add a ceiling 30 In the Project Browser. Next. under Ceiling Plans. 37 In the Project Browser. (Press TAB to highlight the ceiling line or wall face before selecting. 32 In the Type Selector. and lock the dimension. you modify them to be bulkhead walls. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Wireframe. 35 Align and lock each ceiling line to the interior wall faces.

48 Attach the walls to the 02 Level floor: ■ Select one of the vertical walls above the ceiling. 43 On the Design Bar. and click OK. enter 2700 mm. and click (Element Properties). click Attach. double-click Section Display Area. under Sections. 40 Move the cursor over one of the walls. for Base Offset. 44 Press TAB to highlight the ceiling. 47 In the Project Browser. double-click 01 Entry Level. 42 In the Element Properties dialog. 46 Press ESC. click (Element Properties). Select the 02 Level Floor. and click to select the walls. click to select it. under Constraints. under Constraints. under Ceiling Plans. ■ ■ The walls attach to the 02 Level floor. 41 On the Options Bar. click Modify. enter 2700 mm. and click OK. On the Options Bar. press TAB until the chain of walls is selected. and press ESC. Creating a Drop Ceiling | 119 . for Top/Base. and click to select the walls. 45 In the Element Properties dialog. for Height Offset From Level. press TAB until you select the wall chain.Make bulkhead walls 39 In the Project Browser.

View the ceiling structure 50 Select the ceiling. 52 In the Type Properties dialog. 55 In the Type Properties dialog. and click . click (Rotate). click Cancel. for Type. 51 In the Element Properties dialog.49 In the Project Browser. 59 Move the cursor toward the top left corner of the grid. 54 Click OK. double-click 01 Entry Level. Rotate the ceiling grid 57 Select the center ceiling grid line. under Construction. 58 On the Edit toolbar. click Edit/New. 56 In the Element Properties dialog. view the ceiling structure. 53 In the Edit Assembly dialog. click Cancel. for Structure. under Ceiling Plans. 120 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . click Edit.

Creating a Drop Ceiling | 121 . 61 Press ESC. and press ENTER. 62 Select and drag the diagonal center grid line until it spans the corners of the ceiling grid.60 Click. enter 45.

click Shadows On. under 3D Views. 122 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . 65 On the View Control Bar. double-click To Building. click Shadows Off. Creating Multi-Level Stairs on page 123.View the building in 3D with shadows 63 In the Project Browser. 67 Proceed to the next exercise. 66 Optionally. NOTE You may close the project with or without saving it. 64 On the View Control Bar. copy the drop ceiling to the other building levels.

and open Metric\m_RRB_add_stair. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Move the cursor over grid line B.Creating Multi-Level Stairs In this exercise. You then cut an opening through the floors on each level. enter 1500 mm. click ■ ■ (Pick Lines). click Ref Plane. and copy it to the 05 Level. you create multi-level stairs and a stairwell that span the levels of the building.rvt. click Training Files. 4 Draw 2 reference planes that you will use to locate the flight of stairs: Move the cursor over grid line C. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. 3 On the Options Bar. and click to create a reference plane to the left. and for Offset. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. double-click 01 Entry Level. and click to create a reference plane to the right. You create a flight of stairs and stairwell on the 01 Entry Level of the building. under Floor Plans. Create the stair 1 In the Project Browser. Creating Multi-Level Stairs | 123 .

and drag the model ends so the reference plane only displays between grid lines 2 and 3. and specify a point to create first stair flight. 7 Using the same method. 8 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. Move the cursor vertically along the reference plane until the text below the stair flight displays an equal number of risers created and risers remaining.5 On the Design Bar. click Modify. C. You will create the stair in the area between grid lines B. and 3. click Stairs. shorten the right reference plane. 2. 6 Select the left reference plane. 9 Sketch the stair: ■ ■ Select the bottom endpoint of the right reference plane. 124 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model .

■ 14 Draw walls around the stair. with a message that 20 risers have been created and 0 remain. Draw walls around the stair 11 On the Design Bar. select Finish Face: Interior. and select the 2nd reference plane. Click (Rectangle).■ ■ Move the cursor horizontally to the left. click Wall. and specify a point. 13 On the Options Bar: ■ For Loc Line. click Finish Sketch to create the complete stair. beyond the end of the stair. Creating Multi-Level Stairs | 125 . Move the cursor down. select Basic Wall : Generic . The complete stair displays. 12 In the Type Selector. 10 On the Options Bar.225mm Masonry. including its handrails.

and specify a point away from the wall. Select the wall. and click to select it. 126 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . click Align. click Dimension. 16 Move the cursor over the top horizontal outside edge of the stair. 20 Dimension the distance from the bottom of the stair to the interior face of the bottom horizontal wall: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ On the Options Bar. 18 Using the same technique. Click Modify. for Prefer. press TAB until the stair edge is selected. 19 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. Select the bottom of the stair. 17 Select the interior face of the top horizontal wall. and press ENTER. select Wall faces. select the dimension value. Select the interior face of the wall. Lock the dimension.15 On the Tools toolbar. align the 2 vertical side edges of the stair with the 2 vertical walls and lock the alignments. Make sure you select the stair and not the railing. and lock the alignment. enter 1200 mm.

Creating Multi-Level Stairs | 127 . select M_Single-Flush : 0915 x 2134mm. select both reference planes. click Door. press the SPACEBAR before you place the door. and drag it to the left to test the stair and wall constraints. but leave the stair and wall constrained to each other. 25 While pressing CTRL. a warning displays. clear Tag on Placement. (Undo). TIP To flip the door swing. 27 In the Type Selector.21 Select the dimension. Because the dimension is constrained. 29 Select the right side of the lower horizontal wall to place the door. click Add a door to the stairwell 26 On the Design Bar. and press DELETE. 28 On the Options Bar. 22 Click OK to delete the dimension. The stair and walls move to the left. and press DELETE. 23 Select the stair. 24 On the Standard toolbar.

For Top Constraint. Under Constraints. but if you view the top level of the building. click Opening ➤ Shaft Opening. (Rectangle). You can see that the walls and stairs span the vertical height of the building. verify that Up to level: 05 Roof Garden is selected. Create a shaft opening 39 In the Project Browser. click 36 On the View toolbar. 41 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. click Modify. Click OK. and click 32 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ (Element Properties). (Default 3D View). under Floor Plans. 35 On the View toolbar. select 00 Foundation. click 37 Press and hold the Orbit button. 44 On the Tools toolbar. select all 4 walls. 40 Zoom in to the stairs. and move the cursor to spin the building model. (SteeringWheels). for Base Constraint. You must cut an opening through the building to accommodate the multi-level stairs. double-click 01 Entry Level. you can see that the stair railings penetrate the floors. (Element Properties). click Align. select 05 Roof Garden. 128 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . for Multistory Top Level. 38 Press ESC to close the SteeringWheels.30 On the Design Bar. and click ■ ■ 34 In the Element Properties dialog: Under Constraints. 42 On the Options Bar: ■ Click Click (Draw). 45 Align the top horizontal shaft sketch line with the top horizontal interior wall face and lock the alignment. 33 Select the stair. ■ 43 Draw a rectangular shaft opening around the stairs. Span the height of the building 31 While pressing CTRL. Click OK.

Look at the top of building and notice that the shaft is not cutting an opening.46 Align the 2 vertical shaft sketch lines with the interior face of the 2 vertical walls. on the View toolbar. 48 Click Finish Sketch to complete the shaft. 51 Click Edit menu ➤ Paste Aligned ➤ Select Levels by Name. click see the roof. (SteeringWheels). select 02 Level through 05 Roof Garden. and lock the alignments. click (Default 3D View). 50 Click Edit menu ➤ Copy to Clipboard. Copy the door to multiple levels 49 Select the door. and spin the building so you can 54 If necessary. 47 Align the bottom horizontal shaft sketch line with the bottom tread of the stair. View the shaft and stair 53 On the View toolbar. 52 In the Select Levels dialog. and lock the alignment. Creating Multi-Level Stairs | 129 . and click OK.

■ 58 On the View toolbar. Creating a Wall with a Non-Uniform Height In this exercise. You learn how to access and modify the profile and height of the wall to create a decorative wall that extends past the height of the 06 Roof level. for Base Offset. you create a wall on the 05 Roof Garden level. The shaft opening will cut through any level it touches. Creating a Wall with a Non-Uniform Height on page 130. select Up to Level: 06 Roof. NOTE You may close the project with or without saving it. 56 Select the shaft. (SteeringWheels). click 60 Spin the building so that you can see the shaft opening. (Default 3D View). enter 300 mm. For Top Constraint. and click 57 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ (Element Properties). and click OK. 130 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . you prevent it from cutting through the 01 Entry Level floor. double-click 01 Entry Level. click 59 On the View toolbar. under Floor Plans. By offsetting the base. 61 Click View menu ➤ Orient ➤ Southwest. 62 Proceed to the next exercise. Under Constraints.55 In the Project Browser.

In the left pane of the Open dialog. 4 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. for Underlay. and open Metric\m_RRB_wall_profile. double-click 05 Roof Garden. 2 Right-click in the view.Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. click Training Files. under Floor Plans. and click View Properties. under Graphics. 3 In the Element Properties dialog. and click OK. select 06 Roof.rvt. Creating a Wall with a Non-Uniform Height | 131 . click Wall. Add a basic wall to the 05 Roof Garden level 1 In the Project Browser.

16 On the Design Bar. and click Open View. select Basic Wall : Generic . 14 Select the 3750 mm vertical dimension value. 7 On the Tools toolbar. The exact placement is not important. enter 9750.225mm Masonry. click Edit Profile. and on the Options Bar. 13 Select the top sketch line for the wall. and click (Fillet arc). Modify the profile of the wall 10 Select the wall. 11 In the Go To View dialog. and press ENTER. select Elevation: South. 12 Zoom in to the top right area between the C and E grid lines. 6 Draw the wall above the edge of the roof shown in the underlay. click (Align).5 In the Type Selector. You must draw the wall from left to right to position it on the correct side of grid line 3. click Remove Constraints. click . 9 Click the lock that displays to constrain the 2 elements. 132 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . 15 In the error dialog. click Lines. and then select the right face of the wall. 17 On the Options Bar. 8 Select the floor on the right side of the wall.

22 In the Project Browser. and click (Circle). click Finish Sketch. select a point on the vertical sketch line below the corner. click . and select a third point within the corner to create a rounded corner. Creating a Wall with a Non-Uniform Height | 133 .18 In the upper right corner of the profile. 20 Draw a circle with a 1200 mm radius just below the fillet arc. under 3D Views. as shown: 19 On the Options Bar. double-click {3D}. 23 Click View menu ➤ Orient ➤ Northwest. as shown: 21 On the Design Bar. select a point on the profile to the left of the corner.

You learn how to place and adjust these components in project views. you place planters on the 05 Roof Garden level to create a roof garden. Adding Entourage and Site Components In this exercise. 134 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . and place people and a car on and next to the sidewalk. Adding Entourage and Site Components on page 134. 24 Proceed to the next exercise. create a sidewalk on 2 sides of the building.NOTE You may close the project with or without saving it.

under Floor Plans. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 7 Click to place a tree in the center of each planter. 4 Add 3 planters on the inside of the floor and grid line 5. double-click 05 Roof Garden. click Component. select Planter : 1220 x 1220. click Training Files. move the cursor over the planter and move it to the right to display a dashed blue line that helps you to place the next planter. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. Create the roof garden 1 In the Project Browser.rvt. Adding Entourage and Site Components | 135 . between grid lines C and D. and press ESC twice. select M_RPC Tree .4. and open Metric\m_RRB_host. 3 In the Type Selector. click Component.Deciduous : Japanese Cherry . as shown.Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. TIP After you place the 1st planter. 5 On the Basics tab. 6 In the Type Selector.5 Meters.

under Floor Plans. 20 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. under 3D Views. click 12 In the Element Properties dialog. 16 Click Apply. click Edit/New. and in the Type Selector. click Duplicate. Create a sidewalk outside of the building 19 In the Project Browser. 11 Select one of the trees. 22 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Click (Pick Lines). under Dimensions.5 Meters. under Floor Plans. 13 In the Type Properties dialog. for Height. enter 2400 mm. and click OK. click (Default 3D View). View the roof. as shown. The height of the trees no longer extends past the roof.8 On the View toolbar. 17 While pressing CTRL. 21 On the Design Bar. 136 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . 18 In the Project Browser. double-click 05 Roof Garden. click Floor. and move the mouse to orient the view to the Southwest. and then click OK twice. click Lines.Deciduous : Japanese Cherry 1. enter 1500 mm. for Type. select M_RPC Tree . 9 Click and hold the left mouse button on the ViewCube. enter Japanese Cherry 1. double-click 01 Entry Level. select the 2 remaining trees. and on the Options Bar.5 Meters. 15 In the Type Properties dialog. (Element Properties). 14 In the Name dialog. 10 In the Project Browser. double-click {3D}. and notice that the trees that you placed in the planters protrude through the roof. For Offset.

and click to sketch a line.23 Move the cursor over grid line 5 between grid lines A and B. and click to sketch a line. Adding Entourage and Site Components | 137 . 24 Press TAB until a line that is offset 2400 mm below grid line 5 displays between grid lines A and B. sketch a line between grid lines 4 and 5. 29 On the Options Bar. for Offset. click (Draw). enter 0 mm. 26 On the Options Bar. 25 Using the same method. 28 Select the right vertical floor line. 27 Select the bottom horizontal floor line. and click to place the line.

move the cursor up 900 mm. 33 Select the left endpoint of the line between grid lines A and B. and click to finish the line. and then select the line that you sketched along the bottom horizontal line of the floor. clear Chain.30 On the Options Bar. 32 Press ESC. 35 Select the line that you just drew. 31 Select the top endpoint of the right vertical line. 36 Select the line between grid lines A and B. click (Trim/Extend). 138 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . and then select the line that you sketched between grid lines 4 and 5. 34 On the Tools toolbar. and click to finish the line. and then select the horizontal line near grid line 1. move the cursor to the right approximately 1200 mm. 37 Select the line that you sketched between grid lines 4 and 5.

RPC people are represented by a tear drop shape. and click so he is facing the column. select M_RPC Male : Alex. Next. click Component. 39 Select the sidewalk. a photorealistic image displays. 45 Click OK. 42 In the Name dialog. Adding Entourage and Site Components | 139 . click Duplicate. 48 In the Type Selector. click Finish Sketch. for Height Offset from Level. click Edit/New. near Column E5. 51 Move the cursor to rotate approximately 150 degrees. enter -250 mm. 47 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. The pointed end of the shape indicates the person’s line of sight. Placeholders for RPC content display in 2D and 3D views only. as shown: (Element Properties). The completed sidewalk displays. 50 Click to place Alex on the sidewalk. 40 In the Element Properties dialog. When you render an image. select Rotate after placement. Place 2 people on the sidewalk 46 Zoom to the lower right corner of the sidewalk. enter Sidewalk.38 On the Design Bar. and on the Options Bar. 44 In the Element Properties dialog. 43 Click OK twice. In plan view. 49 On the Options Bar. for Type. click 41 In the Type Properties dialog. under Constraints. create a new type for the sidewalk element because it is currently a floor element.

NOTE If necessary. select M_RPC Female : Cathy. about 30 degrees. and click to place Cathy so she is facing Alex. and place it along the sidewalk behind him. 56 Press ESC twice. 52 In the Type Selector. 57 On the View tab of the Design Bar. select M_RPC Beetle. 53 Move the cursor clockwise. click Camera. you can use the Rotate tool to further adjust the component placement. 55 Press the spacebar to rotate it until it is facing away from Alex. click the car. 58 In the camera view (3D View 1). and click to place her on the sidewalk. and place it in the corner of the scene as shown. and click (Element Properties). 140 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . 54 In the Type Selector.

If the sidewalk changes height. 64 Select Alex. click Pick Host. double-click To Building. under 3D Views. pick the sidewalk as the host for the car. 65 Click the sidewalk. under Elevations. and click OK. 61 Zoom in to the area where Alex and Cathy are standing. you select the sidewalk as a host for both the Alex and Cathy RPC components. View the front of the building 67 In the Project Browser. both Cathy and Alex will move with it. 63 Click the sidewalk. enter -300 mm. you ensure that the components remain on the same plane as the host. and on the Options Bar. 66 Using the same method. click Pick Host. 60 In the Project Browser. Adding Entourage and Site Components | 141 . Next. Select a host for the RPC components 62 Select Cathy. double-click West. When you select a host for a component. under Constraints. for Offset. and on the Options Bar.59 In the Element Properties dialog.

68 Proceed to the next exercise. Adding a Service Core to the Building Project on page 142. Adding a Service Core to the Building Project In this exercise. the elements will be ungrouped in the project. 142 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . After the service core is positioned.NOTE You may close the project with or without saving it. The service core is contained in an external file that you bring into the current project as a group. and replace them with a service core. you remove the multi-level stairs and stairwell that you created in a previous exercise from the building.

under Floor Plans. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Adding a Service Core to the Building Project | 143 . Notice that there is no longer a stairwell in the building. 2 Zoom in to the stairwell. and open Metric\m_RRB_add_service_core. Remove the stairwell from the building model 1 In the Project Browser. (SteeringWheels). you delete the entire stairwell.Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. click (Default 3D View). and shaft opening. double-click 05 Roof Garden. 3 Select the entire stairwell. 4 Press DELETE. click 6 On the View toolbar. walls. 5 On the View toolbar. By deleting the stairwell from the 05 Roof Garden. including the stairs. click Training Files. and use the Orbit tool to spin the building.rvt.

and open Metric\m_RRB_core. double-click 01 Entry Level. under Floor Plans. Create an instance of the group 12 In the Project Browser. 11 In the Project Browser. click Modify. right-click m_RRB_core. 8 In the left pane of the Load File as Group dialog. click Training Files. click (Align). and click Create Instance. and notice that the linked file is listed.rvt. expand Model. under Floor Plans. 144 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . and zoom in to the linked instance.Add the service core as a group 7 Click File menu ➤ Load from Library ➤ Load File as Group. click to place an instance of the service core between grid lines B and D and 1 and 2. expand Groups. double-click 00 Foundation. and on the Design Bar. click OK. Position and align the group 15 On the Tools toolbar. 9 In the Duplicate Types dialog. 10 In the Project Browser. 14 In the Project Browser. 13 In the drawing area. Ignore and close any warnings that are displayed as the file is imported as a group.

20 On the View toolbar. click 21 On the View toolbar. click Modify. and spin the building to see the inserted group Shaft openings were included as part of the group geometry and are created automatically as the group is placed. click Ungroup. click Modify. 18 Select the core.16 Align the core: ■ ■ Click the inner top horizontal floor line. click (top down view). 19 On the Design Bar. (Default 3D View). ■ ■ Click grid line C. Press TAB to select the wall centerline of the wall between the top 2 rooms. 17 On the Design Bar. and on the Options Bar. NOTE This step is not required and may not be recommended if there is more than one instance of the group. or if the group layout is expected to change. (SteeringWheels). and click to align the center. Adding a Service Core to the Building Project | 145 . Click the exterior face of the top horizontal wall of the core.

Modifying a Floor and Adding Railings In this exercise. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. You copy the railing type into your project from another project. After you modify it. you cut away a portion of the floor on the 02 Level of the building. where it is hosted within a railing family.rvt. you add glass railings around the floor edges. Modifying a Floor and Adding Railings on page 146.NOTE You may close the project with or without saving it. and open Metric\m_RRB_modify_floor_add_railings_. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 146 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . click Training Files. 22 Proceed to the final exercise.

and expand Railings. and double-click Lounge Perspective. click Edit. Notice the glass railing in the foreground.rvt. and select Glass. 10 In the Duplicate Types dialog. Modify the 02 Level floor 12 Select the floor. and on the Options Bar. 3 In the Conference project. and click to split the floor. 5 Expand Railing. expand Families. click (Split).Open a different project and view a rendering of the building lounge 1 Click File menu ➤ Open. and open Metric\m_Conference. 11 Close the warning dialog that displays. under Floor Plans. Modifying a Floor and Adding Railings | 147 . and Parapet. Copy the railing types into the retail building project 4 In the Project Browser. 13 On the Tools toolbar. This is the railing that you want to add to your model. expand Renderings. 14 Select the bottom horizontal floor 700 mm to the left of grid line C. 7 Click Window menu ➤ m_RRB_modify_floor_add_railings. 6 Click Edit menu ➤ Copy to Clipboard. The rendering displays. click OK. click Training Files. 8 In the Project Browser. 9 Click Edit menu ➤ Paste from Clipboard. 2 In the left pane of the dialog. press and hold CTRL. double-click 02 Level.rvt. Handrail only. The floor sketch displays. in the Project Browser.

and click to place it. 19 Select the left endpoint of the floor. 23 Complete the sketch as shown. 16 Select the left endpoint of the floor where you split it. 148 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . 21 Sketch the same lines in the opposite direction on the right side of the floor sketch. and click to draw another line. click Modify. move the cursor vertically until the line is 1500 mm long. and click to draw another line. and drag to the left until it intersects with grid line B. 18 On the Design Bar. and on the Options Bar. click Lines. 25 Select grid line B. verify that Chain is not selected. select the left vertical sketch line along grid line B. click (Align). 22 Select the endpoint of the right horizontal line that you just sketched.15 On the Design Bar. and click the lock to lock the alignment. move the cursor horizontally to the right 1500 mm. and drag it to the right until it intersects with grid line D. 24 On the Tools toolbar. 17 Select the right endpoint of the floor where you split it. 20 Click to create a line starting from the endpoint of the line that you just drew. move the cursor vertically 1500 mm.

For Offset. 35 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Click (Pick Lines). 36 Select the floor lines to sketch the railing around the inside of the floor line as shown. 30 On the Design Bar. 29 On the Design Bar. select Glass. for Type. click Railing Properties. click Railing. click Dimension. 34 In the Element Properties dialog. select the right vertical sketch line along grid line D. and click the lock to lock the alignment. and dimension the floor sketch lines as shown. 28 Align the horizontal sketch lines with each other as shown. click (Align). This is the railing type that you copied from the Conference. and lock the alignment. 31 In the Revit dialog. click Finish Sketch. Modifying a Floor and Adding Railings | 149 . Lock the dimensions. 27 On the Tools toolbar. click Yes to attach the top of the walls on 01 Entry Level to the bottom of the 02 Level floor.rvt project. enter 100 mm. 33 On the Design Bar. and click OK. Add railings around the floor 32 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar.26 Select grid line D.

View the floor and railings 40 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 41 Place the camera and camera target as shown. 39 Click Finish Sketch. click Camera.37 On the Design Bar. 38 Dimension the railing sketch to the edge of the floor and lock the dimension. click Dimension. 150 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model .

Click (Hide Crop Region) to hide the frame around the view. 42 On the View Control Bar: ■ Click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges. ■ Modifying a Floor and Adding Railings | 151 .A new 3D view of the interior of the 02 Level displays. You can view the railing that you just added.

152 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model .43 Close all project drawings.

exterior fire stairs. a Kansas City-based architectural firm for providing their Freighthouse Flats renovation project to use for the tutorial training files in this section. the Freighthouse Flats project is an exciting renovation of an historic three-story warehouse into new urban luxury loft living spaces. BNIM Architects was selected to convert the existing building into a 22-unit condominium featuring concrete floors. and a roof garden. and north facing balconies for the 2nd and 3rd floor units. Located in Kansas City’s popular Crossroads Arts District. NOTE For training purposes. you learn to create construction documentation in Revit Architecture 2009.Documenting Your Projects In this section of the tutorials. The additional 4th floor and non-historic north facade will be modernized to include a 4th floor penthouse. As the building is slated to receive historic tax credits. balconies. lofty ceilings. 153 . the existing building shell will be maintained and restored. We wish to thank BNIM Architects. slight modifications to the building design have been made.

154 .

You learn how to create new views from existing views.Adding Views and Sheets to a Project 4 In this tutorial. you begin the construction documentation for the Freighthouse Flats project. and detail views Modify the appearance of tags and other annotation on plans Set visibility and graphic controls in views to produce different presentation effects Create projects sheets that contain project views Creating Views In this lesson. you create new plan views of the building model by copying existing views and then modifying the copied views. Duplicating Plan Views In this exercise. how to create section and elevation views. You also duplicate the project site plan to create a vicinity plan. elevation. 155 . section. and how to create views from callouts that you place in other views. you learn how to create views from a building model. You learn to: ■ ■ ■ ■ Create new project views. including plan. You duplicate the Level 1 and Level 2 floor plans to create Level 1 and Level 2 furniture plans.

Level 1 Furniture Plan created from the Level 1 floor plan Vicinity Plan created from the Site plan Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open.rvt. click Training Files. expand Floor Plans. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 156 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . and open Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Creating Views. and right-click Level 1 ➤ Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. Duplicate the Level 1 floor plan to create a Level 1 furniture plan 1 In the Project Browser.

Use an alternate method of view duplication to create a Level 2 furniture plan 5 In the Project Browser. double-click Level 1 Furniture Plan. 9 In the Project Browser. 8 In the Rename View dialog. 3 In the Rename View dialog. enter Level 2 Furniture Plan. right-click Copy of Level 1 ➤ Rename. and click OK. double-click Level 2 Furniture Plan. under Floor Plans. select Level 2. Duplicating Plan Views | 157 . 4 In the Project Browser. right-click Copy of Level 2 ➤ Rename. under Floor Plans. enter Level 1 Furniture Plan. 6 Click View menu ➤ Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. and click OK.2 In the Project Browser. 7 In the Project Browser.

under Floor Plans. right-click Site ➤ Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. 158 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . 13 In the Project Browser. Next. double-click Vicinity Plan. and click OK. 14 On the View Control Bar. 12 In the Rename View dialog. hide the display of the elevation markers in the view. enter Vicinity Plan.Duplicate a view and change the scale as required 10 In the Project Browser. click the current scale. 11 Under Floor Plans. right-click Copy of Site ➤ Rename. and click 1: 1000.

you create an additional section and elevation view of the building model. Creating Elevation and Section Views In this exercise. 16 Right-click. All of the elevation markers on the plan are hidden.15 Select the body of the south elevation marker. and click Hide in view ➤ Category. 17 Click File menu ➤ Save As. 18 Save the file as Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Creating Views_in_progress.rvt. Creating Elevation and Section Views | 159 .

select 1:100. double-click Level 1. 3 In the Type Selector.South East elevation view Section view Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson. 4 On the Options Bar. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 160 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . NOTE Elevation markers are context sensitive and will automatically try to align parallel to model geometry. under Floor Plans. Add an elevation marker to the Level 1 floor plan 1 In the Project Browser. click Elevation.rvt. for Scale. select Elevation: Building Elevation. Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Creating Views_in_progress. 5 Specify a point in the drawing in front of the angular wall to place an elevation marker.

8 On the Design Bar. click Modify. and select the head of the elevation marker that you just placed. click Modify. Creating Elevation and Section Views | 161 . 7 Select and drag the upper horizontal line of the elevation until it extends past the upper-left corner of the building.Modify the elevation extents 6 On the Design Bar.

Draw a section line on the Level 1 floor plan 12 In the Project Browser. for Scale. under Elevations (Building Elevation). select 1:100.Rename and view the new elevation 9 In the Project Browser. under Views (all). 15 On the Options Bar. click Section. 16 Draw a section line through the building: ■ Specify a point above the top wall of the building between grid lines 2 and 3. 10 In the Rename View dialog. 11 In the Project Browser. enter South East. 13 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 162 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . and double-click Level 1. and click OK. 14 In the Type Selector. under Elevations. ■ Move the cursor down. double-click South East. right-click Elevation 1-a ➤ Rename. select Section: Building Section. expand Floor Plans. and specify the section line endpoint between the endpoints of grid lines 2 and 3.

Modify the section line 17 Click the blue arrows below the section line head to reverse the direction in which the section is cut through the building. Creating Elevation and Section Views | 163 . and move them to just outside of the left side of the building. 18 Select the blue triangular grips on the left side of the section extents.

19 Click the blue arrows below the section tail twice to cycle through the section tail options and add a section head to the section line endpoint. drag it to the right (keeping it below the split) until it cuts through the stair. 20 Add a jog to the section line: ■ ■ On the Options Bar. click Split Segment. 164 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . Click the midpoint of the section line. and click to place it.

using the blue circular drag grip. expand Sections (Building Section). and double-click Section 1. 24 Select gridline F. select the blue break mark that displays under the grid bubble. Creating Elevation and Section Views | 165 . click Detail Level: Coarse ➤ Medium.21 On the Design Bar. and drag the top segment of gridline F to the right. 23 On the View Control Bar. View the new section 22 In the Project Browser. click Modify.

25 On the Design Bar. Creating Callout Views In this exercise. To create each view. you draw a callout around the geometry in another view to specify the contents of each new callout view. 26 Click File menu ➤ Save. click Modify. Stair callout on the Level 1 floor plan 166 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . you create new views: an enlarged stair plan view and a detail view.

4 On the Options Bar. for Scale.rvt. 3 In the Type Selector. ■ Move the cursor to the lower-left of the stair. Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Creating Views_in_progress. select Floor Plan. click Callout.Enlarged Stair Plan Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson. double-click Level 1. 5 Draw the callout around the large stairs in the center of the plan: ■ Click to specify a point to the upper-right of the stair.Resulting callout view . Creating Callout Views | 167 . Create a floor plan callout 1 In the Project Browser. under Floor Plans. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. and click to specify a point to complete the callout. select 1:50.

■ Select the middle grip. and drag it down slightly to create a jog in the leader line. Select the grip on the leader line that is closest to the callout head. and select the callout boundary.6 Modify the callout leader: ■ ■ On the Design Bar. 168 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . click Modify. and move it to the left side of the callout boundary.

for Scale. 9 In the Rename View dialog. and click to specify a point above and to the right of the roof overhang. Creating Callout Views | 169 . 15 Create the callout: ■ Zoom in to the upper-left corner of the building. click Modify. The Enlarged Stair Plan view displays. under Sections (Building Sections). 12 On the View tab of the Design Bar. and click OK. enter Enlarged Stair Plan. Create a detail view callout 11 In the Project Browser. 8 In the Project Browser under Floor Plans. right-click Callout of Level 1 ➤ Rename. click Callout. select 1:50. double-click Section 1. 14 On the Options Bar. Open the callout view 10 Double-click the callout head. 13 In the Type Selector.7 On the Design Bar. select Detail View: Detail.

and click to specify a point to the left and below the roof overhang. 16 Modify the callout leader as shown. 170 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project .■ Move the cursor diagonally down.

18 In the Rename View dialog. enter Roof Overhang Detail. and click OK. and right-click Detail 0 ➤ Rename. expand Detail Views (Details). double-click Roof Overhang Detail. 20 Click File menu ➤ Save. Open the detail callout view 19 In the Project Browser. Creating Callout Views | 171 .17 In the Project Browser. under Detail Views (Details).

Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Creating Views_in_progress. 3 In the left pane of the Open dialog. Existing stair callout head and boundary Modified stair callout head and boundary Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson. click Training Files. the elevation markers.rvt. 172 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . You change the appearance of the section mark head. Modify the section mark head 1 In the Project Browser. 2 Click File menu ➤ Open. under Floor Plans. double-click Level 1. and click Open.rfa. open Metric\Families\Annotations. select Custom-Section Head. you modify the appearance of tags in a view so that they conform to office CAD standards. and the callout head and boundary that you placed in previous exercises.Modifying View Tag Appearance In this exercise.

Modify the line weight of the section line and mark 13 Click Settings menu ➤ Object Styles. 19 Click OK. click Duplicate. .5mm Square. and click OK twice. click Load into Project. scroll to Section Marks. select the section line. and can be applied to the section line. The Custom-Section Head family is now loaded in the project. clear any others. click Edit/New. Modifying View Tag Appearance | 173 . 14 In the Object Styles dialog. 15 Under Category. 10 On the floor plan. scroll to Section Line. 16 Click in the Line Weight/Projection field. Modify the shape and weight of the elevation markers 20 Click Settings menu ➤ View Tags ➤ Elevation Tags. enter Section Head – Custom. Section Tail . and click OK. 9 In the Type Properties dialog. 21 In the Type Properties dialog. and click 11 In the Element Properties dialog. and select 2. click Duplicate. 8 In the Name dialog. select Section Head . 4 On the Design Bar. 12 For Section Tag. On the floor plan. and select 3.Filled. and click OK. notice the updated section marks that display at each endpoint of the section line.The new section mark head that you want to apply to either endpoint of the section line displays. 5 In the Load into Projects dialog. select the current project. 22 In the Name dialog. select Custom-Section Head: Section Head – Open. for Section Head. and click OK. 7 In the Type Properties dialog.Custom. click the Annotation Objects tab. 18 Click in the Line Weight/Projection field. and click OK. 6 Click Settings menu ➤ View Tags ➤ Section Tags. 17 Under Category. Section Tail – Filled. enter 12.

and click Open.23 In the Type Properties dialog. clear all others. click Edit/New. For Line Weight. notice the square elevation markers that display. select Custom – Callout Head w/ 6mm Corner Radius. 31 In the Load into Projects dialog. 40 Press ESC. and on the Options Bar. click Training Files. On the floor plan. 33 In the Type Properties dialog. for Callout Tag. 39 Click OK twice. 30 On the Design Bar. For Corner Radius. The new callout head that you want to apply to the callout displays. and on the Options Bar. . 36 In the drawing. 29 In the left pane of the Open dialog. 27 Click OK twice. open Metric\Families\Annotations. The custom callout head displays on the floor plan. Modify the callout head 28 Click File menu ➤ Open. click Load into Project. enter Custom – Callout Head w/ 6mm Corner Radius. click Edit/New. click 25 In the Element Properties dialog. . 34 In the Name dialog. 38 In the Type Properties dialog.rfa. for Elevation Tag. under Graphics: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Shape. select 12. and click OK. select the callout. 26 In the Type Properties dialog. 32 Click Settings menu ➤ View Tags ➤ Callout Tags.5 mm. For Dimensions ➤ Width. and click OK. select Custom-Callout Head. Click OK.5mm Square. enter 12. 35 In the Type Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Callout Head. click Duplicate. enter 6 mm. select the current project. Click OK. select 3. click 37 In the Element Properties dialog. 24 Select an elevation marker in the drawing. 174 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . select Custom – Callout Head: Callout Head. select Square.

and select 7. 43 Under Category. Setting Visibility and Graphics Options in Views | 175 . 46 Under Category. 44 Click in the Line Weight/Projection field. and visual overrides. The new callout boundary displays on the floor plan. Setting Visibility and Graphics Options in Views In this lesson. 49 Click OK. 42 In the Objects Styles dialog. click the Annotation Objects tab. filters.Modify the callout boundary 41 Click Settings menu ➤ Object Styles. 47 Select Callout Leader Line. and select 4. You learn to create view templates. masking regions. scroll down to Callout Boundary. view regions. you learn how to control the visibility and graphic characteristics of elements in views. expand Callout Boundary. 50 Click File menu ➤ Save. 48 Click in the Line Weight/Projection field. 45 For Line Pattern. select Dash.

2 On the View Control Bar. and open Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-VG. The crop region displays as red. click Zoom to Fit. click (Hide Crop Region). click Training Files. and features blue triangular grips and break marks. 4 Select and move the blue triangular grips to resize the crop region as shown. you create presentation views that feature elevations of the building. Set a crop region for the view 1 In the Project Browser.rvt. Presentation view Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. and double-click East. under Elevations. To accomplish this. click (Show Crop Region).Creating a View Template In this exercise. View templates provide an easy way to transfer visibility settings to multiple drawings. and apply it to multiple elevation views. 5 On the View Control Bar. you create a view template containing specific presentation quality visibility settings. 176 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . 3 Select the outer crop region that displays around the view. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 6 On the View Toolbar.

levels. elevation markers. 10 Click the Annotation Categories tab. 9 In the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog. Creating a View Template | 177 . grids. 13 On the View Control bar. clear: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Callouts Elevations Grids Levels Sections 12 Click OK. under Visibility. 11 Under Visibility. clear Entourage. Callouts. 8 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics.Create and apply a view template to an elevation drawing 7 On the View Control bar. click Shadows Off ➤ Shadows On. and section lines are now hidden in the view. click Detail Level: Coarse ➤ Medium.

click OK. and click OK. The settings in the view template create a presentation-quality elevation view. 22 Save the file as Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-VG_in_progress. 15 In the New View Template dialog. 16 In the View Templates dialog. and click OK. 19 In the Select View Template dialog. and click Apply View Template. 18 In the Project Browser. under Elevations.14 In the Project Browser. double-click North. 21 Click File menu ➤ Save As. 20 Using the same method. select Black and White Presentation Elevation. right-click North. enter Black and White Presentation Elevation. right-click East. 17 In the Project Browser. and click Create View Template From View. click Apply. edit the crop region as before. 178 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project .rvt. under Elevations.

select Penthouse. 4 In the View Range dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Primary Range. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson. for View Range. right-click. 3 In the Element Properties dialog. Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-VG_in_progress.rvt. for Level. for Bottom. under Floor Plans. as this structure has not yet been documented in any of the views. select Level Below (Level 4). View Range and Plan Regions | 179 . NOTE The Penthouse plan now shows the level below to provide additional context to the view. Adjust the view range of the Penthouse plan 1 In the Project Browser. click Edit. You want to display the exterior roof terraces from Level 4 on the penthouse and roof plan. Under View Depth. select Level Below (Level 4). and the exterior area on the south side of the building. Click OK twice. under Extents. 2 In the Project Browser. you modify the view range and create view plan regions to adjust the display of elements in the building Penthouse and Roof Plan. and click Properties.View Range and Plan Regions In this exercise. double-click Penthouse.

Under View Depth. 7 In the Element Properties dialog. click Edit. Click OK twice. under Floor Plans.Adjust the view range of the Roof plan 5 In the Project Browser. right-click. and click Properties. for Bottom. 8 In the View Range dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Primary Range. 180 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . select Level 4. for View Range. select Roof Plan. 6 In the Project Browser. select Level 4. double-click Roof Plan. for Level. under Extents.

10 On the Design Bar. for View Range.Create a plan region to show exterior space on the south side of the building 9 On the View tab of the Design Bar. click Region Properties. click 12 Sketch a plan region: ■ ■ (Rectangle). 15 In the View Range dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Primary Range. click Finish Sketch. Move you cursor diagonally. 11 On the Options Bar. 16 On the Design Bar. select Unlimited. for Level. for Bottom. 13 On the Design Bar. and select the endpoint the gridline shown below. NOTE A Plan Region allows you to modify the view range of a specified area defined by the extents of the Plan Region. View Range and Plan Regions | 181 . click Lines. Click OK twice. 14 In the Element Properties dialog. select the left endpoint of the outer wall. under Extents. In the left corner of the building. click Edit. click Plan Region. Under View Depth. select Unlimited.

2 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. you visually audit the drawing to make sure the fire-rated walls are placed correctly. under Views (all). 182 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project .17 On the Design Bar. click Modify. 3 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. 18 Click File menu ➤ Save. Using Filters to Control Visibility In this exercise. expand Floor Plans. the fire-rated walls on the floor plan display with a solid red fill. in this case. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson. 1 In the Project Browser. After you apply the filter. You use a filter to quickly apply visual changes to the walls based on defined parameters. the fire rating of the walls. Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-VG_in_progress. click the Filters tab. and double-click Level 1.rvt.

select the red color. 8 Under Filter Rules: ■ ■ ■ For Filter by. click Remove. under Basic colors. 7 In the Filters dialog. Using Filters to Control Visibility | 183 . On the Filters tab of the Visibility Graphics dialog. apply the red solid fill override to Cut Patterns as well.4 At the bottom of the Visibility/Graphics dialog. 19 Remove the filter: ■ ■ Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. 16 Click OK. 14 In the Color dialog. and click OK. 12 On the Filter tab. select Solid Fill. 13 In the Fill Pattern Graphics dialog. select Walls. Enter Hr. click Edit/New. click <No Override>. and click OK. 6 In the Filter Name dialog. under Projection/Surface. click Add. 18 In the Visibility/Graphics Overrides dialog. under Filters. 17 Using the same method. You click the current color value to open the Color dialog. The fire-rated walls now display without the solid red fill. for Pattern. 11 Select Rated Walls. click Override under Patterns. and click OK. under Categories. for Color. and apply a color. 15 In the Fill Pattern Graphics dialog. enter Rated Walls. but the overrides associated with the filter must be reapplied as well. for Rated Walls. 5 In the Filters dialog. 9 Click OK. and click OK. The Rated Walls filter can be reapplied to the drawing at any time. Select contains. click OK. select Fire Rating. click (New). 10 On the Filter tab.

20 Click File menu ➤ Save. you use masking regions that you sketch over the areas that you want to hide. you obscure geometry in portions of a view. To accomplish this. Masking Portions of a View In this exercise. Masking regions sketched over the upper corners of a view Unit plan view with upper corners masked 184 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project .

Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson. under Floor Plans. Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-VG_in_progress. NOTE This specifies the line type for the border of the masking region. click Show Crop Region ➤ Hide Crop Region. click Masking Region. enter Unit 18 Plan – Level 1. as shown. 2 Select Copy of Level 1. 11 In the Type Selector. 6 Modify the crop region to get close to the desired view at the bottom left. Masking Portions of a View | 185 . 8 Select the crop region. right-click Level 1 ➤ Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. 9 On the View Control Bar. and adjust the view again until it displays as shown. click Zoom ➤ Zoom to Fit. 7 On the View menu. and click Rename. click Zoom ➤ Zoom to Fit. select Invisible lines. Use a masking region to hide additional model geometry that does not need to be shown 10 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar.rvt. and click OK. click Show Crop Region. 1 In the Project Browser. 3 In the Rename View dialog. 4 On the View Control Bar. 5 On the View menu. right-click.

14 On the Design Bar. 16 Click File menu ➤ Save.12 On the Options Bar. 13 Sketch 2 masking regions as shown. click Finish Sketch. click (Rectangle). 186 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . 15 View the effects of the masking regions on the floor plan.

right-click. click <No Override> to apply a color. and click 1: 50. and click OK.Level 1. you create a presentation plan of one of the residential units on the Level 1 floor plan. Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-VG_in_progress. click black. and click Rename. and click Override. select Walls. under Visibility. under Floor Plans. for Color. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson. click the current scale. 2 Select the Copy of Unit 18 Plan – Level 1. 8 In the Fill Pattern Graphics dialog. 7 Under Cut. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate with Detailing. 3 In the Rename View dialog. right-click. You create poche for the walls and you hide and modify the display of certain elements on the presentation plan. for Pattern. select Solid fill.Working with Visual Overrides In this exercise. 6 In the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog. 1 In the Project Browser. 11 Click OK twice. 9 On the left side of the Color dialog. 4 On the View Control Bar. Create poche for walls 5 Select the diagonal bottom wall. click in the Patterns field. right-click Unit 18 Plan . Working with Visual Overrides | 187 . and click Override Graphics in View ➤ By Category. and click OK. and apply different visual overrides to create presentation effects. under Pattern Overrides. 10 In the Fill Pattern Graphics dialog. enter Presentation Unit 18 Plan – Level 1. NOTE Duplicate with Detailing is selected so that the masking regions are retained in the new view.rvt.

16 Under Visibility. 188 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . click Modify. clear Floors. 13 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. clear Grids. Hide elements in the view by category 17 Select the lamp on the table on the floor plan as shown.Set the visibility and graphics of other categories in the view 12 On the Design Bar. 14 In the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog. 15 Click the Annotation Categories tab. under Visibility. and click OK.

and click Hide in View ➤ Category.18 Right-click. 19 Select 1 of the chairs around the long table on the floor plan as shown. Working with Visual Overrides | 189 .

click Override. for Color. click <No Override> to apply a color. 190 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project .20 Right-click. under Lines. and click Override Graphics in View ➤ By Element. 27 In the View-Specific Element Graphics dialog. By using the previous method to make the selection. 24 In the Line Graphics dialog. 25 Click OK twice. right-click. click a purple color. the Visibility/Graphics dialog opens to the category of the object (Furniture) selected by default. for Pattern. select the sofa. 21 Under Projection/Surface. select Dash. 22 In the Line Graphics dialog. Modify visibility and graphics by element 26 On the floor plan. and click OK. and click Override Graphics in View ➤ By Category. 23 In the Color dialog. click Projection Lines.

28 For Color. click By Category Override. right-click. and click Unhide in view ➤ Category. 32 Select one of the lamps. Working with Visual Overrides | 191 . 29 In the Color dialog. Reveal hidden elements in a view 31 On the View Control Bar. The lighting fixtures and grid lines that you hid previously display in a dark red color. 30 On the Design Bar. click Modify. select a bright green color. click . and click OK twice.

Creating Drawing Sheets In this exercise. how to add views to the sheets. you create project drawing sheets that report the project information in the sheet titleblocks. Creating Drawing Sheets in a Project In this lesson. 34 Click File menu ➤ Save. and how to make changes to the building model from a view on a sheet. click . you learn how to create sheets within a Revit Architecture project. 192 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project .33 On the View Control Bar. Training File ■ Click File menu ➤ Open.

select A0 metric. The title block that you selected is a family that has already been loaded into the project. click Training Files. click Sheet. Creating Drawing Sheets | 193 . The text fields in the titleblock family (shown below) contain labels that associate the project information parameters with the appropriate text fields. Create a project sheet 1 On View tab of the Design Bar. right-click. 2 In the Select a Titleblock dialog. A title block and drawing borders are displayed on the drawing sheet.Creating Sheets.■ In the left pane of the Open dialog. and click OK. and click View. TIP If the View tab is not displayed in the Design Bar. and open Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats.rvt.

click Modify. 3 In the Project Browser. and select the title block. click Modify. The new sheet is displayed in the Project Browser with the name A102 .Unnamed. enter Site Plan. The Sheet Number has been updated to display A101. 8 Zoom in to the lower-right corner of the title block. Site Plan displays in the title block as the sheet name and is appended to the sheet name in the Project Browser. enter A101. under Identity Data: ■ ■ ■ (Properties). Click OK. Change the sheet name and number 4 On the Design Bar. 7 On the Design Bar. 5 When the title block highlights. 194 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . For Sheet Name. click 6 In the Element Properties dialog.NOTE The vertical time and date stamp in the lower-right corner of the sheet view automatically updates every time the project file is saved. expand Sheets (all). For Sheet Number. on the Options Bar.

Display additional project information in the sheet title block 9 Click Settings menu ➤ Project Information. 14 Click OK. Smith. For Client Name. For Project Name. 10 In the Element Properties dialog. continue to add project information: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Project Issue Date. For Project Number. 13 In the Element Properties dialog. 11 In the Edit Text dialog. enter 2009-1. Creating Drawing Sheets | 195 . 2009. enter the following address: ■ ■ 123 Main Street Anytown. under Other. enter Freighthouse Flats. enter J. click Edit. The new project information displays in the titleblock. for Project Address. For Project Status. enter 15 May. MA 12345 12 Click OK. NOTE Text size is determined within the sheet family. enter For Approval.

and click Save. 16 In the Select a Titleblock dialog. you add views to the sheets that you created in the previous exercise.Layout Plan A104 .Create a floor plan sheet 15 In the Project Browser. for Name. and click OK. and click Rename. right-click. and click OK.Stairs In the following exercise.rvt.Sections A108 . 17 In the Project Browser. select the new sheet name. 196 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . Create additional sheets 19 Using the same method as you did in the previous steps. you add views to these sheets. enter Floor Plan. 18 In the Sheet Title dialog. 21 Save the file as Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Creating Sheets_in_progress. select A0 metric.Elevations A106 . 20 Click File menu ➤ Save As.Elevations A105 . Adding Views to Sheets In this exercise.Elevations A107 . right-click Sheets (all) ➤ New Sheet. create the following new project sheets: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ A103 .

and click to place it.Elevations. Add elevation views to the A104-Elevation sheet 5 In the Project Browser. select Level 1.Training File ■ Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson. Drag the Level 1 floor plan onto a sheet to create a floor plan 1 In the Project Browser. The border of the view displays as red to indicate that you can reposition it on the sheet.rvt. 6 In the Project Browser. under Floor Plans. under Sheets (all). Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Creating Sheets_in_progress. 4 On the Design Bar. double-click A102 . 2 In the Project Browser. click Modify. 3 Move the cursor to position the lower-right corner of the view in the lower-right corner of the sheet. drag East to the upper-right corner of the sheet. Adding Views to Sheets | 197 . and drag it to the sheet. and click to place the view. double-click A104 . The red border around the view no longer displays. under Elevations (Building Elevation). under Sheets (all).Floor Plan.

click Modify. Add the Building Section view to the A107-Sections sheet 9 In the Project Browser. 8 On the Design Bar. align it with the East elevation. 198 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . 10 Under Sections (Building Sections). and click to place it. drag Building Section to the upper-right corner of the sheet. drag Roof Overhang Detail to the left of the Building Section view on the sheet.7 Drag the North elevation to the lower-right corner of the sheet. 12 On the Design Bar.Sections. double-click A107 . and click to place it. 11 Under Detail Views (Detail). under Sheets (all). click Modify. and click to place it.

zoom in to the grip. and click OK. Adding Views to Sheets | 199 . move the cursor over it. select 1:5.Change the scale of the detail view 13 Select the Roof Overhang Detail on the sheet. 15 Drag the view to reposition it next to the Building Section view. and on the Options Bar. Notice the title bar also needs to be resized. . for View Scale. click 14 In the Element Properties dialog. NOTE If you find it difficult to select the left grip on the title bar. and press TAB until it highlights. and use the blue endpoint grips to resize it so that it spans the length of the view. 16 Select title bar.

200 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . drag Enlarged Stair Plan to the upper-right corner of the sheet. 18 Under Floor Plans. under Floor Plans. double-click A108 . View updated annotation on referenced views 20 In the Project Browser.Stairs. 21 Zoom to the stair callout. click Modify. and click to place it. Notice that the callout tag has been automatically updated to reference the correct sheet. 22 Zoom in to the section line heads and the east and north elevation markers.Create a sheet with stair and stair detail views 17 In the Project Browser. 23 Click File menu ➤ Save. double-click Level 1. and notice they also reference the correct sheet numbers. 19 On the Design Bar. under Sheets (all).

3 At the right end of the Roof level line. and click Activate View.rvt. In order to do this. Training File ■ Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson.Modifying the Building Model from a Sheet View In this exercise. Change the roof elevation 1 In the Project Browser. and press ENTER. right-click. 5 On the Design Bar.Sections. under Sheets (all). Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Creating Sheets_in_progress. you must first activate the view on the sheet. double-click A107 . zoom in to the name and elevation of the level. 4 Double-click the Roof elevation height. 2 Select the building section view. click Modify. you learn how to modify a building model directly from the drawing sheets that you created from its views. enter 16700 mm. and then make changes and deactivate the view. Modifying the Building Model from a Sheet View | 201 .

You modify the view to hide the view title. Notice that the Roof Plan elevation has been updated. under Elevations (Building Elevation).6 Right-click. 7 In the Project Browser. Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Creating Sheets_in_progress. 8 Click File menu ➤ Save. as it is not necessary to display it on the title sheet. Training File ■ Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson. Creating and Modifying a Title Sheet In this exercise.rvt. you create a perspective view of the building and place it on the sheet. double-click North. After you create the sheet. 202 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . and click Deactivate View. you create a title sheet for your drawing set.

double-click Level 1. 4 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Sheet Number. right-click Sheets (all) ➤ New Sheet. select the new sheet name. 3 In the Project Browser. click Camera. and click Properties. and click OK. 2 In the Select a Titleblock dialog. under Floor Plans. Click OK. Create a view of the building to place on the title sheet 5 In the Project Browser. 6 On the View tab of the Design Bar. select A0 metric. For Sheet Name. Creating and Modifying a Title Sheet | 203 .Create a new sheet 1 In the Project Browser. enter T. enter Title Sheet. 7 Place the camera as shown. The camera view displays. right-click.

For Far Clip Offset.8 On the Options Bar. 12 On the View Control Bar. Under Extents. enter 1500 mm. 204 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . 11 On the View Control Bar. click 9 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ . click Shadows off ➤ Shadows on. enter 100000 mm.Title Sheet. Click OK. click Show Crop Region ➤ Hide Crop Region. 10 Select the crop region and adjust the view to fit the building. 13 In the Project Browser. 14 Under 3D Views. enter 18000 mm. under Sheets (all). double-click T . select Far Clip Active. Under Camera. and click to place it in the center of the sheet. For Target Elevation. drag 3D View 1 onto the sheet. for Eye Elevation.

24 Click OK twice. 19 Select the view on the sheet. 21 In the Type Properties dialog. 16 In the Crop Region Size dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Change.15 With the view selected. 25 On the Design Bar. Under Model Crop Size. click Size. The title bar no longer displays on the sheet. 23 In the Type Properties dialog. select No. enter Viewport/no title mark. Creating and Modifying a Title Sheet | 205 . click Edit/New. on the Options Bar. click Modify. select Scale (locked proportions). click Duplicate. under Graphics. 17 Reposition the view on the title sheet. Click Apply. Remove the title bar on the view 18 On the Design Bar. 22 In the Name dialog. click 20 In the Element Properties dialog. for Height. for Show title. and click OK. enter 635 mm. and then click OK. . click Modify. and on the Options Bar.

26 Click File menu ➤ Save. and close the exercise file. 206 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project .

The Room command with the Tag on placement option selected allows you to place and tag rooms with one command. You learn how to ■ ■ ■ ■ Sequentially tag rooms on a floor plan Tag doors and windows Modify tag placement and mark text Tag other objects. in your Revit Architecture 2009 projects. expand Floor Plans. and open Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Tagging Objects. Add room separations 1 In the Project Browser. you learn how to tag rooms and other components of floor plans.rvt. you need to create room separation lines to define the rooms to be tagged. In the left pane of the Open dialog. you sequentially place and tag the rooms on the floor plan. and double-click Unit 18 Plan .Level 1. such as furniture Sequentially Placing and Tagging Rooms In this exercise.Tagging and Scheduling 5 In this tutorial. 207 . You also learn to create different types of schedules. Tagging Objects In this lesson. click Training Files. such as doors and windows. Because of the open style floor plan. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. such as room and window schedules. you learn how to use some of the annotation features included in Revit Architecture.

4 Click the endpoint of the short horizontal wall on the left. 3 On the Room and Area tab of the Design Bar. click Room Separation. right-click in the Design Bar. and click Room and Area. move the cursor to the right. as shown: 5 Using the same method. Adding room separation lines breaks up an open space to make it easier to add rooms.2 Zoom in to the upper area of the floor plan. create a vertical separation to divide the kitchen from the entry area on the right. and click the opposite wall to create a horizontal room separation dividing the kitchen from the dining area (top area of the drawing). NOTE If the Room and Area tab of the Design Bar is not active. as shown: 208 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling .

6 Using the same method. Load room tag annotation family 8 Click Settings menu ➤ Annotations ➤ Loaded Tags. click Load. Sequentially Placing and Tagging Rooms | 209 . click Modify. 9 In the Tags dialog. create a horizontal separation above the stair to divide the dining area from the living area. 7 On the Design Bar.

The room tag number displays in blue. click it. 11 In the Tags dialog. click Training Files. and open Metric\Families\Annotations\M_Room Tag. and select the room tag. indicating that it can be edited.rfa. 15 Move the cursor to the room at the upper right of the plan view. click Modify. click Room. 14 For Offset. type 2400 mm. Tag rooms sequentially 12 On the Room and Area tab of the Design Bar.10 In the left pane of the Load Family dialog. The crosshair graphic represents the room area being tagged. 17 Zoom in on the tag number. verify that Tag on placement is selected. and click to place the room and tag. 16 On the Design Bar. and the rectangle contains the room tag. and press ENTER. 13 On the Options Bar. click OK. type U18-1. 210 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling .

Move the cursor into the room to the left of the one previously tagged. type Kitchen. 20 Place another room and tag: ■ ■ ■ On the Design Bar. and press ENTER. and press ENTER. click Modify. NOTE The second tag that you place displays the sequential number U18-2. Dining. place rooms and tags. 22 Click the room text label. click Modify. ■ 21 On the Design Bar. click Room. Align the tags by moving the cursor until a dashed green line displays between the placed tag and the one that displays at the tip of the cursor.18 Click the room text label. Click to place the new room and tag. 23 Using the same method. Sequential letters are also supported. type Entry. and Living): Sequentially Placing and Tagging Rooms | 211 . 19 On the Design Bar. and edit the tags as shown (Toilet.

on the Model Categories tab. Tag rooms on upper level 26 In the Project Browser. click Modify. 212 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling . and click OK.Level 2. 29 On the Design Bar. click to place a room tag in each of the 5 rooms. clear Room Separation. click Room Tag. 28 Starting with the Balcony (area near the stair). expand Lines. and moving clockwise. The rooms are already placed.Hide the room separations 24 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. but they need to be tagged. 25 In the Visibility/Graphics Overrides dialog. under Floor Plans. double-click Unit 18 Plan . 27 On the Design Bar.

Tag Level 1 doors 1 If necessary. Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Tagging Objects_in_progress. 31 Save the file as Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Tagging Objects_in_progress. you learn how to place door and window tags. clear Leader. 3 On the Options Bar. You learn how to add tags to the floor plan and how to simultaneously tag multiple untagged doors and windows. click Tag ➤ By Category. Tagging Doors and Windows In this exercise.Level 1. expand Floor Plans. 4 Select 5 doors in the upper area of the floor plan: ■ ■ ■ ■ Entry door Kitchen pantry door Pocket door in toilet Closet door in dining room Tagging Doors and Windows | 213 .rvt. Training File Continue using the training file you saved in the previous exercise.rvt.30 Click File menu ➤ Save As. in the Project Browser. and double-click Unit 18 Plan . 2 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar.

Closet door in living room

5 On the Design Bar, click Modify. 6 Click the door tag for the entry door, type U18-1, and press ENTER. NOTE The tag symbol and text size are determined by the tag family.

7 Select the kitchen pantry door to the left, and on the Options Bar, click Properties).

(Element

8 In the Element Properties dialog, under Identify Data, for Mark, type U18-2, and click OK.

214 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling

9 Using one of the methods you just learned, rename the other 3 door tags to match the corresponding room tags.

10 Select the tag for the pocket door on the right, and drag it down to center it in the doorway.

11 Select the tag for the closet door and move it to the right of the door.

Tagging Doors and Windows | 215

Tag Level 2 doors 12 In the Project Browser, double-click Unit 18 Plan - Level 2. 13 On the Design Bar, click Tag All Not Tagged. 14 In the Tag All Not Tagged dialog, verify that All objects in current view is selected. 15 Under Category, select Door Tags, and click OK. 16 Move the door tags to center them in the doorway. 17 Edit the numbers of the door tags as shown:

Place window tags 18 In the Project Browser, expand Floor Plans, and double-click Level 1.

19 Click Settings menu ➤ Annotations ➤ Loaded Tags. 20 In the Tags dialog, click Load. 21 In the left pane of the Load Family dialog, click Training Files, and open Metric\Families\Annotations\M_Window Tag.rfa. 22 In the Tags dialog, click OK. 23 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar, click Tag All Not Tagged. 24 In the Tag All Not Tagged dialog, select Window Tags, and click OK.

216 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling

25 Zoom to the lower-right area of the drawing to view the window tags.

26 Under Floor Plans, double-click Level 2. 27 Zoom to the drawing extents. 28 Using the same method, tag all untagged windows. 29 Save the file.

Tagging Other Objects
In this exercise, you learn how to tag furniture objects, and modify the tag placement and display. Training File Continue using the training file you saved in the previous exercise, Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Tagging Objects_in_progress.rvt. Add furniture tags 1 In the Project Browser, expand Floor Plans, and double-click Unit 18 Plan - Level 1. 2 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar, click Tag ➤ By Category. 3 On the Options Bar, select Leader. 4 Select a dining room chair. 5 At the confirmation prompt, click Yes to load a tag. 6 In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Metric\Families\Annotations\M_Furniture Tag.rfa. 7 Select each of the chairs and the table to place tags; select the edge to which the leader connects.

Tagging Other Objects | 217

8 Select the furniture in the living room.

9 Click Modify. Modify tag placement 10 Zoom to the dining table. Notice that the chair and table tags overlap.

11 Select the tag for the table, and drag it above the chair tag.

218 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling

12 Click the elbow control, and drag it up to form an angled leader.

13 Optionally, modify the position of the chair tags to move them closer to the chairs. 14 Click Modify. 15 Select the tag for the table (TBL-1), and on the Options Bar, clear Leader. 16 Drag the table tag to the center of the table, and on the Design Bar, click Modify.

Tag furniture on Level 2 17 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, double-click Unit 18 Plan - Level 2. 18 On the Design Bar, click Tag All Not Tagged, select M_Furniture Tag : Standard, and click OK. All furniture in the floor plan is tagged.

Tagging Other Objects | 219

Change tag style 19 Draw a selection box around the top area of the drawing to select the furniture.

20 On the Options Bar, click

(Filter Selection).

21 In the Filter dialog, click Check None, select Furniture Tags, and click OK. 22 In the Type Selector, select Furniture Tag: Boxed, and click Modify.

23 Save the file.

Defining Schedules and Color Diagrams
In this lesson, you learn to add schedules. You also learn to add schedule keys to a project by creating a room schedule and room color diagram. Schedule keys allow you to define common items that can be used by multiple objects within a schedule.

220 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling

Creating a Window Schedule
In this exercise, you create a window schedule for the building model shown below.

You begin by creating a window instance schedule; that is, a schedule that lists every window in the building.

Creating a Window Schedule | 221

You then select a window in the instance schedule and use the Show command to locate it in a view of the building model.

Next, you group and sort the windows in the instance schedule. Finally, you change the window instance schedule to a type schedule, in which windows are listed by window type.

Training File
■ ■

Click File menu ➤ Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Color Diagrams.rvt.

Create a window schedule 1 In the Project Browser, expand Floor Plans, and double-click Level 1. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar, click Schedule/Quantities. TIP If the View tab of the Design Bar is not active, right-click in the Design Bar, and click View. 3 In the New Schedule dialog, under Category, select Windows. 4 For Name, type Building Window Schedule, and click OK. Define the fields to display as columns in the window schedule 5 In the Schedule Properties dialog, click the Fields tab. 6 Under Available fields, select Comments and click Add. The Comments field is moved under Scheduled fields. 7 Using the same method, add the following fields to the schedule:
■ ■ ■ ■

Count Height Level Type Mark

222 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling

Width

8 Under Scheduled fields, order the fields as shown in the following illustration by selecting them and clicking Move Up or Move Down.

9 Click OK. A schedule is created that contains every window in the building model.

Select a window in the schedule and locate it in the building model 10 Select a cell in the window schedule with the C14 Type Mark, and on the Options Bar, click Show. If no open view shows the selected element, you are prompted to open one that does. 11 If the confirmation dialog displays, click OK to search through relevant views of the building model.

Creating a Window Schedule | 223

The window that corresponds to the information in the schedule row is displayed in a relevant view of the building model.

12 In the Show Element(s) in View dialog, click Close. NOTE By clicking Show, you can display other views of the building model that include the selected window. However, in large building models with many views, this can be a time-consuming process. 13 In the Project Browser, expand Schedules/Quantities, and double-click Building Window Schedule to redisplay the window instance schedule. Group and sort the window schedule by type mark 14 In the drawing area, right-click the schedule, and click View Properties. 15 In the Element Properties dialog, under Other, for Sorting/Grouping, click Edit. 16 On the Sorting/Grouping tab of the Schedule Properties dialog, for Sort by, select Type Mark 17 Click OK twice. The window schedule is displayed, sorted by type mark.

Change type mark from the schedule 18 In the window schedule, change the Type Mark in the first row from 19 to A, and press ENTER. 19 Click OK to confirm that you want to change the type mark for all windows of this type.

224 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling

The type mark is changed to A and the schedule is resorted. Change the schedule from an instance schedule to a type schedule 20 Right-click on the schedule, and click View Properties. 21 In the Element Properties dialog, under Other, for Sorting/Grouping, click Edit. 22 In the Schedule Properties dialog, clear Itemize every instance. 23 Click OK twice. The window type schedule is displayed.

24 Change the Type Mark for the other window types, so that the types are sequentially named from A to H, as shown:

25 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, double-click Level 2. 26 Zoom to the lower area of the floor plan to see that the window tags have changed.

27 Click File menu ➤ Save As, and save the exercise file as m_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Color Diagrams_in_progress.rvt.

Creating a Window Schedule | 225

Adding Project Parameters to a Window Schedule
In this lesson, you add schedule columns for parameters that are not standard for the scheduled object. In this case, you want to add columns to the window schedule to describe the detail where head, jamb, and sill conditions for a window can be found. These parameters cannot be shared with other projects and, unlike shared parameters, you cannot use them to tag objects.

Training File Continue using the training file you saved in the previous exercise, m_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Color Diagrams_in_progress.rvt. Create project parameters 1 In the Project Browser, expand Schedules/Quantities, and double-click Building Window Schedule. 2 Click Settings menu ➤ Project Parameters. 3 In the Project Parameters dialog, click Add to create the new parameter. 4 In the Parameter Properties dialog:
■ ■ ■ ■

Under Categories, select Windows to associate the parameter with the Windows category. Under Parameter Data, for Name, type Head Detail. For Group parameter under, select Construction. Select Type.

5 Click OK. The new project parameter Head Detail is displayed in the Project Parameters dialog. 6 Using the same method, create 2 more window parameters: Jamb Detail and Sill Detail. 7 In the Project Parameter dialog, click OK. Add project parameters to the schedule 8 In the Project Browser, right-click Building Window Schedule, and click Properties. 9 In the Element Properties dialog, under Other, for Fields, click Edit. 10 On the Fields tab of the Schedule Properties dialog, under Available fields, select the following fields, and click Add to add them to the schedule in order:
■ ■ ■

Head Detail Jamb Detail Sill Detail

11 Use the Move Up control to move the new parameters up in the list, so that they are listed before Comments.

226 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling

12 Click OK twice.

Group headers in the schedule 13 In the schedule, select Head Detail, Jamb Detail, and Sill Detail. TIP To select all 3 headers, click in the Head Detail header, and without releasing the left mouse button, move the cursor over the Jamb Detail and Sill Detail headers. 14 On the Options Bar, click Group. 15 In the grouping field above the detail headers in the schedule, type Window Details. 16 You can add values for the new project parameters directly in the schedule. For example, under Type Mark A, for Head Detail, type 1/A107; for Jamb Detail, type 2/A107; and for Sill Detail, type 3/A107.

17 Save the file.

Adding Project Parameters to a Window Schedule | 227

Creating a Unit-Based Door Schedule with a Filter
In this exercise, you create a unit-based door schedule and use a filter to limit the selection of doors to a single unit. You then hide the column used for the filter, and place the unit-based door schedule on a sheet with the unit plans. Training File Continue using the training file you saved in the previous exercise, m_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Color Diagrams_in_progress.rvt. View Level 1 of the building 1 In the Project Browser, expand Floor Plans, and double-click Unit 18 Plan - Level 1. Create a new door schedule for Unit 18 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar, click Schedule/Quantities. 3 In the New Schedule dialog:
■ ■ ■ ■

Under Category, select Doors. Under Name, type Unit 18 - Door Schedule. Verify that Schedule building components is selected. For Phase, verify that Phase 1 is selected.

4 Click OK. 5 In the Schedule Properties dialog, click the Fields tab. 6 Under Available fields, select the following fields, and click Add to add them to the schedule in order:
■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■

Count Family and Type Head Height Sill Height Width Mark

7 Click the Filter tab, and specify the following values for Filter by:
■ ■ ■

Select Mark in the first field. Select contains in the second field. Type U18 in the third field.

This filter checks each door in the project to see which unit it is associated with, and produces a schedule that includes only the doors in Unit 18. 8 Click the Sorting/Grouping tab, and specify the following options:
■ ■

For Sort by, select Family and Type. Clear Itemize every instance (to group the like door types into one row).

9 Click the Formatting tab. 10 Under Fields, select Mark. 11 Under Field formatting, select Hidden field, and click OK.

228 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling

The schedule includes the count and type for doors in Unit 18 only. The Mark field is used to filter the entries in the schedule, but is not included as a column in the schedule.

Place the schedule on a sheet 12 In the Project Browser, expand Sheets (all), and double-click A102 - Unit 18. 13 In the Project Browser, click Unit 18 - Door Schedule, and drag it to the sheet.

14 Click to place the schedule in the upper left corner of the sheet. 15 On the Design Bar, click Modify. 16 Zoom in to see the details of the door schedule.

Modify the width of a schedule column on the sheet 17 Select the door schedule on the sheet. 18 Select the control at the top of the schedule for the Family and Type column and drag it to the right to expand the column width. The wider column makes it easier to read the door descriptions.

Creating a Unit-Based Door Schedule with a Filter | 229

19 On the Design Bar, click Modify. 20 Save the file.

Creating a Room Schedule
In this exercise, you create a room schedule for the first floor plan. You also add programmed rooms to the schedule for the public spaces in the building. NOTE In some cases in this tutorial, partial schedules are shown for illustration purposes. Training File Continue using the training file you saved in the previous exercise, m_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Color Diagrams_in_progress.rvt. Create a room schedule 1 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, double-click Level 1. Notice that several rooms have been defined in the floor plan. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar, click Schedule/Quantities. TIP If the View tab of the Design Bar is not active, right-click in the Design Bar, and click View. 3 In the New Schedule dialog, under Category, select Rooms, and click OK. Select the fields to display as columns in the room schedule 4 On the Fields tab of the Schedule Properties dialog, under Available fields, select Number, and click Add. The Number field is moved under Scheduled fields. 5 Using the same method, add the following fields to the schedule in order:
■ ■ ■

Name Level Area

6 Click the Appearance tab. 7 Under Text, to the right of Header text, select Bold. 8 Click OK. NOTE The Appearance settings only take effect when the schedule is placed on a drawing sheet. The bold header is not noticeable until you place the schedule on a drawing sheet.

230 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling

For 102. for room 101. 12 Edit the room names in the schedule: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ In the schedule. for Name. For 105. The room Number is U17-46. Creating a Room Schedule | 231 . 101-106. type Corridor. and the Level and Area values are displayed as Not Placed because the room is not placed in the floor plan. and press ENTER. A new row is displayed at the bottom of the schedule. type Storage. The rooms are displayed at the bottom of the list and numbered sequentially. For 104. next to Rows. For 103.Add new rooms to the schedule 9 On the Options Bar. add 5 more rooms. and press ENTER. select Corridor. select Storage. type Building Entry. 10 Edit the number to be 101. 11 Using the same method. click New. and press ENTER.

place rooms from a program list.rvt. Specify style for room separation lines 1 In the Project Browser. expand Lines. 4 Click OK twice. click the bright green swatch. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Color Diagrams_in_progress. In the Line Graphics dialog. you add room separation lines. double-click Level 1. 232 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling . You also change the bounding behavior of walls in the storage areas of the plan.■ For 106. under Projection/Surface. For Room Separation. For Weight. 2 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. 3 Change the display of room separation lines: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ On the Model Categories tab of the Visibility/Graphics dialog. and modify room names. In the Lines field. click Override. click the Color field. and press ENTER. Scheduling Rooms from a Program List In this exercise. type Stair. click the Lines field. and click OK. under Visibility. Training File Continue using the training file you saved in the previous exercise. select 9. 13 Save the file. under Floor Plans. Under Custom colors.

click Room. Place rooms from a program list 10 On the Design Bar. 7 Click to add 2 room separation lines in the corridor at the right side of the drawing. 9 On the Design Bar. click Room Separation.Add room separation lines 5 Zoom in to the center of the building. draw the horizontal line. click Modify. 6 On the Room and Area tab of the Design Bar. Scheduling Rooms from a Program List | 233 . 8 Draw a vertical separation line from the wall endpoint to the new corridor separation line. First.

select 101 Building Entry.Placed rooms are indicated with a crosshair graphic in the drawing. 12 Click to place the room in the newly defined entry area (lower right). select 102 Storage. 14 For Offset. 13 On the Options Bar. 234 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling . 11 On the Options Bar. for Room. for Room. type 2400 mm.

Place 104 in the space to the left of 103. 16 Using the same method. place the following rooms. 19 In the Project Browser. as shown: Scheduling Rooms from a Program List | 235 . click Modify. Place 105 in the lower space to the left of the kitchen. Notice the area values for the Storage rooms in the schedule.15 Click to place the room in the area to the left of Building Entry. double-click Room Schedule. 17 On the Design Bar. under Schedules/Quantities. 20 While pressing CTRL. These values will change after you change the room bounding behavior of walls in the storage areas. double-click Level 1. select the 3 small walls (in or adjacent to the storage areas). Change the room bounding behavior of walls 18 In the Project Browser. under Floor Plans. Place 106 in the space with the stairs (to the left of room 105). as shown: ■ ■ ■ ■ Place 103 in the space above room 101. and zoom in to the Corridor.

24 Open the Room Schedule. under Available fields. 26 In the New Schedule dialog.21 On the Options Bar. Create key schedule 25 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 30 On the Options Bar. 28 In the Schedule Properties dialog. type As Selected. under Category. The Room Style Schedule displays without data. and click OK. and click Add. type Units. 31 For Key Name. 22 In the Element Properties dialog. click New. (Element Properties). select Base Finish. Floor Finish. click Modify. 236 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling . clear Room Bounding. under Constraints. 29 Click OK to create the new room style schedule. select Rooms. and click OK. and Wall Finish. for Rows. click 23 On the Design Bar. 27 Select Schedule keys. click Schedule/Quantities. Notice that the area for the storage rooms has increased as a result of the change in the room bounding behavior of the walls. while pressing CTRL. and for all 3 finishes.

32 Using the same method. click Check None. 40 Zoom to the drawing extents. for Room Style. 35 In the Schedule Properties dialog. under Schedules/Quantities. 43 In the Filter dialog. The Room Style column is added to the Room Schedule. and click Properties. All rooms are selected in the floor plan. select Rooms. click (Element Properties). for Room Style. 45 In the Element Properties dialog. select Units. and click OK. 33 In the Project Browser. 44 On the Options Bar. 34 In the Element Properties dialog. and click Add. 41 Draw a selection box around floor plan. and click OK. 37 Open the Room Schedule. add 2 more key names: Service and Public. for Available fields. under Identity Data. right-click Room Schedule. 38 Under U17-8. for Fields. under Floor Plans. 36 Click OK twice. double-click Level 1. select Room Style. 42 On the Options Bar. click (Filter Selection). Scheduling Rooms from a Program List | 237 . under Other. click Edit. select Units. Specify the Room Style for Level 1 rooms 39 In the Project Browser.

and apply it to the Level 1 view. 48 Save the file. (Duplicate). 103. for Color. 9 In the Project Browser. click 5 For Title. under Views (all). Creating a Room Color Diagram In this exercise. 3 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog. right-click Level 1. type Room Type. 47 Edit the Room Style for rooms 101 through 106: ■ ■ For rooms 101. at the warning prompt. Notice that the Room Style is Units for all rooms on Level 1. Training File Continue using the training file you saved in the previous exercise. under Graphics. All rooms on Level 1 now have the room style defined. for Name. Create a room color scheme 1 In the Project Browser.rvt. under Floor Plans. click OK. 4 In the New color scheme dialog. 238 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling . 2 Click Settings menu ➤ Color Fill Schemes. 10 In the Element Properties dialog. 8 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog. type Room Type. select Room Style. You also edit the colors used in the color scheme and modify the properties of the color scheme legend. click OK. select Service. click the Color Scheme field. The Room Style specification will be used later to determine color fill in a room color diagram. 7 Because you are creating a new color scheme. and double-click Level 1. expand Floor Plans. and click Properties. and 106. For rooms 102 and 105. and click OK. 104. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Color Diagrams_in_progress.46 Open the Room Schedule. select Public. you create a room color scheme (based on the type of the rooms in the floor plan). 6 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog.

in the first row of the Scheme Definition table (none). 19 On the Options Bar. select the color legend. Change the fill colors applied to the rooms 18 In the drawing area. 16 Click in the lower right of the drawing area to place the legend. Add a color scheme legend 15 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. expand Lines. click Edit. under Schemes. 13 In the Visibility/Graphics Overrides dialog. 14 Click OK twice. clear Visible. When you move the cursor over the drawing area. click Color Scheme Legend. for Visibility/Graphics Overrides. 20 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog. click Modify. 21 In the second row of the table (Public). under Visibility. Creating a Room Color Diagram | 239 . 17 On the Design Bar. click the value in the Color column. and clear Room Separation. and click OK. click Edit Color Scheme. a legend displays at the tip of the cursor. 12 In the Element Properties dialog. select Room Type.11 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog.

select blue. 30 On the Design Bar. click Modify. under Graphics. type 5 mm. 27 In the Type Properties dialog. and click OK. 28 Under Title Text. on the Options Bar. type 25 mm. Specify properties for the legend colors and title 25 With the legend still selected. 240 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling . 24 Click OK. change the colors for Service and Units to cyan and gray. 23 Using the same method. 29 Click OK twice.22 In the Color dialog. respectively. for Size. (Element Properties). under Custom color. click Edit/New. click 26 In the Element Properties dialog. for Swatch Width.

33 In the Element Properties dialog. Turn on the visibility of rooms in the building section view 32 In the Project Browser. 38 In the Choose Space Type and Color Scheme dialog. for Visibility/Graphics Overrides. 35 Click OK twice. select Room Type. 34 On the Model Categories tab of the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog. select Rooms.Create a section color diagram 31 In the Project Browser. under Visibility. click Edit. Calculation of room volumes can affect project performance. position the legend horizontally across the bottom of the section view. 39 Using the grip at the bottom of the legend. Creating a Room Color Diagram | 241 . under Sections. under Sections. under Graphics. the legend displays at the tip of the cursor. As you move the cursor over the drawing area. right-click Building Section. and click OK. and select Properties. for Color Scheme. Place the color scheme legend on the section 36 On the Room and Area tab of the Design Bar. double-click Building Section. volume computations must be enabled from Settings menu ➤ Area and Volume Computations. click Color Scheme Legend. 37 Click to place the legend on the drawing. NOTE In order for color fills to be displayed in section.

41 On the Options Bar. for Room Style. under Identity Data. 42 In the Filter dialog. 44 In the Element Properties dialog. 45 While pressing CTRL. select Rooms. under Identity Data. and click OK. 242 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling . click Check None. select Units. for Room Style. 46 Click . click Assign all rooms the Units room style 43 On the Options Bar. select all the rooms in the stairwell. and click OK. click . and the room to the right of the stair on level 1 (Corridor 104). 47 In the Element Properties dialog. (Filter Selection). and click OK. select Public.40 Draw a selection box around the entire drawing.

and click OK. 49 In the Element Properties dialog. 52 In the Room Style Schedule. type Suites. Add suites as a new room style in the Room Style Schedule 50 In the Project Browser. Creating a Room Color Diagram | 243 . Assign the Suites room style to all rooms on levels 3 and 4 53 Open the Building Section. under Identity Data. double-click Room Style Schedule. excluding the stairwell spaces. select all the rooms on levels 3 and 4. click New. under Schedules/Quantities. and click . under Key Name for the new row.Assign the penthouse room the service room style 48 Select the penthouse. select Service. TIP You may need to use TAB to select the room in the upper right with the entertainment center. for Rows. for Room Style. 54 While pressing CTRL. 51 On the Options Bar.

A new Suites key is added to the color scheme legend.55 Click . for Room Style. Change room heights 60 In the drawing area. select Suites. select Areas and Volumes. under Identity Data. 61 Drag the top Control grip above the bounding roof. 244 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling . under Volume Computations. The color fill extends to the roof. 59 Under Room Area Computation. but not beyond it. verify that At wall finish is selected. and click OK. Use volume calculations to control color fills 57 Click Settings menu ➤ Area and Volume Computations. 56 In the Element Properties dialog. The color fill will extend to the roof. and click OK. 58 In the Area and Volume Computations dialog. 62 Repeat this process for all rooms that are bounded by the sloping roof: the remaining suites and the public stairs on the top floor. select the room on the left side of the top floor.

0. select the stairwell room. 67 On the first level. 70 For Limit Offset. . for Upper Limit. type -254 mm. 64 In the Element Properties dialog. select Loft. and the living room. under Constraints. under Constraints. click Modify. 69 In the Element Properties dialog. the dining room. 68 Click . type 0. 72 On the Design Bar. for Upper Limit. select the public room next to the stairs (Corridor 104). Creating a Room Color Diagram | 245 . select Level 2. 71 Click OK.Assign the correct heights to the rooms on the first level 63 On the first level. and click 65 For Limit Offset. 66 Click OK.

73 Save the file. you have already determined the roof configuration for the building. You then add formulas to the material takeoff to produce cost estimates. under 3D Views. You learn to change the roof family type and create a material takeoff schedule for the roofing materials. Create a material takeoff 1 In the Project Browser. Creating a Material Takeoff In this exercise. Training File Continue using the training file you saved in the previous exercise. 246 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling .rvt. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Color Diagrams_in_progress. double-click {3D}.

Insulation on Plywood Deck . select Family and Type. select Roofs. Creating a Material Takeoff | 247 . For Then by.2 Zoom in to the roof area of the building. under Category.EPDM. select Material: Description. 5 On the Design Bar. add Material: Description and Material: Area to the Scheduled fields. 4 In the Type Selector. select Basic Roof : Wood Joist . Clear Itemize every instance. 8 On the Fields tab of the Material Takeoff Properties dialog. and click Add. 10 On the Sorting/Grouping tab: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Sort by. select the roof of the building and the smaller roof for the elevator penthouse. 6 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Material Takeoff. Select Grand totals. and click OK. click Family and Type. 3 While pressing CTRL. under Available fields. 9 Using the same method. click Modify. 7 In the New Material Takeoff dialog.

TIP Double-click the column dividers to expand the columns to fit the text. select Material: Area. The Roof Material Takeoff Schedule displays. 16 In the Material Takeoff Properties dialog. under Other. 17 Click Calculated Value. right-click Roof Material Takeoff. 15 In the Element Properties dialog. Add cost information and a formula to calculate estimated cost 14 In the Project Browser. under Available fields. and click OK twice. select Material: Cost. type Material: Area*Material: Cost /(1000mm^2). click the Formatting tab. 22 In the Material Takeoff Properties dialog. select Calculate totals. Under Field formatting. and under Fields. 18 In the Calculated Value dialog. 12 Click OK. for Fields. for Material: Cost. and click Add. 24 In the Roof Material Takeoff. 23 For Field formatting. click Edit. type Estimated Cost. and click Properties. select Calculate totals. 20 For Formula.40 50. 13 Expand the column widths to see all of the information. click Estimated Cost. for Name. 19 For Type. type the following values: Material: Description EPDM Plywood Rigid Insulation Material: Cost 16 13. 21 Click OK. The /(1000mm^2) is required to remove the formatting of the fields so that the cost estimate value can be calculated.80 248 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling .11 On the Formatting tab: ■ ■ Under Fields. select Currency.

Digit grouping. Adding shared parameters to a family allows you to create a tag and schedule to track this specific information. and are defined and stored in an external file. 28 For Unit symbol.35 The Estimated cost is calculated. 26 In the Project Units dialog. tag the line. The cost fields are formatted correctly. Their values may also be aggregated and reported within Revit Architecture multi-category schedules. You draw a travel path line. for Rounding. ensuring consistency across families and projects. regardless of category. for Currency. Add currency formatting to the schedule 25 Click Settings menu ➤ Project Units. 30 Click OK twice.Material: Description Wood Joist Material: Cost 5. creating a generic tag to tag the family. and schedule the total distance of each path. you create an exiting plan for the building. you learn how to use shared parameters to define additional parameters that are not included in predefined instance and type parameters. can be used for any number-based parameter. not just for currency. either within family components or within the project template. In this lesson. 29 Select Use digit grouping. adding the shared parameters to a family. 27 In the Format dialog. 31 Save the file. Scheduling Shared Parameters In this lesson. An example of the use of shared parameters is the need to add specific parameters to a family component for scheduling and tagging when those parameters are not present by default. click the Format value. This lesson demonstrates the solution for this situation and covers the process of setting up shared parameters. Creating a Shared Parameter File In this exercise. which inserts commas after every three digits. you create a shared parameter file. Scheduling Shared Parameters | 249 . select $. and reporting the shared parameters. verify that 2 decimal places is selected. These shared parameters can be added to any family.

10 In the Parameter Properties dialog. for File name. 7 Under Parameters. 3 In the Edit Shared Parameters dialog. 12 Click File menu ➤ Save As. 250 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling .rvt. 2 Click File menu ➤ Shared Parameters. and click Save. for Name. under Floor Plans. click Create. double-click Exiting Plan-Level 1. and click OK. click Training Files. for Name. 4 In the left pane of the Create Shared Parameter File dialog. type Travel Distance. type Exiting. under Groups. 6 In the New Parameter Group dialog. 11 Click OK twice.rvt.txt. for Name. 8 In the Parameter Properties dialog. type OfficeStandardsParameters. click New. click New. select Length. In the left pane of the Open dialog. NOTE Shared parameter files are typically stored at a network location for use in all projects. type Path ID. 9 Under Parameters.Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. and save the exercise file as m_Freighthouse_Flats-Shared Parameters_in_progress. click Training Files. for Type of Parameter. and click OK. and open Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Shared Parameters. click New. 5 In the Edit Shared Parameters dialog. 1 In the Project Browser.

rvt. 1 Click File menu ➤ Open. Adding Shared Parameters to a Family | 251 . 5 In the Parameter Properties dialog. and open Metric\Families\Annotations\M_Travel Line.rfa. 3 On the Design Bar. and click Select. under Parameters. add Travel Distance as a shared parameter. following the equals symbol (=). click Load into Projects. If you have multiple projects open. select Shared parameter.rvt. 15 If necessary. type Length. 12 In the Family Types dialog. for Travel Distance Formula. and click OK. group it under Dimensions. 7 In the Parameter Properties dialog. Create a tag using shared parameters 16 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Annotation Symbol.Adding Shared Parameters to a Family In this exercise. 8 Select Instance. 2 In the Left pane of the Open dialog. click Add. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Shared Parameters_in_progress. verify that Parameter group is Exiting and that Path ID is selected. click Family Types. select Constraints. 13 Click Apply. Click Training Files. and click OK. The Family Types dialog displays the parameters that are currently available for this family category. and click OK. 6 In the Shared Parameters dialog. Training File Continue using the training file you saved in the previous exercise. 4 In the Family Types dialog. under Dimensions. 10 Using the same method. under Parameters. and select Instance. select m_Freighthouse_Flats-Shared Parameters_in_progress. click Add. in the Load into Projects dialog. for Group parameter under. under Parameter Type. you add the shared parameters you created to a family file. otherwise the family loads into the current project. 9 In the Family Types dialog. and click OK. the Load into Projects dialog displays for you to select the project. under Parameter Data. You then create a generic tag to tag the family. 14 On the Design Bar. 11 Click OK.

24 Click OK twice. 22 In the Parameter Properties dialog. click Label.17 In the left pane of the New Annotation Symbol dialog. and click OK. click Select. under Category Parameters. 23 In the Shared Parameters dialog. click Label. 20 Click the intersection of the reference planes. (Add 26 On the Design Bar. 252 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling . and use the same method to select the Path ID parameter. and open Metric\Templates\M_Generic Tag.rft. 27 Click above the intersection of the reference planes. under Parameters. 18 Zoom in to the intersection of the reference planes. select Travel Distance. 25 In the Edit Label dialog. click Training Files. 21 In the Edit Label dialog. click parameter(s) to label). select Travel Distance. click (Add Parameter). 19 On the Design Bar.

type M_Travel Distance Tag. and click Save. 33 On the Design Bar. verify that m_Freighthouse_Flats-Shared Parameters_in_Progress. click Modify. 29 In the drawing window. and click OK. 31 Click File ➤ Save As. and press DELETE. Adding Shared Parameters to a Family | 253 . 30 Select the Note in the upper left area of the drawing window. for File Name.28 On the Design Bar. 32 In the Save As dialog. so that it is positioned just above Travel Distance. select Path ID. and move it down. click Load into Projects.rfa.rvt is selected. 35 Save the file. 34 On the Load into Projects dialog.

select Chain. and click in the center of the corridor. After the lines are tagged. 4 On the Options Bar. and Scheduling a Family with Shared Parameters In this exercise. above the exterior door as shown. Training File Continue using the training file you saved in the previous exercise. 6 Move the cursor to the right. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Shared Parameters_in_progress. 5 Specify a start point for the path at the left end of the corridor as shown. 254 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling . you place the travel line family in the Level 1 and Level 2 exiting plans.Placing. You then tag the travel lines and give them a path ID. under Floor Plans. you create a schedule that totals the travel distances in each exiting plan for each path ID. Create Level 1 exiting travel path 1 In the Project Browser. double-click Exiting Plan . 3 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 2 Zoom in to the corridor.Tagging.rvt.Level 1. click Component.

and click outside of the building. through the door. 9 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. and click (Element Properties). 14 In the Element Properties dialog. click Modify. Placing. verify that Chain is selected. 11 Select each of the travel path lines. and click to specify the first segment of the path as shown. 13 While pressing CTRL. 17 On the Options Bar. and Scheduling a Family with Shared Parameters | 255 . click Modify. under Constraints. and click OK. 10 On the Options Bar.Level 2. for Path ID.7 Move the cursor down. select the 2 dashed travel lines. 18 Click in the horizontal corridor below the door on the right side of the floor plan. Create Level 2 exiting travel path 15 In the Project Browser. move the cursor near the right corner. under Floor Plans. double click Exiting Plan .Tagging. 16 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 8 On the Design Bar. 12 On the Design Bar. clear Leader. type 1-1. click Component. click Tag ➤ By Category.

click Component. and click. click Modify. move the cursor to the left. 22 Click at the starting point of the previous path. 20 On the Design Bar. 21 On the Design Bar.19 Move the cursor up through the door. and click above the door to the stair. 256 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling . 23 Move the cursor down. and click in the stair.

and Scheduling a Family with Shared Parameters | 257 . click Modify. select the 2 dashed travel lines for the left exit path. for Path ID. Placing. click Modify. . Create a schedule to total the paths on each plan 31 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Schedule/Quantities. type Level 1 Exit Distance. under Constraints. type 2-1. click Tag ➤ By Category. 26 Select each of the travel path lines. and click 29 In the Element Properties dialog. 32 In the New Schedule dialog. 30 Using the same method. 25 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. and click OK. 27 On the Design Bar. and click OK. specify the Path ID for the right exit path to 2-2.24 On the Design Bar. verify that <Multi-Category> is selected. under Category. 28 While pressing CTRL. 33 For Name.Tagging.

in the first field. select Calculate totals. 38 For Sort by. and under Field formatting. 43 In the Project Browser. 46 In the Project Browser. 45 In the Rename View dialog. and click Add. right-click Level 2 Exit Distance. and click OK. type 1-. for Filter by. type 2-. 50 Save the file. while pressing CTRL. right-click Copy of Level 1 Exit Distance. 39 Clear Itemize every instance. and open Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Uni-Format. for Filter. under Available fields. 42 Click OK. in the third field. The Level 2 Exit Distance schedule displays. 44 In the Project Browser. right-click Level 1 Exit Distance. select Path ID. Scheduling Uniformat Assembly Codes In this lesson. The Level 1 Exit Distance schedule displays. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 35 Click the Filter tab. under Schedules/Quantities. 40 Click the Formatting tab.rvt. 49 Click OK twice. select contains. 258 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling . 36 For Filter by. and in the third field. select Path ID. in the second field. click Edit.34 On the Fields tab of the Schedule Properties dialog. under Other. Scheduling Uniformat Assembly Codes and Descriptions In this exercise. 37 Click the Sorting/Grouping tab. select Travel Distance. you create a wall schedule that includes columns for the Uniformat Assembly Codes and assembly descriptions of the scheduled walls. you schedule Uniformat Assembly Codes as they are applied to Revit Architecture components. 47 In the Element Properties dialog. type Level 2 Exit Distance. and click Properties. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. 48 In the Schedule Properties dialog. select Path ID and Travel Distance. click Training Files. 41 Under Fields. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. and click Rename.

and select C1010145 . click Schedule/Quantities. 3 In the Schedule Properties dialog. expand the Assembly Description column to see the description. right-click the Design Bar.Fixed Partitions. 10 In the schedule. 8 In the Choose Assembly Code dialog. and click Properties. expand C . under Identity Data. Assign an assembly code to a wall type in the project 6 In the Project Browser. 7 In the Type Properties dialog. TIP If the View tab of the Design Bar is not active. for Assembly Code. and click View. and click OK. expand Families ➤ Walls ➤ Basic Wall.Partitions ➤ C1010100 . click the Fields tab. under Categories. 2 In the New Schedule dialog.Partitions .152 mm. right-click Generic . 9 Click OK twice. select the following fields. Scheduling Uniformat Assembly Codes and Descriptions | 259 . and click . 4 Under Available fields. and click Add to add them to the schedule in order: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Area Volume Width Length Assembly Code Assembly Description 5 Click OK to complete the schedule. click the Value field.Drywall w/ Metal Stud.Interiors ➤ C10 . select Walls.Create a wall schedule 1 On the View tab of the Design Bar.Interior Construction ➤ C1010 .

5 Type RevitDSN for the name of the file data source.rvt. 4 In the Create New Data Source dialog. click Export ➤ ODBC Database.mdb. and click Next. In the left pane of the Open dialog. under Database. 3 Click New. click Training Files. 2 In the Select Data Source dialog. click OK. The process that you use to export the database is similar for any other ODBC-compliant database.mdb). 8 In the New Database dialog. 6 Click Finish. for Database Name.11 Close the exercise file. 7 In the ODBC Microsoft Access Setup dialog. Exporting Project Information with ODBC In this lesson. click the File Data Source tab. and click OK to create the database. and open Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Uni-Format. Exporting Schedule Information to Microsoft Access In this exercise. 1 On the File menu. 11 Click OK 3 times. 260 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling . you learn how to export project information into a Microsoft® Access 2000 database. 9 Under Directories. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. select the Microsoft Access Driver (*. type Revit_Project. select a location for the database file. 10 When the confirmation dialog displays. the database display may be different than that shown. NOTE Depending on your version of Microsoft Access. click Create. 12 Open the database in Microsoft Access. and click Next. you learn how to export project information to an ODBC (Open DataBase Connectivity) compatible database.

These parameters are also exported and contain the ID of the key element. Additionally. tables that list instances only are created for levels and rooms because these categories do not have types. Each key schedule gives elements in its category a new parameter.Revit Architecture creates 2 tables for the following categories of elements (see below): one that lists all of the element instances in a project and one that lists all of the element types in a project. The table of types includes an Assembly Code column that references the Assembly Codes table. Elements IDs are also used to establish relationships between elements in different tables. In addition to the tables for instances and types in a category. and some instance tables include a RoomId column containing the ID of the room that the instance is in. Exporting Schedule Information to Microsoft Access | 261 . For example. so that each table of elements includes an Id column. One final table is also exported: Assembly Codes. which is used for choosing one of the keys from the key schedule. A unique element ID is used to identify exported elements. a table is also created for each key schedule in a project. in addition to the Id column. 13 Close the exercise file. instance tables include a TypeId column containing the ID of the instance’s type. as long as the category is one of the categories that Revit Architecture exports. The columns of the table are Assembly Code and Assembly Description. The exported columns are the same as the columns in the key schedule. This table contains one row for each Uniformat Assembly Code.

262 .

You can change the base elevation without changing the elevation value of every other level in the project. You accomplish this in Revit Architecture by defining levels as either project or shared levels. you learn how to relocate the base elevation of a project. and how to annotate and dimension your Revit Architecture 2009 projects. or you can change the base elevation and add its value to the levels above it. 263 .Annotating and Dimensioning 6 In this tutorial. as the base elevation of most projects is rarely at 0 mm. Changing the Base Elevation of a Project In this lesson. you learn how to change the base elevation of a project.

Project levels report elevation relative to other levels in the project

264 | Chapter 6 Annotating and Dimensioning

Shared levels report elevation relative to the base height

Relocating a Project
In this exercise, you relocate the base elevation of a building from 0 m to 10000 m. After you define the building levels as shared and relocate the project, the height of the elevations above Level 1 report height relative to Level 1.

Relocating a Project | 265

Training File
■ ■

Click File menu ➤ Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open m_Freighthouse_Flats-Anno_Dim.rvt.

Define Level 1 as a shared level 1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (all), expand Elevations (Building Elevation), and double-click South. Level 1 displays an elevation value of 0 mm. The levels in the project are not shared, so changing the height Level 1 would change it only in relation to the other levels in the project.

266 | Chapter 6 Annotating and Dimensioning

2 Select the Level 1 line to display it as red. 3 On the Options Bar, click (Element Properties).

4 In the Element Properties dialog, click Edit/New. In order for the levels to report height relative to the new base elevation after the project is relocated, you must set the Elevation Base parameter to Shared. If you did that now, the parameter for all the levels in the project would change. However, to better demonstrate how shared levels work, only the Elevation Base parameter of Level 1 is shared at this time, and you create a new shared level type for only Level 1. 5 In the Type Properties dialog:
■ ■ ■

Click Duplicate. In the Name dialog, type 8 mm Head - Shared Elevation, and click OK. Under Constraints, for Elevation Base, select Shared.

6 Click OK twice. Relocate the project 7 Click Tools menu ➤ Project Position/Orientation ➤ Relocate this Project. 8 Select the Level 1 line. By selecting the Level 1 line, you specify the point (0 mm) from which you want to relocate the project. 9 Move the cursor above the elevation line, type 10000 mm, and press ENTER. By typing 10000 mm in this step, you specify the new location of the project. 10 On the View menu, click Zoom ➤ Zoom All To Fit. The south elevation is displayed. The base elevation now reads 10000 mm. The elevation of the other levels remains the same.

Relocating a Project | 267

Define the remaining project levels as shared 11 Select the Loft level line. 12 In the Type Selector, select Level : 8 mm Head - Shared Elevation. 13 On the Design Bar, click Modify. The reported value of the Loft level changes to take the new base elevation value into consideration.

14 In the Project Browser, under Elevations, double-click North. The changes in elevation have propagated to this view, as well as other views of the building model.

268 | Chapter 6 Annotating and Dimensioning

15 Define the remaining levels as shared:
■ ■ ■

While pressing CTRL, select Levels 2-4, the Penthouse level, and the Roof Plan level. In the Type Selector, select Level : 8 mm Head - Shared Elevation. On the Design Bar, click Modify. All the building levels now report elevations relative to the base elevation.

Relocating a Project | 269

16 If you want to save your changes, click File menu ➤ Save As, and save the exercise file with a unique name. 17 Proceed to the next lesson, Dimensioning on page 270.

Dimensioning
In this lesson, you learn how to create permanent dimensions to control and document your building models. In Revit Architecture, there are 2 types of dimensions: temporary and permanent. Temporary dimensions display automatically when you create and insert components. Permanent dimensions must be explicitly created, except when you sketch profiles to complete families. In this case, permanent dimensions are created automatically, although you must turn on their visibility to view them.

Creating Dimensions
In this exercise, you learn how to use dimensioning tools and constraints in Revit Architecture to dimension and space planter boxes on the north side of the building. You place linear, multi-segmented, radial, and angular dimensions, and learn to work with dimensioning constraints to control placement of elements in the model.

270 | Chapter 6 Annotating and Dimensioning

Linear and multi-segmented dimensions

Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise, Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Anno_Dim.rvt Place an overall linear dimension 1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (all), expand Floor Plans, and double-click Level 1.

2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar, click Dimension. The default dimensioning options display on the Options Bar. By default, dimensions are aligned, snap to wall centerlines, and are created by selecting individual reference points.

3 Move the cursor over the curtain wall on the top left side of the view, and when a blue dashed line displays along the left side of the curtain wall, select it.

Creating Dimensions | 271

4 Move the cursor over the curtain wall on the top right side of the view, and when a blue dashed line displays along the right side of the curtain wall, select it.

5 Move the cursor above the view, and click to place the dimension.

272 | Chapter 6 Annotating and Dimensioning

6 Click the lock that displays on the dimension string to lock the dimension. The lock displays as locked, indicating that you cannot change the distance between the curtain walls without first unlocking the dimension. Only aligned and angular permanent dimensions can be constrained in this way.

7 On the Design Bar, click Modify. Place a multi-segmented dimension 8 On the Design Bar, click Dimension. 9 Select the left side of the left curtain wall as you did in a previous step, and move the cursor over the left endpoint of the first planter to the right. 10 Press TAB until the left endpoint of the planter displays, and select it. 11 Using the same method, select the right endpoint of the planter.

Creating Dimensions | 273

12 On the Options Bar, for Prefer, select Wall Faces. 13 Move the cursor to the planter on the right, and select its left exterior face.

14 Move the cursor to the right, and continue to select the endpoints and faces of the planters. 15 After you select the reference points on the final planter, select the right side of the curtain wall. 16 Move the cursor up, above the plan view of the building, but below the first dimension that you placed, and click to place the multi-segmented dimension.

Make the dimension segments equal to space the planters at equal distances 17 With the multi-segmented dimension selected, click to make all the dimension segments equal and reposition the planters equal distances apart from one another.

18 On the Basics tab, click Modify.

274 | Chapter 6 Annotating and Dimensioning

Create a baseline dimension style 19 Select the dimension string, and on the Options Bar, click 20 In the Element Properties dialog, click Edit/New. 21 In the Type Properties dialog, click Duplicate. 22 In the Name dialog, enter Linear - 2.5 mm Arial - Baseline, and click OK. 23 In the Type Properties dialog, under Graphics, for Dimension String Type, select Baseline. Create an ordinate dimension style 24 In the Type Properties dialog, click Duplicate. 25 In the Name dialog, enter Linear - 2.5 mm Arial - Ordinate, and click OK. 26 In the Type Properties dialog, for Dimension String Type, select Ordinate. 27 Click OK twice. View and apply the new dimension styles 28 Zoom in to the dimension string. The dimensions start from 0 mm and increase moving away from the origin. .

29 Select the dimension string, and in the Type Selector, select Linear - 2.5 mm Arial - Baseline. The dimensions are stacked and measure from the same baseline.

Creating Dimensions | 275

30 In the Type Selector, select Linear - 2.5 mm Arial to return to the original dimension style. Add text below a permanent dimension You can add supplemental text above, below, to the left, or to the right of a permanent dimension value. 31 Click the dimension value to which you want to add text, for example Text dialog displays. 33 Under Text Fields, for Below, enter Planter. 34 Click OK. . The Dimension

32 In the Dimension Text dialog, under Dimension Value, verify that Use Actual Value is selected.

35 On the Design Bar, click Modify. Place a radial dimension with a Typ. suffix 36 Zoom to the planter between grid lines 3 and 4.

276 | Chapter 6 Annotating and Dimensioning

37 On the Design Bar, click Dimension. 38 On the Options Bar:
■ ■

Click

(Radial).

For Prefer, select Wall faces.

39 Move the cursor over the left exterior curved face of the planter until it highlights, and select it. 40 Move the cursor outside the wall, and specify a point to place the dimension. 41 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar, click Modify.

42 Select the radial dimension. 43 Select the blue square grip that displays under the dimension value and drag it slightly up and to the right.

44 With the dimension still selected, click the dimension text. 45 In the Dimension Text dialog, for Suffix, type Typ., and click OK. 46 On the Basics tab, click Modify.

Creating Dimensions | 277

Place an angular dimension 47 Zoom to the planter near grid line 5.

48 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar, click Dimension. 49 On the Options Bar:
■ ■

Click

(Angular).

For Prefer, verify that Wall faces is selected.

50 Select the horizontal line. This line is the edge of a mass that represents the neighboring building.

278 | Chapter 6 Annotating and Dimensioning

51 Select the left exterior face of the planter.

52 Move the cursor to the left to resize the dimension arc, and click to place the dimension. 53 On the Basics tab, click Modify.

54 Proceed to the next exercise, Creating Automatic Wall Dimensions on page 279.

Creating Automatic Wall Dimensions
In this exercise, you learn to automatically dimension a linear wall and its openings (windows) on the Level 3 floor plan of the building. When you dimension the wall, you select only the wall, instead of the wall and each individual opening reference point. This automatic dimensioning option provides a convenient way to quickly dimension walls with multiple openings.

Creating Automatic Wall Dimensions | 279

Automatic wall dimension

Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise, Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Anno_Dim.rvt Open the Level 3 floor plan view 1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (all), expand Floor Plans, and double-click Level 3. You will dimension the short bottom horizontal wall that includes 3 windows.

Select automatic dimensioning options 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar, click Dimension. 3 On the Options Bar:
■ ■ ■

For Prefer, select Wall centerlines. For Pick, select Entire Walls. Click Options.

4 In the Auto Dimension Options dialog:

Under Select references, select Openings, and select Widths.

280 | Chapter 6 Annotating and Dimensioning

Click OK. These options ensure that the wall dimension includes the openings, and that the opening widths are referenced in the overall dimension string.

Place the dimension 5 Select the bottom exterior wall.

6 Move the cursor down below the plan view, and click to place the automatic dimension string.

7 On the Basics tab, click Modify.

8 Proceed to the next exercise, Controlling Witness Lines on page 281.

Controlling Witness Lines
In this exercise, you learn to override dimension witness line settings as you place dimensions, and learn how to change the location of witness lines after you place dimensions. When you place dimensions, you specify their origin on the Options Bar. However, in some cases, you may need to override their settings on an instance basis. For example, for a multi-segmented dimension, you may want to locate the two outermost witness lines on the exterior face of each wall, where the witness lines referring to interior walls would be located on the centerline of each wall. Training File

Controlling Witness Lines | 281

Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise, Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Anno_Dim.rvt Override default dimension witness lines 1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (all), expand Floor Plans, and double-click Level 1. 2 Zoom to the planter on which you placed a radial dimension.

3 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar, click Dimension. 4 On the Options Bar:
■ ■

For Prefer, verify Wall centerlines is selected. For Pick, select Individual References.

5 Move the cursor over the left side of the planter.

6 Press TAB to cycle through the selection options until the left face of the planter highlights, and select it.

282 | Chapter 6 Annotating and Dimensioning

7 Using the same method, select the right edge of the planter, move the cursor down, and click to place the dimension.

8 Move the cursor over the bottom of the planter on which you placed the angular dimension. 9 Press TAB until the bottom left endpoint is highlighted, and select it.

10 Using the same method, select the bottom right endpoint. 11 Move the cursor down, and specify a point to place the dimension.

Controlling Witness Lines | 283

Dimension the partition walls to centerlines 12 On the Basics tab, click Dimension. 13 On the Options Bar, for Prefer, select Wall centerlines. 14 Move the cursor over the left partition wall in the top left corner of the plan, and when the wall centerline highlights, select it.

284 | Chapter 6 Annotating and Dimensioning

15 Moving the cursor to the right, select the centerline of each of the 6 remaining partition walls, and click to place the dimension. 16 On the Design Bar, click Modify. Adjust the witness line location on the end dimensions to align them to the faces of wall 17 Select the dimension that you just placed, and zoom in on the right end of the dimension. 18 While pressing SHIFT, select the green grip that displays in the middle of the tick mark, and drag the dimension down the wall.

Controlling Witness Lines | 285

19 Release SHIFT, select the top blue grip and drag it up to create a witness line gap.

20 Click the blue middle grip, drag it to the right, and press TAB until the dimension aligns with the outer face of the partition wall.

21 Zoom to the partition wall on the left side of the plan, and using the same methods, create a witness line gap and align the dimension to the outer left face of the wall. 22 On the Basics tab, click Modify. 23 Proceed to the next exercise, Creating an Office Standard Dimension Type from Existing Dimensions on page 286.

Creating an Office Standard Dimension Type from Existing Dimensions
In this exercise, you learn how to duplicate the dimension family type of dimension on the floor plan and then modify its parameters to create an office standard dimension style. After you create the new family type, you change the dimension tick mark, text font, and text size parameters to create dimensions that better conform to your office standards.

286 | Chapter 6 Annotating and Dimensioning

Angular and linear dimensions with office standard text and arrows

Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise, Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Anno_Dim.rvt Duplicate an existing dimension type 1 On the Level 1 floor plan, zoom to the planter between grid lines 3 and 4, and select the lower dimension.

2 Click

(Element Properties).

3 In the Element Properties dialog, click Edit/New. 4 In the Type Properties dialog, click Duplicate. 5 In the Name dialog, type Office Standard, and click OK. Modify the parameters of the new Office Standard type 6 In the Type Properties dialog:
■ ■

Under Graphics, for Tick Mark, select Arrow 30 Degree. Under Text, for Text Size, type 3.2 mm.

Creating an Office Standard Dimension Type from Existing Dimensions | 287

For Text Font, select CityBlueprint. NOTE Fonts that are available in this list are the Windows fonts installed on your system. If CityBlueprint does not display in the list, select another font.

Click OK twice.

7 On the Basics tab, click Modify. The dimension that you selected previously now displays the new Office Standard family type.

8 Move the cursor to the planter on the right, and select the bottom dimension.

9 In the Type Selector, select Linear Dimension Style: Office Standard. 10 On the Basics tab, click Modify.

288 | Chapter 6 Annotating and Dimensioning

11 Using the same method, select the angular dimension on the planter, create a new angular dimension type, and modify it to use the office standard parameters.

12 Proceed to the next lesson, Creating Text Annotation on page 289.

Creating Text Annotation
In this lesson, you add text notes on the Level 1 floor plan of the building. You create a new office standard text note type by duplicating the family type of a note on the floor plan. You learn how to change the text font and size of text notes, and how to add leaders to the text notes.

Creating Text Annotation | 289

Adding Text Notes to the Floor Plan
In this exercise, you add text notes to the Level 1 floor plan. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise, Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Anno_Dim.rvt Add a text note 1 On the Level 1 floor plan, zoom to the planter near grid line 5.

2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar, click Text. 3 On the Options Bar, for Leader, click (None).

4 Move the cursor above grid line 4, but below the upper dimension string, and click and drag to create a text box.

290 | Chapter 6 Annotating and Dimensioning

5 In the text box, type EXISTING BUILDING.

Create a new text note family type by duplicating the existing type 6 On the Design Bar, click Modify. 7 Select the text box, and click .

8 In the Element Properties dialog box, click Edit/New. 9 In the Type Properties dialog, click Duplicate. 10 In the Name dialog box, type 6 mm Arial Notes, and click OK. 11 Under Text, for Text Size, type 6 mm, and click OK. 12 In the Element Properties dialog, under Graphics, select Arc Leaders, and click OK.

Adding Text Notes to the Floor Plan | 291

You may have to move the text box to avoid overlapping other elements on the floor plan. If so, select and drag the top left blue symbol to relocate the text box.

Create a text box with leaders 13 On the Design Bar, click Text. 14 Create another text box to the right of grid line 4, and type Planting Bed. 15 On the Design Bar, click Modify.

16 Select the Planting Bed text box.

292 | Chapter 6 Annotating and Dimensioning

17 On the Options Bar:

Click (Add Right Arc Leader). A downward pointing leader displays on the right side of the Planting Bed text box. Click (Add Left Arc Leader). Another leader displays on the left side of the Planting Bed text box.

Reposition the leaders 18 Select the blue grip at the end of the right leader, and drag it down to point to the bottom of the planter. 19 Select the blue grip at the end of the left leader, and drag it down to point to the bottom of the planter. 20 On the Design Bar, click Modify.

21 Select the Planting Bed text box to select both the text and leaders, and click 22 In the Element Properties dialog, click Edit/New. 23 In the Type Properties dialog:
■ ■ ■ ■ ■

.

Click Rename. In the Rename dialog, for New, type Standard Notes, and click OK. Under Text, for Text Font, select CityBlueprint. Under Graphics, for Leader Arrowhead, select Arrow 30 Degree. Click OK twice.

24 On the Design Bar, click Modify.

Adding Text Notes to the Floor Plan | 293

Add another note using the Standard Note type 25 On the Design Bar, click Text. 26 In the Type Selector, select Text: Standard Notes. 27 On the Options Bar, for Leader, click (Arc).

28 Click the inside bottom face of the rounded planter near grid line 3.

29 Move the cursor up and to the right, over the Planting Bed text. 30 When blue dashed lines that indicate it is aligned with the Planting Bed text, click to place the text box.

294 | Chapter 6 Annotating and Dimensioning

31 Click in the text box, and type 457 mm Conc. Wall, and click Modify.

32 If you want to save your changes, click File menu ➤ Save As, and save the exercise file with a unique name. 33 Close the exercise file without saving your changes.

Adding Text Notes to the Floor Plan | 295

296

you use a separate drafting view in which to create the detail. You define that view by creating a callout view within a section view. These components display at the required scale. using detail components to represent materials like lumber. In the callout view. you detail the roof overhang of a project building. like a standard door header condition. The "drafted" detail that you create is not parametrically linked to the building model. Creating a Detail from a Building Model In this lesson. you trace over the building model geometry. 297 . you must define the view in which you want to create a detail. For a detail that you do not want to associate with the model. and metal studs. You can detail directly in a view of the building information model. you learn how to create details in Revit Architecture 2009. In order to detail from the building model.Detailing 7 In this tutorial. add detail components. plywood. and then complete the detail by adding break lines and text notes.

and use the model as an underlay for the detail. and click OK. and insulation objects. The roof overhang detail displays. Exact location is not important. navigate to Metric\Families\m_Corrugated Metal.Detailing the View In this exercise. 298 | Chapter 7 Detailing . 6 In the left pane of the Open dialog. and click Open. After you add components. as well as detail lines. click Training Files. click Yes to load a Detail Items family. click Detail Component. you detail the view of the roof edge.rvt. The detail components that you add to the view are two-dimensional family objects. Display a detail view 1 In the upper left corner of the building model. 2 Click View menu ➤ View Properties. You load detail components. 3 In the Element Properties dialog. 5 In the alert dialog. They are also view specific. In the left pane of the Open dialog. you add notes and dimensions to the detail view. double-click the detail callout head. Load and place a detail component 4 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. region objects. that you add to the view are visible only in this view. and open Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing. 7 In the drawing area. click Training Files.rfa. select As underlay. click in the space below the roof overhang to place the component. which means that all detail components. for Graphics ➤ Display Model. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open.

for Pattern ➤ Detail. 18 Move the cursor up to generate the graphics for the repeating detail. select Corrugated Metal. 14 In the Type Properties dialog. 15 For Spacing. Specify a point high enough so the siding reaches the underside of the roof overhang. Detailing the View | 299 . NOTE The detail component endpoint may not coincide with the geometry extents. 13 In the Name dialog. enter 406. enter Corrugated Metal Siding.5mm. You load and place the component so that it is in the project to use in a repeating detail. 11 In the Element Properties dialog. 19 On the Design Bar. Place a repeating detail 9 On the Design Bar. click Edit/New. 16 Click OK twice.8 Delete the component. 17 In the drawing area. click Modify. 12 In the Type Properties dialog. click the bottom of the exterior wall to select the start point. click (Element Properties). and click OK. click Duplicate. click Repeating Detail. 10 On the Options Bar.

navigate to Metric\Families\Detail Components\Div 06-Wood and Plastic\06100-Rough Carpentry\06160-Sheathing\M_Plywood-Section. 25 Place the plywood component to the right of the metal component as shown in the following illustration.20 Move the component end point: ■ ■ Select the corrugated metal component. Select the endpoint of the geometry of the corrugated metal component as the move start point. click Detail Component. TIP You may need to use the Move command to adjust the position of the plywood. 24 In the Type Selector. Select the bottom edge of the roof joist as the move end point. click Training Files.rfa. click Load. and on the Edit toolbar. 23 In the left pane of the Load Family dialog. and click Open. click (Move). 300 | Chapter 7 Detailing . ■ ■ Click Modify. Add lumber detail components 21 On the Design Bar. verify that M_Plywood-Section 19mm is selected. 22 On the Options Bar.

Load components as a group 26 Click File menu ➤ Load from Library ➤ Load File as Group. 32 Click the top right corner of the plywood to select the insertion point. 30 In the Type Selector. select M_Nominal Cut Lumber-Section : 50 x 200mm Nominal.rvt. click Training Files. click Detail Component. and place it in the detail view as shown. 29 On the Design Bar. Detailing the View | 301 . navigate to Metric\Families\Detail Components\m_Roof Edge Components. click OK. and click Open.Because you still have several components to load. 28 In the Duplicate Types dialog. 31 To properly orient the component. you load them as a group from a single file. press SPACEBAR 3 times. select M_Nominal Cut Lumber-Section : 50 x 150mm Nominal. 27 In the left pane of the Load File as Group dialog. 33 In the Type Selector.

and click Modify. 38 Select the horizontal segment. 302 | Chapter 7 Detailing . NOTE You can also press SPACEBAR as you place the component to flip the justification. The wallboard segment is now on the underside of the roof joist. select M_Gypsum Wallboard-Section : 16mm. 37 Click Modify. select Chain. 36 Place the wallboard component as shown.Add wallboard detail component 34 In the Type Selector. click the Flip instance arrows. 35 On the Options Bar.

Select the right midpoint of the 50 x 200mm component as the move end point. Select the left midpoint of the 50 x 200mm component as the move start point. click Insulation. For Offset. Detailing the View | 303 .Add insulation 39 On the Design Bar. ■ Click Modify. and on the Edit toolbar. as shown. Add lumber components 44 On the Design Bar. 40 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ For Width. click Detail Component. click (Move). 41 Place 2 segments of insulation. select to near side. 42 Click Modify. 43 Move the upper segment: ■ ■ ■ Select the upper segment of insulation. enter 140mm.

rvt. 46 Click to place the component at the lower left corner of the roof overhang as shown.45 In the Type Selector. select M_Rigid Insulation-Section : 63mm. 3 Sketch a detail line from the lower right corner of the 50 x 300mm component to the lower left corner of the 50 x 200mm component. select M_Nominal Cut Lumber-Section : 50 x 300mm Nominal. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing. Add detail lines 1 On the Design Bar. select M_Plywood-Section : 19mm. 47 In the Type Selector. Adding Detail Lines on page 304. 50 Add the insulation above the plywood you just placed. Add rigid insulation 49 In the Type Selector. Adding Detail Lines In this exercise. they are view specific. 2 In the Type Selector. meaning they display only in this view. Like detail components. select Thin Lines. you add lines to your detail. as shown. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. 48 Place the component directly above the 50 x 200mm component. and lock the component. 304 | Chapter 7 Detailing . 52 Proceed to the next exercise. 51 Click Modify. click Detail Lines.

9 Select the lines at the top of the 50 x 300mm component and the roof joist. Adding Detail Lines | 305 . 13 Add detail lines around the 50 x 300mm component. 12 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Click (Pick Lines). For Offset. 10 On the Design Bar. 11 In the Type Selector. and press ENTER. 7 In the Type Selector. For Offset. enter 10mm.4 Click Modify. 8 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Click (Pick Lines). Trim and extend the lines as necessary to get the desired result. enter 10mm. click Detail Lines. and press ENTER. drag the endpoint up to the top of the 50 x 200mm component. Add offset lines 6 On the Design Bar. 5 Select the vertical plywood component. click Detail Lines. select Thin Lines. select Medium Lines. as shown. as shown.

17 Draw a horizontal line as shown. 15 Draw a small diagonal line at the bottom left corner of the 50 x 300mm component. 306 | Chapter 7 Detailing . and draw the detail lines as shown. select Chain. 16 On the Options Bar. and clear Chain. click (Draw).Draw detail lines 14 On the Options Bar. as shown.

18 In the Type Selector. 26 In the Type Selector. select the Penthouse level line. click Add a vapor barrier 25 On the Design Bar. select Do not display. draw the detail lines as shown. 22 In the Project Browser. When you turn the display model off. and click Hide in view ➤ Elements. and click OK. click Detail Lines. 19 Zoom in to the area where the roof joist and the corrugated metal component abut. 20 Move the top horizontal line down so that it overlays the Penthouse level line. select Vapor Barrier. for Graphics ➤ Display Model. and press ENTER. For Offset. right-click. right-click Roof Overhang Detail. 28 Select the interior edge of the vertical segment of gypsum wallboard. under Views ➤ Detail Views (Detail). Adding Detail Lines | 307 . and then select the interior edge of the horizontal segment. the model elements such as walls and floors no longer display in this view. Click (Pick Lines). Modify display properties 21 In the drawing area. 27 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ ➤ Hide Crop Region. and click Properties. 23 In the Element Properties dialog. What remains are the detail components and lines that you added. select Thin Lines. 24 On the View Control Bar. enter 10mm.

press SPACEBAR as necessary. Adding Text Notes In this exercise. Training File 308 | Chapter 7 Detailing . you add text notes to complete the detail. 34 Proceed to the next exercise. TIP To rotate the break line as you place it.29 On the Design Bar. 30 In the Type Selector. 32 Click Modify. select the break line and use the shape handle grips to modify it. Adding Text Notes on page 308. 33 If a break line does not completely mask the portion of the detail that it is intended to mask. click Detail Component. 31 Add break lines at the bottom and the right of the detail. select M_Break Line.

rvt. click Text. 5 Click the left outer edge of the 50 x 300mm component. Add a dimension to the detail 4 On the Design Bar. click ■ ■ ■ ■ (Arc) to create an arced leader. 6 Click Modify. Add text notes to the detail 1 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 3 Add the leaders and notes as shown: Click in the detail to specify the location of the arrow. click Dimension.Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. Enter the text. Click again to specify the location of the text box. Adding Text Notes | 309 . 2 On the Options Bar. click the left edge of the corrugated metal component. and click to place the dimension. Click in the drawing area to end the text insertion command. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing.

and click the dimension text. Creating Detail Components on page 310. click Roof Overhang Detail. under Views (all) ➤ Detail Views (Detail). clear Detail Items and Dimensions. select a text note. Create a duplicate drawing 1 In the Project Browser. 10 Proceed to the next exercise. Creating Detail Components In this exercise. and click OK. enter Roof Overhang Detail . m_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing. and click OK. and click Rename. Convert detail lines to components 5 Use a window to select the entire roof detail. right-click. right-click. and press DELETE. 8 In the Dimension Text dialog. 310 | Chapter 7 Detailing . for Suffix. under Text Fields.rvt.7 Select the dimension line. (Filter Selection).Keynotes. you modify the previously drawn detail so that you can annotate it with keynotes rather than text notes. enter Typ. Remove text notes 4 In the drawing area. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise.. click 6 In the Filter dialog. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate with Detailing. 9 Click File menu ➤ Save. The selected lines need to be replaced with detail components in order for them to accept a keynote. click Select All Instances. and click OK. 2 Select Copy of Roof Overhang Detail. and save the exercise file. on the Options Bar. right-click. 3 In the Rename View dialog.

pressing TAB. 8 Zoom in to the metal coping. You can also select all the linework by highlighting a segment. 9 Click Edit menu ➤ Copy to Clipboard. select all the coping linework.rft. Creating Detail Components | 311 . 10 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Family. and selecting the chain. 14 Click Modify. 16 Click Modify. in the Type Selector.7 Click Modify. 13 Click the intersection of the reference planes to place the linework. 17 Click File menu ➤ Save As. and click Open. select Medium Lines. click Training Files. navigate to Metric\Templates\Metric Detail Component. 12 Click Edit menu ➤ Paste from Clipboard. while pressing CTRL. 11 In the left pane of the New Family dialog. 15 Use a window to select all linework.

28 On the Options Bar. you place keynotes on objects. 29 In the left pane of the Open dialog. click Training Files. Adding Keynotes on page 312. clear Detail Items. select the coping. 21 To place the component.rfa. click Load into Projects. 25 In the Filter dialog. 32 Proceed to the next exercise. and add keynote data to components that do not have data associated with them. and click Save. 24 On the Options Bar. 30 In the drawing area. While pressing SHIFT. double-click it in the Project Browser. click Detail Component. navigate to your preferred location.18 In the Save As dialog. Training File 312 | Chapter 7 Detailing . enter Roof Edge. Add components to the detail 19 On the Family tab of the Design Bar. 22 Click Modify. 26 Press DELETE. and click Open. deselect any extraneous lines that are also selected. delete the underlying linework. 20 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. click the bottom left endpoint of the metal coping. The underlying linework is deleted and the detail component remains in the drawing. 31 Using the same method used previously.Keynotes view is not the open view. click Detail Component. The component family is now part of the roof overhang detail. 23 Using a window. click on the upper end point of the drip edge to place the component. and click OK. for File name. click . navigate to Metric\Families\Detail Components\m_Metal Fascia w_Drip Edge. and the component can be placed in the detail. Adding Keynotes In this exercise. The original linework remains selected. NOTE If the Roof Overhang Detail . 27 On the Design Bar. click Load.

Roof Edge4. click Edit/New. Add keynotes to components 1 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. navigate to Metric\Families\Annotations\M_Keynote Tag. Adding Keynotes | 313 . click Training Files. select the metal fascia with drip edge. 3 In the left pane of the Load Family dialog. use keynote 07645. 2 In the alert dialog. Assign keynote parameter to a component 7 In the drawing area. click Yes to load a Keynote Tag family to the project. and click 8 In the Element Properties dialog.D11. 19mm Plywood.rvt.rfa.Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. and click Open. 6 Click Modify.B5. select the rigid insulation as the object to tag. 4 Add the tag: ■ ■ ■ ■ In the drawing area. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing. (Element Properties). 63mm Rigid Insulation. Click to place the leader arm. navigate to 07000 ➤ 07200 ➤ 07210 ➤ 07210. use keynote 06160. and click OK. For the metal coping. Click the rigid insulation on the roof to place the tag.C1. 5 Tag additional components: ■ ■ For the plywood decking. In the Keynotes dialog. click Keynote ➤ Element.

click Detail Component. use keynote 06110.9 In the Type Properties dialog. use keynote 06160.A8.F1. and click . 314 | Chapter 7 Detailing . select Corrugated Metal. 10 In the Keynotes dialog. For the 50 x 300. You do this in order to keynote the component. using keynote 07460. 17 Keynote the component. 22mm Corrugated Steel . For the 19mm Plywood Siding.D11. Creating Line-based Detail Components on page 314. 11 Click OK 3 times.20 Ga. click Keynote ➤ Element.I1. 15 In the Type Selector. For the 50 x 150. you convert detail lines to detail components so that you can add keynotes to them.F1. ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ 14 On the Design Bar. for Identity Data ➤ Keynote. 18 Save the file. use keynote 06110. navigate to 07645. For the 2 instances of the 16mm Gypsum Wallboard. use keynote 09250.G1. Creating Line-based Detail Components In this exercise. 19 Proceed to the next exercise. a repeating detail cannot be keynoted. the keynote is automatically read when you place the tag. FasciaProfile_1. For the 50 x 200. use keynote 06110. 13 Tag components: ■ Tag the metal fascia with drip edge. click in the Value column.D1. 16 Place an instance of the component directly on top of the bottom segment of the corrugated metal repeating component. 12 On the Design Bar. Because you defined the keynote parameter as part of the component properties.

Load line-based detail components 21 On the Design Bar. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing. click Lines. select m_Hidden Line Detail Component. 22 On the Options Bar. navigate to your preferred location. 2 In the left pane of the New Family dialog. 14 Add the component in the location of the previously deleted horizontal line. select Medium Lines. 23 In the left pane of the Load Family dialog.rft. and select the right end point. Create a detail component 1 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Family. and click (Element Properties). click Edit/New. m_Invisible Line Detail Component. and click Open. 8 In the Save As dialog. click Training Files. 9 On the Design Bar. 6 Lock the line. select the horizontal line under the roof overhang as shown. 11 Press DELETE. 19 In the Name dialog. 20 Click OK 3 times. 18 In the Type Properties dialog.Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. 12 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. navigate to Metric\Templates\Metric Detail Component line based. 24 While pressing CTRL. click Training Files. 15 Click Modify. enter m_Medium Line Detail Component. click Detail Component. and click Open. and m_Light Line Detail Component. The deleted line needs to be replaced with a detail component in order for it to accept a keynote. click Load into Projects. 5 In the drawing area. 17 In the Element Properties dialog. navigate to Metric\Families\Detail Components. 7 Click File menu ➤ Save As. select the left end point of the reference line. 16 Select the component.rvt. 13 In the Type Selector. Creating Line-based Detail Components | 315 . 3 On the Family tab of the Design Bar. click Detail Component. click Load. select Medium Line Detail Component. Convert detail lines to components 10 In the drawing area. for File name. and click Modify. click Duplicate. 4 In the Type Selector. and click Save. enter Prefinished Metal Soffit Panel.

invisible. 41 Select the component just added. 47 Select the component. 27 On the Design Bar. and click . click Edit/New. click Detail Component. and assign it keynote 06110. 43 Zoom to the repeating component. 50 Move the air barrier to the right. 37 Click OK 3 times. 45 Click the upper end of the repeating detail. select m_Light Line Detail Component. and click . you create line-based detail components for other line weights (light. for Identity Data ➤ Keynote. Single-Ply Membrane Roofing. 29 In the drawing area. enter EPDM Membrane. and assign it keynote 07260. 39 Add the Light Line Detail Component to the underside of the overhang. click (Move). name the component Air Barrier.A1. click Duplicate. 36 In the Keynotes dialog. navigate to 07000 ➤ 07500 ➤ 07530 ➤ 07530. click the end points of the long detail line above the roof. 49 With the component selected. 28 In the Type Selector. click Detail Component.G1. 42 Using the same method used previously. click Detail Component. 48 Using the same method used previously. and hidden) used in the view. 40 Click Modify. You add the components to the project and keynote them. click in the Value column. on the Edit toolbar.A5. and click OK. Add light line components 26 Zoom to the roof overhang. 30 Click Modify. 33 In the Type Properties dialog. and click the lower end at the break line. against the 19mm plywood. name the component 50 x 200 Framing. 44 On the Design Bar. 46 Click Modify. and click . 35 In the Type Properties dialog. 32 In the Element Properties dialog. 31 Select the component. 316 | Chapter 7 Detailing .25 Next. and click . 38 On the Design Bar. 34 In the Name dialog.

select m_Hidden Line Detail Component. 53 On the Options Bar. leaving the detail component lines. 56 Delete both dashed detail lines. and click . 55 Click Modify. 54 Create the component by drawing over the vertical and horizontal dashed detail lines that represent the vapor barrier. select Chain. 57 Select the vertical hidden line component. Creating Line-based Detail Components | 317 . 52 In the Type Selector. click Detail Component.Add a vapor barrier component 51 On the Design Bar.

64 Save the file as m_Invisible Line Detail Component. Add keynotes 59 Zoom to the drawing extents. 68 In the drawing area. 318 | Chapter 7 Detailing . 63 In the drawing area. Create an invisible line component 62 Click Window menu ➤ m_Medium Line Detail Component.A4. click Keynote ➤ Element. and assign it keynote 07260. 50 x 200 Framing. draw a line in the center of the large vertical segment of insulation. select m_Invisible Line Detail Component. 61 In the drawing area. click Load into Projects.58 Using the method used previously. select Invisible Lines. 65 On the Family tab of the Design Bar. add keynotes for the EPDM Membrane. Air Barrier. click Detail Component. 60 On the Design Bar. select the component. in the Type Selector.rfa. name the component Vapor Barrier. and Vapor Barrier. 67 In the Type Selector. 66 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar.rfa.

The database file opens in a text editor. Enter Pre-Finished Metal Soffit. and press TAB. name the component Batt Insul. click File menu ➤ Save. and press TAB. you add keynote information for a detail component to the database text file. click Settings menu ➤ Keynoting.69 Select the component. under Keynote Table. 3 In the text editor. You are then able to assign the keynote to the component in the drawing. and double-click m_Example_RevitKeynotes. navigate to Documents and Settings\All Users\Application Data\Autodesk\RAC 2008\Training\Metric. Modifying a Keynote Database on page 319. Enter 07463. 2 Add keynote information for the metal soffit: ■ ■ ■ ■ Position the cursor at the end of the line that begins with 07460.rvt. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing.A1. and click . Modifying a Keynote Database | 319 . click Browse. add a keynote for the component. Add information to the text file 1 In Windows Explorer. 73 Proceed to the next exercise.. 72 Save the file. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. Modifying a Keynote Database In this exercise. Enter 07460.A4.txt. 71 In the drawing area. Update keynote settings 4 In Revit Architecture. 70 Using the method used previously. and close the text editor. and assign it keynote 07210.A9. 5 In the Keynoting Settings dialog. and press ENTER.

10 In the Keynotes dialog.txt. Each keynote displays as a simple number. under Path Type. 12 Apply various keynote styles: ■ ■ In the drawing area. and click to place the note. After you create a drafting view. 13 Click Modify. you can reference it within the model and place it on a sheet. These details do not update with changes to the building model.6 In the Browse for Keynote File dialog. Work with keynotes 8 On the Design Bar. 14 Save the file. ■ ■ Change the keynote style back to the boxed number type. select M_Keynote Tag : Keynote Number. navigate to 07463. 11 Click Modify. as there is no parametric linkage to any building model components. 7 In the Keynoting Settings dialog. click to place the leader. In the Type Selector. Creating a Drafted Detail In this lesson. 320 | Chapter 7 Detailing . You can create drafted details using the drafting tools in Revit Architecture or by importing details from an existing detail library. and click OK. Drafted details are created in drafting views and are not directly based on building model geometry. and click Open. you learn how to create a drafted detail.A1. select all the keynotes. click Keynote ➤ Element. You can create details in drafting views when you do not need to create callout views from the building model. select Absolute. The descriptive text for each keynote displays. navigate to m_Example_RevitKeynotes. Select Keynote Tag : Keynote Text. and click OK. 9 In the drawing area. select the metal soffit (horizontal line under the overhang).

The detail is imported as an import symbol. expand Views (all) ➤ Drafting Views (Detail). 7 In the Rename View dialog. 8 Proceed to the next exercise. and click OK.dwg. you create a callout in the section view of the building model to reference the metal coping detail that you previously imported. select Black and White. and click Rename. right-click Drafting 1. For Colors. for Scale. Create a new drafting view 1 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Drafting View. Import a complete detail in DWG format 3 Click File menu ➤ Import/Link ➤ CAD Formats. For Positioning. Click Open.Center to Center is selected. Importing a Detail into a Drafting View | 321 . The detail that you import is in DWG format.Importing a Detail into a Drafting View In this exercise. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. Training File Use the training file you used in a previous exercise. 4 In the Import/Link CAD Formats dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ In the left pane.rvt. Creating a Reference Callout on page 321. 2 In the New Drafting View dialog. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing. click Training Files. enter EPDM Metal Coping. Creating a Reference Callout In this exercise. verify that Auto . you place an existing detail in a new drafting view to create a drafted detail.rvt. select 1 : 5. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing. 5 Enter zf to zoom to the detail. Navigate to Metric\m_Roof Edge Detail. 6 In the Project Browser. and click OK.

8 In the Element Properties dialog. 12 Click OK twice. select Reference other view. right-click EPDM Metal Coping.Create the callout view 1 In the Project Browser. for New. 322 | Chapter 7 Detailing .No Reference. and click OK. 4 Add the callout bubble by dragging a rectangular bubble around the metal coping. 9 In the Type Properties dialog. delete the existing value. 11 In the Type Properties dialog. and select Drafting View: EPDM Metal Coping. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. under Views (all) ➤ Detail Views (Detail). double-click Roof Overhang Detail to open it in the drawing area. click Callout. The callout head no longer displays a reference label. 10 In the Rename dialog. click Rename. Modify detail view properties 7 In the Project Browser. 3 On the Options Bar. for Graphics ➤ Reference Label. and click Properties. 6 Select the callout. enter Detail . 5 Click Modify. and use the callout grips to move the callout head. click Edit/New.

so you use Revit Architecture tools to draft the detail.Elev./Sect. Creating a Detail in a Drafting View on page 323 Creating a Detail in a Drafting View In this exercise.No Reference). 18 Save the file.Display the reference view 13 On the Design Bar. The callout is updated with the sheet information. 16 Click on the sheet above the Roof Overhang Detail to place the drafting view. and double-click the callout. 15 Under Drafting Views (Detail . under Views (all) ➤ Sheets (all). The metal coping detail that you imported previously displays. Add the drafting view to a sheet 14 In the Project Browser. 17 Click Window menu ➤ Detail View: Roof Overhang Detail. click Modify. There is no existing DWG file for this door detail./Det. double-click A105 . drag EPDM Metal Coping onto the sheet. Creating a Detail in a Drafting View | 323 . you create a door head condition in the new drafting view. 19 Proceed to the next exercise. Modeling elements at this level of detail may be time consuming and can reduce the overall performance of the product.

click Duplicate.rvt. click Edit/New. click Detail Component. . 14 Click OK 3 times. click Filled Region. Create a drafting view 1 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Drafting View. You sketch filled regions to represent gypsum wall board. for Graphics ➤ Fill Pattern. 3 On the View Control Bar. Add a detail component 4 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. click Region Properties. 10 In the Type Properties dialog. 5 In the Type Selector. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing. 6 Click in the drawing area to place 2 instances as shown. and click OK. verify that the scale is 1 : 5. 2 In the New Drafting View dialog. click 13 In the Fill Patterns dialog. Create a filled region 7 On the Design Bar. 8 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. 9 In the Element Properties dialog. Board.Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. 11 In the Name dialog. enter Gyp. for Name. select Gypsum-Plaster. for Name. enter Header @ Sliding Door. and click OK. select M_Nominal Cut Lumber-Section : 50 x 150mm Nominal. Press SPACEBAR to rotate the component as you place it. 324 | Chapter 7 Detailing . 12 In the Type Properties dialog.

Select the lower left corner of the 50 x 150 lumber as the start point. select the left and bottom edges of the region. 19 In the Type Selector. and on the Edit toolbar.5mm. select Wide Lines. 20 On the Design Bar. select the width dimension.15 Draw the region: ■ ■ ■ On the Options Bar. and enter 20. click (Draw). click . click Finish Sketch. (Mirror). 17 Click Modify. Mirror the region 21 Select the filled region. Draw a rectangle as shown. Creating a Detail in a Drafting View | 325 . 18 While pressing CTRL. click 22 On the Options Bar. 16 Select the left edge of the region.

29 In the Type Properties dialog. 31 In the Type Properties dialog. for Graphics ➤ Fill Pattern.23 Draw the mirror line: ■ ■ Select the midpoint of the upper 50 x 150 as the start point. and click OK.Finish. and drag the bottom up to just below the top of the upper 50 x 150. Move the cursor up. . 28 In the Element Properties dialog. 33 Click OK 3 times. select Wood . click Duplicate. enter Wood . 30 In the Name dialog. click Region Properties. for Name. click Edit/New. click 32 In the Fill Patterns dialog. 326 | Chapter 7 Detailing .Finish. click Filled Region. 27 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. 24 Select the mirrored region. Add wood filled regions 26 On the Design Bar. and click above the top of the region as the end point. 25 Click Modify.

in the Type Selector. select Medium Lines. Creating a Detail in a Drafting View | 327 . sketch the new region as shown. Select the right edge of the lower 50 x 150. Draw a rectangle as shown. 37 On the Design Bar. click (Align). 38 On the Design Bar. click (Rectangle). click . 40 On the Options Bar. and select the right edge of the wood region. verify that the width is 19mm and the height is 63. 35 Select all the linework for the wood region.5mm.34 Draw the region: ■ ■ ■ On the Options Bar. 39 In the Type Selector. 41 Beginning at the lower right of the wood region. verify that the thickness is 19mm. select Medium Lines. 36 Align the wood region to the 50 x 150: ■ ■ On the Tools toolbar. Select the lower left corner of the left gypsum board region as the start point. click Finish Sketch. click Filled Region.

328 | Chapter 7 Detailing . click Finish Sketch. (Align). You use the reference plane as an alignment reference for the gypsum board region above it. Add a door panel 49 On the Design Bar. click Filled Region. and click the bottom of the gypsum board region. For Offset. For Offset. click 48 Click Modify. enter 10mm. 46 On the Tools toolbar. 45 Select the top of the vertical wood region to place the reference plane above it.42 On the Design Bar. 51 Select the left edge of the horizontal wood region. enter 6mm. 50 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Click (Pick Lines). 44 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Click (Pick Lines). and press ENTER. click Ref Plane. Add a reference plane 43 On the Design Bar. and press ENTER. 47 Click the reference plane.

54 On the Tools toolbar. Select Chain. Move the cursor right 25mm. and click to select the point. and click to select the point. 56 On the Design Bar. Move the cursor left 25mm.52 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ ■ Click (Draw). Creating a Detail in a Drafting View | 329 . click (Trim/Extend). 53 Draw the door panel outline: ■ ■ ■ ■ Click the top endpoint of the offset line. and press ENTER. click Finish Sketch. For Offset. 55 Select the small vertical line of the door panel sketch. and click to select the point. enter 0. and select the bottom horizontal line. Move the cursor down 305mm.

and right edges of the door panel region. TIP Press the SPACEBAR as necessary to rotate the bolt to the correct orientation. 61 Click Modify. 69 Select the bolt. select Medium Lines. click Detail Lines. and press ENTER. 67 Add the bolt to the right side of the lower wood region as shown. and press ENTER. enter 3mm. enter 76. 330 | Chapter 7 Detailing .rfa. Add mounting/sliding hardware 64 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar.2mm. select the height dimension.Add detail lines for mounting/sliding hardware 57 On the Design Bar. 63 Repeat for the right detail line. 60 Select the left. For Offset. click Load. and click Open. 62 Select the left detail line. 58 In the Type Selector. navigate to Metric\Families\Detail Components\Div 05-Metals\05090-Metal Fastenings\M_A307 Bolts-Side. click Detail Component. 65 On the Options Bar. top. 68 Click Modify. 66 In the left pane of the Load Family dialog. click Training Files. 59 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Click (Pick Lines). drag the left shape handle until the nut is against the detail line.

72 In the left pane of the Load Family dialog. click Training Files. click Detail Lines.rfa. use the images as a guide. Add detail lines 75 On the Design Bar. 77 Draw a line at the base of the bolt head as shown. and click Open. Creating a Detail in a Drafting View | 331 . 73 Add the component to the left side of the lower 50 x 150.70 On the Design Bar. click Load. select Wide Lines. 71 On the Options Bar. NOTE Exact sizes and positioning are not critical when creating the remainder of the detail. navigate to Metric\Families\Detail Components\Div 05-Metals\05090-Metal Fastenings\M_Expansion Bolts-Side. 74 Select the expansion bolt. 76 In the Type Selector. click Detail Component. drag the right shape handle until the bolt end is just past the midpoint of the 50 x 150.

select Thin Lines. click Detail Lines. 86 Draw a small rectangle between the mirrored rectangles as shown. click Detail Lines. 81 Draw the rectangle to the left of the wide line as shown. (Mirror). and on the Edit toolbar. 87 Click Modify. 84 On the Design Bar. click 83 Select the wide detail line as the axis of reflection. 80 On the Options Bar. click . click . 79 In the Type Selector. 85 On the Options Bar. 82 Select the rectangle.78 On the Design Bar. 332 | Chapter 7 Detailing .

click (Mirror). as shown. and on the Edit toolbar. 91 Draw a small line from the midpoint of the left mirrored rectangle to the left. drag the top end above the mirrored rectangles as shown. 89 On the Design Bar. click Detail Lines. 90 In the Type Selector. 93 Select the wide detail line as the axis of reflection.88 Select the detail line to the left of the lower wood region. Creating a Detail in a Drafting View | 333 . Do not extend the line to the vertical detail line. 92 Select the line. select Medium Lines.

98 Click the end of the detail line on the left. click Detail Lines. 95 On the Design Bar. 334 | Chapter 7 Detailing . 96 Beginning at the end of the 3mm line. select M_Break Line. click . 99 Click Modify. and press ENTER. 101 On the Design Bar. and click to place the arc as shown. Add two break lines 100 Zoom to the drawing extents.94 Select the mirrored line on the right. TIP Rotate and move the break lines as necessary to adjust the masking elements. 97 On the Options Bar. enter 3mm. select the length dimension. draw a line up to the height of the other detail line. 103 Add two break lines as shown. click Detail Component. 102 In the Type Selector.

110 Select the dimension line. using the Drag Text grip. click Dimension.Add dimensions 104 On the Design Bar. select the left edge of the horizontal wood region. and click Modify. 105 In the drawing area.5mm Arial. and click Modify. Creating a Detail in a Drafting View | 335 . select Linear Dimension Style : Linear 2. 109 Add a multi-segment dimension line as shown. and select the right edge of the adjoining vertical region. 107 On the Design Bar. drag the text for the smaller dimension. 106 Click to place the dimension. click Dimension. 108 In the Type Selector.

and enter 175 mm @ Type A. 120 In the Dimension Text dialog. and enter Varies.Add dimension overrides to represent different wall types 111 Select the wall dimension. Add dimension overrides to represent different wall types. for Below. under Dimension Value. 336 | Chapter 7 Detailing . and click the dimension text. 116 In the Type Selector select Linear Dimension Style: Detail Linear . under Dimension Value. click Dimension. and then click the dimension text. select Replace With Text. Add dimension strings based on the wall type 115 On the Design Bar. 114 Click OK. 117 Click to place additional dimensions on the wall as shown. 113 Under Text Fields. enter See Schedule. 119 Select the topmost of the 3 wall dimensions. 112 In the Dimension Text dialog.5mmArial. select Replace With Text.2. 118 Select Modify to end the command.

121 Click OK. 126 In the drawing area. Add text notes to complete the detail 124 On the Design Bar. Enter 225 mm @ Type C. 127 Enter Gyp. 130 Add leaders and text notes to the detail as shown. Board. 129 Drag the end of the new leader to the other gypsum board region. Creating a Detail in a Drafting View | 337 . select the gypsum board region on the left. click Text. and click Modify. and on the Options Bar. click (Add Right Arc Leader). 128 Select the note. click to create an arced leader. 125 In the Options Bar. 123 Click OK. 122 Repeat this process for the next 2 dimensions: ■ ■ Enter 200 mm @ Type B. and click to place the text.

132 Save the file. click Modify to end the command. 338 | Chapter 7 Detailing .131 On the Design Bar.

including: ■ ■ ■ Creating a note block that contains typical construction notes Creating a drawing list that is automatically populated based on filter selections Creating the 2 most common types of legends produced for construction: annotation legends and building component legends Tracking and documenting revisions in the project Importing resources (images and text) from other applications into project sheets ■ ■ Using Note Blocks In this lesson.Finishing the Sheets 8 In this tutorial. In the left pane of the Open dialog. The note block can be used to schedule parameters assigned to a generic annotation family. you add typical construction notes to sheets and then create a note block to expose the note text. you create a typical note block to annotate repairs and renovations to the exterior of the building. you perform tasks to provide finishing touches on your project documentation. click Training Files. 339 . expand Elevations (Building Elevation).rvt. and open Metric\m_Freighthouse_FlatsFinishing-Sheets. Creating a Note Block In this exercise. Load a generic annotation family 1 In the Project Browser. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. and double-click East.

7 On the Design Bar. click Training Files. 8 Select the keynote. and drag the endpoint of the leader to position it on the right front door.2 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar.Hexagon. 5 On the Options Bar. for Number of Leaders. click Modify. click Symbol. and open Metric\Families\Annotations\Sheet Keynote . 6 Click in the drawing area to the right of the building to place a hexagon tag. 4 In the left pane of the Open dialog. 3 Click Yes to load a generic annotation family into the project. type 1. 340 | Chapter 8 Finishing the Sheets .rfa.

for Text. on the Options Bar. and click above the tag to place the copy.9 Drag the midpoint of the leader to position it as shown: Create annotation marks for items requiring notes 10 With the tag selected. type Seal existing doors and insulate. click (Element Properties). 12 On the Edit toolbar. Creating a Note Block | 341 . and click OK. 11 In the Element Properties dialog. 13 Select the tag. under Identity Data. click (Copy).

and on the Options Bar. 342 | Chapter 8 Finishing the Sheets . position the cursor over the hexagon tag until a vertical bar displays. 16 For Tag. on the Edit toolbar. 18 Using the same method. make another copy of the tag and place it on the left side of the building. click Copy. 15 For Text.14 With the copy selected. Contact Historic Preservation District official for specific requirements. type Repair existing door surround. type B. 17 Click OK. and click. (Mirror). click (Element Properties). 19 With the tag selected. clear 20 To create a vertical mirror image of the tag so the leader points toward the building. on the Options Bar.

21 On the Design Bar. Clean and repair existing stone trim as required. Repair existing door surround. and moving counter-clockwise. Remove all existing windows. 22 Optionally. C D E F G Creating a Note Block | 343 . continue tagging the building as shown in the following illustration: Tag A B Text Seal existing doors and insulate. Repair as required. Clean existing concrete loading dock. Clean opening and repair as required for new window installation. Contact Historic Preservation District official for specific requirements. Clean exterior brick wall. Tuckpoint as required. using the table as a reference. click Modify. Clean and repair stone parapet cap as required.

and for Alignment. expand Sheets (all). 26 Click OK. 25 Specify values in the Note Block Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ On the Fields tab. On the Appearance tab. and click OK. The Exterior Construction Notes block displays. and click Add. Clean cut and repair wall as required. for Header text. Create. 29 In the Project Browser.Elevations. 28 In the Project Browser. 24 In the New Note Block dialog. On the Formatting tab. and double-click A103 . for Sort by. verify that Arial is selected. and drag the right column control to expand the column to display the note text. and click Add. and drag it to the sheet. under Available fields. select Tag. select Tag. type Mark. type Exterior Construction Notes. format. select Center. for Heading. select Exterior Construction Notes. 27 In the column header (text). for the value. 344 | Chapter 8 Finishing the Sheets . type Description. expand Schedules/Quantities.Tag H Text Saw cut existing brick wall. On the Sorting/Grouping tab. for Note block name. and select Bold. Select Text. 30 Click to place the block in the upper left corner of the sheet. and place a note block on a sheet 23 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Note Block. type 6 mm.

you quickly create a drawing list that is automatically generated from the drawings available in the project. 1 In the Project Browser.rvt.Title Sheet. 33 Save the file as Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Finishing-Sheets_in_progress. you create an automatically populated drawing list for placement on the title sheet of the project. Using Drawing Lists | 345 . 32 Zoom in to see the note block.31 On the Design Bar. Creating a Drawing List In this exercise. Using Drawing Lists In this lesson. under Sheets (all). double-click T .rvt. Metric\m_Freighthouse_FlatsFinishing-Sheets_in_progress. click Modify. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson.

and click Add. and drag it to the sheet. double-click T . 346 | Chapter 8 Finishing the Sheets . under Sheets (all). change Drawing List to Sheet Index. The drawing list displays. select Sheet Number. in the first field. in the second field. under Available fields. 7 In the Project Browser. On the Sorting/Grouping tab. On the Filter tab. 3 Specify values in the Drawing List Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ On the Fields tab. select Sheet Number. 6 In the Project Browser.Title Sheet. for Filter by. select Sheet Number. select Sheet Index. type T. 8 Click to place it on the sheet in the lower right corner. expand Schedules/Quantities. and expand the right column to accommodate the text. ■ 4 Click OK. 5 In the list title field. select does not equal. and click Add. Select Sheet Name.2 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Drawing List. for Sort by. and in the third field.

and thus is not added to the number of instances of that component listed on a schedule or note block. building component legends are often called schedules (wall type schedule. 10 Zoom in to the drawing list. annotation legends are often referred to as symbol legends. On construction documents. and so on). The two most common types of legends produced for construction documents are annotation legends and building component legends. you use a text type you create by duplicating an existing text type and modifying the type properties. and door frames. NOTE A component that is placed in a legend does not count as an additional instance of the component in the Revit Architecture building model. For the text. Finally. On construction documents.9 On the Design Bar. Annotation legends are made up of components (such as section markers and door tags) that are paired with text that identifies them. Building component legends list and identify components such as walls. you create a legend view and add symbols and text to it. 11 Save the file. Training File Using Legends | 347 . door frame schedule. you add the completed symbol legend to multiple sheets for easy reference. windows. click Modify. doors. Using Legends Legends provide a way to display a list of the various building components and annotations used in a project. Creating a Symbol Legend In this exercise.

type Typical Symbol Legend. 348 | Chapter 8 Finishing the Sheets .Circle M_Door Tag M_Window Tag Sheet Keynote . type Legend Text. click Edit/New. and click OK. for Name. You do this by duplicating the standard text type and modifying the type properties. 10 For Text Size. and click OK twice.Hexagon : Tag Create a text type 5 On the Design Bar. type 3mm. click Duplicate. Add symbols to the legend 3 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar.rvt. selecting each from the Type Selector and placing it in the legend as shown. ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Custom-Section Head: Section Head . 4 Add the following symbols to the legend view. 9 For Text Font. 2 In the New Legend View dialog. you create a text type with the necessary size.Open Level Head . Metric\m_Freighthouse_FlatsFinishing-Sheets_in_progress. for Name.Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson. 6 On the Options Bar. and click OK. select Arial. click . click Symbol. click Text. 7 In the Element Properties dialog. 8 In the Type Properties dialog. Because the text size for the symbol legend is not available in the Type Selector. Create a legend view 1 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Legend.

13 Type Detail Callout for the text note. expand Sheets (all). and double-click A101 . verify that Text : Legend Text is selected. type the following text for the remaining symbols in the legend: ■ ■ ■ ■ Level Indicator Door Tag Window Tag Sheet Keynote Place the symbol legend on a sheet 15 In the Project Browser. 14 Working from the top down. verify that is selected.Site Plan/Floor Plan. click Typical Symbol Legend.Add text to the legend 11 In the Type Selector. 16 In the Project Browser. and for Leader. expand Legends. 12 Click to the right of the first symbol to specify the text start point. and click to place it. Creating a Symbol Legend | 349 . drag it to the lower right corner of the sheet.

click Modify. The symbol legend is added to the project sheet. 21 In the Type Selector. select Viewport : No Titlemark. 350 | Chapter 8 Finishing the Sheets . 19 In the Project Browser. click Modify.Unit 18.17 In the Type Selector. under Sheets. 22 On the Design Bar. select Viewport : No Titlemark. double-click A102 . 20 Drag Typical Symbol Legend to the lower right corner of the sheet. 18 On the Design Bar. 23 Save the file. and click to place it. A legend view is unlike any other view and can be placed onto multiple sheets for reference where required.

Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. You use the text type that you created in a previous exercise to create annotations that identify the material used in each wall component. and click OK. 6 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ ■ For Family. you create a building component legend for the wall types in the building model. 3 For Scale.Creating a Component Legend In this exercise.rvt. 8 Click directly below the first wall to place a second wall. type 4th Floor Wall Types. Creating a Component Legend | 351 . select 1 : 50. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Finishing-Sheets_in_progress. Create a legend view 1 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Legend. 2 In the New Legend View dialog. select Medium for Detail Level. 5 On the View Control Bar. for Name. type 900 mm. select Section. 7 Click near the top left of the drawing area to specify the insertion point for the wall. For Host length. You then add the completed legend to a project sheet. and press ENTER. Add components to the legend 4 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. For View. select Walls: Basic Wall: 4th Floor Balcony Divider. click Legend Component.

352 | Chapter 8 Finishing the Sheets . for example to force a line break between ''Wall Type 1'' and ''Patio Divider. verify that Text : Legend Text is selected. click Text. for Leader. 13 On the Options Bar. 14 Click below the upper wall component to specify the start point for the text. 12 In the Type Selector. NOTE Press ENTER to force the text to start on the next line. and on the Options Bar. click Modify. select Walls : Basic wall : 4th Floor Exterior. click to add text without a leader. for Family. Add titles to the legend components 11 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. and type Wall Type 1 Patio Divider. 10 Select the second wall.'' 15 Click below the lower wall and type Wall Type 2 Exterior Wall.9 On the Design Bar.

Place the legend on a sheet 21 In the Project Browser. click to add text with a single-segment leader. under Floor Plans. pressing ENTER between component descriptions. The text note with leader is added to the legend. and click Modify on the Design Bar: 33mm Decking 50x100 Stud 33mm Decking. 22 In the Select a Titleblock dialog. 23 In the Project Browser. and drag it to the new sheet. 17 Click the right side of the Wall Type 1 component to specify the leader start point.Add text to the legend 16 On the Options Bar. select Level 4. Creating a Component Legend | 353 . click OK to accept the default titleblock. and click New Sheet. 24 Click to place the floor plan on the right side of the sheet. 18 Click to the right of the wall to end the leader and specify the text start point. right-click Sheets (all). 20 Use the following illustration as a guide for entering the text annotations on the lower wall component. 19 Type the following text.

28 Click Window menu ➤ Close Hidden Windows. drag it onto the sheet. click Modify to end the command. 30 Click Window menu ➤ Tile.25 In the Project Browser. The floor plan and legend are added to the new sheet. 29 In the Project Browser. select 4th Floor Wall Types. under Legends. allowing you to select a component type in one drawing and then apply the type in the second drawing. 26 On the Design Bar. 354 | Chapter 8 Finishing the Sheets . under Floor Plans. Tile views in the drawing window 27 In the Project Browser. The open drawings are both visible. double-click 4th Floor Wall Types. and click to place it in the upper left corner of the sheet. double-click Level 4.

Match a component type 31 On the Tools toolbar. zoom to the lower right area of the floor plan including the patio divider wall. 34 Select the patio divider wall. 33 In the floor plan view. 35 On the View Control Bar. Notice that the eyedropper changes to filled. click (Match Type). Creating a Component Legend | 355 . select the Wall Type 2 component. Changing the detail level displays the hatching for each material of the wall component. select Detail Level: Medium. 32 In the 4th Floor Wall Types Legend view. The wall type in the floor plan matches wall type 2 from the Wall Type Legend. indicating that it captured the wall type properties.

you open a revision table in which you can add rows that represent a sequence of revisions. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson.36 Optionally. double-click Level 4. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Finishing-Sheets_in_progress. Using Revision Tracking Revit Architecture provides tools that enable you to track revisions to your project. click 37 Save the file. You can create a sequence of revisions. you can specify the numbering method for revisions in a project. and can then display the revisions in schedules that appear in the titleblock of each project sheet.rvt. unanticipated changes in construction conditions. In this exercise. 356 | Chapter 8 Finishing the Sheets . Setting Up a Revision Table There are likely to be changes to your construction documents after you have issued the original set of documents for bid or after you have received a signed contract. and you can add data such as release date and description to each revision. under Floor Plans. Specify a revision numbering method 1 In the Project Browser. These changes can be due to owner requests. Using the table. and you can draw revision clouds around elements in your project that have changed. You can use revision tags to notate the revision clouds. if you do not want to save the change to the wall type. or changes in building material availability. contractor inquiries.

yet as concise as possible. type a date. if the active revision is number 1. revision descriptions should be comprehensive. If you select Per Sheet. type Relocate 4th floor partition dividing walls. In most instances. you would turn off visibility only after a revision was issued. 5 For Description. For example. verify that Cloud and Tag is selected. Setting Up a Revision Table | 357 . 3 On the right side of the Sheet Issues/Revisions dialog. 7 Under Show. In general. all tags and schedules display the numeral 1. the revisions are numbered according to the sequence of revisions in the Revisions dialog. Add a revision to the project 4 For Date. When Issued is selected. When you use this option.2 Click Settings menu ➤ Revisions. verify that Per Project is selected. the revisions are numbered according to the sequence in which they are added to a sheet. This is the date the revisions are sent out for review. any revision cloud you draw to indicate this particular revision is not visible in the view in which you create it. the revision is locked and issued to the field. for Numbering. 6 Verify that Issued is cleared. If Visible is not selected.

rvt. You can draw multiple revision clouds for each revision. and click to reposition the divider closer to the upper wall. 6 On the Design Bar. including revision number and revision date. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Finishing-Sheets_in_progress. move the cursor up. and then indicate the changes graphically with a revision cloud. 2 Zoom in to the left area of the drawing to see the 4th Floor Balcony Divider. Revision clouds have read-only properties. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. 4 On the Edit toolbar. 9 Save the file. but each cloud is visible only in the view in which it is sketched. 3 Select the divider. under Floor Plans. you make changes to the project floor plan. double-click Level 4.8 Click OK. click (Move). 5 Select the divider. Sketching Revision Clouds In this exercise. 358 | Chapter 8 Finishing the Sheets . which are inherited from the revision table you created for the project. click Modify. You can sketch revision clouds in all views except 3D views. Modify a wall 1 In the Project Browser.

select Snaps Off. NOTE To turn off snaps when drawing a revision cloud. 10 Continue adding segments until the cloud encompasses the area that you changed. Sketching Revision Clouds | 359 . and click OK. In the Snaps dialog. click Revision Cloud. Revit Architecture is now in sketch mode. click Settings menu ➤ Snaps. 11 On the Design Bar. The revision cloud is displayed around the modified partition. click near the partition you moved. click Finish Sketch.Add a revision cloud 7 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 9 Click to end that segment and begin a new segment. and move the cursor clockwise to create a segment of the revision cloud. 8 In the drawing area.

13 Click Settings menu ➤ Object Styles. select 6. 16 Click OK. and then apply the tag to the revision cloud in the current drawing. 15 Under the Revision Clouds category. 14 In the Object Styles dialog. Tagging Revision Clouds In this exercise. for Line Weight. The tag number that is displayed in the drawing is based on the numbering method you specified when you set up the revision table in a previous exercise. 17 Save the file. Training File 360 | Chapter 8 Finishing the Sheets . click the Annotation Objects tab. you load a revision tag into the project.Modify revision cloud style 12 Select the revision cloud.

8 In the Tags dialog. Because you chose to number by project. Tag a revision cloud 9 On the Options Bar. you need to add one. under Floor Plans. 3 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. position the cursor just outside the revision cloud to the left.Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. the tag is displayed inside the cloud. click Tag ➤ By Category. 7 In the left pane of the dialog. select Leader.rfa. the cloud is tagged as number 1. and because the revision is the first in the project. Because there are no tags loaded for revision clouds. double-click Level 4. If the cursor is just inside the cloud. Training File Working with Revisions | 361 . m_Freighthouse_Flats-Finishing-Sheets_in_progress. The tag displays the revision number of the cloud. click Tags.rvt. 10 In the drawing area. 2 Zoom in to the area with the revision cloud. click Training Files. scroll down to Revision Clouds. 5 In the Tags dialog. 6 Click Load. click OK. Because a real-world project can undergo several revisions before it is completed. The number is based on the numbering method you specified when you set up the revision table. which creates a record of the revision and locks it from further changes. notice that M_Revision Tag is the loaded tag for Revision Clouds. Working with Revisions In this exercise. You then issue a revision. 12 Save the file. you view a sheet on which you place a revised view. and open Metric\Families\Annotations\M_Revision Tag. you create additional revisions in the revision table. 4 On the Options Bar. 11 Click to place the tag. Load a revision tag 1 In the Project Browser.

You do this by issuing the revision. After you make the necessary changes to the project and add the revised views to a sheet. 9 Click OK. 2 Zoom to the revision schedule in the sheet titleblock. type Modify Paving Area. and click OK. double-click A107 . 6 In the Sheet Issues/Revisions dialog. with the description Relocate Door. Create additional revisions 5 Click Settings menu ➤ Revisions.Unnamed. under Sheets. 7 For Description. Issue a revision 3 Click Settings menu ➤ Revisions. you can no longer modify it. you prevent further changes to the revision. View the revision schedule on a sheet 1 In the Project Browser. and enter a date for the revision. click Add. You can continue to add revisions.Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. The information you added to the revision table in a previous exercise is displayed in the revision schedule. 8 Add another revision row. NOTE After you issue a revision. Your project may have several revisions before it is completed.rvt. 362 | Chapter 8 Finishing the Sheets . select Issued. 4 For the Sequence 1 revision. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Finishing-Sheets_in_progress. and enter a date. A new row is added below the existing rows in the revision table. nor can you edit the sketch of the existing clouds. You cannot add revision clouds to the revision in the drawing area.

16 Add another revision cloud as shown. Information for all tagged revisions displays in the schedule. in the drawing area. 12 In the drawing area.Unnamed. double-click Level 4. for Revision. click to add a revision clouds. 21 Zoom in to the revision schedule in the titleblock. Tag the revision clouds 18 On the Drafting tab. and then specify the revision table sequence to alphabetic. under Sheets (all). click outside each of the two revision clouds you just drew.Relocate Door to the revision cloud. select Seq. 19 To add tags.Change revision scheme from numeric to alphabetic You place the new revisions on a sheet. Apply revisions to revision clouds 14 In the drawing area. 2 . 3 . 10 In the Project Browser. select the revision cloud. 13 Click Finish Sketch. Working with Revisions | 363 . double-click A107 . 20 On the Project Browser. apply Seq. 15 On the Options Bar. select Tag ➤ By Category. select Revision Cloud. 11 On the Drafting tab. 17 Using the same method learned previously.Modify Paving Area. under Floor Plans.

For each revision. and rotation) to the revision schedule. height. The revision schedule now uses alphabetic characters. beginning with "D". ■ ■ 24 In the Sequence Options dialog. you edit the titleblock family. select Alphabetic. for Sequence. Click Options. You want to change the numbering value from numeric to alphabetic for all sequences. for Numbering. You can modify the sequence of characters used for the alphabetic numbering scheme. You do this so that the revision can be changed. Edit the titleblock family The revision schedule is part of the titleblock family. 26 In the drawing area. delete the first 3 characters. clear Issued.Change the sequencing of revision to use alpha characters 22 Click Settings menu ➤ Revisions. 25 Click OK twice. select the titleblock. 23 In the Sheet Issues/Revisions dialog: ■ For Sequence 1. In order to make formatting changes (appearance. 364 | Chapter 8 Finishing the Sheets .

and press DELETE. 35 Select the existing schedule lines. 30 In the Element Properties dialog. 28 In the alert dialog. and delete the schedule lines because the table will be dynamically built. 38 In the Reload Family dialog. under Other. all sheets that use this titleblock in the project will be affected. click Edit. click Yes. and select Wide Lines for the outline type. on the Appearance tab: ■ ■ Under Graphics. click Load into Projects. Relocate revision schedule You relocate the revision schedule to the bottom of the revision area. 33 Select the schedule header. 31 In the Revision Properties dialog. click Modify. Clear Blank row before data. and then zoom in to the revision schedule. 34 On the Design Bar. 37 On the Family tab of the Design Bar. Select Outline. click Edit Family. and click Properties. 36 Drag the header to the bottom of the revision schedule area. for Build Schedule.27 On the Options Bar. and drag it above the schedule area. Reload the titleblock family into the project Because you changed the titleblock family. Select Grid lines. Modify the revision schedule properties 29 In the Project Browser. right-click Revision Schedule. expand Views (all) ➤ Schedules. select Bottom-up. Grid lines will now be dynamically added as the revision schedule is built. Working with Revisions | 365 . for Appearance. ■ ■ 32 Click OK twice. click Yes.

under Other. for Formatting. 48 Click the circular grip and drag it so that the schedule fills the revision area. select User defined. 43 In the Element Properties dialog. 46 Click OK twice. When the height property is variable. and the most current revisions display in the available rows. and click Properties. for Height. enter Rev. Rotate revision schedule to display it vertically 39 Using the same method learned previously. select the revision schedule. select 90° Counterclockwise. open the titleblock family for editing. 44 On the Formatting tab of the Revision Properties dialog. for Rotation on Sheet. Modify the properties of the revision schedule 42 In the Project Browser. the schedule is restricted to a specific size. 41 Drag the header to the right side of the titleblock.The revision schedule is now shown in a bottom-up format. and on the Options Bar. click Edit. 366 | Chapter 8 Finishing the Sheets . the schedule continues to add rows as revisions are created. Use grip editing to resize the revision schedule 47 In the drawing area. right-click Revision Schedule. 40 Select the revision schedule header. for Heading. 45 On the Appearance tab. With a user-defined height..

Load revised schedule into the project 49 On the Family tab of the Design Bar. you learn to import information (such as images. click Yes. The modified revision schedule displays on the project sheet. Importing from Other Applications In this lesson. and spreadsheets) from other applications into a project. 51 Save the file. 50 In the Reload Family dialog. text. Importing from Other Applications | 367 . click Load into Projects.

Title Sheet. 368 | Chapter 8 Finishing the Sheets . you import a logo image in JPG format into a project. and place it on a sheet. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. under Sheets. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson. you import text from another application using a cut and paste function to populate a text object on a sheet. click to add text without a leader. 1 In the Project Browser. 3 On the Options Bar.rvt. 6 Click File menu ➤ Save. and open Common\Freighthouse Logo. click Training Files. click Text.Importing Image Files In this exercise.Title Sheet. double-click T . Create a text element on the title sheet 1 In the Project Browser. Importing Text Documents In this exercise.JPG. double-click T . 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 2 Click File menu ➤ Import/Link ➤ Image. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Finishing-Sheets_in_progress. for Leader. click Modify. 4 Click and drag to place a text box on the right side of the sheet. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Finishing-Sheets_in_progress.rvt. under Sheets. 5 On the Design Bar. 3 In the left pane of the Open dialog. 4 Click in the upper right area of the sheet to place the logo.

Copy the text 5 Open the Training Files\Common\Bidding Statement. 6 Select the text. NOTE Some formatting may be required after the text is placed in Revit Architecture. The text is pasted into the new text box on the sheet. with the new text box still selected.doc text file in another window. Training File Importing Spreadsheets | 369 . 10 Zoom in to view the pasted text. 11 Save the file. 7 Click Edit menu ➤ Copy. Paste the text on the sheet 8 In the Revit Architecture window. you have existing information in a spreadsheet format and would like to use it in the project. Importing Spreadsheets In this exercise. click Edit menu ➤ Paste from Clipboard. The only way to do this is to convert the spreadsheet file to a raster format (JPG or BMP) and import it as an image. 9 On the Design Bar. click Modify.

4 Under Printer. and click Save. and saved as Fixture Schedule. This step has been completed for you. click File menu ➤ Import/Link ➤ Image.Unit 18. NOTE You need to print/export the spreadsheet to a raster format. select the document writer. click File menu ➤ Print. This process may vary from system to system. 7 In the Revit Architecture window. 10 On the Design Bar. double-click A102 . click Desktop. Training Files\Common\Lighting Fixtures. 8 In the left pane of the Import Image dialog.mdi. 3 In Microsoft Excel. for Name. click Modify. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Finishing-Sheets_in_progress. This exercise demonstrates a common method. under Sheets.Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. 2 Open the Microsoft Excel worksheet.rvt. you could use a screen capture utility to save the worksheet in BMP or JPG format. for File name. and open Common\Fixture Schedule. 5 Click OK. Now that you have the worksheet in a raster format. type Fixture Schedule.JPG. 370 | Chapter 8 Finishing the Sheets . click Training Files.JPG. 12 Save the file. 1 In the Project Browser.xls. 9 Click to place the image on the sheet. 6 In the left pane of the Save the file as dialog. 11 Zoom in to see the Fixture Schedule.

The drawings include the aviary and observation area of the site. for the sanctuary will not fit onto a plotted sheet as one plan. The large floor plan. 371 . To effectively document this project. as well as a large lab building. called dependent views. you work with a large project for a bird sanctuary.Using Dependent Views 9 In this tutorial. you break up the plan into sections. or footprint.

Dependent view of lab building Dependent view of aviary and observation platforms Dependent views can be placed on sheets for documentation purposes. 372 | Chapter 9 Using Dependent Views .

Using Dependent Views in Documentation In this lesson. click Training Files. you ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Create split dependent views of a large floor plan view Add a matchline to the primary view to indicate where the view is split Place dependent views on sheets Add view references to the primary view to link to dependent views Apply dependent view specifications to other views Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open.rvt Using Dependent Views in Documentation | 373 . In the left pane of the Open dialog. and open Metric\m_Dependent_Views. you ■ ■ Create split dependent views of a large floor plan and elevation Annotate the primary view to indicate where the view is split and to provide links to the dependent views Apply the specifications of the dependent views to other views in the project Add dependent views to sheets for documentation ■ ■ Using Dependent Views for Floor Plan Views In this exercise.

select the crop region. 374 | Chapter 9 Using Dependent Views . click Zoom To Fit. and click Rename. enter Level 2 . and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate as a Dependent. 6 In the drawing area.Create dependent views 1 In the Project Browser. under Floor Plans. The annotation crop is the exterior crop region. for Name. and the model crop is the interior crop region. and click OK.Aviary. and on the Zoom flyout of the View toolbar. 7 Select the inside (model crop) control on the right and drag it toward the center of the view to crop out the lab building. 5 Click in the drawing area. right-click Dependent on Level 2. double-click Level 2. 2 In the Project Browser. 3 In the Project Browser. under Level 2. The following image shows a plan view with the model and annotation crop regions visible. The dependent view opens. right-click Level 2. 4 In the Rename View dialog.

confining the view to the upper-left area of the drawing (the aviary).8 Click the inside control on the bottom and drag it up. Using Dependent Views for Floor Plan Views | 375 . click (Hide Crop Region). 9 On the View Control Bar.

Labs. 376 | Chapter 9 Using Dependent Views . click Zoom To Fit. 13 In the Rename View dialog. 12 In the Project Browser. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate as a Dependent. and on the Zoom flyout. and click OK. 15 Select the crop region. click Zoom To Fit. and click Rename. for Name. 14 Click in the drawing area. right-click Dependent on Level 2. enter Level 2 .10 Click in the drawing area. 17 Select the outside control on the left and drag it to the left to reveal the notes. and on the Zoom flyout. 11 In the Project Browser. 16 Use the inside controls to crop the view to the lower-right building (the labs). right-click Level 2.

22 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. under Floor Plans. 23 Draw the matchline by specifying the following points: ■ Click above and to the right of the intersection of the lab building and the aviary. Add matchline to indicate split view 21 In the Project Browser. (Align with the second column of lab cubicles. 18 On the Design Bar.) Using Dependent Views for Floor Plan Views | 377 . click Zoom To Fit. Matchlines are annotation lines that you add to a view to indicate where a view is split for dependent views. 20 Click in the drawing area.The outside controls adjust the annotation crop region. click Modify. click (Hide Crop Region). double-click Level 2. 19 On the View Control Bar. click Matchline. and on the Zoom flyout.

Click above the left corner of the lab building.■ ■ ■ ■ Move the cursor down and click just above the lab building. 378 | Chapter 9 Using Dependent Views . and click. Click just below the lower intersection of the lab building and the aviary. Move the cursor left about 4800 mm. click Finish Sketch. 24 On the Design Bar.

click the Annotation Objects tab. expand Sheets. under Floor Plans. select Double Dash. for Name. for Line Weight. 30 In the Select a Titleblock dialog. 33 In the Project Browser. enter Level 2 Aviary. Using Dependent Views for Floor Plan Views | 379 . 28 For Line Pattern. right-click A101 . and click OK. click Level 2 . click OK to accept the default titleblock. 26 In the Object Styles dialog. 32 In the Sheet Title dialog.25 Click Settings menu ➤ Object Styles. 31 In the Project Browser. and click Rename. 34 Click to place the view in the center of the sheet. Create sheets and place dependent views 29 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Sheet.Unnamed. and click OK. and drag it onto the sheet. select 9.Aviary. 27 Under Matchline.

38 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. for Target view. verify that Floor Plan: Level 2 . double-click Level 2.Labs dependent view on the sheet. 39 On the Options Bar. click Modify. rename the sheet Level 2 Labs. 380 | Chapter 9 Using Dependent Views . click View Reference.35 On the Design Bar. under Floor Plans. 40 Click to the left of the top of the matchline.Aviary is selected. and place the Level 2 . 36 Use the same method to create another sheet. Add reference annotations to sheets 37 In the Project Browser. You add view references near the matchline to annotate and link to the dependent views.

click Zoom To Fit. 44 On the Design Bar. 42 Click to the right of the top of the matchline. 41 On the Options Bar. Using Dependent Views for Floor Plan Views | 381 . 45 On the Zoom flyout. 43 Use the same method to add View References above (A101) and below (A102) the lower-left end of the matchline.Labs. NOTE Double-clicking a view reference opens the dependent view that it references.The Sheet number of the dependent view displays to the left of the matchline. select Floor Plan: Level 2 . click Modify. for Target view.

Notice that the view reference for the aviary does not display in the aviary dependent view. under Floor Plans. 382 | Chapter 9 Using Dependent Views . 49 If. double-click Level 2 . the tags for Cubicles 3 and 14 display. and drag it slightly to the right to expand the annotation region so you can see the view reference. right-click. click (Show Crop Region). 47 On the View Control Bar. after modifying the annotation crop region.46 In the Project Browser. click the far right control. select the room tag for Cubicle 3 (upper-right room tag) in the annotation area.Aviary. 48 Select the crop region. NOTE View references display in all views except for the view that it is referencing. and click Hide in view ➤ Elements.

leaving 4 rooms visible in the view. 52 In the Project Browser. and click Apply Dependent Views. you can apply the view and crop region specifications to parallel views of the same scale. 51 On the View Control Bar. 55 On the Zoom flyout. Using Dependent Views for Floor Plan Views | 383 . 54 In the Project Browser. click Zoom To Fit. 56 Double-click Dependent on Level 1. 53 In the Select Views dialog. click Apply dependent view settings to other plans (Hide Crop Region). and double-click Dependent (2) on Level 1. right-click Level 2. New dependent views display in the Project Browser under the primary view.50 Use the same method to hide Cubicle 14 (directly below Cubicle 3). under Floor Plans. and click OK. but are not placed on sheets. Notice that the matchline and crop regions from Level 2 are applied to Level 1. After you have set up dependent view configuration for one view. select all views in the list. expand Level 1.

57 On the Zoom flyout. you ■ ■ ■ ■ Create dependent split views of an elevation view Annotate the primary view to indicate where the view is split Place dependent views on a sheet Add view references to the primary view to link to dependent views Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. 384 | Chapter 9 Using Dependent Views . and open Metric\m_Dependent_Views. right-click South Elevation. click Training Files. 2 In the Project Browser. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate as a Dependent. In the left pane of the Open dialog. expand Elevations (Building Elevation). The matchline is already placed in the view. Using Dependent Views for Elevation Views In this exercise.rvt Create dependent views 1 In the Project Browser. click Zoom To Fit. and double-click South Elevation.

right-click Dependent on South Elevation.The dependent view opens. 5 In the drawing area. 9 In the Project Browser. 6 Select the inside crop region control on the right. enter South Elevation . 10 In the Rename View dialog. and drag it toward the center of the drawing. right-click South Elevation. enter South Elevation .Right. and click Rename. click (Hide Crop Region). right-click Dependent on South Elevation. 3 In the Project Browser. cropping the view to the lab building. for Name. 4 In the Rename View dialog. and drag it toward the center of the view. expand South Elevation. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate as a Dependent. for Name. select the Crop Region. Using Dependent Views for Elevation Views | 385 . 8 In the Project Browser. 11 Select the crop region.Left. cropping the view to the aviary. and click Rename. 12 Select the inside crop region control on the left. and click OK. and click OK. 7 On the View Control Bar.

13 On the View Control Bar, click

(Hide Crop Region).

Create a sheet and place both dependent views on the sheet 14 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Sheet. 15 In the Select a Titleblock dialog, click OK to accept the default titleblock. 16 In the Project Browser, under Sheets, right-click A103 Unnamed, and click Rename. 17 In the Sheet Title dialog, for Name, enter South Elevation, and click OK. 18 In the Project Browser, under Elevations, click South Elevation - Left, and drag it onto the sheet. 19 Click to place the elevation view at the top of the sheet.

20 In the Project Browser, under Elevations, click South Elevation - Right, and drag it onto the sheet. 21 Click to place the elevation view at the bottom of the sheet.

386 | Chapter 9 Using Dependent Views

22 On the Design Bar, click Modify. 23 In the Project Browser, under Elevations, double-click South Elevation. 24 On the Views tab of the Design Bar, click View Reference. 25 On the Options Bar, for Target view, verify that Elevation: South Elevation - Left is selected. 26 Click to the left of the top of the matchline at the center of the elevation. 27 Click to the left of the bottom of the matchline.

28 On the Options Bar, for Target view, select Elevation: South Elevation - Right. 29 Click to the right of the top and the bottom of the matchline.

Using Dependent Views for Elevation Views | 387

30 On the Design Bar, click Modify. 31 In the Project Browser, under Sheets (all), double-click A103 - South Elevation. NOTE If the view references are not visible, you can modify the annotation region for the dependent view from the sheet. Right-click the view, and click Activate View. Select the crop region, and use the annotation crop controls to modify it.

388 | Chapter 9 Using Dependent Views

Viewing and Rendering

389

390

Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs

10

In this tutorial, you learn to use the rendering features in Revit Architecture 2009 to create rendered interior and exterior views of a building information model. You also learn how to create and record animated walkthroughs of a model.

Rendering an Exterior View
In this lesson, you learn how to create an exterior perspective view of a pool house building model and create rendered images for daytime and nighttime lighting.
Daytime rendering of the pool house

391

Nighttime rendering of the pool house

You learn to create and apply materials to the building model, add trees to the building site, and create the perspective view that you want to render. After you create the perspective view, you specify options that define the model environment, and then render a final exterior view.

Applying Materials and Textures to the Building Model
In this exercise, you learn how to view and modify the material that is applied to a building component in a building model. You also learn how to create a new material and apply it to a building component. You work with a building model that already has materials applied to it.

In this exercise, you:
■ ■ ■

change the render appearance of the wood material applied to the exterior screen wall of the pool house. change the material of the pad of the pool house from the default material to concrete. define a new black anodized aluminum material and apply it to the curtain wall mullions of the pool house wall.

When you complete these changes, you render a region of the building that includes the exterior wall, the pad, and the curtain wall to view and verify the material and texture changes.

392 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs

Training File
■ ■

Click File menu ➤ Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Common\c_Pool_House.rvt.

View the finish material of the screen wall 1 Verify that the 3D view of the pool house is displayed.

2 Zoom in to the wall of the house near the pool.

Applying Materials and Textures to the Building Model | 393

3 In the drawing area, select the wooden screen wall, and on the Options Bar, click Properties).

(Element

You check the construction of the screen walls to determine the material assigned to the wall, so you can change the render appearance for the material.

4 In the Element Properties dialog, click Edit/New. 5 Under Construction, for Structure, click Edit. 6 In the Edit Assembly dialog, verify that the material for Structure [1] is Wood - Teak, Solid. 7 Click OK 3 times. Change the render appearance of the wood material 8 Click Settings menu ➤ Materials. The Wood - Teak, Solid material is currently a light stained teak. The design calls for the use of a dark stained, satin-finished teak. 9 In the Materials dialog, for Materials, select Wood - Teak, Solid. 10 On the Render Appearance tab, click Replace.

394 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs

11 In the Render Appearance Library dialog, click Wood Teak Stained Dark Medium Gloss, and click OK. You do not want the medium gloss finish, but it is the closest material to what you want. You make modifications to the settings for this material to more closely match the desired finish. 12 On the Render Appearance tab of the Materials dialog, for Finish, select Satin Varnish. 13 Click Update Preview, and click OK. The Update Preview option provides a real time rendering of the changes to the material. It can be used for visual feedback to see if the setting produces the desired results. Change the material of the pad from the default material to concrete 14 In the drawing area, select the pad, and on the Options Bar, click (Element Properties).

The material assignment for the pad is currently set to By Category, which is using a default material. You change the material assignment to use a concrete with a straight broom finish.

15 In the Element Properties dialog, click Edit/New. 16 Under Construction, for Structure, click Edit. 17 In the Edit Assembly dialog, for the Structure [1] Material value, click <By Category>, and click . 18 In the Materials dialog, select Concrete - Cast-in-Place Concrete. 19 On the Render Appearance tab, for Finish, select Broom Straight, and click Update Preview. 20 Click the Graphics tab, and review the material patterns. 21 Click OK 4 times. 22 On the Design Bar, click Modify.

Applying Materials and Textures to the Building Model | 395

Define a new material and apply it to the mullions 23 Zoom in to view the curtain wall mullions.

24 Click Settings menu ➤ Materials. You create a black anodized aluminum material, and apply it to the mullions of the pool house wall. 25 In the Materials dialog, select Metal - Aluminum. You use an existing material as a template to create the black anodized aluminum material. 26 At the bottom left corner of the Materials dialog, click (Duplicate).

27 In the Duplicate Revit Material dialog, for Name, enter Metal - Aluminum, Anodized - Black, and click OK. 28 On the Graphics tab of the Materials dialog, select Use Render Appearance for Shading. By selecting this option, the color used for this material in shaded views is an average color defined by the render appearance. 29 On the Render Appearance tab, click Replace. 30 In the Render Appearance Library, click Aluminum Anodized Black, and click OK. 31 On the Graphics tab of the Materials dialog, review the material appearance (color and pattern), and click OK.

396 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs

32 Click Settings menu ➤ Object Styles. The mullions and frame for the wall are defined as By Category. You change the material used by the curtain wall mullion category. 33 In the Object Styles dialog, for Curtain Wall Mullions, select the Material value, and click 34 In the Materials dialog, select Metal - Aluminum, Anodized - Black. 35 Click OK twice. .

36 Zoom to fit the drawing in the view.

Render a region of the model to view the material changes 37 On the View Control Bar, click 39 Select the rendering crop boundary. (Show Rendering Dialog).

38 At the top of the Rendering dialog, select Region.

Applying Materials and Textures to the Building Model | 397

40 Adjust the extents of the region by dragging the borders in tight around the areas where the materials changed (pool house screen, mullions, and pad). NOTE The smaller the region, the faster the image renders. It is a good practice to define a precise render region until you are ready to create the final rendered image.

41 Zoom in to the region in order to see the results of the rendering test more clearly.

398 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs

42 Specify options in the Rendering dialog:

Under Quality, for Setting, select Medium. Several quality settings are available. The higher the quality, the longer the rendering process will take. Refer to the Revit Architecture Online Help for best practices for optimizing quality and output settings. Under Lighting, for Scheme, select Exterior: Sun only. For Sun, select Sunlight from top left.

■ ■

43 Click Render. The Rendering Progress dialog displays, providing information on the status and duration of the rendering process.

44 To display the building model, after the rendering process completes, on the Rendering dialog, under Display, click Show the model. 45 Close the Rendering dialog. 46 Click File menu ➤ Save, and save the project as c_Pool_House_in_progress.rvt. 47 Proceed to the next exercise, Adding Trees to the Site on page 399.

Adding Trees to the Site
In this exercise, you place trees and shrubs on the building site in order to provide a more realistic context for rendering the project.

Adding Trees to the Site | 399

In a later exercise, when you render an exterior view of the model, the RPC model is used in the rendering. NOTE For simplicity, imperial components and units are used in this lesson. Specific types and sizes of trees are referenced in the steps, but any type and size can be used. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise, c_Pool_House_in_progress.rvt. Add shrubs and trees to the site 1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (all), expand Floor Plans, and double-click Site.

2 Zoom in so you can easily view the area surrounding the pool house and walkway.

400 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs

3 On the Site tab of the Design Bar, click Site Component. TIP If the Site tab is not displayed, right-click in the Design Bar, and click Site. 4 In the Type Selector, select RPC Shrub : Yew 2'-4''. NOTE If planting families are not loaded into a project, they can be loaded from the Content Library. See Loading Families in the Revit Architecture 2009 Online Help. 5 Place 4 shrubs to the right of the patio, near the walkway, as shown. (Exact placement is not important.)

6 In the Type Selector, select RPC Tree - Deciduous : Red Maple - 30', and place 2 trees in the project, similar to the locations shown.

Adding Trees to the Site | 401

7 In the Type Selector, select RPC Tree - Deciduous : Scarlet Oak - 42', and place a tree to the left of the pool house between the 2 maple trees.

Create a tree type and add it to the site 8 In the Type Selector, select RPC Tree - Deciduous : Honey Locust - 25', and on the Options Bar, click (Element Properties).

9 In the Element Properties dialog, click Edit/New. You change the size of the existing Honey Locust tree family. 10 In the Type Properties dialog, click Rename. 11 In the Rename dialog, for New, enter Honey Locust - 18', and click OK. 12 In the Type Properties dialog, for Height, enter 18'. 13 Click OK twice. 14 Click in the drawing area to the right of the pool house to place the tree.

402 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs

Creating a Perspective View | 403 . click Modify.15 On the Design Bar. Creating a Perspective View on page 403. Creating a Perspective View In this exercise. you define the exterior perspective view of the building model that you want to render. 16 Click File menu ➤ Save. 17 Proceed to the next exercise.

The perspective view displays.Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. Specify the second point in the upper left corner of the pool house to define the target point of the camera. c_Pool_House_in_progress. click Camera. on the View tab of the Design Bar. ■ Exact placement is not important because you modify the view as required. 2 Add the camera to the view by specifying points for the camera position and the camera target point: ■ Specify the first point along the curve of the walkway facing the pool house to position the camera.rvt. 404 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . Place a camera in the site view 1 With the Site view open.

the triangle that represents the field of vision can be adjusted. Creating a Perspective View | 405 . as necessary. Adjust the back clipping plane so that it is beyond the wall in the yard. The camera can also be moved along the walkway to get the desired perspective view. Adjust the field of vision and back clipping plane 5 In the Project Browser. as shown. With the camera shown. under Floor Plans. and adjust the field of vision. right-click 3D View 1. in the Project Browser.3 Zoom out. double-click Site. If the camera is not shown in the view. Depending on camera placement. 4 Adjust the crop boundary to display the entire building and some of the pool in the foreground. and select the crop boundary. and click Show Camera. the back wall of the yard may be cut off.

and make any final adjustments to the crop boundary to improve image composition. 11 Proceed to the next exercise. right-click 3D View 1. enter Exterior . Creating the Exterior Rendering on page 407. double-click Exterior . and click Rename.Day. 8 In the Project Browser. under 3D Views. 10 Save the file.6 In the Project Browser. and click OK. 9 Zoom to fit the perspective view in the window.Day to open the view. 7 In the Rename View dialog. 406 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs .

under 3D Views. and render a daytime view of the exterior. you specify the time and location settings for the rendering. modify render settings. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. double-click Exterior .rvt.Day. Display the perspective view 1 In the Project Browser. You then duplicate the view. and create lighting groups for a nighttime view of the exterior. Creating the Exterior Rendering | 407 .Creating the Exterior Rendering In this exercise. c_Pool_House_in_progress.

select Sky: Cloudy. 3pm. NOTE If a background image is required.Specify rendering settings for a daytime view 2 On the View Control Bar. 6 Click OK twice. 7 In the Rendering dialog. select Edit/New. You adjust cloud settings as required. under Background. enter Spring Equinox .Santa Monica. export the resulting image in PNG or TIFF format. 8 Under Quality. for New. and click Render. In this case. The PNG and TIFF formats place the chosen background on an alpha channel for easier manipulation during photoediting. see Re-orienting the Project on page 447. 4 On the Still tab of the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. for Sun. select Medium. For information on how the rendering/sun relates to the location settings. 408 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . the sky will be a procedural sky based on cloud settings and time of day. and click Rename. click (Show Rendering Dialog). under Lighting. 5 In the Rename dialog. for Setting. You create a location and time for the rendering. 3 In the Rendering dialog. select Spring Equinox.

you can switch between the rendered view and the model view as long as the Revit Architecture session is open. 10 In the Rendering dialog. select Portable Network Graphics (*. click Desktop. After the image is rendered. click Show the model. Creating the Exterior Rendering | 409 . 12 In the Save Image dialog: ■ ■ ■ In the left pane.9 In the Rendering dialog. Export the rendered image to an external file 11 In the Rendering dialog. click Export. click Show the rendering. Click Save. 13 Close the Rendering dialog. The image file is saved to the Desktop for later reference.png). For Files of type.

Night view open. 22 Using the same method. click New. for Name. 410 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . (Show Rendering 17 In the Rendering dialog. dialog. click New. for Name. and click Move to Group. add 30 :Sconce Light . under Ungrouped Lights. press and hold SHIFT. under Lighting. under Group Options. under Ungrouped Lights. highlight 9 :Sconce Light .120V.Day.Night.Flat Round : 60W . click Dialog). you duplicate the view and change the settings.120V through 35 :Sconce Light . select Exterior: Artificial only. and click OK. To create a similar view using different rendering settings.Night. 27 In the Rendering dialog. 23 In the Artificial Lights dialog. and click OK.Specify rendering settings for a nighttime view 14 In the Project Browser. for Scheme. and click Artificial Lights. enter Pool House Lights. 26 In the Artificial Lights dialog. under Group Options. click Render. 19 In the New Light Group dialog. right-click Exterior . select the first light. You change the rendering settings to create a nighttime rendering of the same view.120V through 14 :Sconce Light . To select a sequential list. under 3D Views. 20 In the Artificial Lights dialog. Create lighting groups 18 In the Artificial Lights .120V to the Pool Lights group. 15 Rename the Copy of Exterior .Flat Round : 60W . enter Pool Lights. 25 Using the same method.Day view to Exterior .Flat Round : 60W . 21 In the Light Groups dialog. verify that Pool Lights is selected. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. 24 In the New Light Group dialog. and select the last light. and click OK. Lighting groups allow greater control over lighting schemes used in renderings. add 16 :Light Fixture through 29 :Light Fixture to the Pool House Lights group.Flat Round : 60W . on the View Control Bar. 16 With the Exterior . click OK.Exterior .

32 Save the file. you create a nighttime and a daytime rendering of the interior view of the building model that you worked with in the previous lesson. 29 In the Exposure Control dialog. you change the brightness of the exposure. and click OK. for Exposure Value. and then switch between the views by clicking Show the rendering. enter 4. but the other settings can be modified as well to control the final rendering.Adjust the exposure 28 In the Rendering dialog. Rendering an Interior View | 411 . Rendering an Interior View on page 411. under Image. After the image is rendered. the exposure can be modified to improve the output. 30 In the Rendering dialog. click Show the model. 31 Close the Rendering dialog. Settings can be changed at any time within the Revit Architecture session. click Adjust Exposure. 33 Proceed to the next lesson. Rendering an Interior View In this lesson. In this example.

412 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . and finally. define the perspective view and rendering settings. you add an RPC person to the interior view that you render in a later exercise.Draft nighttime rendering of the interior High quality daytime rendering of the interior To create the rendered view. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. c_Pool_House_in_progress. you add ArchVision® realpeople (RPC content) to the interior of the pool house. render the views.rvt. RPC people are represented by a 2D symbol in plan view and resemble real people only when rendered in a 3D view. Adding RPC People In this exercise.

click Modify. ■ (Rotate). the person’s line of sight. select RPC Female : YinYin. click 7 Rotate the figure: The pointed portion of the symbol represents the front of the figure. 6 Select the figure. 4 In the Type Selector. under Floor Plans. Exact placement is not important. Adding RPC People | 413 . double-click Level 1. 5 On the Design Bar. 3 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 2 Zoom in to the pool house.Add an RPC figure to the view 1 In the Project Browser. click Component. and place the component inside the pool house. but place the figure close to the front of the vanity so that her reflection displays in the mirror after the scene is rendered. and on the Edit toolbar. Click to set the rotate start point at the line of sight.

the reflection of RPC content is turned off in order to enhance rendering performance. the reflective properties must be turned on for the family type. under Parameters. 10 In the Type Properties dialog.■ Rotate clockwise about 20 degrees. select Cast Reflections. on the Options Bar. 12 Click OK 3 times. under Identity Data. click Edit. In order to see the figure’s reflection. 11 In the Render Appearance Properties dialog. Enable reflective properties for RPC content 8 With the RPC figure selected. By default. click Edit/New. 14 Save the file. click Modify. click (Element Properties). for Render Appearance Properties. 414 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . and click so that the figure is angled toward the vanity. If reflections of RPC content are important to the rendering. you can enable this option. 13 On the Design Bar. 9 In the Element Properties dialog.

Exact placement is not important because you will adjust the crop boundary of the view in later steps. Add a camera 1 On the View tab of the Design Bar. click Camera. you create the interior perspective view that you will render in the final exercise in this lesson. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise.15 Proceed to the next exercise. and using a section box to limit the geometry included in the rendering process. You define the interior perspective by placing a camera. You place a camera into the view to create an interior perspective. Creating the Interior Perspective View In this exercise. Creating the Interior Perspective View | 415 . c_Pool_House_in_progress. Click outside of the pool house to the left to place the target point. Creating the Interior Perspective View on page 415.rvt. 2 Add the camera to the view by specifying points for the camera position and target point: ■ ■ Click inside the lower right corner of the pool house to place the camera.

The perspective view displays. select Section Box. right-click 3D View 1. 6 Zoom out so that you can see the selection box. under 3D Views. 4 In the Project Browser. and click OK. under Extents. and click Properties. 416 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . Add a section box to limit the extents of the rendered view 3 Zoom to fit the view in the window. You can use a section box to limit the geometry included in a rendering. 5 In the Element Properties dialog.

10 Click Window menu ➤ Tile. in addition to the 3D view. 9 In the Project Browser. under Elevations (Building Elevations). Creating the Interior Perspective View | 417 . 8 In the Project Browser. 11 In the 3D view. double-click South. In order to accurately adjust the section box. under Floor Plans. you display an elevation/section view and a plan view. double-click Level 1.7 Click Window menu ➤ Close Hidden Windows. select the section box.

select the section box. 13 In the South Elevation view. size the box as shown. right-click. 14 In the 3D view. and click Hide in view ➤ Category. size the box as shown. 418 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs .12 In the floor plan view.

and curtain walls.15 Maximize the 3D view. Creating the Interior Rendering on page 419. 16 Zoom to fit the view in the window. 18 Proceed to the next exercise. 17 Save the file. and adjust the crop boundary to match the illustration. To create a daytime view. Training File Creating the Interior Rendering | 419 . you define daylight portals for the glazed panels of the curtain wall. Daylight portals improve the quality of light that shines through windows. and render the interior view. you define artificial lighting and render a nighttime view of the interior. doors that contain windows or glass. Creating the Interior Rendering In this exercise.

Because the exterior pool lights will not have an effect on this rendering. for Setting.rvt. right-click 3D View 1. and click OK. select Interior: Artificial only. Using light controls and lighting groups can help to define multiple lighting conditions for views. 2 In the Rename View dialog. and click OK. click (Show Rendering Dialog). you turn them off for this scene. the view can be rendered at a higher quality level. for Scheme. enter Interior . and click Rename. and render the view to check lighting levels and material selections. 5 Click Artificial Lights. After these settings are established. You can specify a lower quality. 6 In the Artificial Lights dialog. under Lighting.Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. 8 In the Rendering dialog. The Interior: Artificial only option defines a baseline for the exposure and other settings for an interior rendering without daylight. 4 In the Rendering dialog. clear Pool Lights. under 3D Views. These settings can be adjusted after the rendering is complete using the Adjust Exposure option. click Render. 3 On the View Control Bar. select Draft. 7 Under Quality. 420 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . c_Pool_House_in_progress.Night. Define lighting for a nighttime view 1 In the Project Browser.

you must create a custom setting. 11 Rename the copied view to Interior . 13 In the Rendering dialog. You create a view for the interior during the day. 3pm. right-click Interior . 16 Scroll to the bottom of the dialog. for Sun.Day. see the Revit Architecture Online Help. select Curtain Walls.Santa Monica. 15 In the Render Quality Settings dialog. The daylight portals help to further refine this daylight into a more realistic rendered effect. click Copy To Custom. in order to turn on daylight portals. You can duplicate the view for each lighting condition/time of day you want to render. for Daylight Portal Options.9 Close the Rendering dialog. IMPORTANT Enabling daylight portals can drastically increase rendering times. NOTE The custom setting is only applied to this view. By default they are turned off. In this case. (Show Rendering Dialog). Specify rendering settings 12 On the View Control Bar. click 14 For Setting. for Scheme. For sunlit interiors. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. Create an interior day view 10 In the Project Browser. the daylight portals can be turned on. select Region. 17 In the Rendering dialog. This process must be repeated if you want to use custom settings in other views. select Interior: Sun only. and click OK.Night. select Spring Equinox . You have to copy a preset scheme to your custom settings in order to make changes. The preset schemes are read-only. but the space will receive standard daylighting. For more information on daylight portals. and click Render. select Edit. Creating the Interior Rendering | 421 .

Notice that the speckling on the wooden column in the foreground is reflecting too much light. Modify the column material 21 In the drawing area. click Adjust Exposure. For Saturation. 20 In the Rendering dialog. select the column on the right. 19 In the Exposure Control dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Exposure Value. enter 10. click Show the model. click Properties). and on the Options Bar. and close the Rendering dialog. under Image. you adjust the material of the column to improve the effect. Click OK. View the properties of the column and note that the assigned material is Wood. (Element 422 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . In the next steps. enter 1.18 In the Rendering dialog.

Create a print quality rendering 27 On the View Control Bar. 23 With the column still selected. Creating the Interior Rendering | 423 . 24 In the Materials dialog. For Bump. 30 In the drawing area. and on the Options Bar.6. click (Show Rendering Dialog). move the slider to the right until the value is approximately 5. The rendered output can be set to a printed ratio and the printed size of the output as well as the DPI for the image can be controlled. 31 In the Crop Region Size dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Change.22 In the Element Properties dialog. 29 In the Rendering dialog. For Rotate. You change the varnish setting. click Settings menu ➤ Materials. and click Render. select High. for Setting. After you use the test renderings to verify that you made the correct lighting and material selection. 25 Specify options on the Render Appearance tab: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Finish. For Width. 32 In the Rendering dialog. select Unfinished. 28 In the Rendering dialog. For Amount. add a bump map to create texture. and rotate the material so that the grain of the wood runs vertically along the column. you can define the output and quality settings for final output. and click OK. select Wood. select the crop boundary. enter 90. select Scale (locked proportions). the render time increases significantly. for Resolution. 26 Click Update Preview. click OK. click the dimensions for Size. Click OK. As size and DPI are increased. under Output Settings. enter 5''. clear Region. select Printer. select Based on wood grain.

independent of the Revit Architecture software. You can edit the walkthrough path by selecting and moving the key frames. By completing the two rendering lessons included in this tutorial. Each point becomes a key frame in the walkthrough. Usually. and you create it by specifying points that create the spline. you rendered an exterior and an interior view. The walkthrough path is a spline. but you can also define it in a 3D. A walkthrough is created in a 3D perspective view by default. You learned to create perspective views suitable for rendering and to modify rendering options in order to optimize the final output. Additional frames that comprise the walkthrough are created between the key frames. elevation. Creating and Recording Walkthroughs In this lesson.The rendered image displays. you define the walkthrough path in a plan view. 33 Close the exercise file with or without saving. you can also specify the height of the camera along the walkthrough path. you can select one of the following display options for the building model in your walkthrough: ■ ■ ■ Wireframe Hidden Line (wireframe view with hidden lines) Shading 424 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . or section view. The file can now be exported or saved to the Revit project. but you can also create it in a 3D orthographic view. Recording a Walkthrough After you create a walkthrough. In a plan view. you can record it by exporting it to an AVI file that you can play with any available video player. you learn how to create and record animated walkthroughs of your building models in Revit Architecture 2009. Creating and Editing a Walkthrough The first step in creating a walkthrough is to define the walkthrough path. which is the path that a camera will follow through the building model. When you export your walkthrough to an AVI.

click Training Files. Creating a Walkthrough | 425 . and open Common\c_Townhouse. you learn how to create and edit a walkthrough of the first floor of a townhouse. You create a walkthrough that begins in the breakfast room of the townhouse. on the Options Bar. click Walkthrough. expand Views (all). In the left pane of the Open dialog. If you prefer to use metric values. Create a walkthrough of the first floor of the building model 1 In the Project Browser. TIP If the tab that you need does not display in the Design Bar. proceeds through the dining room. and double-click 1st Floor. and change unit formats as desired. expand Floor Plans. and click to specify the start point (the first key frame) of the walkthrough. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open.rvt. 3 To create the walkthrough in a 3D perspective view. and ends in the far corner of the living room. 5 Specify 4 additional points to define key frame positions on the walkthrough path as shown. verify that Perspective is selected. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. right-click in the Design Bar.■ ■ Shading with Edges Rendering Creating a Walkthrough In this exercise. click Settings ➤ Project Units. NOTE Some imperial values are used by default in this exercise. and click the tab in the context menu. 4 Move the cursor under the text label in the Breakfast room.

Your frame may look a bit different from the frame in the illustration because the walkthrough path is not precisely the same. surrounded by a crop boundary with grips as shown. 426 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . and double-click Walkthrough 1. click Finish. The last frame of the walkthrough is displayed. on the Options Bar. expand Views (all) ➤ Walkthroughs.6 After you specify the final point of the walkthrough path in the Living room. Edit and play the walkthrough 7 In the Project Browser.

and click OK. 12 On the View menu.8 Verify that the crop boundary of the walkthrough frame is selected and is displayed as red with blue grips. enter 1. verify that Field of view is selected. 16 On the Options Bar. select the crop boundary. 15 In the Walkthrough Frames dialog. on the Options Bar. and for Height. 14 Click . enter 16''. Creating a Walkthrough | 427 . 11 Under Change. The walkthrough controls are displayed on the Options Bar. enter 9''. Two options are displayed on the Options Bar: Edit Walkthrough and Size. click Zoom ➤ Zoom Out (2x). and press ENTER to set the walkthrough to play from the beginning (the key frame). 17 Click . If it is not. click the dimensions for Size. 10 In the Crop Region Size dialog. 13 On the Options Bar. for Frame. click Edit Walkthrough. The frame that is displayed is frame 300 of a total of 300 frames. and click OK. 9 To change the size of the walkthrough frame crop region. for Width. and select the crop boundary. enter 60 to reduce the total number of frames in the walkthrough from 300 to 60.

Edit the walkthrough path 4 On the Options Bar. c_Townhouse. 2 On the Options Bar. double-click 1st Floor. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. click Edit Walkthrough. Clearing this option disables the far clipping plane of the camera. under Floor Plans. Change the properties of the camera 1 In the Project Browser. proceed to the next exercise. and click OK. clear Far Clip Active. The camera is displayed at the first key frame position on the walkthrough path in the breakfast room.The walkthrough plays. 3 In the Element Properties dialog. under Extents. 428 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . Changing the Walkthrough Path and Camera Position on page 428. The current display is wireframe with hidden lines. click (Element Properties). press ESC. you learn how to edit the walkthrough path and change the camera position in the walkthrough that you created in the previous exercise. Changing the Walkthrough Path and Camera Position In this exercise. 18 When the walkthrough stops playing.rvt. NOTE To stop playing the walkthrough at any time. The walkthrough path is displayed in the floor plan of the first floor.

7 Click the third key frame position. and adjust it to view the kitchen as shown. Blue grips are displayed at each key frame. for Controls. Your walkthrough path may vary from the one in the illustration. so do not be concerned if the camera displays at a slightly different location. select Path. Changing the Walkthrough Path and Camera Position | 429 .5 Select the target point of the camera (the magenta grip). 6 On the Options Bar. and drag it to the location shown. You can move any camera target or key frame position.

shading. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. you can select to display the walkthrough in wireframe. and save the exercise file with a unique name. or rendering. then you are moving from the breakfast area to the living room window in 10 seconds. The walkthrough is recorded. reducing the size of the image. and then click 10 Proceed to the next exercise. Recording the Walkthrough on page 430. the Full Frames (Uncompressed) option is available to all users. without opening Revit Architecture 2009. for Frames/sec. and click OK. but that do not suffer loss due to compression quality.rvt. 3 Under Format. NOTE The available Compressor options are specific to your current computer system. enter 15. . 4 In the Export Walkthrough dialog. Reducing the size of the output images and managing the frame rate lets you create realistic and smooth movement. hidden line. 1 Click File menu ➤ Export ➤ Walkthrough. 430 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . 6 Double-click the AVI file to play the walkthrough from the location that you specified previously. select any codec (compression/decompression) that is available on your system. 9 To play the walkthrough. 7 Try creating other walkthroughs. specify a path and a file name for the AVI. click Edit Walkthrough. perhaps to 6'' wide x 4'' height. under Output Length. If you had 150 frames and a frame rate of 15 seconds. under Walkthroughs. shading with edges. Recording the Walkthrough In this exercise. and click Save. click File menu ➤ Save As. 5 In the Video Compression dialog.Play the walkthrough to view the changes that you made 8 In the Project Browser. for Model Graphics Style. select <Shading>. specifying the number of frames. 9 Close the exercise file without saving your changes. and with a frame rate of from 15-30 frames per second. on the Options Bar. for Compressor. double-click Walkthrough 1. 2 In the Length/Format dialog. and click OK. c_Townhouse. It produces files that are larger than compressed files. 8 If you want to save this exercise. If you are unsure of what option to use. When you export the walkthrough. you record the walkthrough that you created in the previous exercise by exporting it to an AVI file.

Exterior solar studies can show the impact of shadows on a site by the terrain and the surrounding buildings. Interior solar studies can illustrate how effectively natural light penetrates inside a building during specific times of the day and year. In this tutorial. 431 .Creating Solar Studies 11 The ability to create solar studies for a specific project and site can be very valuable for creating sustainable designs. you create interior and exterior views of a building information model to be used in solar studies that you define. ■ ■ ■ A courtyard perspective view illustrates how shadows impact the site and buildings. A cut section view enables you to see the effect of shadows and light on the interior of a building. you learn how a solar study of different perspective views of a building can support passive solar design by showing where shadows fall during the warmest time of the day and at different times throughout the year. More specifically. You specify settings for summer and winter solstice solar studies and export one solar study as a video and the other as a series of images. Creating Views for Solar Studies In this lesson. you learn to create three 3D views of a building information model for use with solar studies. A plan view provides information on how sunlight and shadows play on the floor of a building.

you customize a 3D external view of the building to enhance Solar Study analysis. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. expand Floor Plans. and open Common\c_Solar_Study. 4 On the View toolbar. as 432 | Chapter 11 Creating Solar Studies . In the left pane of the Open dialog. expand Views (all). and double-click 01 Entry. A 3D view is created. 3 Click in the lower right corner of the drawing area outside of the courtyard to place the camera and click in the upper left corner above the courtyard to place the camera target point. and use the Orbit tool to adjust the view. click Training Files. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. click Camera. click shown.rvt. 1 In the Project Browser.Courtyard View In this exercise. (SteeringWheels). as shown.Creating a Solar Study . The view you create may differ slightly from the illustrations in the exercises because of minor variations in camera placement.

right-click 3D View 1. and click Rename. Creating a Solar Study Section Cutaway View on page 433. enter Solar Study . you create a section cutaway view. Create section 1 In the Project Browser. double-click 01 Entry. 4 Click to the right of reference plane 9 between A and B and. 9 On the File menu. as shown. click Section.Courtyard View. click Save As. 8 In the Rename View dialog. under Floor Plans. and save the exercise file with a unique name.rvt training file you saved in the previous exercise. Creating a Solar Study Section Cutaway View In this exercise. and click OK. 3 On the Design Bar.5 On the Design Bar. Training File Continue to use the c_Solar_Study. if necessary. 10 Proceed to the next exercise. Creating a Solar Study Section Cutaway View | 433 . and drag the blue circular controls to see more of the perspective view. 7 In the Project Browser. click Modify. expand 3D Views. and then click to the left outside of the house to sketch the horizontal section line shown in the following illustration. 2 Enter ZR to zoom in on the house. 6 Click the view boundary to select it.

right-click Section 1. click 10 On the View toolbar. expand Sections. (SteeringWheels). 12 Use the Orbit tool to adjust the view down and to the right. and click OK. enter Section for Solar Study Cutaway. 6 To view the section. 13 On the Design Bar. click Modify. 11 On the SteeringWheel. Create 3D section view 9 On the View toolbar. 434 | Chapter 11 Creating Solar Studies . click Modify. 7 In the Project Browser. double-click the section head. and click Orient to View ➤ Section: Section for Solar Study Cutaway. click . 8 In the Rename View dialog. as shown. and click Rename. click the pull-down arrow to display the Wheel menu.5 On the Design Bar.

NOTE With the detail level set to Coarse. Creating a Solar Study Plan Cutaway View | 435 . click Save. do not display many elements in 3D. including the house. double-click Callout of 01 Entry. changing to Medium or Fine provides a better view for a shadow study. 16 On the View Control Bar. then Fine. clear Section Boxes. some structural elements are shown as a single line rather than solid and do not cast a shadow. under Floor Plans. you create a plan cutaway view. enter Solar Study Callout for Plan Cutaway. click Callout. 17 To hide the section box. click Detail Level ➤ Coarse. under Floor Plans. 5 In the Project Browser. and click Rename. Training File Continue to use the c_Solar_Study. Creating a Solar Study Plan Cutaway View In this exercise.rvt training file you saved in the previous exercise. 4 In the Project Browser. enter Solar Study Section Cutaway. 15 In the Rename View dialog. 3 Click in the upper left corner and lower right corner to sketch a selection around the site. right-click Callout of 01 Entry. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. then select Medium. In some cases. and click OK. Creating a Solar Study Plan Cutaway View on page 435. click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. Typical plan views.14 In the Project Browser. 6 In the Rename View dialog. and click OK. click . double-click 01 Entry. under 3D Views. 19 Proceed to the next exercise. as shown. 18 On the File menu. and click OK. right-click {3D}. such as floor plans and ceiling plans. Create 3D Plan View 7 On the View toolbar. On the Annotation Categories tab. so no shadows will be cast from these elements. NOTE A plan view of a shadow study should be created in a 3D view with top orientation. and click Rename. Create callout 1 In the Project Browser.

so you can see into the building from the top. 13 Select the blue down arrow control at the bottom of the model and drag down to expose the full first level of the model. 11 On the Design Bar. 12 Select the section box in the drawing area. click the pull-down arrow to display the Wheel menu. click Temporary Hide/Isolate ➤ Hide Category. click Modify. as shown. and click Orient to View ➤ Floor Plan: Solar Study Callout for Plan Cutaway. 14 Select the blue up arrow control in the center of the model and drag up to expose the second floor of the building. 9 On the SteeringWheel. click (SteeringWheels).8 On the View toolbar. as shown. 10 Use the Orbit tool to adjust the view to the right and back to view the front side. 15 Select the Roof. 16 On the View Control Bar. 436 | Chapter 11 Creating Solar Studies .

20 On the View Control Bar. and preview the effects of each study as an animation. Saving Solar Study Settings and Previewing Animations In this lesson. and click OK. and click Rename. under 3D Views. The animations of solar activity at a particular place and time allow you to study the impact of natural light and shadows on the buildings and site. Saving Solar Study Settings and Previewing Animations | 437 . enter Solar Study Plan Cutaway. click Detail Level ➤ Fine. click Temporary Hide/Isolate ➤ Reset Temporary Hide/Isolate. under 3D Views.17 On the View Control Bar. you create a solar study for winter and summer solstice. right-click {3D}. 19 In the Rename View dialog. double-click each of the sun study 3D views that you created in this lesson: ■ ■ ■ Solar Study . Display study views 22 In the Project Browser. 21 On the File menu. 18 In the Project Browser.Courtyard View Solar Study Plan Cutaway Solar Study Section Cutaway These views will be used in additional lessons in this tutorial. click Save.

expand 3D Views. click .Boston. For the Multi-Day solar study.rvt training file you used in the previous lesson. 7 Create a Single-Day study from an existing study. and 11 In the Manage Place and Locations dialog. You can create a still. or multi-day solar study. 2 On the View Control Bar. as well as a time interval for the frames of the solar animation. and click OK. Click the Single-Day tab. as well as a time interval for the frames of the solar animation. For the Single-Day solar study. USA. 5 Click the Single-Day tab. 10 Under Place. leave the slider at 50. CA. for City. 6 Click the Multi-Day tab. You can change the intensity of the shadows by dragging the slider in the Shadow field. expand Views (all). 8 Confirm that One Day Solar Study . 9 In the Name dialog. Changing the place in this dialog changes the setting defined for the project. you create a single-day solar study for the summer solstice. click Shadows ➤ Advanced Model Graphics. enter Summer Solstice. single-day. For this study. and time. Create summer solstice study 1 In the Project Browser. and time range. 3 Select Cast Shadows.Summer and Winter Solstice In this exercise. 4 For Sun Position. select Los Angeles. 438 | Chapter 11 Creating Solar Studies . Training File Continue to use the customized c_solar_study. click click OK. you specify the location. you specify the location. The Sun and Shadows Settings dialog displays. MA. USA is selected. date range. click . Los Angeles. and click Duplicate. and double-click Solar Study Courtyard View. date.Creating Solar Studies . .

you preview the solar studies you created in the previous exercise. for Sun Position. Create winter solstice study 15 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. select June 22. enter 10 and press ENTER. You can select the level to be used for shadow display. Clear Ground Plane at Level. on the Single-Day tab. Los Angeles. and click OK. 4 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. confirm that Summer Solstice. 6 On the View Control Bar. click the control buttons to preview the animation: ■ To display the previous key frame. 5 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog.rvt training file you saved in the previous exercise. Under Frame. select December 22. 19 On the File menu. Previewing Solar Study Animation In this exercise. Previewing Solar Study Animation on page 439. Training File Continue to use the c_Solar_Study. click . Notice that 01 Entry is selected as the level. enter Winter Solstice. you want to see how the shadows fall on the terrain and not for a specific level. 2008. 2 On the View Control Bar. NOTE If you clear Sunrise to sunset. under Frame. and click OK. 14 In this case. click OK. for Date. 16 In the Name dialog. verify that Sunrise to sunset is selected. 13 Select Ground Plane at Level. click Shadows ➤ Advanced Model Graphics. and click OK. 18 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. click OK. you can specify the start and stop times for the solar study.Courtyard View is currently displayed. click Save. For Time Range. you can specify to go to a specific frame in the solar study animation: ■ ■ Under Frame. 7 On the Options Bar. Previewing Solar Study Animation | 439 . click .12 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog: ■ ■ For Date. and click Duplicate. 17 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. ■ For Time Interval. click Shadows ➤ Preview Solar Study. 20 Proceed to the next exercise. 2008. 8 On the Options Bar. Preview winter solstice animation 1 Confirm that the 3D View Solar Study . select Winter Solstice. verify that the value is set to 15 minutes. Los Angeles. enter 20 and press ENTER. Los Angeles is selected. 3 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog.

10 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. click To play the animation from start to finish. under Floor Plans. 2 Enter ZR and zoom in on the house. you export the summer solstice solar study as an AVI file. on the Single-Day tab. 12 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. . . The solar study animation plays. Exporting Solar Studies In this lesson. 14 On the Options Bar. Exporting the Study as AVI In this exercise. Click in the drawing area and enter Living Area. . and click OK. click . showing the progression at 15-minute intervals for the location and date specified. Preview summer solstice animation 9 On the View Control Bar. click . 3 Label areas in the house: ■ ■ On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. click . 440 | Chapter 11 Creating Solar Studies . Los Angeles. select Summer Solstice. click ■ ■ NOTE You can stop viewing the animation at any time by clicking Cancel in the Status Bar. approximately as shown.rvt training file you saved in the previous lesson. PNG format images can be easily displayed on a web site or sent via e-mail. 11 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. click Shadows ➤ Preview Solar Study. click Text. double-click 01 Entry. Annotate view for solar study 1 In the Project Browser. click Shadows ➤ Advanced Model Graphics. Training File Continue to use the c_Solar_Study. Each PNG is a still image of a sequential frame in the animation.■ To display the next key frame. AVI files are standalone video files that can be easily distributed and viewed by colleagues or clients. ■ To display the previous sequential frame. you annotate a floor plan to identify different activities for the building and export a solar study for a cutaway view as an AVI video file. You also export the winter solstice solar study as a series of PNG format images. for Sun Position. click OK. click To display the next sequential frame. 13 On the View Control Bar.

Click in the drawing area and sketch a rectangle around the living area. click . 4 Sketch rooms: ■ ■ ■ ■ On the Design Bar. click Lines. expand 3D Views. and double-click Solar Study Section Cutaway. 7 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. Sketching the living and dining room areas in the house and using a solar study to determine where direct light is in the floor plan helps to determine the best layout. approximately as shown. click . 8 For Sun Position. Exporting the Study as AVI | 441 . On the Options Bar.■ ■ Click outside of the text box to end the command. 5 In the Project Browser. Click in the drawing area and sketch around the Dining area. as shown. 6 On the View Control Bar. click Shadows ➤ Advanced Model Graphics. Click and enter Dining. NOTE The building is a shell and you are considering alternative layouts for the interior space. as shown. verify that Cast Shadows is selected.

clear Section Boxes. select Frame Range. as shown. select Summer Solstice. under Output Length. On the Annotation Categories tab. click OK. 17 Specify the export options: ■ In the Length/Format dialog. and click OK. ■ For Frames per second. NOTE ZR for Zoom To Region to make it easier to select the control. select Section Boxes. NOTE The first and last few frames (sunrise and sunset) show large triangular shadows from the terrain. and click OK. On the Annotation Categories tab. 442 | Chapter 11 Creating Solar Studies . click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. 13 Click the right blue control and drag the right edge of the section box to reveal the roof overhang. select the section box. on the Single-Day tab. Export as AVI 16 Click File menu ➤ Export ➤ Animated Solar Study. and click OK. 14 Click outside of the section box. Limiting the range from 5 to 50 omits these frames. 11 To display the section box. 10 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. 12 In the drawing area. and enter ZF to zoom to fit the building to the drawing area. Los Angeles. and enter 5 to 50. click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. verify that the value is set to 15. if necessary.9 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. 15 To hide the section box.

Exporting a Study as PNG | 443 . For Files of Type. you open each image. verify that Hidden Line is selected. enter 450 in the first field (width). and click in the second field (height) to see the value dynamically changed. In the Export Animated Solar Study dialog.■ ■ Under Format. 6 Click File menu ➤ Export ➤ Animated Solar Study. Click OK. under Output Length. Los Angeles. 21 Proceed to the next exercise. of the animation separately. you only enter one dimension and the other one is calculated automatically. click the Desktop icon on the left to save the file to the computer Desktop. for Compressor. For Frames per second. NOTE Uncompressed AVI files can be zipped to reduce the file size. 19 In the Video Compression dialog. Exporting a Study as PNG In this lesson. 5 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. verify that the value is set to 15.Los Angeles. To maintain the proportions of the frame. and click OK. and enter 5 to 10. for Model Graphics Style. you export the Winter Solstice Solar Study to create a solar animation that is output as individual ping (PNG format) graphics. 20 Click File menu ➤ Save. on the Single-Day tab. select Frame Range. The animation plays as the AVI file is saved to the Desktop. 7 Specify the export options: ■ ■ ■ In the Length/Format dialog. 3 For Sun Position. select Winter Solstice. Exporting a Study as PNG on page 443. Training File Continue to use the c_Solar_Study. The equivalent zoom percentage is also set if you specify frame dimensions. and click OK. enter Summer Solar Study Section Cutaway . Export as PNG 1 Confirm that the 3D View Solar Study Section Cutaway is displayed. verify that Hidden Line is selected. verify that Full Frames (Uncompressed) is selected. select AVI Files. click . For Dimensions. click OK. ■ ■ ■ ■ 18 Click Save. To view the animation. For File Name. click Shadows ➤ Advanced Model Graphics. The AVI can then typically be played from within the zip file. for Model Graphics Style.rvt training file you saved in the previous exercise. or frame. 2 On the View Control Bar. 4 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. Under Format.

it is recommended that you first create a folder to export to because the export process creates several files. TIFF. In the Export Animated Solar Study dialog. Create plan interior view 1 In the Project Browser. Click OK. select PNG. such as JPEG. Creating an Internal Plan Study In this exercise.rvt training file you saved in the previous lesson. or GIF. the Frame Range was set to just 5 files to avoid cluttering the Desktop. you create an internal solar study for a plan to determine where shadows fall inside the building during the warmest part of the day. For Files of Type. 8 Click Save. or any single-frame format. depending on the Frame Range. double-click Solar Study Plan Cutaway. as shown: 9 On the File menu. click the Desktop icon. 444 | Chapter 11 Creating Solar Studies . enter 450 in the first field (width). enter Winter Solar Study Section Cutaway . under 3D Views. and click in the second field (height) to see the value dynamically changed. For File name. Creating an Internal Plan Solar Study In this lesson. The resulting PNG images are date and time stamped. The animation plays as the files are saved to the Desktop. Training File Continue to use the c_Solar_Study. you create a 3D view of a plan and create a solar study to animate the effects of natural light on the inside of the building.Los Angeles. In this example. BMP. click Save. ■ ■ ■ ■ NOTE When you export to PNG.■ For Dimensions.

Creating an Internal Plan Study | 445 . as shown. 3 Select the blue left arrow control and drag it to the left to expose the roof overhang and posts. NOTE Enter ZF for Zoom To Fit if necessary to see the entire building on the screen.2 Select the section box in the drawing area.

USA. and click OK.4 Click View menu ➤ Orient ➤ Top. MA. 13 Specify values for the multi-day study: ■ ■ ■ .Los Angeles . Hiding the roof allows you to see how shadows fall on the interior floor of the building. click 10 On the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. 9 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog.Week Interval. and click OK.Boston. specify 2:00 pm. for File name enter 2pm . for Sun Position. 14 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. 11 Select Multi Day Solar Study . 12 In the Name dialog. 8 On the View Control Bar. Notice that the dining area receives full sun during the warmest part of the day. click Shadows ➤ Advanced Model Graphics. click Temporary Hide/Isolate ➤ Hide Category. Clear Ground Plane at Level so that the shadows fall on the terrain. clear Section Boxes. 446 | Chapter 11 Creating Solar Studies . Create multi-day solar study 6 To hide the section box. 5 Select the roof. click the Multi-Day tab. For Time Interval. and on the View Control Bar. click OK. Click Detail Level ➤ Fine. 7 Adjust settings on the View Control Bar: ■ ■ Click Shadows ➤ Shadows On. On the Annotation Categories tab. and click OK. select One week. For Time. click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. and click Duplicate.

Re-orienting the Project | 447 . Mirror the project 1 In the Project Browser. Re-orienting the Project In this lesson. such as East . Mirroring the Project In this exercise. In the Export Animated Solar Study dialog. you use the Mirror Project feature to create a mirror of the project along an axis. Training File Continue to use the c_Solar_Study.15 Export the animation: ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Export ➤ Animated Solar Study. 18 Click File menu ➤ Save. for File Name. 2 Zoom to fit the drawing in the view. model views. and annotations in non-drafting views.South. double-click 01 Entry. you re-orient a building information model by creating an exact mirror of the project along an axis.West or North . In the Length/Format dialog. ■ 16 In the Video Compression dialog. select Full Frames (Uncompressed). you mirror all model elements. When you mirror a project.rvt training file you saved in the previous exercise. click Shadows ➤ Solar Study Off. and click Save. under Floor Plans. 17 On the View Control Bar. and click OK. You also re-orient the project to True North and compare how shadows display when the project is oriented to Project North and when it is changed to True North. for Compressor. The animation plays as the AVI file is saved to the desktop. enter 2pm Los Angeles Plan Cutaway. Click the Desktop icon. click OK.

View still solar studies 1 In the Project Browser.West. Training File Continue to use the c_Solar_Study. For additional information. you change the orientation to True North to see how the change in orientation can impact solar study accuracy.rvt training file you saved in the previous exercise. select the roof. under 3D Views. NOTE Some elements may have to be checked manually for proper placement after the mirror process. and click OK. The project is mirrored along the East . and click Hide in view ➤ Elements. 2 In the drawing area. 4 In the Mirror Project dialog.West axis.3 Click Tools menu ➤ Project Position/Orientation ➤ Mirror Project. 448 | Chapter 11 Creating Solar Studies . Then. select East . click (Undo) to restore the project to its original configuration. Orienting to True North Drafting convention is that Project North is the top of the view. click OK. you create still solar studies and observe that the shadows extend straight up when the project is set to the default orientation of Project North. 6 On the Standard toolbar. In this exercise. 5 In the warning dialog. double-click Solar Study Plan Cutaway. right-click. see Revit Architecture 2009 Online Help.

on the Still tab. you would set the time to 1:00 PM rather than 12:00 PM. 4 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. 8 For Sun Position. 6 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. 9 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. click . and click OK. and select Winter Solstice. click . NOTE Solar Studies do not have a Daylight Savings setting. click Shadows ➤ Advanced Model Graphics. Notice that the shadows display in an upward direction in the cutaway view. click . For example. 10 Under Date and Time. and click OK. click Apply. 7 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. to see the sun at its highest point on June 22.3 On the View Control Bar. change the time back to 12:00 PM. Orienting to True North | 449 . 5 For Sun Position. and click OK. specify 11:00 AM for time. 11 For Sun Position. 12 Under Date and Time. click the Still tab. so you may need to make your own adjustment for specific studies. select Cast Shadows. select Summer Solstice.

the Project North and True North are coincident and pointing toward the top of the computer monitor (in most cases).13 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. and click OK. 22 Re-orient the project: ■ To relocate the rotation center point. the view settings must be set for True North. 17 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. select True North. Plan views are defined to use Project North or True North for the representation. In order to rotate True North so it is not coincident with Project North. click the Still tab. make sure to click in the view and zoom slightly in and out. 19 In the Project Browser. Rotate project to True North True North and Project North can have different values for rotation. click Shadows ➤ Advanced Model Graphics. 14 On the View Control Bar. 21 Click Tools menu ➤ Project Position/Orientation ➤ Rotate True North. 15 For Sun Position. 450 | Chapter 11 Creating Solar Studies . 20 In the Element Properties dialog. and click OK. When a project is started. 18 In the Project Browser. and click Properties. 16 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. double-click 01 Entry. click OK. IMPORTANT After you toggle the views. for Orientation. click . under Floor Plans. This process establishes the view setting to True North. and select Winter Solstice. right click 01 Entry. click at the intersection of the arrows that have been draw in the project representing True North and Project North. click OK. Notice that the drawing did not change when you changed the orientation from True North to Project North. NOTE When rotating True North it is often helpful to draw lines representing the relationship between Project North and True North.

■ To establish the True North direction. The floor plan rotates in the view. click toward the top of the screen. ■ To establish the new direction of True North. Orienting to True North | 451 . click above the end of the magenta line representing True North. as shown.

View the solar study with the Project North orientation 30 In the Project Browser. and click OK. 452 | Chapter 11 Creating Solar Studies . click .23 In the Project Browser. click the Still tab. 26 Right-click Copy of 01 Entry. 31 Click View menu ➤ Refresh. and click Rename. 25 In the Project Browser. 32 On the View Control Bar. under 3D Views. enter True North Orientation. click Shadows ➤ Advanced Model Graphics. right-click. and click OK. 24 In the Element Properties dialog. 29 In the Element Properties dialog. right-click 01 Entry. and click Apply. select Project North. and click Element Properties. for Orientation. and click Properties. select Summer Solstice. select True North Orientation. 33 For Sun Position. for Orientation. double-click Solar Study Plan Cutaway. right-click. and click OK. select True North. Notice that the shadows lengthen now that the project is oriented to True North. 28 In the Project Browser. 34 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. Notice that the view now displays the plan in the correct orientation for True North. right-click 01 Entry. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. 27 In the Rename View dialog.

36 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. Orienting to True North | 453 . NOTE Retain the 45° value for the Angle from project to True North to maintain accuracy in shadow display for this project. click the Desktop icon. enter True North Summer Solstice Plan Cutaway. click the Single-Day tab. verify that Full Frames (Uncompressed) is selected. and click OK. In the Length/Format dialog. for Compressor. Los Angeles. Click OK. ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ 38 In the Video Compression dialog.35 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. 39 Click File menu ➤ Save. In the Export Animated Solar Study dialog. The animation plays as the AVI file is saved to the desktop. enter 600 in the first field. For Files of Type. for Dimensions. and click OK. verify that AVI Files is selected. and click in the second dimension field to see the value calculated automatically. Export animated solar study 37 Export the animation: ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Export ➤ Animated Solar Study. under Format. click Summer Solstice. Click Save. click OK. For File Name.

click Render. 3 On the View Control Bar. and click Duplicate. (Show Rendering Dialog). double-click each of the following views to review the available views for rendering: ■ ■ ■ to house from SW to west facade of house living area This view most accurately shows the interior of the living room. For Sun. In this exercise. under Quality. 1 In the Project Browser. Refer to Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs on page 391 for additional information on rendering.rvt training file you saved in the previous exercise. select 12/22. capturing it. and click OK. In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. you render an interior view to observe how sunlight and shadows play in a specific room. On the Still tab of the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. and click OK. select Edit/New. JPEG format images can be easily displayed on a web site or sent via e-mail. for Setting.Rendering Interior Shadow Views In this lesson. Rendering an Interior View Shadow calculations are not reliable for camera views in which a shadow would fall onto the camera’s location in the view. under 3D Views. you also save the image to the project and export it as a JPEG file for future use. and exporting it as a JPEG image. The scene is rendered in full color at medium quality. click 4 Specify rendering options: ■ ■ ■ ■ In the Rendering dialog. Training File Continue to use the c_Solar_Study. under Settings. under 3D Views. for Date and Time. enter Winter Solstice 2pm Los Angeles. Rendered views do not have this limitation. select Interior: Sun only. double-click Solar Study Plan Cutaway. and 2:00 PM. Since a rendered image is temporary. In the Name dialog. you confirm that the winter solstice has sunlight in the living room by creating one rendering. ■ ■ 5 In the Rendering dialog. select Winter Solstice. 2 In the Project Browser. for Scheme. 454 | Chapter 11 Creating Solar Studies . This would include some exterior views and most interior views. Under Lighting. Rendered views will also show shade from plants and seasonal foliage. select Medium.

and click OK. and click Save.6 In the Rendering dialog. verify that JPEG Files is selected. For Files of type. enter living area_winter solstice. 7 In the Save To Project dialog. click Desktop. The rendered image is saved under the Renderings folder in the Project Browser. click Export. Rendering an Interior View | 455 . click Save to Project. so use the Save to Project option to save the view in the project. NOTE Rendered views are temporary. In the left pane of the Save Image dialog. 9 Click File menu ➤ Save. 8 Export the image as a JPEG: ■ ■ ■ In the Rendering dialog.

456 .

Presentation Views 12 In this tutorial. The analytique is a classic Beaux Arts method of representing a work of architecture for analysis by graphically showing the relationship among plans. transcending the building process to recognize the architecture of the project. Co-house. Whether the audience is the general contractor. you learn several graphic techniques using various tools to create an analytique. Using the pre-built building model. you organize an analytique by creating and modifying several views. you can choose between realism and stylistics. Many tools in Revit Architecture 2009 describe number. 457 . In this tutorial. You can use the analytique to graphically compare the organization and forms of a particular building or space by superimposing and overlapping measured drawings at multiple scales. use the tutorials for the rendering features of Revit Architecture. and section boxes. you explore the stylistic approach. an outside reviewer. you learn various methods of communicating your design intent by creating presentation views. In this series of exercises. and other quantifiable elements in construction documents. a consultant. length. Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs on page 391. however. elevations. When organizing presentation graphics. linework. tailoring the presentation is just as important as the accuracy of the content. sections. and details. Revit Architecture provides several options for expressing the architecture. type. They include rendering. or the client. advanced model graphics. For the realistic approach. help to explain the subjective complexity of the work. Other tools in the software.

Adding a Floor Plan View to the Analytique In this lesson. To fit the floor plan into the analytique. change the visibility settings to remove unwanted documentation. you create a presentation floor plan. and place the plan on a dark background for contrast. you create a copy of the plan. 458 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views .

In the left pane of the Open dialog. and click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics again. A copy of the floor plan is created and opened. exit the menu. Preparing a Floor Plan for the Analytique | 459 . and open Metric\m_Cohouse. click Training Files.rvt. right-click 2nd Flr. 2 In the Project Browser. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. enter Presentation Second Floor Plan. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. TIP If the Visibility/Graphics option is not active. Cnst. Copy the floor plan 1 In the Project Browser. and click Rename. click in the drawing area. right-click Copy of 2nd Flr. you create a copy of a floor plan in preparation for the analytique. 3 In the Rename View dialog. expand Views (all) ➤ Floor Plans. under Floor Plans. Modify visibility/graphics 4 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. Cnst.Preparing a Floor Plan for the Analytique In this exercise. and click OK.

Down Arrow. NOTE Stair text is considered part of a stair component rather than an annotation. you use advanced model graphics to cast shadows and add a sense of texture to the new floor plan view. expand the Stairs category. 12 Proceed with the next exercise. and clear DOWN Text. and click Save.rvt. dimensions. 8 Click OK. 11 In the Save As directory. Notice the immediate change in the line weights. This turns off the visibility of all tags. click the Scale control and select 1:100.5 In the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog. Modify the view scale 9 On the View Control Bar at the bottom of the drawing area. and other annotations in this view. name the project m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. sections. 10 Click File menu ➤ Save As. this represents the view getting smaller. No annotations display in the view. Using Advanced Model Graphics In this exercise. Using Advanced Model Graphics on page 460. and clear Show annotation categories in this view. elevations. click the Annotation Categories tab. 460 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . 7 Under Visibility. UP Text. and Up Arrow. 6 Click the Model Categories tab. navigate to the folder of your choice.

and click Advanced Model Graphics. modify. 12 Click OK. you can specify one place where the project resides in the world. 1:00 PM. 7 For Place. m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. select Sun and Shadow Settings. click . Within a project. 10 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. select By Date. NOTE For this step. At that place. Modify advanced model graphics settings 1 If the Floor Plan: Presentation Second Floor Plan is not the active view. The sun and shadow settings can also be used when rendering a 3D view. MA.Training File Continue to use the training file you saved in the previous exercise. however. double-click it in the Project Browser. 11 Select Ground Plane at Level. This is the level the shadow will be cast upon. 2 On the View Control Bar. NOTE Shadows can display in all view styles except Wireframe. The shadow contrast dictates the darkness of the shadow display. most of the images in the remainder of this tutorial may differ from those on your screen. 9 For City. select Cast Shadows. click OK. and select 1st Flr. the darker the shadows. click . For Sun Position. specify 10/27. Using Advanced Model Graphics | 461 .rvt. 6 Under Settings. ■ For Contrast. you can select any city. Changes made in the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog apply only to the active view. for Date and Time. ■ 5 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. you can create. Time and Place. select Boston. click the Place tab. click (Shadows Off). click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line. on the Still tab. The higher the number. Cnst. 8 In the Manage Place and Locations dialog. 3 On the View Control Bar. specify 35. If you select a different city. and delete multiple locations to analyze a single prototype. 13 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. specify the following: ■ Under Shadow. and click OK. 4 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog.

and click Advanced Model Graphics. This gives the plan depth and creates a sensation of space beyond what you can normally express in a plan view. click OK. click 16 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. and click OK. Adding the Floor Plan to a Sheet on page 462. This plan view is now ready to be added to a sheet. 17 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. This turns off the shadows cast on the ground. 18 Click File menu ➤ Save. . 462 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . click (Shadows On). Adding the Floor Plan to a Sheet In this exercise.Notice the series of shadows based on the specified sun angles. 19 Proceed with the next exercise. under Settings. for Sun Position. you add the floor plan to a sheet and modify the view to enhance the contrast. clear Ground Plane at Level. Turn off the ground plane shadows 14 On the View Control Bar. 15 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog.

and click to place it. Adding the Floor Plan to a Sheet | 463 . right-click the Design Bar. click Modify. 4 In the Views dialog. The viewport displays at the cursor. 3 On the View tab of the Design Bar. and click View. 5 Move the cursor to the center of the sheet as shown. select Floor Plan: Presentation Second Floor Plan. click Sheet. click Add View. TIP If the View tab is not available.Create a new sheet 1 On the View tab of the Design Bar. and click Add View to Sheet. 2 In the Select a Titleblock dialog. and click OK. 6 On the Design Bar. 7 Zoom in around the viewport. select Arch Portrait. The blank D-sized sheet is portrait oriented. and notice the view title.

13 In the Type Properties dialog. and click OK. 14 In the Element Properties dialog. you will create a dark filled region for the floor plan view. To accomplish this. click OK. 12 In the Name dialog. and click OK. and click Activate View. 11 In the Type Properties dialog. For this analytique. click Duplicate. Create a solid fill background for contrast 15 Right-click the viewport. select No. 10 In the Element Properties dialog. click .Because the view title needs to be removed for the analytique. Create a new viewport type 8 Select the viewport in the center of the sheet. enter Presentation. under Graphics. for Show Title. 9 On the Options Bar. you need to create a new viewport type that does not display the view title. you need to create a base of contrast for the centered plan. 464 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . click Edit/New. The viewport no longer displays a view title.

create the interior chain of lines using Medium or Wide lines. and the boundary of the region. 21 Starting at the upper-left corner of the building model. select Invisible lines.This activates the Presentation Second Floor Plan within the context of the sheet. 23 In the Element Properties dialog. 19 Draw a rectangle around the view as shown. 17 In the Type Selector. click Edit/New. The space between the perimeter of the building model and each line should be equidistant. draw a chain of lines around the exterior face of the building model as shown. The lines shown below are enhanced for training purposes. If necessary. use the Trim tool to clean up gaps or overlapping intersections. You enter sketch mode where you define the line type. You may want to zoom in while sketching some details. When you finish drawing the chain. click Filled Region. click . Adding the Floor Plan to a Sheet | 465 . and select Chain. 16 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. fill properties. click Region Properties. select the entire chain (use Tab) and change the line type back to Invisible lines by selecting it from the Type Selector. TIP If you have difficulty sketching with invisible lines. and you should take advantage of endpoint snapping when available. click . 22 On the Design Bar. 18 On the Options Bar. 20 On the Options Bar. TIP Use care when sketching this chain. you must define the inner perimeter by drawing a chain of lines around the perimeter of the building model. Now that you have defined the outer perimeter of the filled region.

click Duplicate. and click Deactivate View. Name the sheet 31 Right-click anywhere on the sheet. and click OK. 28 In the Type Properties dialog. and click OK. 26 In the Type Properties dialog. for Sheet Name. 27 In the Fill Patterns dialog. click . and click View Properties. under Identity Data. scroll down. under Graphics. 32 Right-click the edge of the sheet. 35 Proceed with the next lesson. Notice how the filled region enhances the view contrast.24 In the Type Properties dialog. verify that the Background is Opaque and the Color is Black. click Finish Sketch. select Solid fill. Adding an Elevation View to the Analytique on page 466. and click OK. 466 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . Adding an Elevation View to the Analytique In this lesson. 34 Click File menu ➤ Save. under Name. 29 In the Element Properties dialog. you create an elevation and add it to the presentation sheet that you created in the first exercise. 25 In the Name dialog. for Fill Pattern. click OK. enter Solid Black. and click OK. 33 In the Element Properties dialog. 30 On the Design Bar. enter Presentation.

right-click South. A copy of the south elevation view becomes the active view. m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. expand Views (all) ➤ Elevations. Preparing the Elevation Analytique | 467 .Preparing the Elevation Analytique In this exercise.rvt. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. you copy an elevation view and use advanced model graphics to cast shadows on the view. Copy and rename the elevation view 1 In the Project Browser. Training File Continue to use the training file you saved in the previous exercise.

specify 35. 11 On the View Control Bar. and clear Elevation Swing. 5 In the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog. click OK. right-click Copy of South. 19 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. 13 For Contrast. select By Date. Apply advanced model graphics 10 On the View Control Bar. enter Presentation South Elevation. and click Advanced Model Graphics. under Visibility. 9 Click OK. click (Shadows Off). 16 In the Name dialog. click Override. select Cast Shadows. and click OK. click Duplicate. click . under Visibility. expand the Doors category. 7 In the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog. specify 2:30 PM.2 In the Project Browser. and click OK. you can create more interesting shadows on the elevation view. Modify visibility/graphic overrides 4 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. and click OK. 6 In the Fill Pattern Graphics dialog. By changing the angle of the sun. 14 For Sun Position. 12 Under Shadow. Changes made in the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog apply only to the active view. under Pattern Overrides. click in the Walls row. 3 In the Rename View dialog. on the Model Categories tab. and click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics again. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line. Time and Place. and clear Show annotation categories in this view. and click OK. 15 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. This turns off the visibility of all annotations in this view. This turns off the visibility of all wall surface patterns in this view. 17 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. click in the drawing area. In the Projection/Surface Patterns column for Walls. and click Rename. 468 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . scroll up. under Settings. clear Visible. 18 For Time. 8 Click the Annotation Categories tab. enter Sun and Shadow Settings Elevation. TIP If the Visibility/Graphics option is not active. exit the menu. under Elevations.

select Elevation: Presentation South Elevation. under Views (all) ➤ Sheets (all).Presentation.20 Click File menu ➤ Save. TIP Use the snap feature to snap the viewport to the center reference plane. Training File Continue to use the training file you saved in the previous exercise. you add the Presentation South Elevation view to the Presentation sheet. and click Add View to Sheet. Add a view to the sheet 1 In the Project Browser. 3 In the Views dialog. Adding the Presentation Elevation View to the Presentation Sheet on page 469. 21 Proceed with the next exercise. Adding the Presentation Elevation View to the Presentation Sheet | 469 . m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. 4 Center the viewport above the presentation plan view as shown. double-click A105 . 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. click Add View. Adding the Presentation Elevation View to the Presentation Sheet In this exercise.rvt.

470 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views .The viewport displays a view title. select Viewport : Presentation. The view title no longer displays. 5 In the Type Selector.

7 On the Design Bar. Adding Section Views to the Analytique on page 471. Adding Section Views to the Analytique | 471 . You add silhouette edges and filled regions to the views. 8 Click File menu ➤ Save. click Modify. you create section and callout views and place them in the analytique. Adding Section Views to the Analytique In this lesson. You also create a view template for presentation views and apply it to other views. 9 Proceed with the next lesson.6 Drag the Presentation South Elevation viewport downward until it shares an edge with the presentation floor plan.

Preparing a Section View for the Analytique In this exercise.rvt. Add a section in a plan view 1 In the Project Browser. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 3 On the Options Bar. The section should cut through the center of the building model and extend past the front of the building (lower wall). click Section. Adjust the controls to modify the extents. Training File Continue to use the training file you saved in the previous exercise. and use the flip arrows if necessary. m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. you create and modify the section view that you later add to the analytique. TIP You can also change the scale of the section view after you create it. under Floor Plans. Cnst. for Scale. double-click 1st Flr. 4 Add the section shown below. 472 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . select 1: 100.

7 On the Options Bar. this view needs to be rotated 180°. click Callout. Use the controls to adjust the precise location of the boundary and to move the callout head so you can see it easily.Section 2 is added to the building model. you will create a callout around the building model in the section view. as shown. To fit correctly in the analytique. and double-click Section 2. To accomplish this. 8 Draw a callout around the building model in the section view. 6 On the View tab of the Design Bar. Preparing a Section View for the Analytique | 473 . Create a callout of the section view 5 In the Project Browser. select 1 : 100. expand Sections (Callout 1). for Scale.

and click OK. 10 In the Project Browser. 11 In the Rename View dialog. under Sections (Callout 1). right-click Callout of Section 2. In the Projection/Surface Patterns column for Walls. This turns off the visibility of all wall surface patterns in this view. expand the Doors category. and clear Elevation Swing. click in the Walls row. enter Presentation Section 2. 12 In the Project Browser. 16 In the Fill Pattern Graphics dialog. and click OK. under Sections (Callout 1). double-click Presentation Section 2. and click Rename. 17 Under Visibility. click the Model Categories tab. 15 Under Visibility.Rename the callout 9 On the Design Bar. scroll up. clear Visible. click Override. click Modify. 18 Turn off the visibility of the following model categories: ■ ■ Casework Ceilings 474 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . Modify visibility/graphic overrides 13 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. under Pattern Overrides. 14 In the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog.

22 On the View Control Bar.■ ■ ■ Furniture Lighting Fixtures Specialty Equipment 19 Click the Annotation Categories tab. and clear Show annotation categories in this view. The inner boundary shows the crop region for model elements. The outer boundary (indicated with dashed lines) shows the crop region for annotation elements. Revit Architecture displays 2 boundaries. 24 Proceed with the next exercise. 23 Click File menu ➤ Save. Hide the crop region 21 Select the crop region. click The crop regions no longer display. 20 Click OK. This turns off the visibility of all annotations in this view. Adding Shadows and Silhouettes to a Section View on page 476. (Hide Crop Region). When you select the crop region. Preparing a Section View for the Analytique | 475 .

specify the following: Under Shadow. Click Apply. and click Advanced Model Graphics. under Sections (Callout 1). you apply silhouette edges to contrast the edges of the view. Training File Continue to use the training file you saved in the previous exercise. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line. 476 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . TIP You may need to move the dialog to see the view. 5 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. ■ For Sun Position. click ■ ■ ■ (Shadows Off).rvt. The shadows do not offer much contrast. and click OK. specify 35. enter Sun and Shadow Settings Section. 4 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. you use advanced model graphics to cast shadows on the section view. 3 On the View Control Bar. In the steps that follow. click .Adding Shadows and Silhouettes to a Section View In this exercise. in the Project Browser. For Contrast. double-click Presentation Section 2. Add shadows to the section view 1 If Presentation Section 2 is not the active view. you create new sun and shadow settings to add contrast to the presentation view. click Duplicate. In addition. 6 In the Name dialog. 2 On the View Control Bar. select Cast Shadows. m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views.

7 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. TIP You can also use the Linework tool to emphasize individual surface edges. Click OK. specify 70°. click OK. select Directly. 10 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. click (Shadows On). specify 135°. was added to this training file for training purposes. and click Advanced Model Graphics. 12 Proceed with the next exercise. NOTE The line style. For Altitude. 8 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. for Silhouette style. Notice the application of heavy line weights to the edges of the building model. 11 Click File menu ➤ Save. Silhouette Edges. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Settings. and click OK. The shadows now provide more contrast and a sense of depth. TIP The current view of your model may vary from the illustrations in the tutorial based on the placement of the section line in the previous exercise. Adding the Presentation Section to the Analytique on page 478. Apply silhouette edges 9 On the View Control Bar. Adding Shadows and Silhouettes to a Section View | 477 . For Azimuth. Select Relative to View. You can modify this line style by clicking Settings menu ➤ Line Styles. select Silhouette Edges.

478 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . 3 In the Views dialog. 4 Move the cursor under the centered plan view as shown. and click to place the selected view.Presentation. you add the Presentation Section 2 view to the analytique and rotate the view 180°.Adding the Presentation Section to the Analytique In this exercise. select Section: Presentation Section 2. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. double-click A105 . m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. and click Add View to Sheet. click Add View. under Sheets (all). Add the view to the presentation sheet 1 In the Project Browser.rvt. Training File Continue to use the training file you saved in the previous exercise.

enter 180 to specify the degrees of rotation. In the steps that follow. and press Enter. 8 Select the callout that you added previously. 6 On the Design Bar. under Sections (Callout 1). Rotate the callout 7 In the Project Browser.5 In the Type Selector. move the cursor in the direction of the rotation. The section needs to be rotated 180°. click Modify. The view title no longer displays. 9 On the Edit toolbar. double-click Section 2. 10 Specify the start radius to the right of the callout. you accomplish this by rotating the callout in the section view. specify 3 o’clock as the rotation start point. 11 Move the cursor a slight distance counter-clockwise. Adding the Presentation Section to the Analytique | 479 . select Viewport : Presentation. you click to specify the start radius. To rotate an object. click (Rotate). Using a clock as a reference. and enter the degrees of rotation or click to specify the end radius.

The Presentation Section 2 view has rotated 180° and needs to be repositioned. 480 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . under Sheets (all). 12 Drag the callout boundaries until they extend just past the perimeter of the edges of the building model as shown. double-click A105 .Presentation.The callout rotates 180°. Its boundaries need to be adjusted to fit around the edges of the building model. Reposition the viewport 13 In the Project Browser.

you create a view template for presentation views to reduce repetitive work when creating subsequent views. you add the modified view to the presentation sheet.14 Select the Presentation Section 2 viewport. After applying the view template to a new section view. click Modify. Working with a Presentation View Template In this exercise. and drag it up and to the left as shown. 17 Proceed with the next exercise. 16 Click File menu ➤ Save. Working with a Presentation View Template | 481 . Working with a Presentation View Template on page 481. 15 On the Design Bar.

and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. 7 In the Rename View dialog. 2 Click View menu ➤ Create View Template from View. under Sections (Type 1). and click OK. and click Rename. enter Presentation. under Sections (Type 1). Rather than repeat numerous steps to prepare this view for the analytique. under Sections (Callout 1). 482 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . enter Presentation Section 1. Apply the presentation view template 8 Click View menu ➤ Apply View Template. double-click Presentation Section 2. click OK. and click OK. 3 In the New View Template dialog. 6 In the Project Browser. right-click Section 1. you can simply apply the presentation view template.rvt. m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. Create a new presentation view 5 In the Project Browser. Create a presentation view template 1 In the Project Browser. right-click Copy of Section 1. 4 In the View Templates dialog.Training File Continue to use the training file you saved in the previous exercise.

lighting fixtures. Working with a Presentation View Template | 483 . you can use a view property to accomplish the same thing. under Sheets (all). 12 In the Views dialog. 16 Click View menu ➤ View Properties. for Rotation on Sheet. Add the view to the presentation sheet 10 In the Project Browser. double-click A105 . select Presentation. 13 Place it to the left of the plan view. click Add View. under Names. and click OK. and elevation swings no longer display. under Graphics. select Viewport : Presentation. select 90° Counterclockwise. Rather than use a callout to rotate this view after it is added to a sheet. and click Add View to Sheet. The furniture. annotations.9 In the Apply View Template dialog. 19 Move the view so the walls line up similar to the image shown.Presentation. and click Deactivate View. and click Activate View. select Section: Presentation Section 1. 14 In the Type Selector. 11 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 15 Right-click the viewport. and click OK. 17 In the Element Properties dialog. 18 Right-click the viewport.

20 Click File menu ➤ Save. such as a tracery window or a column capital. you create a wall section and add it to the right side of the analytique. traditional analytiques contain a detail. Working in a Callout Analytique Typically. In this exercise. Working in a Callout Analytique on page 484. 21 Proceed with the next exercise. 484 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views .

under Sections (Callout 1). After you add the callout. under Sections (Type 1). click Callout. click Modify. 3 Draw a callout around the front balcony as shown. as shown. Working in a Callout Analytique | 485 .Training File Continue to use the training file you saved in the previous exercise. and modify its boundaries and the location of the callout head. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. right-click Callout of Section 1. double-click Section 1. 4 In the Project Browser. and click Rename. select the callout.rvt. m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. Create a callout 1 In the Project Browser.

clear Crop Region Visible.5 In the Rename View dialog. 9 In the Element Properties dialog. 486 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . clear Annotation Crop. under Extents. as shown. double-click Presentation Callout. This gap is used later in the exercise to place a fill region. and click View Properties. 6 In the Project Browser. 8 Right-click. and click OK. and adjust the bottom to create a small gap. under Sections (Callout 1). and click OK. enter Presentation Callout. 7 Select the crop region.

do the following: ■ ■ ■ For View Scale. and click Add View to Sheet. 18 In the Element Properties dialog. For Scale Value 1. 17 Click View menu ➤ View Properties. click Add View. select Custom. under Sheets (all). Working in a Callout Analytique | 487 . 11 On the View tab of the Design Bar. specify 22. Modify the presentation callout on the sheet 16 Right-click the Presentation Callout viewport. 13 Place it on the right side of the presentation sheet.Add the callout to the presentation sheet 10 In the Project Browser. double-click A105 . Click OK. 15 On the Design Bar. click Modify. select Section: Presentation Callout. 14 In the Type Selector. 12 In the Views dialog.Presentation. select Viewport : Presentation. and click Activate View.

click Filled Region. hide the crop region and deactivate the viewport. double-click Presentation Callout. click Region Properties. 20 Select the callout presentation viewport. 24 In the Element Properties dialog. NOTE If the presentation callout view does not fit properly on the sheet. and move it to the position shown below. turn on the crop region from the view properties dialog. under Sections (Callout 1). When finished. you add a heavy base to the floors and a poche to the base.19 Right-click the callout presentation view. click Edit/New. and click Deactivate View. In the steps that follow. activate the viewport. 22 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 23 On the Design Bar. Although you can use several methods to create these areas of contrast. the easiest method is to apply filled regions to the presentation callout. and make adjustments as necessary. 488 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . The composition set for the analytique is now complete. Apply filled regions to the presentation callout 21 In the Project Browser.

You do not have to replicate the image exactly. on the Design Bar. select Solid fill. click Filled Region. click . 30 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 26 In the Fill Patterns dialog. and click OK 3 times. 28 In the Project Browser.25 In the Type Properties dialog. and click Activate View. under Sheets (all). for Fill Pattern. 27 Using the drawing tools on the Options Bar. click Finish Sketch. When you are finished. double-click A105 . Working in a Callout Analytique | 489 . Add a poche region 29 Right-click the Presentation Callout viewport.Presentation. sketch the filled regions on the floors and roof shown below. The intent of the analytique is not so much a measured construction document as a stylized representation of the architectural forms. You can sketch one filled region at a time or all of them at once.

and sketch the rectangle shown below. click . click (Show Crop Region). 33 On the View Control Bar. The entire poche region does not display because the crop region does not encompass the new filled region. and drag the left and bottom boundaries until the entire poche region displays. 32 On the Design Bar. 34 Select the crop region.31 On the Options Bar. click Finish Sketch. 490 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views .

you create isometric 3D views and use section boxes to create cutaways with shadows.35 On the View Control Bar. 37 Click File menu ➤ Save. Creating 3D Cutaways with Section Boxes In this lesson. click (Hide Crop Region). Creating 3D Cutaways with Section Boxes | 491 . 36 Right-click the Presentation Callout viewport. Creating 3D Cutaways with Section Boxes on page 491. and click Deactivate View. 38 Proceed with the next lesson. You then add perspective views to the presentation and annotate the sheet.

double-click Isometric. 492 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . and click 1 : 200. Training File Continue to use the training file you saved in the previous exercise. m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. and apply shadows to the views. click (Shadows Off). click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line. click the Scale control. under 3D Views. you create 3 similar isometric views with different cutaways.Creating Cutaway Isometric Views In this exercise. Apply advanced model graphics 4 On the View Control Bar. and click Advanced Model Graphics. 2 Click View menu ➤ Orient ➤ Southwest. Create a southwest isometric view 1 In the Project Browser.rvt. 3 On the View Control Bar. You then add each view to the presentation sheet. 5 On the View Control Bar.

9 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. for Silhouette style. enter Isometric 2. under 3D Views. Select 1st Flr. and click OK. and click OK. Click OK. Creating Cutaway Isometric Views | 493 . For Contrast. double-click Isometric 2. select Section Box. specify 35. specify 45°. 17 Click View menu ➤ View Properties. For Altitude. right-click Isometric. under 3D Views. 13 In the Project Browser. under 3D Views. and click Rename. and click OK. 12 In the Rename View dialog. and click Rename. select Silhouette Edges. 8 In the Name dialog. A section box displays around the building model. under 3D Views. 14 In the Project Browser. select Cast Shadows. 7 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. specify 135°. 18 In the Element Properties dialog. right-click Isometric 1. enter Isometric 1. Select Relative to View.6 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. enter Sun and Shadow Settings Isometric. For Azimuth. and click OK. click . 10 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. select Directly. right-click Copy of Isometric 1. Add a section box to Isometric 2 16 In the Project Browser. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ Under Shadow. in the list. Cnst. For Sun Position. Select Ground Plane at Level. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Settings. under Extents. Rename and duplicate isometric views 11 In the Project Browser. click Duplicate. and click OK. 15 In the Rename View dialog. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate.

as shown. You can use this to rotate the section box. and drag the plane downward until it cuts halfway through the third floor. TIP Notice the rotation symbol. When you are finished. 494 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . These grips allow you to modify the boundaries of the section box. 20 Select the grip for the top plane of the section box. click Modify on the Design Bar.19 Select the section box. Grips display on each face of the section box.

you can adjust the plane location. In the Type Selector. Creating Cutaway Isometric Views | 495 . On the Annotation Categories tab. clear Section Boxes. Add isometric views to the presentation sheet 30 In the Project Browser. enter Isometric 3. under 3D Views.Presentation. under 3D Views. NOTE Depending on the precise location of the top plane of the section box. 27 Select the section box. and drag the plane downward until it cuts halfway through the first floor as shown. and click OK. the stairs and railings may display. under Sheets (all). select Viewport : Presentation.Before turning off the visibility of the section box. double-click Isometric 3. and click Rename. 23 In the Rename View dialog. right-click Copy of Isometric 2. under 3D Views. 24 In the Project Browser. drag Isometric 3 under the left section view as shown. 28 Select the grip for the top plane of the section box. right-click Isometric 2. 29 To hide the section box. If desired. or turn off the visibility of railings and stairs using the Visibility/Graphics dialog. 22 In the Project Browser. clear Section Boxes. When you are finished. click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. under 3D Views. Next. make a copy of the view. under 3D Views. The section box no longer displays. double-click Isometric 2. and click OK. double-click A105 . and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. 31 In the Project Browser. click Modify on the Design Bar. and click OK. Modify the section box of Isometric 3 26 In the Project Browser. you stack the 3 isometric views in a vertical column on the presentation sheet to show the continual erosion of the structure. On the Annotation Categories tab. 21 In the Project Browser. 25 To hide the section box.

In the Type Selector. under 3D Views. 33 In the Project Browser. In the Type Selector.32 In the Project Browser. The filled region partially covers the view. drag Isometric 2 under Isometric 3 as shown. under 3D Views. select Viewport : Presentation. drag Isometric 1 under Isometric 2 as shown. 496 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . select Viewport : Presentation. You resolve this problem in the steps that follow.

This will make it easier to draw lines. click Edit. 39 For Background. select Concrete. click Lines. select Transparent. 41 On the Design Bar.Modify filled region boundaries 34 Right-click the Presentation Callout viewport. The image below shows the redrawn lines. You change the fill pattern back to solid fill when you are done. 37 In the Element Properties dialog. 38 In the Type Properties dialog. redraw the portion of the filled region so it follows the boundary of Isometric 1. click Region Properties. Creating Cutaway Isometric Views | 497 . You may need to use the Split tool and the Trim tool to modify lines during this process. for Fill Patterns. 36 On the Design Bar. click Edit/New. 40 Click OK twice. and click Activate View. 35 Select the poche filled region. 42 Using the drawing tools. On the Options Bar.

498 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . 48 Right-click the Presentation Callout viewport. 44 In the Element Properties dialog. and click Deactivate View. 45 In the Type Properties dialog. 46 Click OK twice. click Edit/New. for Fill Pattern. 49 Click File menu ➤ Save. select Solid fill. click Region Properties. click Finish Sketch. 47 On the Design Bar. Creating Cutaway Perspective Views on page 499. 50 Proceed with the next exercise.43 On the Design Bar.

and specify the range and direction just outside the upper right corner of the building model. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. Create a perspective view 1 In the Project Browser. Cnst. Creating Cutaway Perspective Views | 499 . After adding shadows and silhouette edges to the view. you create the final view for the analytique.rvt. The view opens immediately. m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. double-click 1st Flr. Training File Continue to use the training file you saved in the previous exercise. a cutaway perspective view. you add it to the presentation sheet.Creating Cutaway Perspective Views In this exercise. click Camera. under Floor Plans. then you specify the eye direction and range. 3 Place the camera in the southwest corner of the view as shown. Adding a camera is a 2-click process: first you specify the eye location.

click . 8 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. For Contrast. specify the following: Under Shadow. 7 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. 6 On the View Control Bar. 500 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line. select Cast Shadows. and click Advanced Model Graphics. Add shadows and silhouette edges 5 On the View Control Bar. select Sun and Shadow Settings Isometric. and click OK. for Name. 9 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. select Silhouette Edges. specify 35. click ■ ■ ■ (Shadows Off). For Sun Position.4 Adjust the crop region so the entire building model fits in it. and click OK. for Silhouette style.

Creating Cutaway Perspective Views | 501 . 11 In the Element Properties dialog.Add a section box 10 Click View menu ➤ View Properties. 12 Select the section box. select Section Box. You may need to adjust the location of the crop region as well. and click OK. Grips display on each plane of the section box. under Extents. A section box now cuts through the building model. 13 Use the section grips to modify the location of each plane until your view resembles the following image.

click (Hide Crop Region). In the Type Selector. drag 3D View 1 onto the presentation sheet. On the Annotation Categories tab. select Scale (locked proportions).Presentation. and click OK. and click OK. you must specify the actual size of the image. and place it in the upper-left corner as shown. double-click A105 . 21 In the Project Browser. Because scale does not apply to perspective views. select Viewport : Presentation. for Width. enter 165 mm. 17 Under Model Crop Size. Add the view to the presentation sheet 20 In the Project Browser. under Sheets (all). 15 On the Options Bar. clear Section Boxes. click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. under 3D Views. click Size. 16 In the Crop Region Size dialog. under Change. 18 On the View Control Bar.14 Select the crop region. 19 To hide the section box. 502 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views .

Training File Continue to use the training file you saved in the previous exercise. Annotating the Analytique on page 503. 14 Add a title to the analytique as shown. enter Description. enter Title. and click OK. click Duplicate. Annotating the Analytique In this exercise. double-click it in the Project Browser. 11 In the Type Properties dialog. 23 Proceed with the next exercise. 6 In the Name dialog. select the same font as the title. 4 In the Element Properties dialog. click Edit/New. you complete the analytique by adding text to the presentation sheet. 9 In the Type Properties dialog. 10 In the Name dialog. specify a text size of 6 mm. 12 In the Element Properties dialog. 3 On the Options Bar. 7 In the Type Properties dialog. click Text. click Edit/New. and click OK. select a font. click Duplicate.22 Click File menu ➤ Save. click . 5 In the Type Properties dialog. under Text. Add a title and description 13 In the Type Selector. and click OK.Presentation sheet is not the active view. Annotating the Analytique | 503 . and click OK. m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views.rvt. select Text : Title. click OK. under Text. Create new text types 1 If the Sheets: A105 . specify a text size of 40 mm. 8 In the Element Properties dialog. 2 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar.

This completes the Presentation Views tutorial. 17 Add a description of your choosing and add it to the analytique as shown. 18 On the Design Bar. click Modify. 504 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . 16 In the Type Selector. 19 Click File menu ➤ Save.15 Click in the drawing window to complete the title text. select Text : Description.

Importing and Exporting 505 .

506 .

you create a small building from the front mass form. you import a SketchUp file into a Revit Architecture project as an in-place mass family. Once the model has been imported. curtain walls. you can easily add detail with Revit components. and roofs. You use the mass faces of the mass form to create Revit elements. that compose the building. After you import the SketchUp model. 507 . such as walls. In this tutorial.Importing SketchUp Files 13 The ability to import SketchUp® files directly into Revit Architecture allows you to quickly integrate sketch concepts into the Revit environment and reuse the SketchUp model without having to manually rework it.

Double-click the Common folder.rte. and click OK. 5 Click File menu ➤ Save As. 6 In the Save As dialog. select SketchUp Files. For Layers. you create a Revit Architecture project. visible elements. 12 In the Import/Link dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Click the Training Files icon. The in-place mass family is saved only in context of the project.skp. select Auto-Detect. click Browse. ■ 508 | Chapter 13 Importing SketchUp Files . enter SketchUp Model. under Template file. For Colors. For Files of type. 4 In the New Project dialog. click Training Files. Create a Revit project 1 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Project. click the Massing tab. 11 Click File menu ➤ Import/Link ➤ CAD Formats. click Create Mass. right-click in the Design Bar. and click Save. 10 In the Name dialog. select Preserve. and not in the library. Click the Sketchup file. buildings. 8 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar. and click Massing on the context menu that displays. click OK. 2 In the New Project dialog. and import a SketchUp model into the project as an in-place mass family. enter Import SketchUp. for File name. or select from a list.Importing a SketchUp Model as a Mass In this exercise. 3 In the left pane of the Choose Template dialog. This option allows you to select what to import: all elements. click OK. TIP If the Massing tab does not display in the Design Bar. select All. and open Metric\Templates\DefaultMetric. Import a SketchUp model 7 On the Design Bar. 9 In the informational dialog. For Import units.

16 On the Design Bar. 15 Enter ZR to zoom in on the lower right building. select Level 1. Importing a SketchUp Model as a Mass | 509 . curtain walls. Click Open. depending on the complexity of the project. 13 Click to place the lower right building inside of the elevation markers. and roofs. click the Close button. such as walls. click . NOTE A warning message displays because the mass contains only mesh geometry. In a new project. ■ The model displays in the view on the Level 1 floor plan.Center. click Finish Mass.You can have Revit automatically detect and convert incoming units to project units (Auto-Detect) or you can specify the units for the SketchUp drawing if you know that information. An existing project may have options for many levels to choose from. select Manual . Level 1 is the only choice. For Place at level. 17 In the warning dialog. The mesh geometry (faces) will be used in another exercise to create Revit elements. ■ ■ For Positioning. 14 On the View toolbar.

click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges. You turn their visibility off to view only the building. that compose the building. verify Basic Roof: Generic .18 Proceed to the next exercise. 3 In the Type Selector. After you create the building from the mass faces. 510 | Chapter 13 Importing SketchUp Files . you use the faces of the front mass form to create Revit Architecture elements. for Level. verify Level 2 is selected. 2 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar. click Roof by Face. The mass faces are not converted to Revit elements: they remain in the project. you modify the roofs and add doors to complete the design. such as walls. select the face so that it highlights in red. Creating a Building from Mass Faces In this exercise. and roofs. Create roofs from mass faces 1 Zoom in to the front mass form. and on the View Control Bar. 5 Move your cursor over the top face of the left mass. 4 On the Options Bar. curtain walls. Creating a Building from Mass Faces on page 510.400mm displays. and when the cursor displays a plus sign.

click SteeringWheels to display the Full Navigation Wheel. 10 Adjust the view: ■ On the View toolbar.The cursor displays a plus or a minus sign. indicating that you are adding or subtracting faces to and from the selection. on the Options Bar. (It is difficult to see the roof in the current view. click Create Roof. 6 On the Options Bar. Creating a Building from Mass Faces | 511 . This option enables you to select more than 1 face when you create a roof. To see the new roof. 9 On the Options Bar. click Create Roof. on the View toolbar. A roof is created from the mass face. 8 Select the top 3 faces of the mass on the right. verify that Select Multiple is selected.) to turn off mass visibility in the view. click to display masses. Click again 7 With the Roof by Face command still active.

14 On the Options Bar. 11 Close the Full Navigation Wheel. 13 Select the top 4 faces of the mass. 512 | Chapter 13 Importing SketchUp Files .■ Click the Orbit section of the Full Navigation Wheel and drag your cursor to rotate your viewpoint as shown so you can see the front of the mass form. 12 On the Design Bar. click Roof by Face. click Create Roof.

200mm displays. Creating a Building from Mass Faces | 513 . 23 On the Options Bar. click roofs that you created. This option lets you create the walls on the inside of the mass. verify Basic Wall: Generic .15 On the Design Bar. select Core Face: Exterior. 19 Click the Orbit section of the Full Navigation Wheel and drag your cursor to rotate your viewpoint as shown so you can see the front of the mass form. click SteeringWheels to display the Full Navigation Wheel. click Modify to end the command. for Loc Line. click Wall by Face. 21 On the Design Bar. and display only the 17 Click again to redisplay the masses. to turn off the mass visibility in the view. 22 In the Type Selector. Create walls from mass faces 18 On the View toolbar. 16 On the View toolbar. 20 Close the Full Navigation Wheel.

28 In the Type Selector. 26 Click to redisplay the masses. 25 On the View toolbar. 514 | Chapter 13 Importing SketchUp Files .24 Select the 4 mass faces that have been highlighted in red below. click to view only the walls and roofs. click Curtain System by Face. 29 Select the left face of the left mass. verify Curtain System: 1500 x 3000mm displays. Create curtain systems from mass faces 27 On the Design Bar.

Create walls from mass faces 34 Close the Full Navigation Wheel. Creating a Building from Mass Faces | 515 . 33 Click the Orbit section of the Full Navigation Wheel and drag your cursor to rotate your viewpoint as shown so you can see the back of the mass forms. 31 Using the same technique.30 On the Options Bar. create the 2 curtain systems shown below. click Create System. click SteeringWheels to display the Full Navigation Wheel. 32 On the View toolbar.

and select it. click Create System. TIP If you have difficulty selecting a wall that shares an edge with another wall. and on the Options Bar. click Wall by Face. 38 Select the mass face shown below. select the other wall. click Roof by Face. 40 Select the 4 mass faces shown below. and on the Options Bar. Create a roof from a mass face 37 On the Design Bar. click Create Roof. 36 Select the 5 walls highlighted below. press TAB until the desired wall highlights.35 On the Design Bar. 516 | Chapter 13 Importing SketchUp Files . click Curtain System. Create additional curtain systems from mass faces 39 On the Design Bar.

Creating a Building from Mass Faces | 517 . click to view the building that you have created. 45 Zoom out beyond the drawing extents. Create a 3D perspective view of the building with a camera 44 In the Project Browser. click Wall by Face. and select the mass face shown below. 43 Click to redisplay the masses. click Camera. under Floor Plans. Below the right corner of the view.Create the final wall 41 On the Design Bar. 46 Place the camera and its target: ■ ■ On the View tab of the Design Bar. specify a point to place the camera. double-click Level 1. 42 On the View toolbar.

518 | Chapter 13 Importing SketchUp Files . specify a point for the camera target. to view only the walls. as shown. The perspective view created by the camera displays. 48 On the View toolbar. Click the frame to display its grips. and curtain systems that make up You may need to resize the view again. click your building in the view. roofs. and click in the drawing area to hide the grips.■ In the far left corner of the building that you created. The view frame is highlighted in red and its grips display. 47 Resize the view by moving the frame grips until you can see the building.

click 51 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ . click . Under Grid 1 Pattern. Modify the roofs 53 On the Views toolbar. Click OK. and select the left curtain system in the view. select Center. click Modify. Creating a Building from Mass Faces | 519 . for Justification. 50 On the Options Bar. 52 Repeat the preceding steps to change the justifications of the 2 other curtain systems in the view. select Center. for Justification.Change the justification of the curtain systems 49 On the Design Bar. Under Grid 2 Pattern.

63 In the Type Selector. under 3D Views. Add doors to the building 58 In the Project Browser. 55 Right-click. click Door. 61 Close the Full Navigation Wheel. 520 | Chapter 13 Importing SketchUp Files . 56 In the Project Browser. and click Cancel to end the command. 62 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. under 3D Views.54 Select each roof to display its grips. Click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges. 57 On the View Control Bar: ■ ■ Click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line. double-click 3D View 1. 59 On the View toolbar. verify M_Single-Flush: 0915 x 2134mm displays. double-click {3D}. and move the roof edges as shown below. click SteeringWheels to display the Full Navigation Wheel. 60 Click the Orbit section of the Full Navigation Wheel and drag your cursor to rotate your viewpoint as shown so you can see the front of the building.

64 Add doors to the building as shown below. 65 Save and close the drawing. Creating a Building from Mass Faces | 521 .

522 .

Using Advanced Features 523 .

524 .

To change grids. you need to select a panel. to resize the system. and mullions. you create a curtain system using the wall command. Flat Curtain System In this lesson. In the left pane of the Open dialog. This type of curtain system is also referred to as a curtain wall. You can add curtain systems with the wall command. For example. Like windows.rvt. 525 .Curtain Systems 14 Curtain systems are not walls. and you can change these elements individually. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. or you can use a specific curtain system command. they can usually include mullions and have glazed panels. Unlike windows. This affects the entire curtain system. they can define space and separate the exterior from the interior. panel. click Training Files. A typical curtain system comprises a wall. Creating an Entrance In this exercise. you select the grid. and they are not windows. you need to change the length of the wall. you further develop the building information model by creating a flat curtain system at the entrance of the model. grid lines. curtain systems are usually assembled on site as a single unit. To switch panel types. and open Metric\m_Curtain_Walls. Like walls. They are typically not load-bearing and are not cut for doors or windows.

expand Views (all) ➤ Floor Plans. 6 Move the cursor down along the edge of the floor. 526 | Chapter 14 Curtain Systems . click Wall. 2 Zoom in to Grid F where it meets the arc in the floor. This floor edge will be the entrance to the building. and finish at the outside face of the exterior wall as shown. select Curtain Wall : Curtain Wall 1. 4 In the Type Selector.1 In the Project Browser. and double-click Ground Floor. Creating a curtain system using the wall command 3 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 5 Start the curtain system where shown.

and double-click Southeast Isometric. 8 In the Project Browser.7 Zoom in to the join between the curtain system and the exterior wall. Creating an Entrance | 527 . expand Views (all) ➤ 3D Views. 10 Zoom in to the curtain system you just added. 9 Click View menu ➤ Orient ➤ Northeast.

You want the curtain system to attach to the roof. using curtain grids. Note that a curtain system created from the wall command has similar properties to other walls: base constraint. and click (Properties). For Top Offset. top constraint. and room bounding. 12 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Constraints ➤ Top Constraint. enter 1200.11 Select the curtain system. select Up to level: TOP OF ROOF. 528 | Chapter 14 Curtain Systems . you are going to subdivide the panel into several smaller panels. top and base attachments. The curtain system is now at the same height as the other existing curtain systems. 13 The curtain system is a single glazed panel. Click OK.

under Floor Plans. click Elevation. Creating an Entrance | 529 . 25 On the Design Bar. 15 On the View tab of the Design Bar. double-click the elevation symbol arrow to open the new elevation view. and click Rename. and resize the crop boundary as shown. right-click Elevation 1 . double-click GROUND FLOOR. 22 Move the cursor along the edge of the wall.Adding curtain grids 14 In the Project Browser. 16 Place the elevation symbol in front of the curtain wall and click Modify on the Design Bar. 20 In the drawing area. click Curtain Grid. 17 Click the elevation arrow to display the crop boundary. 24 Place another grid so that it snaps to the SECOND FLOOR level line. 19 Enter Entrance Elevation. and click to place a horizontal curtain grid 1200 mm above the ground floor level line. and click OK. 23 Place another grid 1500 mm above the first grid. 21 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. click Modify. 18 In the Project Browser.a.

THIRD FLOOR. 32 Move the cursor along the GROUND FLOOR level (left of the vertical grid line) until it snaps to the midpoint of the larger vertical panel. select the 3 grid lines you just placed. The selected grid lines are now at each of these levels. 31 Place the cursor on grid 2 so that it highlights. select SECOND FLOOR. while pressing CTRL. 530 | Chapter 14 Curtain Systems . and SEVENTH FLOOR. SIXTH FLOOR. This divides the curtain wall vertically into 2 panels.26 While pressing CTRL. Click to place another grid line. click Modify. and click OK. FOURTH FLOOR. Click to create a vertical grid. watch the tooltips and the Status Bar. 30 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. or press CTRL + C on the keyboard. 27 Click Edit menu ➤ Copy to Clipboard. FIFTH FLOOR. 29 In the Select Levels dialog. 33 On the Design Bar. 28 Click Edit menu ➤ Paste Aligned ➤ Select Levels by Name. one larger than the other. click Curtain Grid. TIP To be sure that the curtain grid is at the midpoint of the panel.

The segment line style changes to dashed. and then you replace that panel with a curtain system door panel. Adding the doorway 34 Zoom in to the ground floor level in the Entrance Elevation view. you add a doorway to the curtain system. click Add or Remove Segments. You enter an editor that lets you select segments of the grid line to remove them. Creating an Entrance | 531 . 37 Click in any white space to exit the editor. and then select the segment above it. and on the Options Bar. 36 Select the lowest segment of the left grid line.Next. you set up a doorway on a curtain panel. Instead of using the Door command. 35 Select the left vertical grid line. The two segments are removed.

and lock them. 532 | Chapter 14 Curtain Systems . 41 Place 4 vertical grid lines as shown.38 Using the same method. 39 On the Design Bar. select One Segment. click Curtain Grid. 42 Place dimensions as shown. 40 On the Options Bar. remove the horizontal segment that intersects the vertical segment removed in the previous step.

Do not click between the 1800 mm panels. To get the horizontal grid to display between the vertical grids. 44 When the warning about locked dimensions being deleted displays. Use the following image as a guide. click in any white space to exit the editor. click OK to leave the curtain grids constrained. 43 Delete the dimensions. The line style changes from dashed to solid to indicate a grid segment has been added. 46 Click Add or Remove Segments on the Options Bar. 48 When the grids are placed (line style have changed to solid). TIP The middle grid lines are centered between the long vertical grid above them.TIP You may need to adjust your zoom settings to view the dimensions. 47 Click the horizontal grid line between the smaller panels. 45 Select the horizontal grid line that is 1200 mm above the ground floor. You now have two 1800 mm wide panels between smaller rectangular panels. You are going to add more segments to an existing curtain grid. click once to the right of the long grid and then click once to the left of it. Creating an Entrance | 533 .

double-click Entrance Elevation. you replace some of the transparent panels with solid ones. 52 On the Type Selector. The panel changes to a double door. This changes the graphics style of the Next. Watch the Status Bar to be sure you are highlighting the panel.Next. 55 In the Project Browser. under Floor Plans. 53 Use the same method to replace the other panel with a double door. click Modify. click M_Curtain Wall-Store Front-Dbl: Store Front Double Door. 51 Select the left 1800 mm panel. 56 In the Project Browser. 54 On the Design Bar. and open Metric\Families\Doors\M_Curtain Wall-Store Front-Dbl. double-click GROUND FLOOR to see the plan view door swings of the curtain wall doors. 59 Select one of the panels below the FIFTH FLOOR level line. you replace the 2 larger 1800 mm panels with curtain system doors. you change panels in front of ceilings from glazed to solid. not as curtain panels. and click Wireframe. You will have to press TAB to highlight it. Now. These panels schedule as doors. 50 In the left pane of the Open dialog. 57 On the View Control Bar. on the new curtain system you added. click view. Changing panels 58 Zoom in to the FIFTH FLOOR level. . 534 | Chapter 14 Curtain Systems . They are part of the curtain panel category. click Training Files.rfa. 49 Click File menu ➤ Load From Library ➤ Load Family. under Elevations.

click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges. The glazed panels display in blue. and the solid panels display in white. 64 Replace the two adjacent glazed panels with solid panels.60 On the Type Selector. 67 Change the remaining glazed panels in front of ceilings to solid panels. Creating an Entrance | 535 . click System Panel : Solid. click . The Offset property specifies the distance from the centerline of the curtain wall. 62 In the Element Properties dialog. and Material specifies the shading and patterning. 66 Change the graphics style back to Wireframe. click Edit/New to open the Type Properties of the panel. 65 On the View Control Bar. 61 With the panel still selected. Thickness specifies the depth of the panel. The glazed panel is changed to a solid panel. 63 Click OK twice.

2 On the Options Bar. This completes the exercise for creating an entrance.68 On the File menu. Training File ■ Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. you place mullions on curtain panel grids. 3 Place a mullion on the grid segment at the ground floor immediately to the right of the right set of doors. select Grid Line Segment. click Save As. Adding Mullions to the Curtain System In this exercise. select Entire Grid Line. click Mullion. Name the file m_Curtain_Walls-in_progress. 1 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar.rvt. 5 Place a mullion on the horizontal grid that is 1200 mm above the ground floor. 4 On the Options Bar. 536 | Chapter 14 Curtain Systems .

Removing mullions 8 Zoom in to the set of doors. because their width reduces the size of the doors. however. 12 Select the vertical mullion above and between the set of double doors. The two mullions below the doors are not necessary. select All Empty Segments. 9 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. You are going to change some mullion joins. so you remove them next. Now all empty grid segments have mullions on them. 10 Delete the mullions below them. 7 Place the cursor on any empty grid segment on the curtain system and click. Changing mullion joins 11 On the View Control Bar. Mullions can change their joins to other mullions. Adding Mullions to the Curtain System | 537 . clickModify. there are a few that you do not want. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line.6 On the Options Bar.

You learned how to create a basic curtain wall system and how to subdivide it with grids. This completes the exercise for adding mullions. 15 On the Design Bar. double-click Southeast Isometric. you can also right-click. 16 In the Project Browser. 13 Click the lower mullion join control. 14 Click the top mullion control. you learned how to add mullions and change their joins. TIP After selecting the vertical mullion.Two mullion join controls display. The top of the vertical mullion now meets the bottom of the horizontal mullion above. click Modify. 538 | Chapter 14 Curtain Systems . Finally. and click Join Conditions ➤ Break at Join to break the mullion at both joins. 17 Save the file. This also completes the lesson on creating a flat curtain system. The bottom of the mullion meets the top of the horizontal mullion. You also learned how to modify grids and change panels.

specify Up to level: FIFTH FLOOR. 9 Place the second point at the lower right side. you add both predefined and custom mullions to the system. Finally. 1 In the Project Browser. click Wall. enter 1200. Training File ■ Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson. for Top Constraint. Curved Curtain System | 539 . 2 Zoom in to the circular space above the entrance that was just completed. double-click GROUND FLOOR. (Arc passing through three points).Curved Curtain System In this lesson. you create a curved curtain system near the entrance of the model that was just completed. You also create a custom curtain panel for the system. 5 Click ■ ■ ■ . 6 In the Element Properties dialog: Under Constraints. you add a curtain system using the wall command. The curtain wall is sketched as an arc. Click OK. Adding a Curved Curtain System In this exercise. select Curtain Wall : Curtain Wall 1. 4 In the Type Selector. click 8 Start the wall by clicking at the left edge of the circle at the centerline of the intersecting wall. For Top Offset. 3 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 7 On the Options Bar. under Floor Plans.

14 In the Project Browser. 13 Continue to place more grids by using the snap points on the arc. Divide the halves into quarters.10 Finish the wall by clicking at the top of the arc. 540 | Chapter 14 Curtain Systems . 12 Snap the cursor to the midpoint of the curved arc and click. under Elevations. you place grids on the system. and then sixteenths. Watch the Status Bar to ensure you are at the midpoint. click Curtain Grid. double-click East. You are going to use one of these snaps points. The curtain wall displays as one flat panel between the first and second points placed. Next. The curtain grid command snaps only to the curved arc. eighths. 11 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar.

Adding a Custom Curtain Panel | 541 . Next you create a custom panel and add it to the system. Remember to click other elements from the selection except Curtain Panels. select the bottom layer of panels. Using walls as panels 17 Using a selection box. to filter out all 19 Save the file. and snap the cursor to each level line and click to add horizontal curtain grids. Adding a Custom Curtain Panel In this exercise.15 Zoom in to the cylinder. Next. you create a custom curtain panel and place it into the curved curtain system. select Basic Wall: Generic . 18 In the Type Selector.300mm. click Modify. This completes the first exercise for creating a curved system. 16 On the Design Bar. Do not add a grid on the GROUND FLOOR level. you change some panels in the system.

clear Chain. and on the Options Bar. . 542 | Chapter 14 Curtain Systems . 6 On the Options Bar. 8 On the Design Bar. 9 Select the extrusion. click . under Elevations. for Identity Data ➤ Subcategory. select Glass. 5 On the Design Bar. and click . 2 In the left pane of the New dialog. double-click Exterior.Training File ■ Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. 1 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Family. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion. 4 On the Design Bar. click Lines. click Model Lines. and click OK. enter 100. click Finish Sketch. for Depth.rft. 10 In the Element Properties dialog. 7 Start the sketch at the upper left reference line intersection and finish at the lower right reference line intersection. click Training Files. 11 On the Design Bar. and click 13 Sketch 2 lines that crisscross the extrusion. 3 In the Project Browser. 12 On the Options Bar. and open Metric\Templates\Metric Curtain Wall Panel.

All fourth floor panels are selected. click 25 On the View toolbar. click Modify. and click Change Walls Orientation. 18 Load the Curtain Panel . 24 On the View toolbar. (SteeringWheels).14 On the Design Bar. under Floor Plans. select Curtain Panel . and return to the project file. click (Default 3D View). 22 Select the curved arc curtain wall. 17 Click File menu ➤ Load from Library ➤ Load Family. 16 Click File menu ➤ Close.Pattern.Pattern.Pattern. right-click. Adding a Custom Curtain Panel | 543 . 19 In the Project Browser. and click Select Panels ➤ Along Horizontal Grid. 15 Click File menu ➤ Save As. 26 Spin the model so that you can see the curved curtain system. 20 Press TAB until a panel in the arc is highlighted.rfa family. All the panels change to the custom panel you created. 23 Right-click. 21 In the Type Selector.rfa. and save the family as Curtain Panel . double-click FOURTH FLOOR.

and click Select Panels ➤ Along Horizontal Grid. 27 In the Project Browser.The structure of the curved curtain system now matches that of the main part of the building. right-click. 544 | Chapter 14 Curtain Systems . select System Panel . All fifth floor panels are selected. The finished arc wall should look like the following image. 28 Highlight a panel in the arc. 29 In the Type Selector. you add both custom and predefined mullions to the curved curtain panel. Adding Mullions to the Curved Curtain Panel In this exercise. All the panels change to the solid panel. This completes the exercise for adding a custom curtain panel. double-click FIFTH FLOOR. under Floor Plans.Solid. 30 Save the file.

Adding Mullions to the Curved Curtain Panel | 545 .rft. you use the Family Editor to create a custom mullion. Select Radius. 2 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 6 Click Settings menu ➤ Family Category and Parameters. For vertical mullions. under Elevations. 9 On the Options Bar: ■ Click (Polygon). select Mullion.Training File ■ Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. Creating a custom mullion in the Family Editor 4 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Family. double-click East. and enter 50 mm for the radius. click Training Files. click ■ ■ For Sides. and select it. click Lines. 8 On the Design Bar. 10 Place the cursor at the intersection of the reference planes and click to enter the octagon starting point. click Mullion. 1 In the Project Browser. enter 8. except at the GROUND FLOOR level. 7 In the Family Category and Parameters dialog. If Polygon does not display on the Options Bar. for Profile Usage. Notice that both the starting and ending points are in the same location. 3 Select each horizontal grid line on the curved curtain panel. . 5 In the left pane of the New dialog. and click OK. and open Metric\Templates\Metric Profile. Click again to specify the ending point.

18 Place the detail component so that it snaps to the mullion profile as shown. 22 Click File menu ➤ Save As. 31 Click . click Mullion. After the new profile is loaded. click Detail Component.rfa. under 3D Views.rfa. 19 On the Design Bar. 15 Click File menu ➤ Load from Library ➤ Load Family. and click Visibility. 30 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 25 Click File menu ➤ Load from Library ➤ Load Family. 14 In the Family element visibility settings dialog. This controls the detail level at which the mullion profile displays. 17 On the Design Bar. 26 Load the Cylinder Mullion. 24 Click File menu ➤ Close. and return to the project file. 28 On the View toolbar. 546 | Chapter 14 Curtain Systems . 16 In the left pane of the Open dialog. click Modify. 23 Save the family as Cylinder Mullion. 21 In the Family element visibility settings dialog. it can be added as a mullion type. 29 Spin the model so that you can see the curved curtain system. click Visibility.rfa family. and click OK. 20 Select the detail component. 27 In the Project Browser.11 On the Design Bar. clear Fine. click (SteeringWheels). click Modify. 12 Select the lines in the octagon. clear Coarse and Medium. and open Metric\Families\Detail Components\m_Cylinder Mullion .detail. 13 On the Options Bar. double-click Southeast Isometric. and click OK. The detail component becomes the true representation in plan view. click Training Files.

right-click. 35 Enter Cylinder Mullion for Name. double-click GROUND FLOOR. 41 In the Project Browser. for Profile. 39 Click on any grid line in the entry cylinder. You have placed more mullions than you want. 34 In the Type Properties dialog. 44 Save the file. and click OK. click Modify. 33 Click Edit/New. select All Empty Segments. click Duplicate. 42 Highlight a mullion in the arc. 37 Click OK twice. 40 On the Design Bar. Adding Mullions to the Curved Curtain Panel | 547 . select Circular Mullion for Family. 43 Press DELETE. 36 Under Construction. under Floor Plans. select Cylinder Mullion : Cylinder Mullion. so you remove the unwanted ones. and click Select Mullions ➤ On Gridline.32 In the Element Properties dialog. 38 On the Options Bar.

In this lesson. and then apply those custom elements to the system. All the inside faces highlight. double-click TOP OF ROOF. 6 Select the inside faces of the base walls. 2 Zoom in to the skylight at the center of the building between Grids 2 and 3 and D and E. Additional Curtain Systems In this lesson. and a ruled curtain system. select Defines slope. 4 On the Design Bar. you learned to create a curved curtain system.This completes the exercise for adding mullions. a storefront system. Sloped Glazings Sloped glazings are useful when you are creating skylights and other glazed roofing systems. you create additional types of curtain systems: a sloped glazing system. 1 In the Project Browser. under Floor Plans. 3 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 548 | Chapter 14 Curtain Systems . 5 On the Options Bar. as well as the lesson on creating a curved curtain system. and press TAB. make custom curtain panels and mullions. TIP To chain select all the walls. Training File ■ Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson. click Pick Walls. click Roof ➤ Roof by Footprint. and you can click to select them all. place the cursor on the inside face of one of the walls.

18 Save the file. click Mullion. 14 On the Options Bar. 8 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Family. 12 Zoom in to the skylight. 13 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. click Finish Roof. Click OK. enter 600. 17 On the View Control Bar. click Roof Properties. 16 On the Design Bar. 11 On the View Control Bar. 15 Select the grid lines that define the edges of each panel in the sloped glazing. select System Family: Sloped Glazing. Sloped Glazings | 549 . under 3D Views. click Modify. This completes the exercise for creating a sloped glazing system. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges. For Constraints ➤ Base Offset From Level. 9 On the Design Bar. double-click Southeast Isometric.7 On the Design Bar. 10 In the Project Browser. select Entire Grid Line.

1 In the Project Browser. and enter 2400. 550 | Chapter 14 Curtain Systems . 5 On the Options Bar. You can place the curtain wall right inside this wall. select Curtain Wall : Storefront. 2 Zoom in to the wall at the right of the model. Training File ■ Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. double-click GROUND FLOOR. 6 Start the wall 1200 mm from one end of the wall on the wall centerline. click Wall.Storefront System In this exercise. 3 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. you embed curtain walls into other walls to create a storefront system. You are going to place a storefront system in this wall. 4 In the Type Selector. select Unconnected for Height. under Floor Plans.

14 After you have looked at the Vertical Grid Pattern and Horizontal Grid Pattern parameters. double-click Southeast Isometric. under 3D Views. 10 In the Project Browser. To see how the grid layout is defined. 9 On the Design Bar. even if the wall height changes. 13 In the Element Properties dialog. click Modify. click Edit/New. The curtain wall cuts the original wall. and click . and the Spacing (Horizontal Grid Pattern) is set to 2400 mm. This means that the panel heights will be exactly 2400 mm. click OK to close the Type Properties dialog and return to the Element Properties dialog that displays the instance parameters.7 Sketch a curtain wall along the wall centerline to the approximate length shown. For this wall. This indicates that the curtain grids are placed at even intervals along the length of the curtain wall at a distance up to 1524 mm. enter 10200 mm. which is specified in the type. and the Spacing (Vertical Grid Pattern) is set to 1524 mm. The type parameters under the Vertical Grid Pattern and Horizontal Grid Pattern headings create the predefined layout. 11 Zoom in to the new storefront wall. 8 Click the temporary dimension. 12 Select the storefront wall. Storefront System | 551 . The Layout (Horizontal Grid Pattern) is set to Fixed Distance. This specifies an exact length for the wall. The storefront wall already has a curtain grid layout. and press ENTER. you can look at the properties of the storefront wall. the Layout (Vertical Grid Pattern) is set to Maximum Spacing.

and Offset. 18 On the Options Bar. 17 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 20 Save the file. Training File ■ Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. This type of curtain system is known as a ruled curtain system. 1 In the Project Browser. select All Empty Segments. The Offset is the distance the spacing starts from the justification point. enter 15. The Justification specifies the vertical spacing at the beginning. double-click Southeast Isometric. 19 Select a curtain grid. center. Angle. 2 Orient the view to the storefront wall you added in the last exercise. for Vertical Grid Pattern ➤ Angle. This completes the exercise on creating a storefront. Under Vertical Grid Pattern. see the Revit Architecture help. you find Number. enter 45 and for Horizontal Grid Pattern ➤ Angle. You see these same parameters for Horizontal Grid Pattern. you create a curtain wall based on 2 lines that have been sketched at different elevations on the model. 16 Click OK. By setting the Angle value. In this exercise. Curtain System by Lines In this exercise. you are rotating the grid lines to an angle on the face of the panel. you learned how to embed a curtain wall and set up a grid layout. For more information about these curtain wall parameters. The Horizontal Grid Pattern counterparts are the same but for the perpendicular direction. Justification. 552 | Chapter 14 Curtain Systems . Under the Vertical Grid Pattern heading. the Number is the number of vertical curtain grids you want on the curtain instance. under 3D Views. or end. click Mullion. 15 To see how these parameters can affect the wall.The Instance Parameters list includes additional parameters that define the curtain grid layout.

Watch the Status Bar and Tooltips to be sure you are highlighting the model line. making sure Lines : Model Lines : Line is highlighted.3 On the View Control Bar. Curtain System by Lines | 553 . 4 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line. 5 Place the cursor at the top edge of the SECOND FLOOR slab. 7 Place the cursor at the top edge of the TOP OF ROOF level. 6 Click the highlighted line. and highlight the model line. click Curtain System ➤ Curtain System by Lines. Press TAB to select the line if it does not immediately highlight.

Next. click Modify. you can vary the steps to style the system the way you want. A panel between the 2 lines is created. 10 Select the panel. 9 On the Design Bar.8 Select the highlighted line. 554 | Chapter 14 Curtain Systems . A ruled curtain system does not have all the properties of a curtain wall. 11 Click OK. but now that you have created a ruled curtain system. Notice there are very few properties for the ruled curtain system. you subdivide the ruled curtain system using curtain grids. 12 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. click Curtain Grid. NOTE The next few steps are intended as a guide to finish the system. and click .

17 Change the THIRD FLOOR level panels to solid.13 Using the midpoint curtain grid snaps. This completes the exercise for creating a ruled curtain system. In this lesson you learned to create a sloped glazing system. select System Panel : Solid. right-click. and then eighths. and click Select Panels ➤ Along Grid 2. you replace some of the glazed panels in front of the ceilings with solid panels. quarters. quarters. Curtain System by Lines | 555 . and define a ruled curtain system. embed a curtain system inside another wall. 15 Highlight a top level glazed panel. Finally. 18 Save the file. 14 Place vertical grids that snap to the midpoints on the panel and divide the panel into halves. place horizontal grids that divide the panel into halves. and then eighths. This is similar to placing the grids on the curved curtain system. 16 In the Type Selector. and the lesson on creating additional curtain systems.

556 .

you need to select a work plane to use as a sketching guide. you learn how to create different types of roofs in Revit Architecture 2009. 557 . Before you can sketch the roof profile. In this lesson. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. and low sloped roofs. You do not need to create the work plane. you learn how to add fascia. you create an extruded roof over a breezeway between a house and a garage. In this exercise. gable. including hip. you learn to create several different types of roofs. you create roofs from footprints and by extrusion. mansard. and soffits to the roofs that you create.Roofs 15 In this lesson.rvt. In this tutorial. and open Metric\m_Roofs. shed. In the left pane of the Open dialog. click Training Files. Creating Roofs Creating an Extruded Roof You create the roof by sketching the top roof profile and extruding it over the length of the breezeway. In addition. gutters. a work plane named Breezeway exists for the purpose of this exercise.

you need to define four reference planes to help determine key points on the profile sketch. 558 | Chapter 15 Roofs . and double-click Level 1. centerline. 6 In the Roof Reference Level and Offset dialog. 7 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. click Roof ➤ Roof by Extrusion. and so on). 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. verify that Section: Section1 is selected. click Ref Plane. and then click Open View to select a section view parallel to the work plane in which to sketch the roof. expand Views (all).1 In the Project Browser. Before you can sketch the profile of the roof. click the blue square on the witness line. verify Level 3 is selected for Level. 8 Sketch the first reference plane 450 mm to the left of the left exterior breezeway wall face. select Name. 5 In the Go To View dialog. expand Floor Plans. The section view is automatically cropped around the area where you want to sketch the roof. and then select Reference Plane : Breezeway. TIP Instead of trying to place the reference plane in its exact location initially. 3 In the Work Plane dialog. 4 Click OK. you can place it in the general location and then zoom in and use temporary dimensions. and click OK. To change where the temporary dimension is measured from (face. This helps ensure that the plane is measured from the face of the wall rather than from the wall centerline.

9 Sketch a similar reference plane 450 mm to the right of the right exterior breezeway wall face. 10 Sketch a vertical reference plane centered between the two vertical walls. 11 Sketch a horizontal reference plane 450 mm below Level 2. Creating an Extruded Roof | 559 .

560 | Chapter 15 Roofs . click Lines. click Finish Sketch to complete the roof. sketch the roof profile. 13 On the Options Bar.Next. 14 Sketch two sloped lines to create the roof profile. Begin the sketch at the intersection of the left vertical reference plane and the horizontal plane. click (Default 3D View) to display the model. The roof is automatically extruded from the Breezeway work plane in one direction. select Chain. 12 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. 16 On the View toolbar. 15 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. Use automatic snaps to link the chain to the reference plane intersections.

19 On the Tools toolbar. Use the Join Roof command again to join the opposite end of the breezeway roof to the exterior wall of the house that joins the breezeway. 18 Select the edge of the roof.Notice that the breezeway roof penetrates the house walls inappropriately. The breezeway walls still penetrate the roof. 22 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. so you next attach the breezeway walls to the breezeway roof. expand Sections (Type 1). 17 On the Tools toolbar. and then select the exterior wall face of the garage to join the roof to the garage wall. The roof should resemble the following illustration. and double-click Section 1. and select the second wall. click Modify. press TAB. use the Join Roofs command to adjust the length of the roof and join the roof edges to the exterior walls. click (Join/Unjoin Roof). 20 Select the breezeway roof edge. press CTRL. 23 Select one of the breezeway walls. expand Views (all). Next. click (Join/Unjoin Roof). and then select the exterior face of the wall. 21 In the Project Browser. Creating an Extruded Roof | 561 .

Creating a Gable Roof from a Footprint In this exercise. (Default 3D View) to view the completed breezeway roof in the 27 Proceed to the next exercise. 26 On the View toolbar. click model. you create a gable roof over a garage from a footprint. Creating a Gable Roof from a Footprint on page 562. click Attach for Top/Base. and then verify that Attach Wall: Top is selected. 562 | Chapter 15 Roofs .24 On the Options Bar. 25 Select the roof to join the wall tops to the roof.

verify that Defines slope is selected. 3 In the Project Browser. 5 On the Options Bar. 6 Select the left vertical wall of the garage to define the first roof slope line. 4 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. Next. m_Roofs. You use roof slope lines to define the roof gable ends. expand Views (all). To complete the gable roof with the correct pitch. and enter 600 for Overhang. and click Yes. expand Floor Plans.You begin by sketching the perimeter of the roof in plan view to create the roof footprint. click Pick Walls. you set the roof slope as a property of the footprint slope lines. 2 Select Garage Roof to move the roof to the correct level. 1 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. Verify that a dashed blue line displays to the left of the wall from the edge of the roof as you select the wall. sketch the roof footprint.rvt. click Roof ➤ Roof by Footprint. and double-click Garage Roof. Creating a Gable Roof from a Footprint | 563 .

enter 500 mm for Rise/1000 to change the roof slope. the roof slope has a 750 mm rise over a 1000 mm run. clear Defines slope. click the model. under Dimensions. 564 | Chapter 15 Roofs . edit the properties of the two vertical slope definition lines to change the roof pitch. select both slope definition lines. 10 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. 11 Press CTRL. 13 On the Design Bar. and click OK. click Modify. 12 In the Element Properties dialog. Creating a Roof with a Vertical Penetration from a Footprint on page 565.7 Select the parallel wall on the right to define the second roof slope line. Next. click (Properties). Verify that a dashed blue line displays to the right of the wall from the edge of the roof as you select the wall. (Default 3D View) to view the gable roof and attached walls in 16 Proceed to the next exercise. 14 When you see the informational dialog. 8 On the Options Bar. By default. and on the Options Bar. click Yes to attach the highlighted exterior garage walls to the roof. click Finish Roof. The Element Properties dialog is displayed. 9 Select the two horizontal walls to create a closed loop and complete the roof footprint. 15 On the View toolbar.

4 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar.rvt. expand Views (all). press TAB. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. When you complete the roof. m_Roofs. 5 Place the cursor over one of the exterior walls. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. The roof requires an opening to accommodate a chimney. and double-click Level 3. You begin by sketching the perimeter of the roof in plan view to create the roof footprint. you sketch a closed rectangular opening around the chimney. expand Floor Plans. Creating a Roof with a Vertical Penetration from a Footprint | 565 . you add a main gable roof to a house from a footprint. the opening that you sketched becomes a void in the roof. and then verify that a dashed blue line displays to the exterior side of the walls. 1 In the Project Browser. clear Defines slope. click Pick Walls. and enter 600 for Overhang.Creating a Roof with a Vertical Penetration from a Footprint In this exercise. click Roof ➤ Roof by Footprint. 3 On the Options Bar. After you define the roof slope lines and complete the footprint. NOTE You add the slope defining lines in a later step.

click Finish Roof. click Yes to attach the walls to the roof. 17 When you see the informational dialog. click Lines. 11 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. 15 On the Options bar. 8 On the Options Bar. sketch the chimney opening. 13 On the Options Bar. add new slope lines to the roof. click Modify. 7 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. 14 Select one of the shorter line segments shown in the following illustration. sketch a rectangle from the upper left corner of the exterior chimney face to the lower right corner of the exterior chimney face. 9 Using automatic snaps.6 Click to select all the walls. 10 On the View menu. Next. click Zoom ➤ Zoom To Fit to view the entire floor plan. 12 Select the uppermost horizontal line. click (Rectangle). 566 | Chapter 15 Roofs . 16 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. select Defines Slope. Next. select Defines Slope.

Creating a Hip Roof from a Footprint In this exercise.18 On the View toolbar. click Roof ➤ Roof by Footprint. expand Floor Plans. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. 3 On the Options Bar. expand Views (all). select Defines slope. Creating a Hip Roof from a Footprint on page 567. click (Default 3D View) to view the new roof in the model.rvt. click Pick Walls. you create a hip roof over the rear of a house from a footprint. 19 Proceed to the next exercise. 1 In the Project Browser. m_Roofs. and enter 600 for Overhang. 4 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. Creating a Hip Roof from a Footprint | 567 . and double-click Level 2.

click (Trim/Extend). using the following illustration for guidance. close the roof sketch. Make sure you select the segment on the side that you want to keep. click Lines. Roof sketches must create a closed loop before you can create the roof. 11 To trim the first line segment. clear Defines Slope. 7 On the Options Bar. and click (Pick Lines). verify that the Trim/Extend to Corner option is selected.5 Select the exterior edges of the three walls that create the rear addition to the house. 8 Select the exterior edge of the uppermost horizontal wall of the main building. Verify that a dashed blue line displays on the exterior side of the wall from the edge of the roof as you select the walls. The sketched lines cannot overlap or intersect each other. select the left vertical slope definition line. 6 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. trim the extra line segments that result from the intersection of the sketch lines. 10 On the Options Bar. Next. You must trim these lines to create a valid sketch. 9 On the Tools toolbar. and then specify a point near the midpoint of the line that you sketched along the wall of the main building. 568 | Chapter 15 Roofs . Next.

(Press ESC to close the SteeringWheels. Creating a Hip Roof from a Footprint | 569 . click Roof Properties. Next. 13 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. and use the Orbit tool to view the back of the house.12 Repeat the trim procedure on the adjacent corner to create a closed loop without intersections. click (Default 3D View) to display the model. Use the Attach Top/Base command to join the walls to the roof. 18 On the Design Bar. 17 On the View toolbar.) Notice that the walls do not join to the roof. and click OK. click Modify. The Element Properties dialog is displayed. enter 600 for Base Offset From Level. 16 On the View toolbar. click Finish Roof. click (SteeringWheels). and then verify that Attach Wall: Top is selected. click Attach for Top/Base on the Options Bar. raise the roof 600 mm above the current level. 15 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. 20 Select the roof to join the wall top to the roof. 14 Under Constraints. 19 Select one of the walls under the hip roof.

22 Using the same method that you used previously. The properly joined roof should resemble the following illustration. click (Join/Unjoin Roof). join the two remaining walls to the roof. 570 | Chapter 15 Roofs .21 Click (SteeringWheels). 23 On the Tools toolbar. and use the Orbit tool to view the remaining walls that support the hip roof. Notice that the new hip roof does not properly join to the back of the house. and then select the edge of the main roof to join the roofs. use the Join Roof command to fix the roof. 25 Proceed to the next exercise. Next. Creating a Shed Roof from a Footprint on page 571. 24 Select the edge of the hip roof. Press and hold CTRL to select and join the two remaining walls at the same time.

8 On the Tools toolbar. 9 On the Options Bar. and double-click Level 2. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar.rvt. click Roof ➤ Roof by Footprint. 4 On the Options Bar. and then click to select all three of the entry way walls. 10 To trim the first line segment. 3 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. clear Defines Slope. 5 Place the cursor over one of the exterior walls that defines the entry way. m_Roofs. click Pick Walls. 6 On the Options Bar. 7 Select the exterior face of the main wall to close the sketch. and enter 300 for Overhang. click (Trim/Extend). and then select a point near the midpoint of the upper horizontal line you sketched earlier. you create a shed roof over the entrance to a house from a footprint. Next. verify that the Trim/Extend to Corner option is selected. press TAB. trim the extra line segments that result from the intersection of the sketch lines. select the left vertical roof line. You must trim these lines to create a valid sketch. expand Floor Plans. 1 In the Project Browser. Make sure you select the segment on the side that you want to keep. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. enter 0 for Overhang. Verify that a blue dashed line displays around the exterior side of the walls before clicking to select the walls.Creating a Shed Roof from a Footprint In this exercise. expand Views (all). Creating a Shed Roof from a Footprint | 571 .

1 In the Project Browser.rvt. and use the Orbit tool to rotate the model. click (Default 3D View) to display the model. and double-click 3D. 12 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. (SteeringWheels). Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. 572 | Chapter 15 Roofs . m_Roofs. Notice the rise value is displayed next to the slope marker. Next. 21 Proceed to the next exercise. expand Views (all). click 20 On the View toolbar. 14 Enter 500 mm for the rise value to change the roof slope. Adding Slope Arrows to a Shed Roof In this exercise. 18 Click Yes to attach the walls to the roof. and select the lower horizontal line at the front of the roof. you add a slope-defining line. expand 3D Views. you add slope arrows to the shed roof.11 Repeat the trim procedure on the adjacent corner to create a closed loop without intersections. click Roof Properties. 15 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. 16 Under Constraints. and press ENTER. click Finish Roof to complete the roof. and click OK. Adding Slope Arrows to a Shed Roof on page 572. 19 On the View toolbar. 17 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. select Defines slope. click Modify. enter -600 for Base Offset From Level. 13 On the Options Bar.

Adding Slope Arrows to a Shed Roof | 573 . 8 Select the two vertical sketch lines. and select the middle segment of the slope defining line. and zoom in around the shed roof footprint.2 Select the shed roof over the entrance of the house. 15 Sketch a slope arrow from the reference plane to the midpoint of the lower horizontal roof line: Select the intersection of the left vertical reference plane and the roof line to specify the location of the slope arrow tail. 11 On the Design Bar. 4 In the Project Browser. click Slope Arrow. To help locate the position of each split. 7 On the Options Bar. Next. click (Pick Lines). Before you can add slope arrows. click Zoom ➤ Zoom in Region. change the longest slope line segment (the middle segment) so that it no longer defines slope. add two new slope arrows. expand Floor Plans. click Split Walls and Lines. you need to add two reference planes. click Modify. and double-click Level 2. 14 On the Options Bar. Next. verify ■ (Draw) is selected. Verify that the reference planes are located inside the shed roof sketch. clear Defines Slope. click Edit to activate the roof footprint sketch. and enter 600 for Offset. 6 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. 5 On the View menu. click Ref Plane. 12 On the Options Bar. 9 On the Tools menu. 13 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. expand Views (all). 10 Split the slope defining line where the reference planes intersect as shown in the following illustration. 3 On the Options Bar. you need to split the slope defining line into three segments.

(Properties). 23 Proceed to the next exercise. use the Attach Top/Base command to join the wall to the roof. Aligning Roof Eaves on page 574. Begin the tail at the right reference plane. When eave heights differ. m_Roofs. expand Floor Plans. select both slope arrows. and double-click Garage Roof. 2 Select the gable roof over the garage. 20 Under Dimensions. and click 19 Under Constraints. 22 Click (Default 3D View) on the View toolbar to display the model. select Slope for Specify. NOTE If the front wall is separated from the roof. you can use the Align Eaves tool to align them. you convert the gable roof over the garage to a hip roof and use the Align Eaves tool to adjust the eave heights. 574 | Chapter 15 Roofs . and then select it to specify the location of the slope arrow head. The head should snap to the midpoint of the line as in the previous steps.■ Move the cursor along the roof line until the midpoint displays. 17 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. and move the cursor to place the arrow.rvt. 16 Repeat steps 13 . Aligning Roof Eaves In this exercise. click Modify. click Edit. expand Views (all). 1 In the Project Browser. and then click OK.15 to add the second slope arrow. When you sketch a hip roof. 18 Press CTRL. 3 On the Options Bar. enter 500 for Rise/1000. 21 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. click Finish Roof to complete the roof. the adjacent eave heights must align.

Notice how the overhang adjusts to match the eave height of the first eave. Aligning Roof Eaves | 575 . When aligning eaves. on the File menu. click Finish Roof. 6 With the two gable end lines selected. on the Options Bar. and click OK. 12 On the Design Bar. 13 On the View toolbar. (Properties). 5 On the Options Bar. select Adjust Overhang to align the eaves by adjusting the overhang to match the eave height of the first eave. Next. 15 Close the exercise file without saving your changes. 11 Select both the horizontal eave lines. select Defines Slope. click 8 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. select a method to align the eaves. and save the exercise file with a unique name. under Dimensions. 9 Select the left vertical eave to use to align the eaves. 10 On the Options Bar. 14 If you want to save your changes.4 Select the two gable end lines (the lines without slope definition). click (Default 3D View) to display the model. click Save As. you must select one eave to use to align both eaves. This dimension is the height of the eave measured from the sketch plane. click Align Eaves. enter 800 mm for Rise/1000. The eave lines display with a dimension. 7 In the Element Properties dialog. Creating a Mansard Roof on page 576. 16 Proceed to the next exercise.

click Training Files. In the left pane of the Open dialog. on the Options Bar. 3 Select the roof and. 1 In the Project Browser. Notice the model has four defined levels: In the next steps. under Constraints.rvt. 4 In the Element Properties dialog. 576 | Chapter 15 Roofs . and double-click North. you create a mansard roof by cutting off a hip roof at a specific level and adding another roof on top of it. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. expand Views (all). select Level 3 for Cutoff Level. you constrain the current roof so it does not rise above Level 3. (Properties). expand Elevations. click Modify.Creating a Mansard Roof In this exercise. click 5 Click OK to cut the top of the roof off at level 3. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. and open Metric\m_Mansard_Roof.

and click OK. expand Floor Plans. enter 750 mm for Rise/1000. and select the remaining three lines. under Dimensions. Next. and then select Defines slope. 7 In the Project Browser. click . 13 Select one of the roof cutoff lines. click (Pick Lines). 11 Select the four edges of the roof cutoff. 10 On the Options Bar. click Roof ➤ Roof by Footprint.6 On the View toolbar. expand Views (all). and double-click Level 3. 9 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. 14 On the Options Bar. 12 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. click Finish Roof. Creating a Mansard Roof | 577 . 16 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. create a new roof that starts at level 3 and completes the mansard roof. 15 In the Element Properties dialog. press TAB. 8 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. click Modify. click Lines. click (Default 3D View) to display the model.

Creating a Low Slope Roof In this exercise. click Training Files. you add a roof to a building shell. (Default 3D View) to display the model with the complete 18 If you want to save your changes. After you add the roof. 20 Proceed to the next exercise. You also modify the structure of the roof slab to more accurately represent the tapered insulation condition used to create the roof drainage system. and save the exercise file with a unique name. click mansard roof.rvt. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. Creating a Low Slope Roof on page 578. you modify the slab to represent roof drains in the low slope roof. 19 Close the exercise file without saving your changes. In the left pane of the Open dialog.17 On the View toolbar. NOTE This exercise uses a common training file and Imperial units. 578 | Chapter 15 Roofs . on the File menu. and open Common\c_Low_Slope_Roof. click Save As.

Creating a Low Slope Roof | 579 . 6 Select the interior face of a wall segment on each side of the building and 1 on either side of the arc wall at the entry. 3 On the Design Bar. under Floor Plans. click Roof ➤ Roof by Footprint. and that Overhang is 0' 0''. 4 On the Options Bar. 2 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. double-click Roof. 5 In the drawing area. click Pick Walls. verify that Defines slope is not selected.Create a flat roof by footprint 1 In the Project Browser. select the interior face of the curved wall on the right.

11 On the Design Bar. click Roof Properties. 8 Select the walls to create a closed loop. 7 On the Tools toolbar. click (Trim/Extend).EPDM. click Finish Roof. select Steel Truss . as shown: 9 On the Design Bar. and click OK. 580 | Chapter 15 Roofs .Because the walls are not continuous. for Type. 10 In the Element Properties dialog. Instead you select walls on each side of the building and then use the Trim tool to create a closed loop sketch.Insulation on Metal Deck . you cannot use TAB to select the chain of walls.

double-click Roof. Add split lines to segment the roof 14 In the Project Browser.Open a section view 12 In the drawing area. you alter the shape of the slab to represent a roof drainage layout. You use this tool to split the roof slab into 6 regions so that you can modify the slope independently. 13 Zoom in to the upper left area of the roof. double-click the section head to open the section view. and click to select it. In the next steps. Creating a Low Slope Roof | 581 . under Floor Plans. but it is a flat object with no slope or indication of roof drainage. 16 On the Options Bar. click (Draw Split Lines). 15 Use the TAB key to highlight the roof. The roof has been created.

582 | Chapter 15 Roofs . 18 Move the cursor down. 20 Using the same method. and select a point on the opposite roof line. 19 Select the lower endpoint of the arc line. add a second horizontal split line beginning at the top endpoint of the arc.17 Select the midpoint of the top horizontal roof line. move the cursor horizontally to the left. and select the midpoint of the bottom horizontal roof line You create a split line vertically down the center.

The roof is now divided into 6 sections. click 22 Click to add a point close to the center of each section. Add elevation points 21 With the roof still selected. exact placement of the points is not important. (Add points). You could also select multiple points and change them all at once from the Options Bar. You modify the points individually. click (Modify Sub-Elements). 23 On the Options Bar. on the Options Bar. you begin to shape the slab by adding points for the roof drains and modifying the elevations of the points and edges. Creating a Low Slope Roof | 583 . Layout tools in Revit Architecture such as reference planes and dimensions can be used to more accurately place editing points on a roof slab. Next. In this exercise.

and press ENTER. for the dimension. 584 | Chapter 15 Roofs . The lines on the roof now represent the ridges of the deformed slab shape. Edit the roof edges 26 On the Options Bar. 25 Using the same method.24 Select the point in the upper left region of the roof. click (Modify Sub-Elements). specify a -2'' dimension for the remaining 5 points. enter -2''. The dimensional value is relative to the roof plane.

as shown: 28 On the Options Bar. and on the Options Bar. and select all of the roof edges. Creating a Low Slope Roof | 585 . double-click the section head to view the additional affects of the shape editing. 31 Select the roof slab. and press ENTER. Modify the construction of the slab type 30 In the drawing area.27 Press and hold CTRL. click Modify. enter 4''. Clicking Modify or pressing ESC exits the editing mode and the shape edits are applied to the slab. click (Properties). 29 On the Design Bar. including the interior edges of the roof regions. for Elevation.

gutters. leaving the other layers to maintain the original plane of placement for the roof.The slab has not responded exactly as intended. gutters. select Variable. and Soffits In this lesson. The insulation now tapers from the edges to the drain in the center. 39 Proceed to the next lesson. 34 In the Edit Assembly dialog. click Save As. Gutters. The entire slab is sloped. click Edit/New. Gutters. 37 If you want to save your changes. and save the exercise file with a unique name. click Edit. under Construction. After you create a roof. for Structure. you learn how to create roof fascia. In some cases this type of slope is desired. and soffits in Revit Architecture. and soffits. 38 Close the exercise file without saving your changes. 36 View the results in the section view. on the File menu. and Soffits on page 586. Creating Fascia. but in this case you want the insulation layer to create the slope. Creating Fascia. the slope will be accommodated in the insulation layer. for the Thermal/Air Layer. you can easily create its fascia. You edit the construction of the slab type to achieve this result. 32 In the Element Properties dialog. 35 Click OK 3 times. By making the insulation layer variable. 586 | Chapter 15 Roofs . 33 In the Type Properties dialog.

1 Click File menu ➤ Load From Library ➤ Load Family. 8 In the Name dialog. click Edit/New to access the type properties of the fascia. and click OK twice. 5 On the Options Bar. 7 In the Type Properties dialog. under Construction. and open Metric\Families\Profiles\Roofs.Creating Roof Fascia In this exercise. click Training Files. Creating Roof Fascia | 587 . 6 In the Element Properties dialog. and click OK. click (Properties).rfa. click Training Files. 9 In the Type Properties dialog. click Duplicate. 3 Press CTRL. you learn to use the Host Sweep command to create fascia on the roof of a condominium. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. select M_Fascia-Built-Up: 38 x 184mm x 38 x 286 for Profile.rvt.rfa and M_Gutter-Cove. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 4 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. select M_Fascia-Built-Up. and open Common\c_Condominium. click Host Sweep ➤ Roof Fascia. enter Built-up Fascia. 2 In the left pane of the Open dialog. and click Open. 10 Move the cursor to the top edge of the roof.

click Modify to exit the Fascia command.11 Select the top edge of the roof to place the fascia. 14 Proceed to the next exercise. click Host Sweep ➤ Roof Gutter. 588 | Chapter 15 Roofs . 1 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. Creating Gutters In this exercise. 12 Select all of the roof top edges to place the fascia around the building. you use the Host Sweep command to place a gutter at the bottom edge of the roof on a condominium building model. c_Condominium.rvt. Creating Gutters on page 588. 13 On the Design Bar. click (Properties). Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. 2 On the Options Bar.

11 Continue to add gutters to the other roof edges of the building model. click in the Value field for Material. click Duplicate. under Construction. 6 In the Type Properties dialog. click Edit/New. 10 Click to place the gutter. 5 Enter Cove Shape Gutter for Name. 12 Proceed to the next exercise. and click OK. 7 Under Materials and Finishes. . 4 In the Type Properties dialog. and click OK three times. Creating Gutters | 589 . Creating Soffits on page 590. select M_Gutter-Cove: 125 x 125mm for Profile. 9 Move the cursor to the bottom edge of the roof. select Metal-Aluminum for Name.3 In the Properties dialog. and then click 8 In the Materials dialog.

you learn how to place a roof soffit. click Pick Roofs. click Roof ➤ Roof Soffit. 1 In the Project Browser. 590 | Chapter 15 Roofs . expand Floor Plans.rvt. You add the soffit underneath the roof of the condominium building model that you used in the previous exercise.Creating Soffits In this exercise. and double-click Roof. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 3 On the Design Bar. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. expand Views. c_Condominium.

and double-click 3D. 5 On the Design Bar. 7 On the Tools menu. expand Views (all). click Finish Sketch. Notice that the geometry of the roof and the soffit overlap. Creating Soffits | 591 .4 Select the roof. expand 3D Views. 8 Select the roof. 6 In the Project Browser. click Join Geometry. and then select the soffit to join them.

592 | Chapter 15 Roofs .9 If you want to save your changes. on the File menu. click Save As. 10 Close the exercise file without saving your changes. and save the exercise file with a unique name.

click Project Units. 2 In the Project Units dialog. You add and modify the area boundaries and add areas. click Format and specify the following: ■ ■ ■ For Units. you learn how to use area analysis tools to define and label spatial relationships. You then create area plans for each scheme as needed. In the left pane of the Open dialog. you use the two predefined area schemes to create respective area plans to define gross area and a rentable area. your values will be different. click Training Files. You add and modify the area boundaries and add areas. 3 Under Area. you create area schedules and color fill plans based on the area schemes and plans. 593 . select Square meters. and open Common\c_Area. If you are using metric units. For Unit Suffix. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. NOTE Images in this exercise reflect Imperial values. Click OK. Two schemes are provided by default: Gross Building and Rentable. you use the two predefined area schemes to create respective area plans to define gross area and a rentable area. The first step in area analysis is the definition of area schemes.Area Analysis 16 In this tutorial. select Millimeters. Creating Area Schemes and Plans In this exercise. you create a color fill plan and area schedule based on the area schemes and plans. Using Area Analysis Tools In this lesson. Finally. click Format and specify the following: ■ For Units. In the final exercise. under Length.rvt. select mm. Each area scheme can have multiple area plans. Set units of measurement to metric 1 On the Settings menu. You can edit the rentable scheme and create additional schemes.

right-click in the Design Bar. Rentable: Area measurements based on the standard method for measuring floor area in office buildings. You can specify the height where the room area is calculated. 6 On the Room and Area tab of the Design Bar. click the Room Calculations tab. For Unit Suffix. 7 In the Room and Area Settings dialog. the system-computed height defaults to the level. You can specify the boundary location to be used for room area calculations.■ ■ ■ For Rounding. expand Floor Plans. View predefined area schemes 5 In the Project Browser. it is not necessary in this exercise. click the Area Schemes tab. 9 Click Cancel. select m2. NOTE If the room area includes a room separation line. 594 | Chapter 16 Area Analysis . 4 In the Project Units dialog. ■ ■ Gross Building: Total constructed area of a building. select 2 decimal places. Although you can create new schemes that are based on the Rentable scheme. ■ At system computed height: Generally defaults to or 1000 mm above the level. 8 In the Room and Area Setting dialog. and click Room and Area. expand Views (all). or 0. Click OK. TIP If the Room and Area tab is not visible. click Settings. These schemes define spatial relationships. and verify that Level 1 is the active view. as well as selecting whether to have room volumes calculated automatically. There are two schemes currently defined: Gross Building and Rentable. ■ At specified height: You specify the height above the level that area is calculated. click OK.

Select Level 1 for Area Plan views. If you select No. 12 When the informational dialog displays. under Views (all). An area is represented by two crossed reference lines. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Select Gross Building for Type. Click OK. The Area Tag command is used to tag existing areas.Create a gross building area plan 10 On the Room and Area tab of the Design Bar. 15 Click in the middle of the room on the lower left corner of the building model to place the tag. and notice that the Level 1 area plan is the active view. 13 In the Project Browser. notice there is a new view type called Area Plans (Gross Building). click Yes to create the boundary lines automatically. click Area Plan. Expand Area Plans (Gross Building). you can create a copy of the area plan with subsequent changes to the original area plan duplicated in the copied plan. you must select one of the reference lines. The area reference lines are for design purposes only and do not print. To modify the area. Verify that Do not duplicate existing views is selected. 14 On the Room and Area tab of the Design Bar. NOTE If you clear Do not duplicate existing views. click Area. area boundary lines are automatically placed on the exterior walls of the building model. NOTE The Area command is used to create and tag new areas. forming a closed loop. you must manually add these boundary lines. When you select Yes in this dialog. Creating Area Schemes and Plans | 595 . 11 In the New Area Plan dialog. rather than the area tag. ■ ■ Verify that the scale is 1/8'' = 1'-0''.

Notice that the area boundary lines are on the inner face of the exterior walls. 17 In the New Area Plan dialog. If you do not select this option. Select Level 1 for Area Plan views. you can select the option "Apply Area Rules" so that the area boundary lines adjust to the area type. Create a rentable area scheme and plan 16 On the Room and Area tab of the Design Bar. NOTE The area lines follow some of the windows hosted by the exterior wall. click Area Plan. common areas. you can either draw them or pick them. the area boundary lines are placed on the face of the glass. Although the rule for these lines is to follow the inside face of the wall. 18 Click Yes to automatically define the area boundary lines. Add area boundary lines 20 On the Design Bar. 22 Select all the interior walls by clicking them one at a time. Click OK. Expand Area Plans (Rentable). and notice that the Level 1 area plan is the active view. click Area Boundary. and store area. Verify that Do not duplicate existing views is selected. When you pick the walls. 596 | Chapter 16 Area Analysis .NOTE An area tag measures area based on the area plan boundary lines. When you add area boundary lines. you create a new area plan for rentable space. A room tag measures the area enclosed within the room-defining walls at the boundary location specified in Room and Area Settings. if the window glass is greater than 50% of the wall height. Notice that there is a new view type called Area Plans (Rentable). 19 Zoom out until you can see the entire building model. the area boundary lines do not update automatically. Next. verify that Pick Lines and Apply Area Rules are selected. You add and use area boundary lines to define the office areas. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Select Rentable for Type. 21 On the Options Bar.

23 On the Design Bar. and click to select the area. NOTE If you have difficulty selecting the area. click Area. do the following: Enter Tenant 1 for Name. click ■ ■ . 25 On the Design Bar. click inside the middle of the room to place the tag. 24 In the upper left corner of the building model. click Modify. 27 On the Options Bar. 28 In the Element Properties dialog. Creating Area Schemes and Plans | 597 . 26 Select the area you added to the room in the upper left corner of the building model. place the cursor over the Area Tag and press Tab until Area displays in the status bar. Select Office area for Area Type.

click ■ ■ ■ . do the following: ■ ■ Enter Circulation for Name. 33 In the Element Properties dialog. click Modify and select the area. 598 | Chapter 16 Area Analysis . In the Element Properties dialog. click Area. do the following: Enter Tenant 2 for Name. Select Building Common Area for Area Type. 34 Using the techniques learned in previous steps. add an area in the common space to the right of the double doors hosted by the west exterior wall. Click OK. 32 On the Options Bar. Select Office area for Area Type.■ Click OK. 31 On the Design Bar. 30 Add the area to the room on the lower left corner of the building model. 29 On the Design Bar.

Creating Area Schemes and Plans | 599 . 36 Add the last two areas to the two spaces on the right side of the building model. enter Core for Name.■ Click OK. and select Store Area for Area Type. 35 Add an area to the building model core. Name the areas Tenant 3 and Tenant 4. and select Major Vertical Penetration for Area Type. Tenant 3 should be in the upper right. and Tenant 4 in the lower right.

name the project Area-in progress. you create a color fill area plan and an area schedule.rvt. NOTE This project is required in its current state if you intend to continue with the next exercise. Create a color scheme legend 1 On the Room and Area tab of the Design Bar. click Color Scheme Legend. 37 On the File menu. you create a color fill area plan and an area schedule. 600 | Chapter 16 Area Analysis . NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise. and click to place the legend. 2 Move the cursor under the left corner of the building model. You added and modified the area boundaries and applied area tags to define spaces. the area boundary lines have adjusted to the new area type. Creating Area Schedules and Color Fill Area Plans In this exercise. In the next exercise. 38 Navigate to your preferred directory. and click Save. In this exercise.Notice that within the two store areas. click Save. you used the two predefined area schemes to create respective area plans to define gross area and a rentable area.

Creating Area Schedules and Color Fill Area Plans | 601 . 8 Add the fields Area and Name. 7 Under Available fields. 6 In the Schedules Properties dialog. Create an area schedule 4 On the View tab of the Design Bar. click OK to make the required visibility setting changes. select Areas (Rentable). and click OK. 5 In the New Schedule dialog. click Schedule/Quantities.3 When the dialog displays. under Category. click the Fields tab. select Area Type and click Add.

602 | Chapter 16 Area Analysis .9 Click OK. The fields you selected in the Schedule Properties dialog are displayed as column headings within the schedule.

floor. volume. you then need to update the building face. and roofs. building elements. you convert to the basic shell elements of the building model. floors. After creating mass floors. roofs. you can pick massing faces and make building model elements such as walls.Massing 17 You can use massing tools during the initial design process to convey a potential design concept without the level of detail usually found in a project. In this tutorial. you can create a schedule to assign usages and to analyze the design. curtain systems. the building model uses those element types to define the walls. You can create and modify the geometric shapes that aggregate to form the building model shell. You use mass floors to divide the mass at each level of the building model. If you modify a massing face. you create a new building model using the various massing tools to add and cut mass. After you make building elements. you can specify the view to display massing elements. and roof types so that when you convert the massing elements to shell elements in the final exercise. Using Massing Tools In this lesson. After you create the basic geometric shape of the building model. Massing elements and building elements are not linked automatically. and perimeter information. you create the basic geometric shape of the building model using various massing tools. You then modify the building model in both the massing view and the shell view to see how changes propagate throughout the project. You assign the default wall. At any time. You create a mass floor schedule and assign mass usage to analyze floor area. 603 . or both. and floors.

click Create Mass. right-click anywhere over the Design Bar. and click Massing. under Floor Plans. The Design Bar title changes to Mass. sweeps. click Training Files. and cutting geometry. under Views (all). 4 Click OK in the Name dialog to accept the default name Mass 1.rvt. and open Metric\m_Massing_Start. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion. 3 Click OK in the Show Mass mode informational dialog. 2 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar.Adding Massing Elements to a Building Model In this exercise. double-click Level 1. Add a mass element 1 In the Project Browser. TIP If the Massing tab is not available on the Design Bar. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 604 | Chapter 17 Massing . 5 On the Design Bar. you create the basic geometric shape of a building model by adding solid and void extrusions.

8 On the Design Bar. click Lines. TIP You may want to dimension and constrain the lines to maintain the exact dimensions. 20 Click the edges of the form to create sketch lines as shown. 17 On the Sketch Design Bar. double-click Level 1. and click . under Constraints. and on the Options Bar. and on the Options Bar. for Extrusion End. click 18 On the Options Bar. 13 On the View toolbar. under Views (all). 12 On the Design Bar. enter 25000. 19 Place the cursor in the drawing area on an edge of the existing form so that the edge is highlighted. select Mass (Opaque). click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion. Adding Massing Elements to a Building Model | 605 . for Offset. click (Default 3D View). This means the sketch line is placed 1550 mm from the position you pick with the cursor. click the value for Material. and click OK. (Line). under Materials and Finishes. Watch the Status Bar in the lower-left corner of the screen to be sure you are highlighting the Form : Extrusion : Shape Handle. and click OK. 16 On the Design Bar. click Extrusion Properties. 9 In the Element Properties dialog. for Name. 10 In the Materials dialog.6 On the Sketch Design Bar. (Pick Lines). click Finish Sketch. Create next extrusion form 14 In the Project Browser. under Floor Plans. click Lines. 11 In the Element Properties dialog. 15 On the View Control Bar. enter 1550 mm. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Wireframe. click 7 Sketch the shape as shown using the exact values.

click the value for Material. click Finish Sketch. and click OK. under Constraints. 25 On the Design Bar. and click . for Name. enter 25000. 23 In the Materials dialog. under Elevations (Building Elevation). under Views (all).Be sure to click to the inside of the extrusion. and click OK. for Extrusion End. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Blend. TIP If necessary. double-click West. select Pick a plane. 28 On the Design Bar. The second form is on top of the first form. for Extrusion Start. 29 In the Work Plane dialog. 26 In the Project Browser. click Extrusion Properties. press TAB to highlight the entire face. enter 27500. under Views (all). 24 In the Element Properties dialog. 22 In the Element Properties dialog. 21 On the Design Bar. 606 | Chapter 17 Massing . and click OK. Continue creation of next massing form 27 In the Project Browser. highlight the larger form. 30 In the drawing area. select Mass (Transparent). under Materials and Finishes. double-click {3D} to see the results.

Next. 32 On the Sketch Design Bar. click (Arc passing through three points). click Lines. click Sketch the blend base 33 Select the top of the larger extrusion as shown. 34 On the Options Bar. 36 Sketch a line 6000 mm up as shown.31 Click to select the face. and on the Options Bar. 35 Place the cursor at the midpoint of the sketch line as shown. and click to select the line start point. Adding Massing Elements to a Building Model | 607 . and clear Chain. 37 On the Options Bar. click (Draw). The triangle indicates that the cursor is at the midpoint. you draw a sketch line that acts as a construction line to create an arc. (Pick Lines).

45 In the Project Browser. Sketch the blend top 44 On the Design Bar. and click Arc passing through three points from the menu. click (Move). 41 On the Edit toolbar. click Modify. 38 Sketch the arc as shown with the top of the arc snapping to the top of the construction line. 40 Select the arc and the horizontal line.TIP If you do not see this option. click 47 Sketch the horizontal line as shown. 43 Move the cursor straight up and click at the top horizontal line of the smaller extrusion as shown. 46 On the Design Bar. and delete the vertical construction line. on the Options Bar. 42 Click the cursor at the midpoint of the horizontal sketch line as shown. under Views (all). under Elevations (Building Elevation). click Lines and. click the arrow next to the drawing options. double-click East. 39 On the Design Bar. (Line). click Edit Top. 608 | Chapter 17 Massing .

(Arc passing through three points). click 49 Create an arc as shown. you created two extrusions and a blend that form the basic geometric shape of the building model. click (Default 3D View).48 On the Options Bar. you use the massing tools to cut geometry from the shapes you have created. 53 On the View toolbar. click Finish Sketch. 54 Proceed to the next exercise. 50 On the Design Bar. 51 In the Element Properties dialog. Adding Massing Elements to a Building Model | 609 . verify that Mass (Opaque) is selected. and that -92000 is specified for Second End. and click OK. click Blend Properties. for Material. Using Massing Tools to Cut Geometry from the Building Model on page 610. 52 On the Design Bar. In the next exercise. In this exercise.

Sketch extrusion voids 8 On the Design Bar. click (Pick Lines) and enter 15000 for Offset. click Ref Plane. 1 In the Project Browser. Training File ■ Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. 610 | Chapter 17 Massing . under Views (all). and select Chain. as shown. 2 In the drawing area. 4 On the Options bar. 6 Place another reference plane 15000 mm to the right of the first reference plane. place 3 more reference planes 15000 mm apart from left to right. 10 On the Options Bar. double-click Level 1. select the mass. 7 Using the same technique. Add reference planes 3 On the Mass tab of the Design bar. under Floor Plans. When sketching the void extrusions in the steps that follow. click Lines. and place the first reference plane 15000 mm to the right. 5 Place the cursor near the left edge of the massing element so that the edge is highlighted. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise and the resulting building model. you use a void extrusion to cut geometry from one of the massing shapes you added in the previous exercise.Using Massing Tools to Cut Geometry from the Building Model In this exercise.rvt. you specify the intersection of the reference planes and the top and bottom edges of the massing element. m_Massing_Start. These reference planes act primarily as sketching aids. 9 On the Design Bar. click Void Form ➤ Void Extrusion. click (Line).

you add a swept blend shape to the massing study created in the previous exercises. enter 0. 11 Enter SI for intersection snap. 16 On the Design Bar. click (Default 3D View). The curved form you create connects 2 pieces of the sloped face side of the massing. enter 12000 and for Extrusion Start. snap the corners to the intersections. 12 Sketch 2 additional void extrusions as shown. on the View Control Bar. When sketching each extrusion. Using Swept Blends In this exercise. 14 Under Constraints.NOTE If the file is currently in shaded mode. Using Swept Blends | 611 . 17 On the View toolbar. click Extrusion Properties. for Extrusion End. and sketch the first void extrusion as shown. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line. 13 On the Design Bar. you cut voids through an extrusion you added in the first exercise. 15 Click OK. click Finish Sketch. In this exercise.

2 On the Mass tab of the Design Bar. click 5 Sketch the arc: ■ (Arc passing through three points). ■ For the radius. Training File ■ Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise.NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercises and the resulting building model. 3 On the Design Bar. 4 On the Options Bar. and click Lines. double-click Level 1. ■ Select the lower left endpoint of the left mass. Sketch a 2D path 1 In the Project Browser. m_Massing_Start. click Sketch 2D Path.rvt. Select the midpoint of the lower face of the middle mass. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Swept Blend. under Floor Plans. 612 | Chapter 17 Massing . select a point below the mass elements.

as shown. 9 On the Options Bar. click Finish Path. click Lines. 12 Select the right endpoint of the arc as the lower right endpoint of the rectangle. 6 On the Design Bar. From a 3D view you can sketch the profiles for the 2 ends of the swept blend. 8 On the Design Bar.Use a radius for the arc (about 180 degrees) that will make the beginning and end planes of the sweep parallel to the face of the existing mass. The only way to align these elements is visually. click (Default 3D View). 10 On the Design Bar. and click Edit. Sketch profile 1 7 On the View toolbar. 11 On the Options Bar. Using Swept Blends | 613 . verify that <By Sketch> is selected. and sketch a 6000mm x 6000mm rectangle on the face of the mass. click (Rectangle). click Profile 1.

sketch a second rectangle: ■ Click to position the lower left corner of the rectangle at the left endpoint of the arc. 14 Align the left edge of the rectangle to the mass edge. (The size of the rectangle is not important because you align it to the mass edges. 17 Using the same method. as shown: ■ ■ 614 | Chapter 17 Massing .) Align the right sketch line of the rectangle with the right edge of the mass. and press ESC. click Profile 2. 15 On the Design Bar. Align the top of the rectangle with the top edge of the cut extrusion. click Finish Profile. Sketch profile 2 16 On the Design Bar. and sketch a rectangle on the face of the mass.13 On the Tools toolbar. click (Align).

and click . Change the material properties of the mass 19 On the Design Bar. 22 Click OK twice. click <By Category>. 23 On the Design Bar. click Swept Blend Properties. Using Swept Blends | 615 . click Finish Swept Blend.18 On the Design Bar. click Finish Profile. 21 In the Materials dialog. 20 In the Element Properties dialog. under Materials and Finishes. select Mass (Transparent).

Using Mass Family Files in a Project In this lesson. Creating New Mass Family Types In this exercise. you added a swept blend shape to the massing study. In this exercise. You place several instances of the mass families into the project. You then load that mass family file and others into a project. you use the Join Geometry command to join several instances of the mass elements.24 On the Design Bar.rvt. 25 Click File menu ➤ Save As. 616 | Chapter 17 Massing . Finally. 26 Save the file as m_Massing_Complete. you create new family types from a mass family file. you open a predefined mass family file and create new types from it. click Finish Mass.

3 In the Name dialog. enter 12000 mm.rfa. for Width. click New. 10 Click File menu ➤ Save As. for Height. 8 For Width. 7 Click New. and click Apply. 6 For Width. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and for Name. 2 In the Family Types dialog. Create 3 family types 1 On the Design Bar. 4 In the Family Types dialog. click Training Files. click Family Types. enter 15000 mm x 18000 mm x 12000 mm. enter 9000 mm. enter 46000 mm x 6000 mm x 11000 mm. enter 68000 mm x 9000 mm x 18000 mm. enter 68000 mm. enter 15000mm. enter 18000 mm. under Other. and for Name. you opened a mass family file and created 3 new types of this family file. enter 18000 mm. for Depth. 11 Save the file as Box-Training. and click Apply. enter 11000 mm. for Height.rfa. 9 Click OK. and open Metric\Families\Massing\Box. enter 46000mm. for Depth. for Depth. for Height.Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. and click Apply. and click OK. In this exercise. Creating New Mass Family Types | 617 . 5 Click New. and click OK. and click OK. enter 6000 mm.

rfa. 1 If not already selected. 9 Place the box mass family on the in-place mass family. TIP You may want to use the Move tool to accurately place the mass families. 2 In the Project Browser. on the View toolbar.rfa.rvt. click Training Files. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. 618 | Chapter 17 Massing . and open the Metric\Families\Massing folder. (Show Mass) to show the massing model. and open Metric\m_Massing_In-place. Semi Barrel Vault. click Place Mass.Loading and Placing New Mass Families In this exercise. select Box-Training: 68000 mm x 9000 mm x 18000 mm.rfa family files. You also load other existing mass families and place them. and Triangle. 3 On the View Control Bar. you load and place the new family types that you created in the previous exercise. Arc Dome. 7 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar. click Training Files. as shown. 6 Open the Box-Training. In the left pane of the Open dialog. under Floor Plans. 4 Click File menu ➤ Load from Library ➤ Load Family. 8 In the Type Selector. under Views (all).rfa. double-click Site. click TIP Zoom out to see the entire massing model. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Wireframe. 5 In the left pane of the Open dialog.

select the 3 boxes. Loading and Placing New Mass Families | 619 . select Rotate after placement. click Modify. specify Mass (Transparent). and on the Options Bar. and click OK twice. and click (Element Properties). 11 Select the box. as shown. 21 On the Options Bar. 18 In the Element Properties dialog. click Modify. for the Material parameter. select Triangle: 15000 x 45000 x 10500. click (Element Properties). 19 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar. 13 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar. 16 On the Design Bar. 14 In the Type Selector. for the Material parameter. select Box-Training: 15000 mm x 18000 mm x 12000 mm. 24 On the Design Bar. specify Mass (Opaque). click Place Mass. 23 On the Options Bar. 22 Place the cursor in the drawing area. 17 Press CTRL. and click to place the mass. 15 Place 3 of these box families on the larger box family. enter 90 for Angle. and click OK twice. 20 In the Type Selector. click Modify. click Place Mass.10 On the Design Bar. and use the Move command on the Edit toolbar to place the triangle as shown. 12 In the Element Properties dialog. select the triangle. 25 In the drawing area.

32 In the Element Properties dialog. 33 On the View toolbar. for the Material parameter. 27 In the Element Properties dialog. click (Default 3D View). click Place Mass. 34 Use the ViewCube to orient the view to the Northeast. specify Mass (Opaque). and click OK twice. select Box-Training: 46000 mm x 6000 mm x 11000 mm. 620 | Chapter 17 Massing . 28 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar. 30 Place the box mass family as shown. 31 Select the box and click (Element Properties). and click (Element Properties). and click OK twice. for the Material parameter. specify Mass (Transparent). 29 In the Type Selector.26 Select the triangle.

(Join Geometry). you join and modify the mass elements that you placed in the previous exercise. Join geometry 1 On the View toolbar. you join these mass elements.rvt file. In this exercise. In the next exercise. NOTE When you join geometry. click 2 On the Tools toolbar. you loaded and placed the new family types that you created in the previous exercise. Joining Mass Elements | 621 . click (Default 3D View).Notice that the triangle and the box masses that you just placed overlap. Training File ■ Continue using the m_Massing_In-place. Joining Mass Elements In this exercise. You also loaded other existing mass families and added them to the building model. the first mass element selected cuts volume from any subsequently selected mass element.

under Floor Plans. Mirror the modified mass element 7 With the smaller box still selected. 622 | Chapter 17 Massing . Modify existing massing elements 5 In the Project Browser. on the Edit toolbar.3 Select the middle Box-Training: 15000 mm x 18000 mm x 12000 mm mass element as shown. double-click Site. 4 Select the triangle. click (Mirror). 6 Select the right edge of the Box-Training: 46000 mm x 6000 mm x 11000 mm and drag it to the left edge of the middle Box-Training: 15000 mm x 18000 mm x 12000 mm as shown. under Views (all).

15 Select one instance of the modified Box-Training: 46000 mm x 6000 mm x 11000 mm first.8 On the Options Bar. 17 Press ESC to see the result. click 14 On the Tools toolbar. 10 Click to select the mirror axis start point. for Axis. TIP Pressing SHIFT while dragging the cursor locks the axis orthogonally. click (Default 3D View). 12 Click to mirror the existing massing element. click (Draw). and then select the triangle. enter SM. (Join Geometry). and snap to the midpoint of the edge. 9 Position the cursor over the upper edge of the middle box. 16 Repeat for the other instance of the modified mass element and the triangle. Join geometry 13 On the View toolbar. Joining Mass Elements | 623 . 11 Move the cursor down to create a vertical axis of reflection. as shown.

you place the mass elements from the previous exercise into Design Options. click Modify. click (Add to Design Option Set).) 3 On the Design Options toolbar. Using Mass Elements with Design Options In this lesson. 624 | Chapter 17 Massing . You then switch between different design options to get different versions of the design.In this exercise. 2 On the Window menu. you continue using the same file from the previous lesson. do not clear the check mark. click Toolbar ➤ Design Options. (If Design Options is already selected. The first selected mass element cut geometry from the subsequently selected mass element. Training File ■ Continue using the file m_Massing_In-place. You add mass elements to design options to experiment with different versions of the design. you joined mass elements together. 1 On the Design Bar. You then make one of the design options the primary one for the model. You also modified and mirrored a mass element before joining its geometry with that of another element. Mass Elements in Design Options In this exercise. and select the triangle mass element.rvt.

18 Place 3 arc domes as shown. for Angle. double-click Site. click Modify. click Place Mass. 5 In the Project Browser. 9 Place the cursor in the drawing area and click to place the mass. 10 On the Options Bar. select Arc Dome: 6000R x 2750H. 13 On the Design Bar. and click OK twice. Place semi barrel vaults 6 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar. select Sloped (primary). specify Mass (Transparent). 8 On the Options Bar. TIP You may want to use the Move tool to place the mass precisely. 14 In the drawing area.4 In the Add to Design Option Set dialog. enter 90. select the 2 semi barrel vaults. Place arc dome mass elements 16 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar. 17 In the Type Selector. select Rotate after placement. 12 Place another semi barrel vault as shown. 7 In the Type Selector. Mass Elements in Design Options | 625 . 11 Place a semi barrel vault where shown. under Floor Plans. and click OK. click Place Mass. 15 In the Element Properties dialog. for the Material parameter. clear Curved. select Semi Barrel Vault: 10000 x 15000 x 7500. under Views (all). and click (Element Properties).

double-click {3D}. select Curved. double-click North. 27 In the Add to Design Option Set dialog. 23 On the View Control Bar. 19 On the Design Bar. specify Mass (Transparent). TIP To find the correct shapes. 20 In the drawing area. It will indicate when you locate an arc dome or semi barrel vault. and click (Element Properties). under Views (all). select the three arc domes. 21 In the Element Properties dialog. click to select each of the arc domes and semi barrel values. and watch the status bar. Model Graphics Style ➤ Wireframe. clear Sloped. 22 In the Project Browser. 28 In the Project Browser. and click OK twice. 26 On the Design Options toolbar. 626 | Chapter 17 Massing . under Views (all). under 3D Views. under Elevations. click Modify. While pressing CTRL. Create a Design Option set 25 Select the 3 arc domes and the 2 semi barrel vaults. for the Material parameter. and click OK.TIP Use the snap control lines to assist in placing the domes. move the cursor over shapes in the drawing. 24 Move the 3 arc domes to the position shown. click (Add to Design Option Set).

You can now see the shapes that are part of the curved design option. and click OK. Creating Building Components from Mass Elements In this lesson. click Save As and save the file as m_Massing_Design_Options. click the Design Options tab. you placed mass elements into Design Options. you use building component creation tools to make building components from mass faces. You then switched between different design options to get different versions of the design. 32 On the Design Options toolbar.29 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. Because it is likely that your client prefers the design option with curved shapes. In this exercise. click (Design Options). and click Close. click Make Primary. select Curved from the Design Option menu. 33 In the Design Options dialog. 30 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. under Option. Creating Building Components from Mass Elements | 627 .rvt. select Curved and. 31 Click the value for Design Option. 35 On the File menu. 34 Close the warning that displays. you can make it the primary option.

rvt. under Views (all). select Basic Wall: Exterior . select Wall Centerline. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. 5 In the Type Selector. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 1 In the Project Browser. 628 | Chapter 17 Massing . double-click {3D}.Creating Walls by Picking Faces In this exercise.Brick on CMU. click Wall by Face. you pick massing faces to create walls. 3 Use the ViewCube to orient the view to the Southeast. 7 Place the cursor in the drawing area and select the face of the in-place mass family as shown. 2 On the View toolbar. click Training Files. click (Show Mass) to show the massing model. and open Metric\m_Massing_Building_Components. Create walls 4 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar. click (Pick Faces). TIP Zoom out to see the entire massing model. 6 On the Options Bar. and for Loc Line.

11 In the Project Browser. under Floor Plans. Creating Walls by Picking Faces | 629 . 8 In the Project Browser. select Curtain Wall : Storefront. 12 On the Design Bar. 13 Select the face indicated by the arrow as shown. click Wall by Face. under Views (all). ignore the warning and continue selecting wall faces. NOTE If a Warning dialog is displayed. under Floor Plans. double-click Level 1. under Floor Plans. 14 In the Project Browser. 15 On the Design Bar. double-click Level 3. under Views (all). 10 Select all the faces shown in red. 17 Select the 3 faces shown in red. click Wall by Face. 9 On the Design Bar. 16 In the Type Selector. click Wall by Face. under Views (all). double-click Level 5.The southeast wall of the mass model is now Brick on CMU. alerting you that the highlighted walls overlap.

you can select the overlapping curtain wall. under Floor Plans. 22 Select all the faces shown in red. You can then edit the profile to clean up the overlapping geometry. under Views (all). 23 Open the 3D view to see the results. If desired. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Wireframe. double-click Level 9. click Wall by Face. 20 On the View Control Bar.18 Select all the faces shown in red. 630 | Chapter 17 Massing . You can ignore the warnings about walls overlapping. and click Edit Profile on the Options Bar. 21 On the Design Bar. 19 In the Project Browser.

you pick mass elements and select levels to create floors. Training File ■ Continue using the file m_Massing_Building_Components. double-click {3D}. and exterior surface area. Revit Architecture generates a mass floor for each selected level that intersects the mass. click Mass Floors. Creating floors 5 Select the in-place mass family Mass 1. 3 On the Model Categories tab.In this exercise. Curtain Systems. 4 Click OK. Creating Floors by Picking Masses | 631 . and Walls. 8 On the Design Bar. The following information is available for mass floors: mass floor area. 2 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. under Views (all). you picked several massing faces and created both basic walls and curtain walls. 6 On the Options Bar. volume. click Modify. and click OK. 7 In the Mass Floors dialog. select all levels. perimeter. 1 In the Project Browser. Creating Floors by Picking Masses In this exercise. clear Curtain Panels.rvt. When you select levels.

11 On the Options Bar. 13 On the Design Bar. click Mass Floors. 12 In the Mass Floors dialog. click Modify. and click OK. select Levels 1-4. and select the three15000 mm x 18000 mm x 12000 mm box mass elements and the mirrored 46000 mm x 6000 mm x 11000 mm box masses as shown. 632 | Chapter 17 Massing .9 Use the ViewCube to orient the view to the Northeast. 10 Press CTRL.

NOTE The semi vault barrel elements are the 2 sloped components in the front of the view. and click OK.14 On the Options Bar. Creating Floors by Picking Masses | 633 . select Level 1. The box mass is the long box element in the middle of the model. 17 In the Mass Floors dialog. clear Exclude Design Options (to allow you to select the semi vault barrel elements in the next step). 16 On the Options Bar. 15 Press CTRL. and select the 2 semi vault barrel mass elements and the 68000 mm x 9000 mm x 18000 mm box mass element as shown. click Mass Floors.

The Floor Area. Now that the floor areas have been added to the mass objects. Create a mass floor schedule 1 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Schedule/Quantities. Creating a Mass Study Analysis In this exercise.In this exercise. under Available fields. 4 Using the same method. you created floors by selecting mass elements and levels for the floors. select Mass Floor. 3 In the Schedule Properties dialog. Floor Perimeter. 634 | Chapter 17 Massing . schedules can be created using the mass floors. and click OK. add the following additional fields: ■ ■ Usage Mass: Family and Type You use the Mass: Family and Type field to help sort the schedule so it is easier to assign usage to the different masses. select Floor Area. and click Add. and Level fields should display under Scheduled fields (in order). you generate mass floor schedules for the hotel and retail massing in the model.rvt. Training File ■ Continue using the file m_Massing_Building_Components. 2 In the New Schedule dialog. press and hold SHIFT. under Category. and select Level. Floor Volume.

for Usage. you can select it from the drop-down list for subsequent entries. Mass Family Box-Training: 1500 mm x 1800 mm x 1200 mm Usage Retail Creating a Mass Study Analysis | 635 . 6 Verify that Itemize every instance is selected. Assign usage values to the mass components 8 In the first entry in the schedule. The Mass Floor Schedule displays. and click OK. 7 Adjust the schedule columns so the entire field is displayed. 9 Enter or select the appropriate usage value for all items in the schedule. enter Retail. NOTE Double-click the column divider in the schedule header to automatically expand the column to fit the text. for Sort by.5 On the Sorting/Grouping tab. select Mass: Family and Type. according to the following guidelines: NOTE After you enter a usage value in the schedule.

expand Schedules/Quantities. 14 Select Level. click Move Up until Usage is listed first. You can also arrange the schedule so it is more useful for analyzing the massing.Mass Family Box-Training: 46000 mm x 6000 mm x 1100 mm Box-Training: 68000 mm x 9000 mm x 18000 mm Mass 1: Mass 1 Semi Barrel Vault: 10000 x 15000 x 7500 Usage Atrium Atrium Hotel Atrium Modify the schedule to calculate hotel floor area 10 In the Project Browser. After you assign usage. the column Mass: Family and Type can be deleted. 11 In the Element Properties dialog. under Scheduled fields (in order). for Fields. 636 | Chapter 17 Massing . and click Move Up until Level is listed second. select Mass: Family and Type. under Other. click Edit. 13 With Usage selected. 12 In the Schedule Properties dialog. and click Remove. and click Properties. right-click Mass Floor Schedule.

under Other. 25 In the Element Properties dialog. 18 On the Filter tab. 27 Click OK twice. in the field under Filter by. and click OK. Creating a Mass Study Analysis | 637 . select Level. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. for Filter. select Usage. You create separate schedules to calculate retail and hotel space independently. right-click Copy of Hotel Floor Area Schedule. enter Retail Floor Area Schedule. 19 Click OK twice. for Sort by. enter Retail (instead of Hotel). and enter Hotel Floor Area Schedule. select Floor Area. select Usage. 23 In the Rename View dialog. elevation. for Then by. 24 In the Project Browser. under Fields. right-click Hotel Floor Area Schedule. TIP The values from these floor area schedules can be tagged in section. right-click Retail Floor Area Schedule.15 On the Sorting/Grouping tab. for Field formatting. enter Hotel. 26 In the Schedule Properties dialog. click Edit. for Filter by. for Filter. under Other. and select Grand totals. and click OK. and plan views. and in the field below. 22 In the Project Browser. 17 In the Element Properties dialog. 20 Click in the title of the schedule. and click Rename. 16 On the Formatting tab. and click Properties. Create a retail floor area schedule 21 In the Project Browser. click Edit. select Calculate totals.

In this exercise. floor perimeter. double-click {3D}. Training File ■ Continue using the file m_Massing_Building_Components. you created mass floor schedules. the floor area. under Views (all). by level. Creating Roofs by Picking Faces In this exercise. 3 Select the top face of the left 15000 mm x 18000 mm x 12000 mm box mass element as shown. 1 In the Project Browser. click Roof by Face. The mass floor schedules list.rvt. Create roofs 2 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar. you pick massing faces to create roofs. and floor volume information of hotel and retail massing in the model. 638 | Chapter 17 Massing .

Your model should now look as shown. and also on the top faces of the 46000 mm x 6000 mm x 11000 mm box mass elements. click Create Roof. Creating Roofs by Picking Faces | 639 .4 In the Type Selector. click Create Roof. 5 On the Options Bar. 6 Create the same roof on the remaining 15000 mm x 18000 mm x 12000 mm box mass elements. NOTE Each time you select a face on an instance of the 15000 mm x 18000 mm x 12000 mm box mass element family. select Basic Roof : Generic . 7 Use the ViewCube to orient the view to the Southwest.400mm. This creates the roof and lets you pick another face to create a new roof.

10 With the Roof by Face command still selected. and click OK. 640 | Chapter 17 Massing . 13 Using the same method. you created roofs by picking faces of massing families. click Create Roof. 9 Use the ViewCube to orient the view back to the Northeast.8 Using the method you just learned. in the Type Selector. create the same roof on the swept blend (curved) mass. Curtain Systems. create a sloped glazing roof on the other semi barrel vault mass element. 14 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. and Walls. 11 Select the left semi barrel vault mass element. 12 On the Options Bar. 15 Click the Model Categories tab. select Curtain Panels. Creating Curtain Systems In this exercise. In this exercise. you create curtain systems by picking non-planar massing faces. select Sloped Glazing.

rvt. click Curtain System by Face. verify that Select Multiple is selected. Creating Curtain Systems | 641 .Training File ■ Continue using the file m_Massing_Building_Components. select Curtain System: 1500 x 1500mm. 4 On the Options Bar. and select both halves of the left arc dome mass element as shown. 3 In the Type Selector. under Views (all). double-click {3D}. 1 In the Project Browser. click Create System. 2 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar. 5 Press CTRL. 6 On the Options Bar.

8 With the Curtain System by Face command still selected. select the blended form on the in-place mass.7 Using the same method. create a curtain system for each of the other 2 domes. 642 | Chapter 17 Massing .

10 Use the ViewCube to orient the view to the Southwest. click Create System. create a curtain system for the walls of the swept blend (curved mass). 11 Using the same method. Creating Curtain Systems | 643 .9 On the Options Bar.

you created curtain systems on non-planar faces.rvt. you change the size of an existing mass family.12 Click Modify to exit the command. and modify building elements to resize with the new mass family. In this exercise. Editing Elements Created from Massings In this exercise. Training File ■ Continue using the file m_Massing_Building_Components. 644 | Chapter 17 Massing .

Roofs. and Walls. you resize one of the 15000 mm x 18000 mm x 12000 mm box mass elements. 4 Select the box mass family as shown. and click (Element Properties). Curtain Systems. under Views (all). click Modify. 5 In the Element Properties dialog. Floors. 9 Use the Move tool to position the box and dome families as shown. and click OK. 6 On the Design Bar. click Visibility/Graphics. Editing Elements Created from Massings | 645 . 8 Drag a selection box over the box family and the dome family. double-click Site.1 In the Project Browser. and then click OK. clear Exclude Design Options. for Width. 2 On the View menu. under Floor Plans. clear Curtain Panels. 7 On the Options Bar. enter 30000. 3 On the Model Categories tab. Next.

In the next steps. 11 In the Project Browser.10 Open the 3D view to see the result. double-click Level 1. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Wireframe. The curtain system is no longer aligned with the dome family. under Floor Plans. under Views (all). 12 On the View Control Bar. you remake several of the building elements to fit to the new size of the massing family. 13 Zoom in to the upper right-hand portion of the model and select the 3 walls shown. 646 | Chapter 17 Massing .

remember that there are two curtain walls of this type that are overlapping here. Editing Elements Created from Massings | 647 . press TAB several times until the Status Bar indicates you are highlighting the Walls : Curtain Wall : Storefront. 14 On the Options Bar. 16 On the View toolbar.TIP To select the curtain wall. 15 In the Exclude Hosts dialog. click (Default 3D View). 17 Select the roof as shown. click Remake. click OK. Also. you want to select the smaller one.

and click Remake.18 On the Options Bar. click Remake. 648 | Chapter 17 Massing . 19 Select the arc dome curtain system.

You then modified building elements to resize with the new mass family. you switch the visibility of the view between the massing elements and the model (shell) elements. Controlling Mass/Shell Visibility | 649 . under Schedules/Quantities. Notice that the values have changed in the schedule to reflect the changes in the mass elements. you changed the size of an existing mass family. double-click Retail Floor Area Schedule. Training File ■ Continue using the file m_Massing_Building_Components. Controlling Mass/Shell Visibility In this exercise. In this exercise.rvt. click (Show Mass) to turn off massing. Turn off massing 2 On the View toolbar. 1 Open the 3D view.20 In the Project Browser.

6 On the Model Categories tab. 3 In the Project Browser. 5 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. Now you create a 3D view that shows only the massing. under 3D Views. 7 Clear one of the check boxes. 4 Rename the view 3D . and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. and click OK.The 3D view now shows only the building shell. 8 Click None to clear the selection.Massing only. 650 | Chapter 17 Massing . 9 Select Mass. right-click {3D}. click All to select all categories.

you switched the visibility of the 3D view to show either the building shell or the mass model.In this exercise. You might create the model shown. This concludes the massing tutorial. If desired. you can continue adding additional Revit Architecture modeling components. to the building shell. Controlling Mass/Shell Visibility | 651 . such as columns and an extruded roof.

652 .

You mirror one instance of the group. you can create reusable entities that represent layouts common to many building projects. Because existing groups can be duplicated and then customized for another purpose. After you create a model group. The new group is considered nested within the host group. and modify repetitive units. You create the group by selecting drawing objects and grouping them as a single entity. This functionality ensures consistency within and across projects. you place 2 new instances of the kitchen group in the floor plan. and typical office layouts. creating a library of groups for your office can reduce the amount of work needed to create. hotel rooms. It also gives all those with access to the library the ability to load any group from the library into their project drawing. and then you nest the kitchen in a 2 bedroom condominium unit group. you learn how to use model groups to collect related elements to simplify placement of repetitive units. you not only simplify their placement. you can place instances of the group in the building model using various methods. and Nesting Groups In this lesson. and is contained in every instance of the host group that you place in the building model. you add the new model group to a previously created group. Saving a group to a library gives you the ability to share the group with other team members working on the same project. and all new instances that you place contain the modifications. Modifications to the nested group are automatically included in the host group. Examples of the types of units for which groups are intended include condominium units. You can also nest groups within other groups. You can also update all instances of a group in the building model by editing a single instance of the group and saving the changes. you create a model group for a typical kitchen. Creating. In this exercise. all instances in the building model are updated. place. By grouping objects. In another exercise. Creating and Placing a Group In this exercise. when you make changes to a single instance of a model group. 653 . Training File ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. you create a model group for a typical kitchen for a condominium unit. When you make changes to a nested group. the host group is also updated automatically. or with those working on a different project. In this tutorial. you also simplify the modification process. Modifying. For example.Grouping 18 Using the grouping functionality in Revit® Architecture 2009. and rotate the other instance to modify the layout position.

expand Views (all). 654 | Chapter 18 Grouping . and zoom to the kitchen in the upper-left area of the floor plan. click Training Files. NOTE You may need to scroll the left pane to see the Training Files folder. enter ZR. Create a group for the typical kitchen layout 1 In the Project Browser. 2 Click in the drawing area. and double-click First Floor. and open Metric\m_Groups-Condominium.rvt.■ In the left pane of the Open dialog. expand Floor Plans.

and click OK.3 Draw a selection box (lower-right corner to upper-left corner) around the kitchen. enter Typical Kitchen. Creating and Placing a Group | 655 . click (Group). 4 On the Edit toolbar. 5 In the Create Model Group dialog. The objects are now grouped and can be placed in the drawing as a single entity.

656 | Chapter 18 Grouping . click Modify. 7 On the Design Bar. select the center control for the group origin.Change the origin point for the group 6 In the drawing area. 8 Click View menu ➤ Zoom ➤ Zoom To Fit. and drag it to the upper-right corner of the kitchen.

12 On the Design Bar. expand Model. 11 Click in the upper-right corner of the stairwell to place a second instance. under Groups. and click Create Instance.Place instances of the group 9 In the Project Browser. 10 Zoom to the center of the floor plan. Creating and Placing a Group | 657 . right-click Typical Kitchen. and click the upper-left corner of the lower unit to place the kitchen group. 13 Select the first instance of the Typical Kitchen group that you just placed. click Modify.

NOTE If the kitchen is not placed exactly as shown in the following image. 15 On the Options Bar. click (Mirror). select the group and use the arrow keys on your keyboard to make any minor adjustments. 658 | Chapter 18 Grouping . 16 Select the adjacent wall near the sink as the axis of reflection. clear Copy.14 On the Edit toolbar. The kitchen is now positioned correctly in the floor plan.

19 Click above the right area of the kitchen to rotate the placement. Creating and Placing a Group | 659 . click (Rotate).17 Select the kitchen in the stairwell. 18 Click in the drawing area to the left of the kitchen. and on the Edit toolbar.

You should now have three instances of the Typical Kitchen group in your model: one with the original orientation. one mirrored. select the group and use the arrow keys on your keyboard to make any minor adjustments. click Modify.NOTE If the kitchen is not placed exactly as shown in the following images. and one rotated. 21 Click View menu ➤ Zoom ➤ Zoom To Fit. 20 On the Design Bar. 660 | Chapter 18 Grouping . as shown.

23 Navigate to your preferred directory. Modifying a Group In this exercise. 2 Move the cursor over the wall to the left of the kitchen. click Save As. and click Save.Save the training file 22 On the File menu. press TAB to highlight the wall. Training File Continue using the training file saved at the end of the previous exercise. name the file m_Groups-Condominium_in_progress. all instances of the same group in the drawing are updated. Modifying a Group | 661 . m_Groups-Condominium_in_progress.rvt. Modify visibility of elements in a group 1 Zoom in to the kitchen on the right above the stair. and click to select it.rvt. you make changes to an instance of a group. When you finish editing.

press TAB. (Restore excluded group 5 Click (Group Member.3 Click (Group Member.). This element remains in the group but is not visible in the project view for this group instance. 8 On the Design Bar. NOTE To display an excluded element. 4 Move the cursor over the door.). Click icon to exclude in this group instance.). Click icon to exclude in this group instance. click Modify. 6 Move the cursor over the horizontal wall. and click to select the wall. and click member to group instance. 7 Click (Group Member. and click to select the door. 662 | Chapter 18 Grouping . select the element. press TAB.). Click icon to exclude in this group instance.

127mm. move the cursor to the left. 10 In the Type Selector. click Modify.Add elements for a unique condition 9 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. select Bifold-4 Panel : 1220 x 2134mm. Modifying a Group | 663 . select Basic Wall : Generic . clear Tag on Placement. 15 On the Options Bar. 14 In the Type Selector. click Wall. 13 On the Design Bar. 12 On the Design Bar. 16 Click in the new wall on the left and on the right to place 2 sets of folding doors for a closet. click Door. 11 Click at the endpoint of the short vertical wall in the kitchen entrance. and click to draw a horizontal wall that extends to the left vertical wall.

and the group editor toolbar initially displays in the upper left corner.17 On the Design Bar. 664 | Chapter 18 Grouping . 21 On the Options Bar. click Modify. the background color of the drawing area is pale yellow. In edit group mode. select the vertical wall to the left of the long counter top. 20 Select the Typical Kitchen group. 18 Click View menu ➤ Zoom ➤ Zoom To Fit. The elements in this instance of the group remain displayed in their object style. 24 Click near the bottom corner of the wall. select Opening ➤ Wall Opening. and click near the top corner of the wall to create an opening. move the cursor up. 22 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. click Edit Group. 23 In the drawing area. All other elements in the model are grayed out. Modify geometry of a group and have changes display in all group instances 19 Zoom in to the kitchen in the left area of the floor plan.

27 In the Element Properties dialog. enter 1000. created in an earlier lesson.25 On the Design Bar. and click OK. Nesting Groups In this exercise. Nesting Groups | 665 . and on the Options Bar. All instances of the Typical Kitchen are updated to reflect the change. you add the Typical Kitchen group. click 28 For Base Offset. 29 On the group editor toolbar. (Element Properties). under Constraints. and the wall and folding doors for the closet. click Modify. enter 2134. When you nest the kitchen in the 2 bedroom unit. 26 Select the opening. all instances of the host group are updated to contain the nested group. to the 2 Bedroom Unit group. click Finish. The kitchen group is then nested within the 2 bedroom unit group. which acts as the host. 30 Click File menu ➤ Save. for Unconnected Height.

in the Project Browser. Add elements to an existing group 1 If necessary. 4 On the group editor toolbar. under Floor Plans.Training File Continue using the training file saved at the end of the previous exercise. 666 | Chapter 18 Grouping . click Edit Group. 3 On the Options Bar.rvt. 5 In the drawing area. select the Typical Kitchen group. m_Groups-Condominium_in_progress. double-click First Floor. 2 Select the 2 Bedroom Unit group in the top area of the floor plan. click (Add to Group).

9 Select the 2 bedroom group. select the wall between the folding doors.6 Press TAB. 8 In the Project Browser. under Floor Plans. Notice that the Typical Kitchen and pantry are nested within the 2 bedroom group. click Finish. double-click Second Floor. Nesting Groups | 667 . 7 On the group editor toolbar. and each of the bifold doors.

under Floor Plans. such as door and window tags. such as text. you work with groups in order to use them in the most efficient manner within and across projects. Detail groups are created when you group view-specific elements. and create an attached detail group containing the tags. You work with the attached detail group in a different way than you had previously worked with host and nested groups because attached detail groups require more manual manipulation. 2 Zoom in to the stair area in the center of the floor plan. you sketch and annotate a rectangular filled region that represents an area of tiled flooring in front of the elevators in the building model. double-click First Floor. you add door tags to a group. Attached detail groups are created when you group view-specific elements that are associated with a specific model group. Draw a filled region 1 In the Project Browser. 668 | Chapter 18 Grouping . You can add the detail group to other views of the building model.rvt. Creating a Detail Group In this exercise. and filled regions. m_Groups-Condominium_in_progress. In the next exercise.10 Click File menu ➤ Save. You create a detail group in the First Floor plan and add the group to the Second Floor plan of the building model. Working with Detail Groups In this lesson. You then save the region and the text note as a detail group. Training File Continue using the training file saved at the end of the previous exercise.

click to draw a rectangular region. 6 Move the cursor down and to the left. A rectangular region with a diagonal cross hatch pattern is added in front of the elevator doors. Creating a Detail Group | 669 . 5 Click the upper-right endpoint below the elevators as the start point of the rectangle. click Finish Sketch. 7 On the Design Bar.3 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 4 On the Options Bar. click Filled Region. and select a point below the left elevator.

12 Enter Tile.Add a text note 8 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 9 On the Options Bar. 15 In the Create Detail Group dialog. select the instance of the Elevator lobby tile group. 10 Click in the filled region to specify the leader start point. click to add an arc leader. The text note with arc leader is added to the building model. click Modify. Create a detail group 13 Press and hold CTRL. and on the Design Bar. 14 On the Edit toolbar. 11 Click below the filled region to end the leader and specify the text start point. 17 Move the origin of the group to the corner of the elevator shaft. as shown. click (Group). click Text. 670 | Chapter 18 Grouping . enter Elevator Lobby Tile. 16 In the drawing area. and click OK. and select the text note and the filled region.

click Modify. you add door tags to the 2 Bedroom Unit group. 21 In the drawing area. click to place the detail group in front of the elevators. click Modify 23 Click View menu ➤ Zoom ➤ Zoom To Fit. under Groups. Using Attached Detail Groups In this exercise. and click Create Instance. 22 On the Design Bar. 20 In the Project Browser. expand Detail. Add a group instance to a different view 19 In the Project Browser. right-click Elevator Lobby Tile.18 On the Design Bar. double-click Second Floor. Because the detail group contains variables. and then use the door tags to create an attached detail group. 24 Click File menu ➤ Save. under Floor Plans. it cannot be added to a group in the same Using Attached Detail Groups | 671 .

click Tag ➤ By Category. clear Leader.rvt. draw a selection box (lower-right corner to upper-left corner) around the right area of the floor plan including the door tags. double-click First Floor. you must manually attach it to each instance of the 2 Bedroom Unit group. NOTE Your door tag numbers may be different.manner that a drawing component can be added. 4 Place door tags (10 total) in the original instance of the 2 Bedroom Unit. under Floor Plans. 3 On the Options Bar. as shown. Create an attached detail group 6 In the drawing area. Place door tags 1 In the Project Browser. 2 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. click Modify. 672 | Chapter 18 Grouping . Training File Continue using the training file saved at the end of the previous exercise. 5 On the Design Bar. m_Groups-Condominium_in_progress.

select Door Tags. enter 2 Bedroom Door Tags. click (Filter Selection). expand Groups\Model\2 Bedroom Unit. Place a detail group in another group instance 12 In the Project Browser. and view that Floor Plan: 2 Bedroom Door Tags is attached. and click OK. click (Group). 8 In the Filter dialog. Using Attached Detail Groups | 673 . for Attached Detail Group Name. 10 In the Create Model Group and Attached Detail Group dialog. 11 In the Project Browser. click Check None. under Floor Plans. and click OK. 9 On the Edit toolbar. double-click Second Floor.7 On the Options Bar.

the doors are numbered based upon the order in which you placed each group. Saving and Loading Groups In this exercise. Training File 674 | Chapter 18 Grouping . click Place Detail. you save a typical condominium layout to a library where it can be accessed by other team members for use in other projects. Door Tags are placed on the Second Floor instance of the 2 Bedroom Unit group. NOTE Component instance numbering is sequential. select Floor Plan: 2 Bedroom Door Tags. When you load the group from the library into a new project. 16 On the Design Bar. 15 In the Attached Detail Group Placement dialog. and click OK.13 Select the model group 2 Bedroom Unit. you save a group to a library so that you can use the group in a new project. Saving and Loading Groups In this lesson. 14 On the Options Bar. you can then work with it in the context of the new project. You also convert the group instance to a linked file to replace the group with an alternative unit layout. 17 Click File menu ➤ Save. Using groups from a library ensures consistency and increases productivity for projects that reuse similar typical layouts for repetitive units. click Modify. This enables you to create a library of groups that can be shared with other team members and used on multiple projects. therefore.

verify that Project is selected. select 2 Bedroom Unit. 12 On the Design Bar. 6 Click File menu ➤ Load from Library ➤ Load File as Group. Saving and Loading Groups | 675 . and expand Model.Continue using the training file saved at the end of the previous exercise. Place an instance of the loaded group 9 In the Project Browser. for Create new. browse to the Desktop. m_Groups-Condominium_in_progress. click OK. and click Create Instance. and click OK. Save a group to a library 1 In the Project Browser. A warning dialog displays. 5 In the New Project dialog.rvt. click Modify. Load the group in a new project 4 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Project. and click Open. In this case. or a Revit family file (RFA) if you are working in the Family Editor. click Desktop.rvt. expand Groups. 3 For File name. and click Save. verify that Same as group name is selected. explaining that duplicate types were found and the types from the new project will be used. 10 Right-click 2 Bedroom Unit. 2 In the left pane of the Save Group dialog. the file is saved as a Revit project file (RVT). accept the default template file. 13 Zoom in to the 2 Bedroom Unit group. 11 Click in the drawing area to place the group instance. You can save a group as a Revit project file (RVT) if you are working in a project. 8 In the Duplicate Types dialog. 7 In the Load File as Group dialog. right-click 2 Bedroom Unit. and click Save Group. under Groups\Model.

verify that Attached Details is selected only. 23 In the confirmation dialog. This message indicates that all instances of the linked model will be deleted from the project. or the group instance can be replaced with an existing linked file. 18 In the Project Browser. and the link is removed. 20 On the Options Bar. You can remove the linked file from the project by clicking Remove Link. or you can remove it at a later time from the Manage Links dialog. either the selected group can be used to make a new linked file. click Use Existing. click Yes to replace the existing Typical Kitchen group with the alternate Typical Kitchen group. click Bind. click Link.rvt. and open Common\c_2 Bedroom Unit-Alternate. 17 On the Design Bar. When a group is converted to a link.Convert group instance to a linked file 14 Select the group.rvt file is added as a link to the project. click Training Files. 25 The linked file is converted to a new model group stored in the project. 676 | Chapter 18 Grouping . 22 In the Duplicate Types dialog. 21 In the Bind Link Options dialog. 16 In the left pane of the Open dialog. expand Revit Links. 26 Close the file with or without saving it. but the linked model file will still be loaded in the project. click Remove Link. click OK. 15 In the Convert Group to Link dialog. The 2 Bedroom Unit-Alternate. click Modify. 24 In the message dialog. and on the Options Bar. select the linked Revit model. and click OK. Convert the linked model to a group 19 In the drawing area.

677 . and walkways. islands. you use site tools to add and modify site components within a project. You start by importing the site contour data and converting it to 3D contour data. In the final exercises. and then modify the data. you use the site tools in Revit Architecture 2009 to add and modify site components within a project. Using Site Tools In this lesson. After grading the topography to create a slightly elevated and flat surface. convert the data to a table. you add a building pad to the site. you add parking and planting components and create a parking space schedule. You add subregions to the area to define parking areas.Site 19 In this tutorial. You add property lines manually.

and open Metric\m_First_Project. 2 On the Site tab of the Design Bar. Create a toposurface by adding elevation points 1 In the Project Browser. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. click Point. expand Floor Plans. TIP If the Site tab is not displayed. click Training Files. 678 | Chapter 19 Site .rvt. The scale of this view is 1 : 100. In the second part of this exercise. enter an absolute elevation of 3000 mm. This project file was created using the default metric template. In the left pane of the Open dialog. expand Views (all). 4 On the Options Bar. Creating a Toposurface In this exercise. 3 On the Design Bar. and click Site. you create a toposurface using two different methods. click Toposurface.The exercises are sequential and must be done in order. Using the first method. you import contour data from a DWG file and use it to create the project toposurface. and double-click Site. right-click in the Design Bar. you create a toposurface by manually placing elevation points in the site plan.

7 Add additional points to create a contour circle similar to the following illustration. Triangulation boundaries display only after you add the third elevation point. 6 Add two additional points to create a triangle. Use the following illustration as a reference. A toposurface must have at least three elevation points. Creating a Toposurface | 679 .5 Click in the drawing area to specify a point. The circle should be approximately 55000 mm wide.

15000mm. 12 On the Settings menu. TIP Do not be concerned with the exact quantity or placement of the points. enter an absolute elevation of 6000mm. click Finish Surface. and click OK. 10 Repeat the previous step for 9000mm. 9 Add a concentric circle of 6000mm elevation points inside the 3000mm contour. Try to add each circle concentrically inside the previously created circle. 12000mm. click Site Settings. under Increment. 680 | Chapter 19 Site . enter 1500mm. and 18000mm absolute elevations. Use the following illustration as a reference. 13 In the Site Settings dialog. under Additional Contours. 11 On the Design Bar.8 On the Options Bar.

and press ENTER. (SteeringWheels). under Views (all). expand Elevations (Building Elevation). 14 On the View toolbar. Creating a Toposurface | 681 . 20 Zoom in around the Level 2 head. on the Standard toolbar. click to delete it. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges. click Modify. and double-click South. 18 In the Project Browser.This setting reduces the quantity of contour lines in the view. click to view it at various angles. 19 On the Design Bar. 16 On the View toolbar. modify the level names and elevations. Before importing the contour data. and use the Orbit tool to spin the toposurface Use imported contour data to create a toposurface 17 Select the toposurface and. 15 On the View Control Bar. click the elevation value. click (Default 3D View). enter 1000mm.

25 Click File menu ➤ Import/Link ➤ CAD Formats. and click OK. clear layer 0 and layer C_bench_mark. Until it is exploded. rename the level Base Site Elevation. it is considered an import symbol. click Pin Position. Click Yes when prompted to rename corresponding views. 26 In the Import/Link dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ In the left pane. 29 Select the imported topography. 682 | Chapter 19 Site . You are immediately prompted to select the layers you want to import. double-click Site. under Views (all). For Layers. For Colors. and press ENTER. select Specify. under Floor Plans. 27 In the Select Layers/Levels to Import/Link dialog. and press ENTER. click Yes. 22 When you are asked if you want to rename corresponding views. Select the c_Import_Site file located in the Common folder.21 Click the Level 2 text. Verify that Current view only is not selected. 24 In the Project Browser. select Preserve. click Modify. 23 Click the Level 1 text. This ensures the import symbol is not accidently moved. 28 On the Design Bar. and zoom out until you can see the entire topography within the view. click Training Files. Click Open. rename the level Basement. 30 On the Edit menu.

select it. click the Annotation Categories tab. 34 Under Visibility. Creating a Toposurface | 683 . 35 On the Site tab of the Design Bar.31 On the Design Bar. click Toposurface. when the edges highlight. When you select the import symbol. click Visibility/Graphics. 33 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. click Use Imported ➤ Import Instance. Notice the elevation symbols are displayed. 37 Place the cursor over the imported symbol and. clear C_INDX. and then click OK. and click OK. you are prompted to select the layer that will generate the elevation points. 36 On the Design Bar. clear Elevations. click Modify. 32 On the View menu. 38 In the Add Points from Selected Layers dialog.

41 Enter ZF to zoom to the extents of the image.The import symbol is converted to elevation points and contours. and click Save. click Finish Surface. NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise.rvt. name the project Site-in progress. 45 Proceed to the next exercise. Adding Property Lines on page 684. 42 On the View toolbar. Notice that the change in this toposurface elevation is minor. this project file is required in its current state. 43 Click File menu ➤ Save As. 40 On the View toolbar. 39 On the Design Bar. Using the first method. and use the Orbit tool to spin the toposurface to view it at various angles. 44 Navigate to your preferred folder. Using the second method. you sketch the property lines and then convert the sketch into survey data. you create property lines by entering survey data into a table of distances and bearings. Adding Property Lines In this exercise. click (SteeringWheels). you add property lines using two methods. click (Default 3D View). 684 | Chapter 19 Site .

On the Design Bar. Site-in progress. do so before continuing. Select and delete the right vertical line.rvt. select Create property lines by sketching. you can quickly create the shape by doing the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Sketch the rectangle first. 2 On the Site tab of the Design Bar. sketch the shape shown in the following illustration. Click Modify. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. 4 On the Design Bar. Although you can use your preferred sketching method. 3 In the Property Line Creation dialog. double-click Site. click Property Line. click Lines.This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise and the project file in its current state. If you have not completed the previous exercise. 5 Using the sketching tools available on the Options Bar. click Lines. Adding Property Lines | 685 . under Floor Plans. and click OK. Sketch property lines 1 In the Project Browser.

9 In the warning dialog. and click OK. A warning dialog is displayed. NOTE The values displayed in the Property Lines dialog depend on the exact dimensions and location of your sketch. NOTE The weight of the sketch lines has been increased in the illustration for training purposes. informing you that converting a property line sketch to a table cannot be undone. The property lines are displayed with a dash-dot line type on the topography. 13 In the Property Line Creation dialog. 8 On the Options Bar.■ Using the 3-point Arc tool. to delete them. 686 | Chapter 19 Site . 7 Move the cursor over the property lines and. select Create property lines by table of distances and bearings. add an arc line on the right. when they highlight. 10 In the Property Lines dialog. click OK. click OK. select Edit Table. click 12 On the Design Bar. Create property lines using a table of distances and bearings 11 Select the property lines and. 6 On the Design Bar. click Finish Sketch. select the lines. on the Standard toolbar. click Property Line.

click Insert three times until there are four rows of deed data. scroll down the list of categories until you find Property Lines and notice there are no tags loaded for Property Line Segments. 17 Move the cursor over the topographic surface and using the following illustration as a reference. If the gap is not closed. review your data entry and make necessary corrections. Adding Property Lines | 687 . 19 In the Tags dialog. This means there is no gap in the property lines. click Annotations ➤ Loaded Tags. enter the following deed data for rows 1 through 4: ■ ■ ■ ■ 100000 S 0°0'0" E 80000 N 90°0'0" W 100000 N 0°0'0" E 80000 N 90°0'0" E Notice that after you complete the last line. 15 Starting in Row #1. the distance that displayed under From last to first point now displays Closed. 16 Click OK. Tag property lines 18 On the Settings menu. click to place the property lines.14 In the Property Lines dialog. The property lines are displayed at the tip of the cursor.

Before adding property line segment tags. you loaded and tagged the property line segments. You created the second set of property lines directly from deed data and located it on the topography. clear the checkbox for c_Import_Site. right-click in the Design Bar. 25 Under Visibility. 22 In the Tags dialog. NOTE If the Drafting tab of the Design Bar is not visible. 32 Proceed to the next exercise. Modifying Contour Visibility and Site Settings on page 689. click Visibility/Graphics. 26 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar.rfa.20 Click Load. 23 On the View menu. notice a tag is now loaded for property line segments. NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise. you modify site settings and contour line visibility. click the Imported Categories tab. 29 Tag the three remaining property lines. the visibility of the imported symbol needs to be turned off. Even though you converted the symbol to elevations points and contours. The first set you sketched and then converted into deed data. In this exercise. and click OK. 30 On the View Control Bar. 21 In the left pane of the Open dialog. click Training Files.dwg and click OK. 24 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. The tags display more prominently in this view. click Tag ➤ By Category. 688 | Chapter 19 Site . 31 Click File menu ➤ Save. the original DWG file remains visible in the view. and open Metric\Families\Annotations\Civil\M_Property Line Tag. 28 Zoom in and place the cursor over the center of the north property line. When the tag displays at the tip of the cursor. click to place it. you created two sets of property lines. clear Leader. In the next exercise. In the final step. and click Drafting. this project file is required in its current state. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges. 27 On the Options Bar.

4 Under Modify Subcategories. Under Range Type. 5 In the New Subcategory dialog. you create a new object style subcategory to mark a specific elevation. select Single Value. 9 In the Site Settings dialog. specify an interval of 1000mm passing through elevation 0. click Site Settings. enter the name Working Contour. 3 On the Model Objects tab of the Object Styles dialog. 2 On the Settings menu.0mm. Create an object style subcategory for specific elevation 1 On the View Control Bar. select a shade of Brown. Under Line Color. In the Object Styles dialog. the new object style subcategory is displayed under Topography. click Object Styles. enter 1000. Under Subcategory. click New. under Contour Line Display. for Subcategory. Modify site settings 8 On the Settings menu. specify the following settings for the Working Contour subcategory: ■ ■ ■ Verify that the Line Weights are 1. Site-in progress. Under Line Pattern. specify the following values: ■ ■ ■ Under Start. 7 Click OK.rvt. 10 Under Additional Contours.Modifying Contour Visibility and Site Settings In this exercise. scroll down the list of categories and expand Topography. Modifying Contour Visibility and Site Settings | 689 . select Working Contour. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Wireframe. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. select Topography. and click OK. select Dash dot. You also modify the site settings so that the new subcategory is displayed at the specific elevation. 6 In the Object Styles dialog.

Creating Topographic Subregions on page 690. 12 Click File menu ➤ Close. 690 | Chapter 19 Site . and islands. it merely defines an area of the surface where you can apply a different set of properties. The object style subcategory. you created a new object style subcategory for topography. such as material. Creating Topographic Subregions In this exercise. and islands. You then modified the site setting to distinguish a specific contour interval using this subcategory. parking areas. Working Contour. parking areas. you create subregions in order to define roads. displays on the topography only at the elevation you specified. In this exercise. The next exercise requires a new training file. Click Yes when prompted to save changes. 13 Proceed to the next exercise. In the next exercise.11 Click OK. you create topographic subregions to define roads. Creating a subregion does not result in separate surfaces.

sketch the shape highlighted in the illustration below. the vertical rectangle is approximately 19500 mm wide. The horizontal rectangle is approximately 7500 mm wide. and use the fillet arc sketching tool to add the curved corner. Although the exact dimensions are not important. TIP You can either sketch the shape freehand or draw two perpendicular rectangles.Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. click Training Files. click Subregion. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and open Metric\m_Site. use the trim tool to create just one closed loop.rvt. Creating Topographic Subregions | 691 . 2 On the Design Bar. Sketch initial parking area 1 On the Site tab of the Design Bar. try to replicate the location and proportion. 3 Using the sketching tools on the Options Bar. click Lines.

and click to open the Materials dialog. 7 In the Element Properties dialog. 5 In the Element Properties dialog. click the value for Material. under Identity Data. under Materials and Finishes.Tarmacadam for Name. 692 | Chapter 19 Site . When you finish the sketch in a later step. you may see fewer contour lines than in the images shown in this exercise.NOTE In the Metric training file. click Finish Sketch. Specify subregion properties for parking area 4 On the Design Bar. Notice that the left edge of the subregion overhangs the site topography. 6 In the Materials dialog. enter Parking for Name. and click OK. 8 On the Design Bar. and click OK. click Properties. select Site . the subregion will end at the edge of the defined topography.

under Floor Plans. expand Schedules/Quantities. they display within this schedule. 15 Add new lines and modify the existing lines to create a boundary similar to the one shown in the following illustration. This topography schedule uses a filter to omit unnamed topographic regions.Tarmacadam. You can create a toposurface schedule to report information regarding each toposurface region. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line. 12 On the View Control Bar. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges. Although you can select each toposurface region separately and apply different properties to each. the toposurface and its contour data remain one element. click Edit Boundary. Open the topography schedule 10 In the Project Browser. double-click Site. 13 Select the subregion you created in the previous steps. The two additional parking areas in the top portion of the sketch must be at least 5500 mm deep to accommodate parking spaces. Notice that the new subregion uses the material Site . As you create new subregions. Modify the subregion 11 In the Project Browser. and double-click Topography Schedule.9 On the View Control Bar. NOTE Your values may differ depending on your sketch. Creating Topographic Subregions | 693 . 14 On the Options Bar.

and use the split and trim tools to clean up the sketch. click Lines. click Finish Sketch. Within each subregion. Mirror the arc line to create an exact duplicate. double-click Site. under Floor Plans. 694 | Chapter 19 Site . under Schedules/Quantities.TIP Add the two upper parking areas as rectangles. 20 On the View Control Bar. double-click Topography Schedule. 17 On the View Control Bar. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line. In this training project. Add additional subregions 19 In the Project Browser. Delete overlapping lines. 18 In the Project Browser. 16 On the Design Bar. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges. 22 On the Design Bar. click Subregion. 21 On the Site tab of the Design Bar. additional subregions are required to create a more attractive parking area. you apply different materials such as grass and concrete. Notice that the project area has increased.

Creating Topographic Subregions | 695 .23 In the upper-right parking area. use the sketching tools available on the Options Bar to sketch the parking island shown in the following illustration. and click to open the Materials dialog. under Materials and Finishes. 27 In the Element Properties dialog. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges. 30 In the Project Browser. click Finish Sketch. under Identity Data.Grass for Name. under Schedules/Quantities. 25 In the Element Properties dialog. Notice that the schedule has been updated with the new information. double-click Topography Schedule. and click OK. 28 On the Design Bar. click Properties. 29 On the View Control Bar.Grass for Name. select Site . enter Island . Precise dimensions are not important at this time. and click OK. 26 In the Materials dialog. 24 On the Design Bar. click the value for Material.

31 In the Project Browser. 36 Use the sketching tools available on the Options Bar to sketch the new concrete walkway shown in the following illustration. You must sketch each region separately. and apply the material Site . Name the subregion Walkway. 35 On the Design Bar. click Subregion. 696 | Chapter 19 Site . double-click Topography Schedule. 34 On the Design Bar. 32 In the Project Browser. Notice that the schedule has been updated. click Lines. under Floor Plans. double-click Site. under Floor Plans. under Schedules/Quantities. Add the concrete walkway 33 In the Project Browser. add the three additional subregions shown in the following illustration. and apply the material Concrete Cast-in-Situ . double-click Site.walkway. Name each region Island Grass. Using the techniques learned in previous steps.Grass.

there is still only one toposurface. double-click Topography Schedule. NOTE Although several toposurface subregions now exist within this project.WARNING Subregions cannot intersect. 37 On the Design Bar. you must either edit the entire toposurface or split the toposurface. so you need to offset coincident lines between the subregions by 100 mm. Creating Topographic Subregions | 697 . If you want to modify the elevation points of a particular subregion. under Schedules/Quantities. 38 In the Project Browser. click Finish Sketch. Notice that the schedule has been updated.

and click Save.39 Click File menu ➤ Save As. under Floor Plans. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise.rvt. 41 Proceed to the next exercise.rvt. this project file is required in its current state. the existing topography is demolished and a new toposurface is created where you can edit the elevation points. 40 Navigate to your preferred folder. Grading the Toposurface In this exercise. you grade the toposurface to create a slightly elevated and flat parking area. double-click Site. When you use the grading tool. Site tutorial-in progress. 698 | Chapter 19 Site . NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise. Modify toposurface phase assignment 1 In the Project Browser. 2 Select the toposurface. Grading the Toposurface on page 698. name the project Site tutorial-in progress.

4 In the Element Properties dialog. under Phasing. Using Phasing on page 761. 7 In the Graded Region dialog. 6 On the Design Bar. Copying internal points lets you delete only the points in the parking area without altering the remaining elevation points. click Graded Region. stating that subregions must have the same Phase Created parameter and the same Phase Demolished parameter as the host toposurface. click (Element Properties).3 On the Options Bar. 5 On the Design Bar. select Copy Internal Points. and click OK. click Modify. 8 Select the topographic surface. RELATED For more information regarding phasing. Grading the Toposurface | 699 . Notice that the toposurface displays differently. The display settings are controlled by the phase filter. see the tutorial. select Existing for Phase Created. and click Select and Edit. A warning dialog is displayed. Click OK to set the subregion phase to match the toposurface.

Make sure the pick box allows a significant buffer around the area. The intent is to select all the elevation points inside and around the parking area.Delete elevation points 9 Draw a pick box outside the main parking area as in the following illustration. 10 Press DELETE. 700 | Chapter 19 Site .

demolished. 12 Draw another pick box around the driveway and remaining parking area as in the following illustration.Notice the toposurface displays with different colors representing the different phases: existing. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line. Grading the Toposurface | 701 . 11 On the View Control Bar. and new.

specify an Absolute Elevation of 5500 mm. 17 On the Design Bar. Place the points until there are no contour lines crossing the parking area or walkway. Add new elevation points 14 On the Design Bar. 19 On the View Control Bar. 16 Add elevation points outside the perimeter of the entire parking area and walkway as in the following illustration. 15 On the Options Bar. click Finish Surface. click (Default 3D View). click Point. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges.13 Press DELETE. The parking and walkway areas are now elevated and flat. 18 On the View toolbar. 702 | Chapter 19 Site .

this project file is required in its current state. When you add a building pad. Adding a Building Pad | 703 . Therefore. click View Properties. Only the components created in or assigned to the Existing phase display in this view. click View Properties. and use the Orbit tool to spin the toposurface The phase filter for this view allows both the new and demolished surfaces to display. you can delete it. only the original toposurface displays. Only the graded topography displays. Delete the demolished toposurface from the project 21 On the View menu. and delete it. it automatically cuts a hole in the toposurface and places it at the depth you specify. specify New Construction for Phase. 27 Proceed to the next exercise. Adding a Building Pad In this exercise. (SteeringWheels). you create a building pad. and click OK. 22 In the Element Properties dialog. nor can you add it without first adding a topographic surface. A building pad is a toposurface hosted element and cannot be added to any other element. because you assigned it to the Existing phase before grading. Adding a Building Pad on page 703. 23 Select the toposurface. 26 Click File menu ➤ Save. under Phasing. Because this toposurface is no longer required for this project. specify Existing for Phase. 24 On the View menu. NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise.20 On the View toolbar. 25 In the Element Properties dialog. click to view it at various angles. under Phasing. and click OK. This accounts for the red surface that you see in this view.

you can pick the exterior walls to define the building pad. If you have an existing building model. 5 Using the sketching tools available on the Options Bar. The building pad should border the concrete walkway on the right and the upper parking area. 704 | Chapter 19 Site . under Floor Plans. the Pick Walls command is active.Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. 6 On the Design Bar. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line. 4 On the Design Bar. click Lines. Site tutorial-in progress. Add a building pad to the project 1 In the Project Browser. sketch an approximate replica of the outline shown in the following illustration. NOTE By default. click Pad.rvt. 3 On the Site tab of the Design Bar. double-click Site. 2 On the View Control Bar. click Finish Sketch.

7 On the View Control Bar. NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise. 10 Click File menu ➤ Save. 8 On the View toolbar. Notice the new building pad. Properties of the slope arrow specify height offsets for the slope of the pad. see Adding Slope Arrows to a Shed Roof on page 572. Adding a Building Pad | 705 . click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges. this project file is required in its current state. 11 Proceed to the next exercise. click (SteeringWheels).TIP You can slope building pads by adding a slope arrow to the sketch. 9 On the View toolbar. Adding Site Components on page 706. click (Default 3D View). For additional information on using slope arrows to modify geometry. and use the Orbit tool to spin the toposurface to view it at various angles.

Adding Site Components In this exercise. Add parking components 1 In the Project Browser. and select the parking space. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. click Modify. under Floor Plans. you add parking and planting components to the site surface. 706 | Chapter 19 Site . 2 On the Site tab of the Design Bar.rvt.90 deg. 4 Zoom in on the upper parking area that borders the building pad and add a parking component to the area. Site tutorial-in progress. double-click Site. 5 On the Design Bar. select M_Parking Space: 4800 x 2400mm . 3 In the Type Selector. 6 Use the flip arrows so it displays as shown below and move it toward the lower left corner of the parking area. click Parking Component.

NOTE Make sure you place the parking space a slight distance above the building pad. 8 On the View toolbar. TIP You could also use the Array tool to accomplish this task. 7 Add 6 additional parking spaces to the right of the first space. Verify that the spaces are horizontally aligned and the left edge of each space is aligned with the right edge of the previous space. Adding Site Components | 707 . click (Default 3D View).

11 On the Site tab of the Design Bar. Notice the new parking spaces. 12 In the Type Selector. click (SteeringWheels). double-click Site. and use the Orbit tool to spin the toposurface to view it at various angles. Add planting components to the site 10 In the Project Browser. 708 | Chapter 19 Site . click Site Component.9 On the View toolbar. and add a tree to each of the two round parking islands as shown below. choose any tree type. under Floor Plans.

15 On the View toolbar. 14 On the View toolbar. 16 Click File menu ➤ Save. click (Default 3D View). and use the Orbit tool to spin the toposurface to view it at various angles.13 Add some more trees outside the parking area as shown below. the landscape shown in the previous illustration has been rendered. Adding Site Components | 709 . NOTE Plants are displayed as simple geometry unless rendered. Notice how the trees vertically attach to the toposurface. click (SteeringWheels). In the following illustration.

5 On the View menu. 710 | Chapter 19 Site . and click Apply. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. and click OK. click Hidden Line. 17 Proceed to the next exercise. under Floor Plans. 6 Zoom in to the upper parking area and around the trees. click Tag All Not Tagged.rvt. You also add spot dimensions to the parking area and the terrain to display the actual elevation at selected points. Tagging Site and Parking Components In this exercise. 3 In the Tag All Not Tagged dialog. Tag site components 1 In the Project Browser. Tagging Site and Parking Components on page 710.NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise. select the line for the category Parking Tags that uses the loaded tag M_Parking Tag: Boxed. you tag the planting and parking components that you added previously. 2 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. this project file is required in its current state. Site tutorial-in progress. 4 Select the line for the category Planting Tags that uses the loaded tag M_Planting Tag: Boxed. double-click Site. click Apply.

Click again to the left to position the leader. NOTE Site components can also be numbered by clicking the tag number and changing the value. In the following exercise. You place spot dimensions on either side of the drive entrance. to position the shoulder of the leader. Click up and to the left. The exact position of the dimensions is not important.Notice each is tagged with no instance mark. outside of the site. Add spot dimensions 7 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 9 Add a spot dimension to the drive entrance: ■ ■ ■ Click in the upper left corner of the drive entrance. Tagging Site and Parking Components | 711 . You also add a spot dimension to the terrain to see how the elevation is reported. you use a parking schedule to number the parking spaces. click Spot Dimension ➤ Spot Elevation. verify that Leader and Shoulder are selected. as shown: 10 Using the same method. 8 On the Options Bar. add 2 more spot dimensions: ■ Add a spot dimension in the lower left corner of the drive entrance.

11 On the Design Bar.■ Add a spot dimension to the terrain below the drive. 12 Press and hold CTRL. 13 Modify the display of the spot dimensions by selecting and clearing options on the Options Bar: ■ Clear Shoulder. and select the 3 spot dimensions. click Modify. 712 | Chapter 19 Site .

Creating Parking Space Schedules In the final exercise of this tutorial. ■ Select Leader and Shoulder. NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise. 15 Click File menu ➤ Save. 14 On the Design Bar. Creating Parking Space Schedules on page 713. You can use a parking schedule to report the quantity and area of each type of parking space.■ Clear Leader. click Modify. you create a parking schedule. Creating Parking Space Schedules | 713 . 16 Proceed to the next exercise. this project file is required in its current state.

click Schedule/Quantities. and click OK. select Mark. enter Size. 13 In the Parking Schedule. under Space. 2 In the New Schedule dialog. select Mark. and click Add. click Tile. 10 In the Project Browser. click the Fields tab. and click OK. under Views (all). click Close Hidden Windows. 8 Under Fields. you can resize the column width by dragging the column edges. under Floor Plans. 5 Under Available fields. 3 In the Schedule Properties dialog. 9 On the Window menu. 12 In the Site plan.Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. Site tutorial-in progress. and under Heading. select Type. 11 On the Window menu. zoom in around the upper parking lot where you previously added the parking spaces. number the first three spaces consecutively. If necessary. 4 Under Available fields. 7 Under Fields.rvt. double-click Site. This tiles the Site plan next to the parking schedule. select Type. 6 Click the Formatting tab. This closes all the views except the parking schedule. Create a parking schedule 1 On the View tab of the Design Bar. and under Heading. The parking schedule is displayed. and click Add. enter Space. 714 | Chapter 19 Site . select Parking for Category.

15 Click File menu ➤ Save. 14 In the Parking Schedule. This allows you to know which space you are numbering. under Space. finish numbering the remaining spaces. the selected space highlights in the Site plan.Notice that the parking spaces in the Site plan update automatically. Creating Parking Space Schedules | 715 . Also notice that when you place the cursor in the parking schedule.

716 .

team members adding and changing elements in worksets can save their work to a local file on the network or their own hard drive and publish work to a central file whenever they choose. They can update their local files at any time in order to see the changes other team members have published. If you need to modify an element that belongs to a workset that someone else is actively working on. Only one user can edit each workset at a given time. Overview Sharing a project for the first time To share a project. In this tutorial. Any new model elements are automatically assigned to the active workset. The first time you activate worksets within a project. doors. You can change the workset assignment of any modeling element within the property dialog for that element. stairs. This prevents possible conflicts within the project. Elements specific to a view. use Element Borrowing. floors. When you are working on a shared project. If you only need to modify a single element within a workset that someone else has checked out. you can borrow that element without requiring the workset owner to relinquish control of the entire workset. are automatically assigned to the view workset of the current view. and so on. and click Editable. such as annotations and dimensions. called Worksharing.Sharing Projects 20 When working with large building projects. a dialog displays allowing you to set up the initial sharing of the project. After the project is shared. Working in a shared project In a shared project. you can select which worksets are open or closed. This involves simultaneously working on and saving different portions of the project at the same time. A workset is a collection of building elements. each building element in the project is contained in exactly one workset. You can close or open worksets at any time using the Worksets 717 . select the desired workset. Elements in closed worksets are not read from disk until they are required. To make a workset editable. you learn how to use Worksharing to divide a project into worksets so multiple users can access the project and have all their changes coordinated by Revit Architecture 2009. such as walls. Each workset can only be editable by one user at a time. Using Worksharing. they cannot make changes to it. architects commonly work in teams with each person assigned to a specific functional area. you can only make changes to the worksets that are editable by you. go to the Worksets dialog. This reduces the time it takes to open the file and the amount of memory it uses. Increasing performance using selective open When opening a Worksharing-enabled project. you must first enable Worksharing. You can enable Worksharing for any project. however. All other team members can view this workset. you specify an active workset.

If the project floor plan is so large that you need to split it with match lines to fit it on sheets. Team size You should take into consideration the size of the project team at the time you enable Worksharing. In the lessons and exercises that follow. and View worksets. you may want to create separate worksets for each portion. You learn what to consider before enabling and using Worksharing. After learning the fundamentals. Instead. not including the Project Standards. Understanding Worksharing Fundamentals In this conceptual exercise. When planning a Worksharing-enabled project The decisions you make when sharing a project and setting up its worksets can have long-lasting effects on the project team. for a typical project. Shared Levels and Grids. Project size The size of your building may affect the way you decide to segment the worksets for your team. you should separate the project into worksets that allow team members to work without interfering with each other. In the next exercise. you learn how to work as an individual with the central and local project files. you learn the fundamentals of Worksharing application. such as a tenant interior. you could create separate worksets for a set of building elements that will only appear on one floor. In a multi-story structure. This includes how to plan and execute the use of worksets in a project in order to maximize project and team performance. In most projects. When setting up Worksharing. You learn the basic steps of project sharing as well as tips for dealing with common workplace scenarios. You can improve the display-related performance of Revit Architecture by opening only those worksets required for your work. Unlike AutoCAD Xrefs. Establishing practical policies on how all team members access and create new worksets in the project will maintain performance for existing users and ease the process of introducing new team members to the project. the optimum number of worksets is approximately four for each team member. you do not need to make separate worksets for each floor of the building. You gain valuable practical experience setting up a project for worksets and working within that project. You should have at least one workset for each person. you learn some of the strategies that maximize your use of worksets. Experience has shown that. You then learn how to work within a Worksharing-enabled project with multiple users and borrow particular elements from other users. 718 | Chapter 20 Sharing Projects . you enable Worksharing within a project and set up the initial workset environment. Using Worksharing in a Project In this lesson.dialog. you learn the fundamentals of Worksharing. greater subdivision improves workflow by reducing interference between team members. you should take several considerations into account: General Considerations: ■ ■ ■ ■ Project size Team size Team member roles Default workset visibility You can maximize long-term project performance more easily if you plan Worksharing appropriately and use the feature correctly.

Long-term performance is improved if new worksets are not visible by default unless they need to be. Step 4: Subdivide the building model into worksets After you have created the initial worksets. On this tab. a Worksets tab displays on the Visibility/Graphics dialog. This allows Revit Architecture to display the view faster because computing time is not spent figuring out if the element belongs to a workset that should be displayed. make sure visibility defaults are set appropriately. you can turn off the visibility of that workset within that view. each team member has control over a portion of the design. Team size usually increases as the project progresses from the design stage to the documentation stage. As new members create worksets for their own use. remember to create worksets for functional roles and properly assign default visibility. For example. Step 1: Start the project with one user One user starts to work on the project. if a workset named Interior was created. When you create a new workset. TIP As new team members create new worksets for their own use. Understanding Worksharing Fundamentals | 719 . The building model should also reach a reasonable point of development before you enable Worksharing. Default workset visibility After a project has been shared.Team member roles Typically. If you are sure that the elements of a particular workset should not appear in a view. designers work in teams. By subdividing the project based on these task roles. the project coordinator should enable Worksharing. you can change the visibility setting in the Visibility/Graphics dialog. This project file should incorporate as many office/project standards as possible and it should include many of the families required by the project. Step 2:Activate Worksharing After the building model is ready for multiple user access. Step 3: Create additional worksets After enabling Worksharing. you would want to assign the interior walls and other interior components to that workset. you control workset visibility on a per view basis. When creating the new worksets. you decide whether or not the elements in that workset are visible by default in each view. you must assign building model elements to their respective workset. Conceptual stages of project sharing The following steps explain the basic stages of project sharing. the worksets they add often do not need to be visible by default. A typical scenario for a multi-story commercial building is shown in the following illustration. the project coordinator should create the additional worksets required by the team. Regardless of the default setting. Notice that the workset names refer to functional roles. with each assigned a specific functional task.

Step 10: Saving your changes As you work on the project throughout the day. the file is saved as the central file. When you save to the central file. your changes propagate to the entire team. Step 11: Closing a local file At the end of a work session. However. you should save the file locally and to the central file at regular intervals. however. This gives you the right to make changes to the elements in the workset and to add to the workset. This is called “Selective Open. Step 6: Create local files Each team member creates a local file that makes it possible to check out worksets and work on their respective portion of the building model. you can shorten the time required to open the file by selecting to open only the worksets required to complete your assigned tasks. On the Options Bar. proceeds as usual. Generally. This ensures that your local file is synchronized with the central file. you should save to the central file and relinquish control of all worksets that you set as editable.” When opening a Worksharing-enabled project. Local files are user-specific and can only be accessed by the users that created them. the central file is not a file that a team member would open and work in directly. they are not propagated to the rest of the team. you should then save to your local file.Step 5: Create the central file The first time you save a project after Worksharing has been enabled. After saving to the central file. As you work. Step 7: Open worksets Whenever you open a central or local file. no other users can make modifications to any elements in those worksets until you check them back into the central file. You create a local file by opening the central file and using “Save As” to create a local copy of the central file. 720 | Chapter 20 Sharing Projects . When finished or at regular intervals. new building elements are assigned to the workset that is active at the moment. There is no limit to the number of worksets you can have editable at one time. you can still work remotely as an individual and as a team. The tips discussed below provide useful information for working creatively with worksets. When you save to the central file. within the local file. When you save locally (to your local file). your changes are saved. You can make a workset active only if it is editable by you. it is essential that you save the central file to a location accessible to all team members. Therefore. you should relinquish any worksets that you no longer need. you have the option to choose which worksets to open. you make that workset editable by you. This makes them available to other team members. Step 8: Check out worksets from the central file When you “check out” a workset. The central file coordinates and propagates the changes of each user and keeps track of which worksets are available. you can select which workset is active. Any changes that other users have made to the building model become visible to you after you save to the central file or when you select Reload Latest. Step 9:Work on the project Work on the project. Tips and common scenarios 1 When working on a Worksharing-enabled project. each user saves their changes back to the central file where the changes can be propagated to all team members.

If you choose Editable at Risk and the owner of the at-risk workset has already published their files to the central file. you work no differently then you would in the office. In this situation. and transfer the updated local file back to the remote user. WARNING You should avoid editing a workset “at risk” whenever possible. You learned the basic steps of project sharing as well as tips for dealing with common workplace scenarios. you may want to phone them and make arrangements rather than waste valuable work time. using VPN. if you know who checked out the required workset. for instance. you will probably be changing material definitions and other project settings. In this instance. When working remotely. ■ If you realize that you need to modify elements in a workset that you did not make editable before going remote. If you have a colleague who is in the office with access to the central file. you learned what to consider before enabling Worksharing. reload the latest changes from the central file. or You are very confident that no other user will make that workset editable in your absence. you enable Worksharing in a project and set up some initial worksets. you will not only lose the changes to that workset. Alternatively. Understanding Worksharing Fundamentals | 721 . save to the central file. and then save the local file. To do this.Taking your computer to a remote location with the project 2 You do not need to have access to the central file in order to work on the project. you can make the workset Editable at Risk. make any required worksets editable. you can save your changes back to the central file but then the other owner loses all their work. change the username to your name under Settings ➤ Options. If the owner of the at-risk workset agrees to relinquish editability of the contested workset. you should use it only when: ■ ■ You do not intend to save your changes back to the central file. If you intend to render the building model while away from the office. you should check out the Materials workset. Remote rendering 4 While rendering remotely is supported. In the next exercise. and make that workset editable. You can also add new elements to any View or Project Standards workset even if they are not editable. This will guarantee that no other user can make it editable during the remainder of your absence. Multiple users working remotely 3 Users can work remotely provided the remote users have high-speed network access to the central file. This means that other team members will not be able to change any materials while you have the Materials workset checked out. You can modify any elements in an editable workset and all new elements are added to the active workset. a user can transfer a local file to someone with network access who can then publish the changes back to the central file. In this conceptual exercise. it is not recommended unless you understand the implications for the rest of the team. you may want to request that someone start a session of Revit Architecture. you will lose the changes you made to all your worksets. you will not be able to save your changes back to the central file if another user has changed the same workset and already published those changes back to the central file. Since making a workset Editable at Risk carries a high risk that work will be lost. You can work on the project from a remote location by doing the following: ■ Before leaving the office and disconnecting from the networked access to the central file.

and notice all are editable by you. The Worksets dialog displays. 2 Click OK to accept the default workset names. and open Common\c_Worksets. click Training Files. Notice that all worksets are open and editable by you. You cannot change your username with an unsaved Worksharing-enabled project open.rvt. 3 In the Worksets dialog. TIP You can change your username by selecting Options under the Settings menu. under Show. select: ■ ■ ■ Families Project Standards Views 4 Scroll down the list of workset names. you enable Worksharing within an existing project." Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog. You subdivide the project into worksets and save the project as the "Central File. Your username displays as the present owner. click Worksets. When you enable worksharing.Enabling Worksharing and Setting Up Worksets In this exercise. A confirmation dialog displays indicating that you are about to enable Worksharing. Enable Worksharing 1 On the File menu. Revit Architecture creates new worksets and moves project elements and settings into the new worksets: ■ Families: Loaded families in the project move into separate worksets. 722 | Chapter 20 Sharing Projects . It also informs you that existing elements in your project move to a default workset. Do not change your username during this exercise unless explicitly instructed to do so.

For training purposes. one user is assigned to the development of the exterior. it is better to make them visible by default. You do. all building model elements are placed into Workset1 by default. In this training file. The project must be subdivided in such a way as to reflect the tasks of each user. In this simple training project. under Identity Data. another is assigned the interior layout. Only User-Created worksets should display. Rather than create a new workset for these elements. Because furniture should only be visible in specific views. 18 In the Element Properties dialog. 12 Click Rename. Creating new worksets 6 In the Worksets dialog. and double-click Level 1. Because the interior walls appear in many views. This improves performance since fewer components need to be generated in each view. Because you renamed Workset1 to Exterior Shell. click OK. all building model elements are assigned to that workset. currently named Workset1. a third team member is assigned furniture placement. 17 On the Options Bar. and click OK You have created the required worksets for each team member working on this project. click . and the remainder of the team must work on wall section details. Therefore. select any of the exterior walls of the building model. and Views. Notice that Visible by default in all views is checked. imagine four users including yourself. type the name Exterior Shell. furniture components have not been added to the building model and therefore do not need to be moved to the respective workset. In this case. notice that the Workset parameter is set to Exterior Shell. 8 Click OK. you should turn off Visible by default in all views. clear Visible by default in all views. and click OK. expand Views (all). 14 In the Worksets dialog. need to reassign the interior elements to the Interior Layout workset. Subdividing the project into worksets 15 In the Project Browser. 9 Click New. expand Floor Plans. Views: Each view moves into a separate View workset. click New. you must create worksets that allow each team member to work independently. 10 Enter Furniture Layout.■ Project Standards: All project-wide settings defined from the Settings menu move to Project Standards worksets. 11 In the Worksets dialog. Project Standards. ■ 5 Under Show. This is why all worksets are editable immediately after you enable worksets. select Workset1. When you initially activate Worksharing. 7 Enter the name Interior Layout. 13 In the Rename dialog. however. Floor Plan Level 1 view moves into a workset called View: "Floor Plan Level 1". The next step is to assign elements within the building model to specific worksets. The next workset you create is for the furniture layout. you can rename the default workset. For example. Enabling Worksharing and Setting Up Worksets | 723 . The final new workset is for the exterior shell of the building model. a small number of team members are working on the building model. 16 In the drawing area. clear Families.

click the Worksets tab. 24 On the Options Bar. 21 On the Options Bar. stairs. 28 Clear Interior Layout to turn off the visibility of that workset in the view. This is because you turned off “Visible by default in all views” when you created the workset. under Identity Data. and click OK. Hold Shift down to deselect an element. including the interior doors. 25 In the Element Properties dialog. Notice that the visibility of the Furniture Layout workset is turned off in this view. 29 Click OK. click . select Interior Layout for Workset. The easiest way to do this is to drag a pick box beginning inside the lower right corner and up to the upper left corner. select Interior Layout for Workset. 23 Select all of the interior elements. click . TIP You can also hold CTRL down to select multiple elements. 20 Select one of the interior walls. 26 On the View menu. 22 In the Element Properties dialog. under Identity Data.19 Click OK. click Visibility/Graphics. You can verify that all interior elements have been reassigned to the Interior Layout workset by turning off the visibility of that workset. and click OK. and walls. 27 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. 724 | Chapter 20 Sharing Projects .

39 Click Save. under Floor Plans. enter Worksets Project-Central as the file name. click Save As. The central file is created automatically the first time you save the project after enabling worksets.The Level 1 floor plan should display with only the exterior shell visible. 33 In the Project Browser. Create the central file 37 On the File menu. click the Worksets tab. 34 In the drawing area. 30 On the View menu. select all the User-Created worksets by pressing CTRL + A. 35 On the Options Bar. you enabled Worksharing on a project. select Interior Layout for Workset. 38 In the Save As dialog. Checking in the worksets 40 On the File menu. If you intend on completing the remaining exercises in this tutorial. select them and change their workset assignment to Interior Layout. If any interior elements remain. and click OK. 36 In the Element Properties dialog. and then assigned building model elements to the worksets. click Worksets. make sure you remember the location of this central file. If you do not have access to a network and still want to complete that exercise. Enabling Worksharing and Setting Up Worksets | 725 . select all of the interior elements of the building model. click Visibility/Graphics. 44 On the File menu. this can be accomplished by saving the central file to your hard drive and changing your user name before accessing the project. created new worksets to accommodate each team member. double-click Level 2. click . You must access it in each of the remaining exercises. Now that you have created the central file. 43 Click OK. but be sure not to save the file in the training files location. Navigate to a location on a network drive that all team members have access to. under Views (all). Notice that your name has been removed as the owner of the worksets and all Editable values are set to No. 42 On the right side of the dialog. In this exercise. click Non Editable. and click OK. You then created the central file and checked in all worksets. click Close. 41 In the Worksets dialog. you must relinquish workset editability so that other users can have access to the worksets they need. under Identity Data. 32 Select Interior Layout. 31 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. This project is now ready for individuals to access it and check out their required worksets. This is imperative if you and another user intend to complete the multi-user exercise later in this tutorial.

726 | Chapter 20 Sharing Projects . Only the worksets that are opened are visible during that session. 12 Click OK. 13 On the Window menu. 4 Click Open. select Interior Layout for Name. In addition. Enabling Worksharing and Setting Up Worksets on page 722. This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise and access to the resulting central file. 8 In the File Save Options dialog. Creating a local file 1 On the File menu. 3 Click the arrow next to the Open button. select all the User-Created worksets. The Worksets toolbar displays with a drop-down list that allows you to specify the active workset. 2 In the Open dialog. Any new elements that you add to the building model are automatically assigned to the active workset. and select Yes for Editable. You have created a local file which is for your use only. please do so before continuing. verify that Make this a Central File after save is not selected. Next. check out worksets. and navigate to the location where you saved the central file created in the previous exercise. click Save As. This reduces the amount of time required to open very large project files and increases performance while you work. 15 In the Project Browser. If you have not yet completed the exercise. 7 In the Save As dialog. select the central file. select Interior Layout.Working Individually with Worksets In this exercise. you should activate the Worksets toolbar. In this case. expand Floor Plans. and click Save. Your name displays as the owner of the Interior Layout workset. name the file Worksets Project_Local-User1. The project sharing environment allows you to choose which worksets are opened during a working session. Using selective open allows you to choose which worksets you want to open. 6 On the File menu. make modifications to the building model. 9 Navigate to a directory on your hard drive. Before working on the model. and publish your changes back to the central file where other team members can see them. click Open. you check out worksets so you can modify the building model. and click OK. 11 In the Worksets dialog. Only the worksets you select and any worksets already editable by you are opened. You are now ready to modify the interior layout of the building model. any referenced workset is opened but hidden. click Options. and click OK. expand Views (all). click Worksets. you are assigned the task of designing the interior layout of the building model. click Toolbar ➤ Worksets. Checking out worksets 10 On the File menu. 5 In the Opening Worksets dialog. 14 On the Worksets toolbar. and double-click Level 1. you create your local file. and select Specify.

Working Individually with Worksets | 727 . a message would display and you would have the option to cancel the change or make the element editable. Verify that it is cleared. however. click Worksets. 22 Click OK. On the Options Bar. notice that this element is assigned to the Exterior Shell workset and that the Edited by value is blank. 18 On the Options Bar. and click OK. 24 Click OK. the Edited by value is now assigned to you. you can still edit this wall. under Identity Data. Even though you have not checked out the Exterior Shell workset. 19 In the Element Properties dialog. If it was owned by another user.16 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. If this is selected. Because this element is not owned by another user. 20 Under Constraints. Revit Architecture borrows it for you and applies your changes. you can only select editable elements within the drawing area. click . Notice that the wall still belongs to the Exterior Shell workset. In the Worksets dialog. notice that you do not own the Exterior Shell workset. 23 On the File menu. In this case. but you are listed as a borrower of that workset. you have borrowed the ownership of the upper exterior wall. 21 On the Options Bar. notice the Editable Only option. The upper exterior wall should still be selected. click . 17 Select the upper exterior wall and notice a symbol displays indicating that the element belongs to a workset that is not currently editable. click Modify. select Finish Face: Exterior for Location Line.

Modify the building model 25 Select the door on the right side of the corridor. 34 In the Type Selector. 29 In the Type Selector. click Modify. The precise location is not important. 728 | Chapter 20 Sharing Projects . and extend the lower end until it intersects the horizontal wall you added previously. 26 Delete the door. 27 Select the wall that hosted the deleted door. 30 Using the following illustration as a guide. 28 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. click Door. select Basic Wall: Interior . 31 On the Design Bar. 33 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. and modify the length so that the corridor is open. 32 Select the vertical interior wall in the upper right corner. add a horizontal wall in the lower right corner. click Wall. select M_Sgl Flush: 864 x 2032mm.126mm Partition (2-hr).

notice that there is an option to save the local file immediately after the save to central. In addition. If you click Modify on the Design Bar and then place the cursor over any of the new elements. All of the new elements that you added were automatically assigned to the Interior Layout workset. you can relinquish the user-created worksets as well as any borrowed elements. each user must check out worksets. It is recommended that you locally save your work approximately every 30 minutes and save to central every 1-2 hours. you created your local file. In this exercise. If you intend to complete the remainder of this tutorial by proceeding to the multi-user exercise. you should relinquish all worksets. Each modifies the building model within their local file and publishes it back to the central file where the other user can see the changes.35 Using the following illustration as a guide. leave this file open in its current state. By default. you borrowed the upper exterior wall in order to modify it. This exercise requires the completion of the previous workset exercises and access to the resulting local and central files. two users access the central file through a network connection. and published your changes back to the central file where other team members can see them. 37 In the Save to Central dialog. which matches the information in the Status Bar. At the end of a work session. and reload the latest changes. For training purposes. Saving your work 36 On the File menu. Whenever you save. a tooltip. If you have not yet completed these exercises. displays the workset as well as the element type. it is recommended. checked out worksets. and borrowed an element from a workset you did not own. You should check this element back into central so that others can use it if necessary. and save locally immediately afterward. click Save to Central. add two door openings into the rooms you created. Using Worksets with Multiple Users | 729 . Using Worksets with Multiple Users In this exercise. they are referred to as User 1 and User 2. In this particular case. select: ■ ■ ■ Borrowed Elements User-created Worksets Save the Local File after “Save to Central” 38 Click OK. Borrowed Elements is selected. When working in your local file. please do so before continuing. You modified the building model. you should perform regular saves. Although this is not a necessary option if you are in the middle of a work session. The Save to Central dialog displays with the path to the central file automatically filled in. make elements editable. Throughout the process. save to central.

and check out worksets 6 On the File menu. and click OK.Although this exercise is designed specifically for two separate users with network access to the central file. name the file Worksets Project_Local-User2. 11 On the File menu. select all the User-Created worksets. and reset the Username to your computer login name. select one of those central files to be used in this exercise. click Worksets. Throughout the remainder of this exercise. 15 On the File menu. 2 Start a new Revit Architecture session by double-clicking the Revit Architecture icon on the desktop or by selecting it from the Start menu. 730 | Chapter 20 Sharing Projects . consider that person to be User 1. any referenced workset is opened but hidden. two users work on the building model residing in the central file you created and saved in a previous exercise. Only the worksets you select and any worksets already editable by you are opened. under Username. click Save As. 10 In the Opening Worksets dialog.rvt. Using a second Revit Architecture session to mimic User 2 1 Minimize the current Revit Architecture window. This file is for your use only. and select Specify. 12 In the Save As dialog. You now have a local copy of the project. instructions are staggered. 8 Click the arrow next to the Open button. 7 In the Open dialog. The user who has not yet created a local file for the chosen central file is User 2. If both users have completed the previous worksets exercises and created central files on the network. and click OK. Regardless of which central file you choose to use. return to the Settings dialog. The next series of steps create a local file for User 2. 9 Click Open. click Options. 16 Select the Exterior Shell workset. WARNING After completing this tutorial and closing the project file. and click Save. In addition. and click OK. This is a system setting. specifically sequenced. User 2: Create a local file. This reduces the amount of time required to open very large project files and increases performance while you work. a single user can complete this exercise by opening up an additional session of Revit Architecture and setting the username to User 2. verify that Make this a Central File after save is not selected. 4 Click the General Tab and. enter User 2. one user has already created a local file. and navigate to the location where you saved the central file named Worksets Project-Central. 13 In the File Save Options dialog. 3 On the Settings menu. and select Yes for Editable. click Options. instructions are provided on how to accomplish this. Creating a local copy 5 In this exercise. click Open. NOTE If you are working with a second user (User 2). skip the following section. and proceed to Creating a local copy. In the following section of this exercise. and refer explicitly to User 1 and User 2. For training purposes. 14 Navigate to your preferred location on the hard drive. select the central file. Using selective open allows you to choose which worksets you want to open.

That is because changes made to the central file display in local files only when the worksets are explicitly updated.” 29 Click OK. 25 Select the vertical interior wall shown in the following illustration. User 1: Check out worksets. and double-click Level 1.You are now the owner of that workset. 17 Click OK. Using Worksets with Multiple Users | 731 . If you only have one workset checked out. click Worksets. Notice that the changes made by User 1 do not immediately display in the local file of User 2. 27 On the File menu. 22 Select the Interior Layout workset. expand Floor Plans. 28 In the Save to Central dialog. 24 In the Project Browser. 31 Using the following illustration as a guide. Notice that the Exterior Shell workset is checked out by User 2. and move it to the left until it approaches the centerline of the exterior double door on the south wall. select the lower exterior wall. it becomes the active workset. select Save the Local File after “Save to Central. modify the building model. 20 Try to change the Editable status for Exterior Shell to Yes. and move it upward approximately 2 meters. Notice that you own this workset and the active workset is now Interior Layout. 21 Click OK to return to the Worksets dialog. User 2: Modify the building model and publish changes 30 In the Project Browser. 23 Click OK. expand Floor Plans. A warning is displayed informing you that a conflict exists. If it is not open. 26 Click anywhere in the empty drawing area to ignore the warning. expand Views (all). A warning is displayed informing you that you cannot check out this workset because it is already checked out by another user. open it now. and double-click Level 1. and publish changes 18 User 1 should still have the local file open. and select Yes for Editable. 19 On the File menu. click Save to Central. expand Views (all).

you publish your changes and load the changes other users have made to the building model. 38 In the Save to Central dialog. and click OK. 34 In the Save to Central dialog. 37 On the File menu. click Worksets. and click OK. Click Yes. you should create a furniture plan view. 732 | Chapter 20 Sharing Projects . However. double-click Level 1 Furniture Plan. select Save the Local File after “Save to Central. 36 Using the following illustration as a guide. right-click Copy of Level 1. 46 In the Project Browser. delete the left window on the lower exterior wall. enter Level 1 Furniture Plan.” 39 Click OK. The wall conflict with the door opening that User 1 introduced now displays. 33 On the File menu. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. under Floor Plans. Even though the Furniture Layout workset is active. User 1: Reload latest worksets. you still have complete access to the elements belonging to the Interior Layout workset. under Floor Plans. you are asked if you want to make the Furniture Layout workset the active workset. right-click Level 1. When you save to central. 44 In the Project Browser. and click Rename. Because you now have more than one workset checked out.A message displays warning you that several windows are not cutting anything. under Floor Plans.” 35 Click OK. any elements added to the building model are automatically assigned to the active workset. 32 Click Delete Instances to delete the windows. Before adding any furniture. and check out additional worksets 40 On the File menu. The changes User 2 made are apparent. 45 In the Rename View dialog. 42 Select Furniture Layout. 41 On the File menu. click Save to Central. This is because windows are wall-hosted components and cannot float in the air without a wall to host them. 43 In the Project Browser. click Save to Central. select Yes for Editable. under Views (all). and move the door to the right in order to avoid the conflict. click Reload Latest. select Save the Local File after “Save to Central.

60 In the Rename dialog. select Save the Local File after “Save to Central. 64 Scroll down to the bottom of the list until you see Wall Types. rather than Families. and click OK. 63 In the Worksets dialog. click Visibility/Graphics. 66 On the File menu. Therefore. 50 On the View menu. under Show. 48 In the Type Selector. 67 In the Save to Central dialog. click Rename. and click OK. the Visible by default option was not selected. click Worksets.” 55 Click OK. Notice the new Level 1 Furniture Plan view in the Project Browser. click Save to Central. click Reload Latest. click Edit/New. User 2: Make an element editable on the fly 56 On the File menu. are placed under Project Standards. 49 On the Design Bar. 57 Right-click the upper exterior wall. select Project Standards. A message displays informing you that the component you are trying to place is not visible in that view. 62 On the File menu. Notice you have borrowed a portion of the workset. choose any desk. This is because when the Furniture Layout workset was created. 58 In the Element Properties dialog. 53 On the File menu. click the Worksets tab. click Save to Central. click Component. 61 Click OK 2 times. You should turn on the visibility before adding furniture. click Modify. such as Wall Types. enter Exterior Wall .47 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 51 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. 59 In the Type Properties dialog. the visibility of the workset is not turned on even though it is checked out and is the active workset. and click inside any room. and click Element Properties. NOTE System families. select Furniture Layout to turn on its visibility. Using Worksets with Multiple Users | 733 . 65 Click OK. 52 Notice that the desk you added previously now displays.200mm. 54 In the Save to Central dialog. select: ■ ■ ■ Borrowed Elements User-created Worksets Save the Local File after “Save to Central” 68 Click OK.

a single user can complete this exercise by opening up an additional session of Revit Architecture and setting the username to User 2. and still have your local files open. two users worked on the same building model using worksets. leave this file open in its current state. and save 69 On the File menu. leave this file open in its current state. select Reload Latest. instructions are provided on how to accomplish this. two users are working on the same project with separate local files. click Save As. 734 | Chapter 20 Sharing Projects . you save the training file as a central file. User 1: Reload latest. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 70 On the File menu. This exercise also requires two users and you can skip the first sections of the exercise and proceed directly to the section.rvt. Each user must have network access to the central file. select Save to Central. Although this exercise is designed specifically for two separate users with network access to the central file. 2 Navigate to a directory on the network that both users have access to. If you intend to complete the final exercise of this tutorial. and open Common\c_Worksets Project-Central. you learn how to borrow elements from worksets that other users are actively working on. click Training Files. Click OK to this message and subsequent messages. and click OK. you must borrow elements that belong to worksets that the other user has checked out. they are referred to as User 1 and User 2. In the final exercise of this tutorial. you need to set up your central and local files. There are specific instructions for each user. This exercise requires two users and. select the following. Checking out worksets. Only one user needs to open the training file and save the central file to a network location. If you have not completed the previous workset exercises. modified the building model. Each user checked out worksets. ■ ■ User-created Worksets Save the Local File after “Save to Central” In this exercise. At the appropriate point in this exercise. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. NOTE When you open the training file for this tutorial. As each of you work. 71 In the Save to Central dialog. NOTE If you are working with a second user (User 2). throughout this training. You learn how to make borrowing requests and how to grant them. Borrowing Elements from the Worksets of Other Users on page 734. and these problems are rectified. These messages are a result of the central file being relocated (to your PC).If you intend to complete the final portion of this tutorial by proceeding to the Element Borrowing exercise. and published their changes back to the central file. In subsequent steps. 3 In the Save As dialog. proceed directly to the section Checking out worksets. finished the previous workset exercises. you may receive a message informing you that the central file has been relocated. click Options. Borrowing Elements from the Worksets of Other Users In this exercise. Save the training file as the central file on the network 1 On the File menu.

select the central file. User 1: Create local file For the sake of simplicity. click Options. 12 On the File menu. and click OK. Only the worksets you select and any worksets already editable by you are opened. and click Save. and click OK. name the file Worksets Project_Local-User2. click Save As. click Options. verify that Make this a Central File after save is not selected. 9 In the File Save Options dialog. The central file should still be open. click Save As. and select Specify. Using selective open allows you to choose which worksets you want to open. and click Save. Borrowing Elements from the Worksets of Other Users | 735 . any referenced workset is opened but hidden. 15 Click Open. On the Settings menu. 16 Select all the User-Created worksets. 6 On the File menu. Next. Set the Username to User 2. perform the following steps to create a session for User 2: ■ Start a second session of Revit Architecture by double-clicking the icon on the desktop or by selecting it from the Start menu. verify that Make this a Central File after save is not selected. and click OK. 20 Navigate to a directory on your hard drive. 18 In the Save As dialog. This is a system setting. 7 Navigate to a directory on your hard drive. Click the General tab of the Options dialog. 19 In the File Save Options dialog. select Make this a Central File after save. WARNING After completing this tutorial and closing the project file.4 In the File Save Options dialog. 17 On the File menu. In addition. User 2: Create local file 11 If you are a single user and want to replicate the multi-user experience. you check out worksets so you can modify the building model. 8 In the Save As dialog. This is the local file for User 1. click Open. 13 In the Open dialog. 10 Name the file Worksets Project_Local-User1. return to the Settings dialog. and click OK. You have created a local file which is for your use only. This reduces the amount of time required to open very large project files and increases performance while you work. 14 Click the arrow next to the Open button. ■ ■ ■ This Revit Architecture session is now set up for User 2. You have created a new central file for User 1 and User 2. 5 Click Save. and reset the Username to your computer login name. and click OK. the user that saved the central file should be User 1. and navigate to the network location where User 1 saved the central file. click Options.

After you submit the request. 736 | Chapter 20 Sharing Projects .Checking out worksets Both User 1 and User 2 can check out their worksets at the same time. and select Yes for Editable. 31 Move the window 500 mm toward the upper exterior wall. Leave this dialog open until User 1 grants permission. Afterwards. the steps for each user have to be followed in sequence. and then click OK. under Floor Plans. User 1: Grant User 2 permission to borrow element 33 When User 2 contacts you and informs you that a borrowing request is pending your authorization. and select Yes for Editable. 32 Click Place Request to ask User 1 for permission to edit the window. select the Interior Layout workset. if any User-Created worksets are not open. 30 On the left exterior wall. 22 In the Worksets dialog. select Interior Layout. 23 Select the Exterior Shell workset. select Exterior Shell. double-click Level 1. click Worksets. verify that Editable Only is cleared. select the second window from the top. 24 Under Active Workset. This allows you to select elements that belong to worksets that you do not own. 27 Under Active Workset. User 2: Borrow an element from User 1 28 In the Project Browser. A warning message informs you that you must obtain permission from User 1. a message informs you that you are waiting for permission from User 1. and click Editing Requests. User 1: Check out worksets 21 On the File menu. You are now the owner of that workset. You can do this by dragging the window or by modifying one of the temporary dimension values. and then click OK. A symbol appears letting you know that it belongs to a workset you do not own. click Worksets. click the File menu. and click Open. you should inform User 1 that you are waiting for permission to edit a borrowed element. select them. User 2: Check out worksets 25 On the File menu. At this point. You are now the owner of that workset. 26 In the Worksets dialog. 29 On the Options Bar.

36 Click Close. select the request submitted by User 2. select the following. to Local. In this case.34 In the Editing Requests dialog. Borrowing Elements from the Worksets of Other Users | 737 . User 2: Check for editability grant 37 In the Check Editability Grants dialog. User 1 and 2: Save to Central. and click OK. 35 Click Grant. click Check Now. and the other user granted it. click Close. In this multi-user exercise. ■ ■ ■ User-created Worksets Borrowed Elements (User 2 only) Save the Local File after “Save to Central” 41 On the File menu. 40 In the Save to Central dialog. A message informs you that your request has been granted. select Save to Central. you learned how to borrow elements from another workset even though that workset was actively being edited by another user. 38 Click OK. and close 39 On the File menu. and notice the window is in the new location. you requested permission to edit the element.

738 .

you can designate a primary design scheme for each option set. Creating Multiple Design Options in a Project You can use design options to explore multiple design schemes as the project develops. you create multiple design schemes within a single project file. Because all design options coexist in the project with the main model (the main model consists of elements not specifically assigned to a design option). In addition. In this tutorial. you can have multiple sets of design options. and each option set can have multiple schemes. the task is to develop two roof schemes for an addition to an existing house. In this particular case. The client is interested in a pergola and sunshade for the roof terrace but is not sure of the specific layout or materials. you can have an option set for the roof structure with multiple subordinate structural design schemes. you can study and modify each design option and present the options to the client. it is common to explore multiple design schemes as the project develops. At any time in the design process. 739 . After you and the client agree on the final design. The client has asked you to create various options. you can have an option set called roofing with multiple subordinate roofing schemes. For example. you learn how to create and manage multiple design sets and options within a single building model.Creating Multiple Design Options 21 When working with a building model. Using design options. These schemes can be conceptual or can be detailed engineering designs.

3 Select Option 1 (primary). you learn how to manage and organize the design options.rvt. 740 | Chapter 21 Creating Multiple Design Options . the only available command is to create a new option set. In the left pane of the Open dialog. These three exercises are designed to be completed sequentially with the second and third exercises dependent on the completion of the previous exercise. After you create a design option. click Design Options ➤ Design Options. The first time you open the Design Options dialog within a project. the roof and structure systems must work together. each with multiple design options. Create first design option 1 On the Tools menu. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. Any new elements introduced to the building model are added to this option. and open Metric\m_Urban_House. you design each of the structural options. Each option set represents a portion of the building model wherein design alternatives are being considered. click Training Files. click Edit Selected. 2 In the Design Options dialog. you create two roof system design options that work with the structural options. each is constructed for interchangeability. you set up multiple design option sets. therefore. TIP In this exercise. The first option is a simple combination of columns and beams. This option will be the first structural scheme consisting of 75 mm round columns and 50 mm round bars. you set up the design option names and add the modeling elements to the structural design option set. Creating the Structural Design Options In this exercise. Notice Option Set 1 has been created with a design option: Option 1 (primary). click New.In the first exercise in this lesson. and click Close. In the second exercise. you create a unique in-place family as the structural system. After setting up the design option sets and their subordinate options. you can edit it. With the second option. In the final exercise of this lesson. under Option Set. and delete the unwanted options from the project. There is no limit to the number of option sets you can create. Any new elements introduced at that time become part of that option. make your final design decision.

7 In the Type Selector. expand Views (all). In this case. click Zoom ➤ Zoom in Region. either add a centered reference plane and snap the column to it. 13 Zoom in around the left column that is embedded in the notch. Creating the Structural Design Options | 741 . You should delete the dimension and unconstrain after adding the column. click 12 On the Options Bar. 6 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. the midpoint of the lower notch line is selected. make sure you select a point that is easily recognizable. Selecting Constrain limits the movement and helps ensure the post-copy alignment of the columns. 10 Select the three columns either by dragging a pick box around them or by selecting them individually while holding CTRL. Constrain Copy Multiple The Copy command is a two-click process. or add a dimension string between the columns. click Modify. select: ■ ■ ■ . The first click specifies the reference point on the element to be copied. you can continue adding new copies without reselecting the reference point (the first click). Because it is important that you select the same location on the notches you copy to. click Column. and double-click ROOF TERRACE. The left column should be centered at the intersection of the notch and the wall. and zoom in on the upper half of the building model. and the second click specifies the point on the building model the reference point is copied to. add three columns. select Round Column: 75mm Diameter. and click the EQ symbol to equalize the segments. 14 Click at an identifiable part of the notch construction. expand Floor Plans. By selecting Multiple. 11 On the Edit toolbar. In the following illustration. 8 Using the following illustration as a guide. the second column directly across from it at the intersection of the two walls. the three columns need to be copied three times to create a 3 x 4 grid of 12 columns. TIP To center the middle column. Arrows and the dimension lines have been added for training purposes only. and the third column centered between the two. 9 On the Design Bar. 5 On the View menu.4 In the Project Browser.

and click in the same location as you did for the previous notch. A copy of the three selected columns is added. click . 742 | Chapter 21 Creating Multiple Design Options . Because of the size of the columns.TIP You can zoom in and out easily during this process using the wheel on your wheel mouse. When you are finished. 16 Zoom in around the notch construction. click Modify on the Design Bar to end the copy process. 17 Zoom out and. 15 Zoom out and move downward to the notch just below this one. add a copy of the columns to the next two notches below this one. 18 On the View toolbar. using the same technique. they are difficult to see in this view.

Zoom in on the upper right column. 22 Add the first beam between the upper left and right columns by using the following steps: ■ ■ ■ Zoom in on the upper-left column. click Beam. you add the beams that span the columns. The second click specifies the end of the beam. The first click specifies the beam start point. 20 On the Structural tab of the Design Bar. double-click TOP OF CORE. 21 In the Type Selector. Use the following illustration as a guide.Notice the 12 columns that you added. Creating the Structural Design Options | 743 . under Floor Plans. click Modify. Adding a beam is a two-click process. The beam needs to be added between the remaining columns. two callouts with thin lines have been added to clarify the location of the start and end points of the beam. Zoom out and move the cursor over the upper right column. You can do this manually or use the Copy command. and click on the center to set the beam endpoint. 23 On the Design Bar. 19 In the Project Browser. In it. and click at its center to set the beam start point. Next. 24 Select the Beam you added previously. select Round Bar : 50mm.

25 On the Edit toolbar. 744 | Chapter 21 Creating Multiple Design Options . move down to the next set of columns. and click the center point. click . 30 On the View toolbar. select: ■ ■ ■ . 29 Repeat this step twice more until a beam is added to each set of columns. and select the center of the column to add a copy. Constrain Copy Multiple 27 Zoom in around the upper left column that is embedded in the notch. 28 Zoom out. This is the reference point for the subsequent copies. zoom into the left column. click 26 On the Options Bar.

click Rename. and click OK. 41 Under Option Set. 45 Under Roofing. under Option. Organize design option sets and subordinate options 31 On the Tools menu. name the option Louvers. click New. NOTE Be sure you are creating a new option. 35 Select Option 1 (primary) and. under Option. click New. 40 In the Rename dialog. enter Brackets for New. click Rename. enter Structure for New. 37 Select Option 2 and. click New. and click OK. under Option Set. not a new option set. Logically naming the option sets and relative options allows you to more easily manage them. 39 Select Option Set 1 and. click Design Options ➤ Design Options. under Option. under Option Set. 43 In the Rename dialog. 44 Select the option set Roofing and. notice that you are still editing Option Set 1: Option 1 (primary). 34 In the Design Options dialog. click Rename. 32 In the Design Options dialog. and click OK. and click OK. select Option 1 (primary). 33 Click Finish Editing. Creating the Structural Design Options | 745 . click Rename. enter Beam for New.Notice that the beams complete the bracket structure for the proposed roof. click Rename. under Option. and click OK. There should now be two roofing design options. enter Roofing for New. 36 In the Rename dialog. 46 Under Option. 38 In the Rename dialog. 42 Select Option Set 1 and.

50 In the Design Options dialog. double-click ROOF TERRACE. 51 Under Edit. Notice that the columns added to the Brackets design option do not display. under Floor Plans. 54 Zoom in toward the top of the roof terrace near the stairs. When finished. This allows you to more easily manage the project. 746 | Chapter 21 Creating Multiple Design Options . click Rename. 52 Click Close. and click OK.47 Under Roofing. select Beam. Design the second structural design option 49 In this section of the exercise. under Structure. select Edit Selected. name the option Sunscreen. Under Now Editing. it will resemble the following illustration. notice that Structure: Beam is displayed. you create the second design option. 53 In the Project Browser. You have completed the initial setup of the design option sets and their subordinate design option names. 48 Under Option. select Option 2.

select M_Roof Beam. The second click represents the plane that is moved. 57 Place a roof beam into the drawing area as shown. Creating the Structural Design Options | 747 . click Align. 59 Align the roof beam by clicking the lower edge of the adjacent horizontal wall and then clicking the lower edge of the roof beam. 58 On the Tools menu. The first click sets the plane that the object will be aligned to.55 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. Using the Align tool requires two clicks. 56 In the Type Selector. Refer to the following illustration. click Component.

Clear Group and Associate Enter 4 for number Select 2nd for Move To: Select Constrain Using the Array tool requires two clicks. on the Edit toolbar. 65 Move the cursor down to the next intersection of the lower edge of the horizontal wall and the beam. 61 On the Design Bar. click the padlock that displays to lock the alignment.60 After aligning the beam. The second click represents the move end point. Click to indicate the end point of the move. The first click sets the move start point. 748 | Chapter 21 Creating Multiple Design Options . 64 Click the start point at the alignment of the beam and wall as shown. click Modify. click 63 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ ■ ■ . 62 Select the beam and.

You can leave it open and proceed immediately to the next exercise. click Save As. 69 Click Close. m_Urban_House-in progress.rvt. 66 On the View toolbar. Notice that even before you close the dialog. and click Save.Three more roof beams are placed at the same intersection as the first beam. Notice the new design option for the structural elements supporting the roof system. the 3D view has reverted back to the brackets rather than the structural beams you just created. click Finish Editing. 70 On the File menu. 68 In the Design Options dialog. Creating the Structural Design Options | 749 . click . Design option visibility is covered in more detail later in the tutorial. 71 Navigate to your preferred directory. NOTE If you intend to continue with the next exercise. 67 On the Tools menu. you need this file in its current state. name the file. which is visible by default. click Design Options ➤ Design Options. That is because the brackets option is set to primary.

The second roofing system. 7 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. This exercise is designed to work in conjunction with the other exercises in this tutorial. is constructed of 50 mm x 250 mm rafters and 50 mm x 150 mm louvers. Roofing: Louvers (primary) should display. 8 In the Type Selector. each with multiple design options to pick from. You should have named it m_Urban_House-in progress. In the next exercise. expand Floor Plans. With the second option. 9 Zoom in on the lower half of the building model until you can see the bottom set of columns and the beam traversing the span. 5 Click Close. Under Now Editing. and double-click TOP OF CORE. 3 In the Design Options dialog.In this exercise. If you need to add dimensions. do so now. you create the roof systems that compliment these structural design options. The first option is a simple combination of columns and beams. delete them after the rafter is in place. is a simple fabric roof created using an extrusion. Both of these options are designed to work in conjunction with each of the structural design options. click Edit Selected. The first option. expand Views (all). 4 Under Edit. Creating the Roof System Design Options In this exercise. 10 Referring to the following illustration. 2 On the Tools menu. 6 In the Project Browser. you designed each of the structural options: one for brackets. you design each of the roofing options. 750 | Chapter 21 Creating Multiple Design Options .rvt. place the rafter 900 mm inside the wall shown and overlap the horizontal beam 900 mm. you set up multiple design option sets. After setting up the design option sets and their subordinate options. The dimensions shown are for training purposes. select Louvers (primary). click Component. If you have not completed the first exercise in this tutorial. open it now. Sunscreen. All are sequential and dependent on the previous exercise. you created a unique in-place family as the structural system. select Rafter 50mm x 250mm. click Design Options ➤ Design Options. under Roofing. the other for beams. Create the first roofing design option 1 If you do not have the project file that you saved at the end of the previous exercise open. a Louver system.

Enter 5 for Number. Creating the Roof System Design Options | 751 . 12 Select the rafter you added previously. click Modify. 14 In the Element Properties dialog. click . Select 2nd for Move To. You are creating an array of five rafters that are 990 mm apart. 15 On the Edit menu. Select Constrain. click in the center of the intersection to specify the array start point. enter 11750 mm for Length. The rafter should now span the entire vertical length of the proposed roof system. and click OK. 16 On the Options Bar. 17 Zoom in on the intersection of the lower end of the rafter and the intersecting beam. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Clear Group and Associate.11 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. click Array. under Other. 13 On the Options Bar.

when the listening dimension displays. 752 | Chapter 21 Creating Multiple Design Options . enter 990. Zoom out to see that the rafter array is created.18 Move the cursor horizontally to the right and. and press ENTER.

Enter 34 for Number. and select the louver you just placed. The louver now spans the horizontal plane of the roof system. 22 On the Design Bar. 26 On the Options Bar. 23 On the Options Bar. Select Constrain. 21 Place the first horizontal louver in the upper left corner according to the following illustration. click . select Louver 50mm x 150mm. and click Array. click the Edit menu. and click OK. 25 With the louver still selected. click Modify. 20 In the Type Selector. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Clear Group and Associate. 24 In the Element Properties dialog. enter 5475 mm for Length. click in the center of any intersection between the louver and the beam. Creating the Roof System Design Options | 753 .Add the louvers to the design option 19 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. Select 2nd for Move To. under Other. 27 For the array starting point. click Component.

28 Move the cursor vertically downward. 29 On the View toolbar. and press Enter. 754 | Chapter 21 Creating Multiple Design Options . and. enter 300. when the listening dimension displays. click . Zoom out to see that the 34 louvers array 300 mm apart.

35 Zoom in on the upper level where the roof design is taking place. 31 In the Design Options dialog. you only need to sketch a single line or a string of lines to define the shape of the extruded roof. click . Notice that the louver roof system no longer displays. 40 On the Options Bar. the sketch should be a series of arcs connected at the ends where they connect to the columns. The louver roof system still displays in the 3D view because it is the primary option. click Lines. Because an extruded roof has a roof type associated with it. click Finish Editing. 33 Under Editing. 36 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. Click OK. select Reference Plane : Roof Extrusion for Name. expand Elevations. 38 You are prompted to verify the roof level and offset. and click OK. click Design Options ➤ Design Options. Creating the Roof System Design Options | 755 . you must create a draped canvas sunscreen. Therefore. and double-click West. The roof extrusion reference plane has been added to the training file specifically for this purpose and is hidden in all views. 34 In the Project Browser. Create sunscreen roof system 32 In the Design Options dialog.The louver roof system is complete. click Roof ➤ Roof by Extrusion. 37 In the Work Plane dialog. In this case. under Roofing. under Edit. and then click Close. click Edit Selected. select Sunscreen. 30 On the Tools menu. 39 On the Design Bar.

and the third point defines the arc. 42 Repeat the previous step and create two more arcs between the columns. The first two points define the ends of the line. enter 5800 mm for Extrusion End. click Finish Sketch. 41 Select the top of the left column. enter 300 mm for Extrusion Start. Select the right arc. and then adjust the dip of the arc until it is 60 degrees. The easiest way to accomplish this is to use the Trim tool. 756 | Chapter 21 Creating Multiple Design Options . 43 On the Design Bar. Under Constraints. click Properties.This tool allows you to sketch an arc line using three points. 46 On the Tools menu. You can adjust the degrees by clicking the blue temporary dimension value immediately after you create the line. Under Constraints. You will fix this in a later step. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ Select Sunscreen Fabric for Type. 44 In the Element Properties dialog. 49 On the View toolbar. click . NOTE As you sketch the arcs. Do not be too concerned if your sketch lines do not exactly connect. 47 Select the left arc and then the center arc. click Trim/Extend. the top of the next column on the right. 45 Click OK. then you can modify it through the dimension. The arcs should connect. 48 On the Design Bar. then the center arc. The roof sketch must be a continuous line. try to get the angle value as close to 60 degrees as possible. You must make sure the arcs are connected where they connect to the columns.

you must create a named 3D view for the primary. and last options. Both of these options are designed to work in conjunction with each of the structural design options. do so now. 50 On the Tools menu. NOTE If you intend to continue with the final exercise. After exploring the combinations. right-click the 3D View Primary Option. under Views (all). enter Primary Option. If you have not completed the previous exercises in this tutorial. you designed each of the roofing options. was constructed of 50 mm x 250 mm rafters and 50 mm x 150 mm louvers. You have completed the sunscreen roof system. Because the client wants to see 3D building models of each of the designs. secondary. you select a design. under Views (all).The louver roof system is complete. In this exercise. Managing Design Options | 757 . you explore how to present each of the design options by creating multiple views to display the various combinations. tertiary. click Design Options ➤ Design Options. and click OK. 4 In the Project Browser. and click Duplicate. 3 In the Rename View dialog. and delete the discarded design options. Sunscreen. The first option. under Edit. 2 In the Project Browser. The second roofing system. 51 In the Design Options dialog. right-click {3D}. was a simple fabric roof created using an extrusion. Repeat this step two more times until you have three copies of the view. click Finish Editing. you need this file in its current state. make it part of the building model. 52 On the File menu. under 3D Views. This exercise is designed to work in conjunction with the other exercises in this tutorial. and click Rename. Create new views for each design option 1 In the Project Browser. and then click Close. Managing Design Options In this exercise. All are sequential and dependent on the previous exercise. expand 3D Views. You can leave it open and proceed immediately to the next exercise. click Save. a Louver system.

double-click Primary Option. under 3D Views. 7 On the View menu. and click OK. Rename the three copies as follows: ■ ■ ■ Secondary Option Tertiary Option Last Option 6 In the Project Browser. This ensures that the primaries (currently bracket and louver) are visible. click the Design Options tab. click Visibility/Graphics. and click Rename. Notice that both option sets are set to automatic. 9 Click OK. double-click Secondary Option. click Visibility/Graphics. 11 On the View menu. click the Design Options tab. 10 In the Project Browser. 758 | Chapter 21 Creating Multiple Design Options . under Views (all). 12 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog.5 Right-click each of the copies. 8 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. under Views (all). 13 Specify Beam for the Structure design option. under 3D Views.

click Visibility/Graphics. In your design options. 21 Specify Beam for the Structure design option. all isometric views are ready to be placed on a titleblock or exported and e-mailed to the client. the beam and the louver roofing should be selected as primary. 15 On the View menu. 16 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. click Visibility/Graphics. under 3D Views. In this case. At this point. under Views (all). click the Design Options tab. 18 In the Project Browser. under Views (all). under 3D Views. specify Sunscreen for the Roofing design option. the client has reviewed the design options and has decided that the beam system coupled with the louver roofing system is the preferred design. double-click Tertiary Option. click the Design Options tab. specify Sunscreen for the Roofing design option. and click OK.14 In the Project Browser. double-click Last Option. 20 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. 19 On the View menu. Managing Design Options | 759 . and click OK. 17 Specify Brackets for the Structure design option.

In this exercise. click Delete to remove the views that used options. An alert is displayed. and deleted the discarded design options. 29 Select Roofing. 35 On the File menu. click Accept Primary to take the louvers into the model. select Beam. click Accept Primary. 27 In the alert dialog. click Close. select Make Primary. 25 Select Structure. click Yes. 33 In the Design Options dialog. made it part of the building model. and you get a dialog asking if you want to delete dedicated option views.22 On the Tools menu. 23 In the Design Options dialog. but should be accepted as part of the building model. 30 Under Option Set. 31 In the alert dialog. 24 Under Option. under Structure. click Delete. 28 In the Delete Dedicated Option Views dialog. asking if you are sure you want to delete all elements of secondary options in this option set and remove the option set. 26 Under Option Set. you learned how to present each of the design options by creating multiple views to display the various combinations. 34 In the Project Browser under 3D Views. This was the client choice for structural. The beam and louver systems are now part of the building model. click Design Options ➤ Design Options. After exploring the combinations. since you no longer need them. you selected a design. 32 In the Delete Dedicated Option Views dialog. The other options were removed along with any dedicated option views. click Save. the beam option becomes part of the model. delete the other design option geometry and any dedicated option views. 760 | Chapter 21 Creating Multiple Design Options . click Yes. the current primaries are no longer options. Because the client has selected the design option. double-click Primary Option. The set is deleted.

For the client. Using Phasing In the lesson and exercises that follow. demolish existing walls and doors. In the lesson and exercises that follow. you work in a simple building model that requires renovation. you work in a simple building model that requires renovation. In the second exercise. you can create a visual time line of phase-specific 3D views. and then add new building model elements. you apply phase-specific room tags to rooms that vary with each phase and observe the differences in the phase-specific room schedules. then add new walls and doors in a different location. you apply phase-specific room tags to rooms that vary with each phase. Phases represent distinct time periods over the duration of a project. This allows you to create phase-specific project documentation. In the second exercise. complete with schedules. You can create as many phases as necessary and assign building model elements to specific phases.Project Phasing 22 In any project. demolish existing construction. 761 . You create new phases. You can use phase filters to control the flow of building model information into views and schedules. you or the client may want to view the model according to phases. You create new phases. This changes room definition and total building model area.

define the units. expand Views (all). You create new phases and phase filters and modify graphic overrides. If you change the view property settings and the phase definitions within a template file. When you create a new project. you create new phase-specific views in order to visualize the changes that you make to the model. This means that all building model elements. they are assigned to the New Construction phase by default. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 762 | Chapter 22 Project Phasing . View current phase conditions 1 In the Project Browser. 6 On the Options Bar. regardless of phase. 3 In the Element Properties dialog.Phasing Your Model In this exercise. 4 Click Cancel. 2 Click View menu ➤ View Properties.rvt. This phase assignment is controlled by a setting within the view properties. expand Floor Plans. under Phasing. and double-click Level 1. Because units of measurement have little bearing on the goals of this tutorial. then new building model elements are assigned to a phase according to those settings. and click OK. 7 Click Cancel. 5 Select any of the exterior walls. NOTE The units of measurement in this project file are imperial. two phases exist by default: Existing and New Construction. under Phasing. You can control the default phases and view phase setting by changing the settings within a template. click Training Files. During the demolition and renovation process. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. and open Common\c_Phasing. are visible in this view. notice that New Construction is selected for Phase Created. click Project Units. you do not need to change the project units to metric. If you wish to do so. Any new elements that you add to the building model are assigned to the New Construction phase. go to the Settings menu. 8 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. click (Element Properties). you work in a simple model that requires renovation. In the Element Properties dialog. notice that Show All is selected for Phase Filter and New Construction is selected for Phase. and None is selected for Phase Demolished. click Modify. As you add new elements to the building model.

and click OK. and click OK. you do not want to rename the corresponding views and level. 12 On the Options Bar. enter Level 1 . 19 In the Project Browser. right-click Level 1. Door tags are not phase-specific and must be filtered from the selection. and click OK. click . and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. Because this is a phase-specific view. click Modify. Notice that the line style of the walls and doors is displayed as gray rather than black because of the phase and phase filter settings in the view properties. 20 In the Rename dialog.Existing. under Floor Plans. Create phase-specific views 15 In the Project Browser. you may want to select the building model in a 3D view to ensure you capture all of the components.Existing. under Floor Plans. 14 On the Design Bar. 18 In the Project Browser. Because this is a renovation project. for Phase Created. enter Level 1 . 11 In the Filter dialog. 13 In the Element Properties dialog. and click Rename. it requires a plan view for demolition and for new construction.Demo. 10 On the Options Bar.Existing. This refers to the ceiling plan and the level line visible in any of the elevation views. draw a selection window around the entire building model to select all of the elements in it. 17 Click No. and click OK. TIP If this were a multi-story building. under Phasing. are highlighted in red. After you create the views. You are asked if you want to rename corresponding level and views. After you release the mouse button. right-click Copy of Level 1 . Phasing Your Model | 763 .Change the phase of the existing building model elements 9 In the drawing area. you modify their view properties to make each view phase specific. clear Door Tags. right-click Level 1 . including the door tags. and click Rename. select Existing. 16 In the Rename dialog. all of the building model elements. click (Filter Selection). under Floor Plans.

click the Phase Filters tab. 764 | Chapter 22 Project Phasing . you use phase filters to define which building model elements display in a particular view. 26 In the Phasing dialog. Existing. double-click Level 1 .Existing. In this case. You may need to zoom in to see this. to which all the building model elements belong. Define phase filters 25 Click Settings menu ➤ Phases. The line style of the walls and doors returns to black. On a logical time line. new construction occurs after existing construction. Demolished. This view uses a different line style because the phase property of this view is set to New Construction. This new filter uses graphic overrides to set the display of all building model elements: New. Later in this exercise. a graphic override is used to make “older” elements use the gray line style. select Overridden. and Temporary. 21 In the Project Browser. 24 In the Project Browser. A new phase filter is displayed at the bottom of the Filter Name list. double-click Level 1 . 23 In the Element Properties dialog. 29 For Composite Plan. Next. you modify these settings. 28 Under Filter Name. Notice that the line pattern is still gray. select Existing. under Phasing. under New. 27 Click New. and click OK. however. Phase status is time-dependent. you need a filter that takes all of the phases into account with a particular graphic override. You can change the cut and projection line color for a demolished object. There are five default phase filters.Demo. Graphic Overrides define the appearance of building model elements according to their phase status. under Floor Plans. under Floor Plans.You should now have a separate floor plan for the existing building model and the planned demolition. Because of this time relationship. for Phase. View graphic overrides 30 Click the Graphic Overrides tab. 22 Click View menu ➤ View Properties. enter Composite Plan.

42 In the Project Browser. select the line style. Add new construction 43 In the Project Browser. 35 Click OK twice. This was the display override that was set for demolished objects in the previous steps. 39 In the Phasing dialog. Change cut lines and patterns for new objects 37 Change the line style for New ➤ Cut ➤ Lines to blue. you begin demolition. Next. 36 Using the same method. This is because the view phase filter is set to Show All. specify red for the Projection/Surface line style for the Demolished phase. Notice that the demolished walls continue to display. click (Demolish). 41 Referring to the walls that display as dashed lines in the following illustration. click OK.Existing. select Demolished. you demolish all elements hosted by it. under Floor Plans. 38 For New ➤ Cut ➤ Patterns. select a lighter blue. The cursor is displayed as a hammer. 32 In the Demolished row. Notice that the doors display as demolished even though you did not specifically demolish them. double-click Level 1 . Demolish building model elements 40 On the Tools toolbar. select red. You can select it and change its Phase parameter to Demolished. select the interior walls one at a time. 34 In the Color dialog. As you click each wall. When you demolish the host. under Cut ➤ Lines. click the value for Color.31 Under Phase Status. or you can use the demolish tool. That is because doors are wall-hosted elements. under Floor Plans.Demo. There are two ways to demolish an element. 33 In the Line Graphics dialog. its display changes to a red dashed line. Phasing Your Model | 765 . double-click Level 1 .

45 In the Element Properties dialog. 49 On the Design Bar. under Phasing.4 7/8" Partition (1-hr). 52 Open Level 1 . 766 | Chapter 22 Project Phasing . 54 Click View menu ➤ View Properties. select Show Previous + New. click Door. and then add four short vertical walls between it and the upper exterior wall. The demolished walls no longer display. add a long horizontal wall. Click the control arrows to adjust the opening and face directions.Demo. 48 Using the following illustration as a guide. select Basic Wall: Interior . for Phase Filter. and click OK.Existing. 53 Open Level 1 . select Composite Plan for Phase Filter. 50 In the Type Selector. 51 Add a door leading into each room. Notice this view still displays the original walls and doors. select Sgl Flush: 34" x 84". 55 In the Element Properties dialog. for Phase Filter. 47 In the Type Selector.44 Click View menu ➤ View Properties. under Phasing. and click OK. 46 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. click Wall.

click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges. Phasing Your Model | 767 . right-click Level 1 . All elements are displayed in this view. 62 If necessary. and existing shows as half-tone. spin the building model so you can see the demolished walls. 58 Rename the copy to Level 1 .The composite plan phase filter uses graphic overrides and shows demolished as red dashed.Demo. click (Default 3D View). and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. 59 Open Level 1 . 57 In the Project Browser. This filter displays all original components that were not demolished (Show Previous) and all new components added to the building model (+ New). 60 On the View toolbar.New.New. The renovated building model plan is displayed. Create a new construction view 56 Change the Phase Filter to Show Previous + Demo. 61 On the View Control Bar. Notice that all building model elements display using the composite filter. You could create multiple 3D views that display each phase just as you did with the floor plans. and change the Phase Filter to Show Previous + New. new is shown in blue. which are displayed as red. regardless of phase. because the phase filter is set to Show All.

New. Notice that this view is the original building model. and open Common\c_Phase_Specific_Room-tags. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. 768 | Chapter 22 Project Phasing . room tags report information based on the phase of the view in which the rooms were added. and new construction. Because units of measurement have little bearing on the goals of this tutorial. All room boundaries are phase-specific. you created a building model with three distinct phases and created views with appropriate phase filters to display each phase. and locations change depending on the phase of the project. Floor plans have been created to display each phase of the project: existing conditions. click Project Units. Add room tags 1 In the Project Browser. you add room tags to a building model that has multiple phases. Using Phase-Specific Room Tags In this exercise. In this view. you do not need to change the project units to metric. and double-click Level 1 . define the units.Notice that all the elements are displayed using the material defined by the graphic overrides.rvt. the rooms change in both definition and size. If you wish to do so. In the left pane of the Open dialog. NOTE The units of measurement in this project file are imperial. go to the Settings menu. and click OK. 3 Open Level 1 . The three level 1 floor plan views show the progression of the renovation. you can do so at this time. expand Views (all).Existing. As the renovation process continues. demolition. You can also see that the room quantities. In this exercise. click Training Files. If you wish to save this file.Demo. you can see the new walls added to the building model. and the information that each room tag reports adjusts accordingly. 63 Close the file. the walls marked for demolition display using a dashed line style. In this view. They are the same walls that display as red in the 3D view. In the next exercise. you learn how to use phase-specific room tags. expand Floor Plans. sizes. 2 Open Level 1 . therefore.

Notice that the two rooms in the lower corners are identical to both the existing phase and the new phase. 14 On the Room and Area tab of the Design Bar. 6 Open Level 1 . click Room. click Room.4 Click Settings menu ➤ Phases. 7 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar.New. 9 On the Design Bar. In the Phasing dialog.Demo. 8 Using the following illustration as a guide. 12 Starting in the room in the upper left corner. 5 Click OK. Using Phase-Specific Room Tags | 769 . Phase 0 is for existing conditions and Phase 1 is for demolition and new construction. notice that there are two phases defined in this project. 10 Open Level 1 . yet they have different room numbers. and maximize the view. click Room Tag. Use the following illustration as a guide. 11 On the Design Bar.Existing. click in each room to create a room and place a room tag. click Modify. 13 Open Level 1 . click in each room as you move to the right.

16 In the Project Browser. 20 Close the file. The room tag command allows you to tag existing rooms.Existing. and double-click Room Schedule . Notice the room tags in this view get the same room tag numbers as the tags in the view displaying new construction. 19 On the Window menu. Notice that in each phase-specific schedule. expand Schedules/Quantities. click Tile.15 Using the following illustration as a guide. click Close Hidden Windows. add a room tag to the three rooms adjacent to the lower exterior wall. 770 | Chapter 22 Project Phasing . you added room tags to various floor plans that are assigned different phases. room information differs based upon the phase of the view the tags are in.New Construction. 17 On the Window menu. That is because the same phase is assigned to both views. View phase-specific room schedules. In addition. 18 Open Room Schedule . The two schedule views tile. In this case. both views are assigned the same phase yet have different phase filters. This is because the additional interior walls in the new construction occupy more space than the original. You also opened two schedules to observe how the room information is reported by phase. notice the new construction has 25 less total square feet than the original building model. In this exercise.

and manage the links throughout the project. Specific examples when you may want to use model linking and shared coordinates: ■ ■ ■ A campus plan that contains links to several structures. In the final lesson. performance. In these situations. you can use model linking and shared coordinates to create the campus within one project file while allowing work to proceed on the individual building models in other project files. you share the coordinates so that the linked files remember their location within the host project. 771 . and productivity by working in a smaller project file while retaining the ability to place that building model into a larger context. A residential development in which a few different prototypes are configured differently in an area. Comparison of alternatives on a site. This maximizes efficiency. you link several building models within a single project file in which only a site plan has been developed. You position the building models on the site plan. modify their visibility. or of a group of related but semi-independent sub-projects. In this tutorial.Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates 23 Many projects consist of disparate buildings in an overall campus.

NOTE You must complete the exercises in this lesson in sequence. This center changes as the footprint of your model changes. Placement options when linking building models When you link a building model in a project.Linking Building Models In this lesson. you work within a project in which only the site components have been developed. modify their visibility. You link multiple instances of one building model and a single instance of another. Linking Building Models from Different Project Files In this exercise.Center to Center: Revit Architecture places the center of the imported geometry at the center of the model. Automatic placement options: ■ Auto . You position the building models on the site. you open a project in which only site components have been developed. and the other is a townhouse. One building model is a condominium. NOTE The center of a Revit Architecture model is the center of the model geometry. and manage their locations in coordination with their originating project files. You link two building models to the project. 772 | Chapter 23 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates . you have the option to manually place the linked building model or allow Revit Architecture 2009 to automatically place it.

use the following steps to copy the training files to a new location. Select c_Site.Origin: The origin of the linked document is centered on the cursor. 8 Clear Read-only. If you are comfortable doing this using Windows Explorer. click Close. click Training Files. ■ ■ Manual . and open Common\c_Site. Because training files are used in multiple tutorials and are normally installed as read-only. NOTE You may need to scroll down in the left pane to see the Training Files folder. 2 On the File menu. click Save As. 6 Repeat the previous five steps for the following files: ■ ■ c_Townhouse c_Condo_Complex 7 Open the Model Linking folder. Click Open. this option will place the link at a predefined location.rvt. This tutorial requires write permission to all the training files used. Link condo complex into site project 9 On the File menu.■ Auto . with write permission. 3 In the left pane of the Open dialog. All three files now reside. ■ Manual placement options: ■ Manual . NOTE Revit Architecture projects have an internal coordinate system.Center: The geometric center of the linked document is at the cursor location. Sharing Coordinates Between Building Models on page 789.By Shared Coordinates: When using Model Linking in conjunction with Shared Coordinates. click Open. The required files can be found in the Common folder of the Training files: c_Site.Base Point: Not applicable for linked Revit Architecture Files. navigate to the Model Linking folder you created in the first step.Origin to Origin: The origin of the imported geometry is placed at the invisible origin of the Revit Architecture model. ■ ■ ■ Navigate to the Model Linking folder. however. click Open. right-click. this system is not exposed to the user. c_Townhouse. and save the file there. select the three files. and click OK. RELATED See the lesson. you can do so. This option is grayed out. Linking Building Models from Different Project Files | 773 . Save training files to different folder 1 Create a new folder on your hard drive called Model Linking. Otherwise. c_Condo_Complex. you need to copy the three training files to a different directory and make them writable. Manual . 5 On the File menu. 4 On the File menu. in the Model Linking folder that you created. Auto . and click Properties.

Notice the blue detail lines. click Import/Link ➤ Revit.Origin to Origin. For Positioning. These represent the footprint outlines of the three building model sites. and double-click Level 1. expand Floor Plans. select Auto . Because model linking and sharing coordinates are not dependent on project units. you can go to the Settings menu. and make your changes.NOTE The three project files used in this lesson use imperial units of measurement. click Project Units. 11 On the File menu. 12 In the Import/Link RVT dialog: ■ ■ Navigate to the Model Linking folder and select c_Condo_Complex. you do not need to change the project units to metric. 774 | Chapter 23 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates . 13 Click Open. 10 In the Project Browser. If you wish to do so. expand Views (all).

The condo complex building model is placed approximately at the center of the site model. The Move command requires two clicks. click (Move). click the upper-left corner of the matching blue detail lines above it.rvt displays in the Type Selector. Standard move commands work with linked building models. The second click specifies the move endpoint. After you select it. click the upper-left corner of the linked condo complex building model. Linked Revit Model: c_Condo_Complex. Move the condo complex building model 14 Select the linked building model. 17 For the move endpoint. The first click specifies the move start point. The linked model moves as one object. Linking Building Models from Different Project Files | 775 . 16 For the move start point. 15 On the Edit toolbar. similar to the behavior of imported DWG objects.

click Import/Link ➤ Revit. For Positioning. and select c_Townhouse.Origin to Origin. select Auto .After you specify the location to move to. click Zoom ➤ Zoom To Fit. Link the townhouse building model 19 On the File menu. 20 In the Import/Link RVT dialog: ■ ■ Navigate to the Model Linking folder. 776 | Chapter 23 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates . the linked file displays within the confines of the blue detail lines. 18 On the View menu. 21 Click Open.

Rotate the townhouse 22 Zoom in around the townhouse model and select it.The townhouse building model displays above the site model. the townhouse must be rotated 90 degrees clockwise. Linking Building Models from Different Project Files | 777 . and click to specify the end of the rotation. click to specify the rotation start point. when the vertical line displays. 25 Move the cursor 90 degrees clockwise. you first specify the rotation start point. To rotate an object. In this case. click (Rotate). 23 On the Edit toolbar. and then click to specify the end of the rotation. 24 Place the cursor just north of the townhouse and.

Do not be concerned if the detail lines do not match the exact footprint of the townhouse. 778 | Chapter 23 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates . 28 Select the lower-left corner of the lower-left set of blue detail lines as the move endpoint. click (Move).The rotated townhouse should resemble the following illustration. This townhouse building model needs to be moved inside the blue detail lines in the lower-left corner of the site model. Move the townhouse 26 On the Edit toolbar. 27 Click the lower-left corner of the townhouse building model as the move start point.

and the second click specifies the copy-to point. click (Copy). Copy the townhouse 29 On the Edit toolbar. 31 Select the upper-right corner of the blue detail lines on the right to specify the copy-to point. select the upper-right corner of the townhouse. The first click specifies the start point. Linking Building Models from Different Project Files | 779 . 30 For the starting point.The townhouse is located within its required footprint. The Copy command works much like the Move command.

enter Townhouse A. 35 In the Element Properties dialog. use the Move command to make any adjustments. and click OK. 32 On the Edit menu. click .A copy of the townhouse displays on the right side of the site project. under Identity data. 34 On the Options Bar. 33 Click the first instance of the townhouse on the left. 36 Use the same technique to name the instance of the Townhouse on the right to Townhouse B. click Rotate. 37 On the View toolbar. click (Default 3D View). if it does not fit reasonably well within the detail lines. 780 | Chapter 23 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates . for Name. and rotate the townhouse 180 degrees. NOTE After you rotate the townhouse.

NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise of this tutorial. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise in this tutorial and the resulting project files. you rotated and moved the building models to fit them into their designated positions within the site development. you linked two separate Revit Architecture 2009 models into a site model. click (SteeringWheels). After linking the files.38 On the File menu. In this exercise. In this exercise. you modify their vertical position so that the townhouses sit correctly on the site. Repositioning Linked Building Models | 781 . do so before continuing. click Try Me for the Full Nav Large Wheel. NOTE If this is the first time you are using the SteeringWheels. In the next exercise. If you have not completed the previous exercise. When you originally linked the files. click and hold Orbit. Modify the vertical position of the townhouses 1 On the View toolbar. Repositioning Linked Building Models In this exercise. and then spin the model until it resembles the following illustration. you modify the elevation of the townhouses. you need this project file open and in this view. you reposition the townhouses in respect to their elevation. 2 On the SteeringWheels. they were placed too low within the site topography. click Save.

6 Zoom in closer on the lower half of the townhouse and notice the ground floor level of the townhouse is 11 feet below Level 1 of the site project. move the cursor over the Ground Floor level of the Townhouse project. In this case. 8 Select the Level 1 line of the Site project. expand Elevations. To do this. 5 Place the cursor over the townhouse and notice that.Notice that the townhouse is not at the proper elevation in relationship to the site toposurface. press TAB until Level 1 : Reference displays in the status bar. When using the Align command. and then select the plane that you want to align. under Views (all). and click OK. This process ensures that you are aligning to the level marker in the site project and not to the linked condo complex project. you use the Align command to reposition the linked model within this project. 7 On the Tools toolbar. and click to select the line. you first select the plane you want to align to. click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. 4 Zoom in around the townhouse on the left. TIP Place the cursor over the Level 1 line of the Site project. click (Align). 782 | Chapter 23 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates . the status bar displays the name of the linked file.rvt. you align the Ground Floor level to Level 1 of the site plan. and double-click South. Remember to turn on visibility of the Condo Complex after you have completed this task. Click the Revit Links tab. and click to select it. If you experience difficulty finding the Level1 : Reference. you may want to hide the Condo Complex from the view. In the steps that follow. when it highlights. 3 In the Project Browser. This is apparent because there is a planter below ground level that was designed to sit on top of the site surface. clear Visibility for the c_Condo_Complex.

15 On the File menu. click and hold Orbit. 9 In the Project Browser. This would over-constrain the model. align the Ground Floor level of the remaining townhouse to Level 1 of the Site project.Notice that the townhouse is now at the proper height within this project. Also notice the option displays for you to lock the alignment. and then spin the model until it resembles the following illustration. under Elevations. 11 Return to the South elevation view. Repositioning Linked Building Models | 783 . 12 On the View toolbar. (SteeringWheels). Both townhouses should be at the proper level. Do not lock the alignment of the linked file. double-click North. click (Default 3D View). 10 Using the same technique learned in the previous steps. 14 On the SteeringWheels. click Save. click 13 On the View toolbar.

double-click South. the defaults are set to By host view for all options. As you can see. click the Revit Links tab. each linked file can have a separate set of levels and relative heights and you can accommodate those differences within the host project. Notice the Level lines for both townhouses no longer display. 6 On the Basics tab of the RVT Link Display Settings dialog. or Custom. 784 | Chapter 23 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates . If you have not completed the previous exercise. When you link a file.rvt. 9 Under Visibility. then the other pages on the RVT Link Display Settings dialog may be set to By host View. click OK. under Elevations. If the Basics page is set to Custom. In the next exercise. and the halftone settings for each linked project. NOTE You have three options for controlling visibility settings of a linked file. display settings. 8 For Annotation Categories. you can independently control the visibility settings. 5 Under Display Settings for c_Townhouse. By linked view. NOTE Changes to Visibility/Graphics are per view only. 10 Click OK. Controlling Linked Building Model Visibility In this exercise. The townhouse level lines still display in the remaining elevation views. 11 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. detail level. By host view matches the display to the settings of the current active project view.rvt. select <Custom>. scroll down and clear Levels.NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise of this tutorial. After you link a Revit Architecture 2009 project file within another project. 3 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. do so before continuing. Custom allows you to override specific visibility settings for a linked project or an instance of the linked project. click By Host View. 4 Under Visibility. Modify visibility settings 1 In the Project Browser. expand c_Townhouse. you modify the visibility settings of the linked files within the site project. click Custom. you changed the elevation of the townhouses relative to the host project. 7 Click the Annotations Categories tab. click Visibility/Graphics. Notice that you can change visibility settings of an entire linked file or selected instances of a linked file. By linked view matches the display to the settings of the linked project view. you need this project file open and in this view. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercises in this tutorial and the resulting project files. In this exercise. you modify how the linked files display within the host project. 2 On the View menu.

rvt. 24 Click OK. under Display Settings. You can click the value for Detail Level. Using the Custom option. 22 Click the Model Categories tab. By selecting custom under Model Categories. Detail levels of a linked file 18 On the View menu. no detail level changes are required.rvt. click Visibility/Graphics. you can independently set the detail level for each model category for each link on a per view basis. 23 In the Model categories list. By default. 20 For c_Townhouse. double-click Level 1. 19 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. on the Basics tab. or fine. under Floor Plans. Apply halftone 13 In the Project Browser. Controlling Linked Building Model Visibility | 785 . and click OK. In this case. the detail level for the linked townhouse project is set to By Host View. 17 Select Halftone for the Townhouse project. select <Custom>. 21 In the RVT Link Display Settings dialog. With linked files. click the Revit Links tab. medium. 15 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. 14 On the View menu. you can also apply halftone to individual categories. click By Host View.12 Using the same technique learned in the previous steps.rvt. This means that the detail level of the linked file is matched to the detail level of the current active project view. click Visibility/Graphics. you can apply halftone to the entire linked project or individual instances of the model. Notice the option to halftone individual instances of the townhouse model. and then set the detail level to coarse. 16 Under Visibility. Notice both townhouses display in halftone. select Custom. clear the Levels display for c_Condo_Complex. expand c_Townhouse. click the Revit Links tab. Halftone displays objects with half their normal darkness.

786 | Chapter 23 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates . In this case. 26 Under Display Settings. If the host file is closed and one of the linked files is modified. this is preferable. In this case. In the next exercise. the townhouse view range now uses the same view range defined within the Floor Plan: Ground Floor of the original linked file. all new. click Save. phase. After you link a Revit Architecture 2009 project into another project. and temporary components in that particular phase (New Construction) are displayed. You also changed the view range of the townhouse so it would cut through the building model at the same height as the other linked building model. click OK. This means that the phase named New Construction for the linked building model is displayed. 28 Select By linked view for View range. you need this project file open and in this view. the host view specifies New Construction for the Phase and Show All for the phase filter. 27 In the RVT Link Display Settings dialog. However. Managing Linked Building Models In this exercise. existing. All other components are grayed out. In this exercise. 25 On the Revit Links tab. those modifications are reloaded into the host project when it is reopened. you manage the links within the host project by unloading and reloading the linked projects. a connection to the linked project continues to exist. With the Show All filter applied. and phase filter of a specific link. demolished. By default. select c_Townhouse. the view range of a linked project uses the current view of the host project to define its view range. Notice that the Custom button displays under Display Settings. Notice the Phase and Phase filter specified are By host view. under Visibility. where you need to specify a different view range so that all the building model plan views cut at the same height.Modify display settings of linked files You can use display settings to control the view range. select Floor Plan: Ground Floor for Linked view. NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise of this tutorial. on a sloped site for instance.rvt. you modified the visibility settings of the townhouse link by turning off the visibility of the level lines and applying halftone in a plan view. with Show All as the phase filter applied to the link. there are situations. In most cases. you manage the linked files. 30 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. 29 Click OK. click Custom for the Townhouse link. 31 On the File menu.

In general. select c_Condo_Complex. 5 Click Unload. In a shared coordinate environment. notice that you have a choice between Relative and Absolute. As links are moved to new locations in the host project. The buttons at the bottom of the dialog are now active. The Loaded option for that linked file is now clear. Locations Not Saved. If you have not completed the previous exercise. click Manage Links. you should use a relative path rather than an absolute. and Saved Path fields are read only. They supply information regarding the links. Notice that the condo complex link no longer displays in the host project. the link is broken because the host project continues to look for the link in the absolute path specified. 7 Click OK. Notice the Loaded. click Yes. Managing Linked Building Models | 787 . 2 In the Manage Links dialog. The default path type is Relative. you can use the Save Locations command to save the new locations to the linked project. You learn more about this in the next lesson. 4 Under Linked File. NOTE The Locations Not Saved field is only relevant for links with shared coordinates. If you use a relative path and move the project and linked file together to a new directory.rvt. NOTE Unloading linked projects may increase performance by reducing the quantity of components that must be opened and drawn. click the Revit tab. If you use an absolute path and move the project and linked file to a new location. 3 Under Path Type. do so before continuing. Sharing Coordinates Between Building Models. the link is maintained. Unload and reload links 1 On the File menu. The most common scenario for using Absolute is when the linked file is on a network where multiple users need access to it. 6 At the confirmation prompt.NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercises in this tutorial and the resulting project files. any changes made to the locations of a linked file are saved within the linked file rather than the host project.

you may decide that you need to see additional worksets of one of those linked files. you should try to keep all instances of a link on the same workset. the specific worksets opened in each host project must be identical. If you choose not to open that workset.rvt. and click Reload. In the Import/Link RVT dialog. When you initially place the link. This enhances performance by reducing the quantity of components that must be opened and drawn. 8 In the Project Browser. To do this. However. In general. the link is not loaded. it is possible to specify which links are loaded when the host file opens. expand Revit Links. click the arrow next to the Open button. you must keep in mind which workset the link is placed in. The user who creates the first link determines the status for all other linked files. 9 On the File menu. Changing the linked worksets: While working in a host file with Worksharing-enabled linked files. go to the Manage Links dialog and use the Reload From command. ■ ■ ■ TIP When opening a Worksharing-enabled host file. Linking building models with Worksharing enabled In some cases. both the link symbol and the link instance are placed in the active workset. 788 | Chapter 23 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates . click Save As. NOTE Some of the more frequently-used commands from the Manage Links dialog can be accessed by right-clicking the link in the Project Browser. Host files with Worksharing enabled: When the host file has Worksharing activated. and select Specify. In these cases. you should consider the following: ■ Selective open of worksets: When linking a Worksharing-enabled building model. you can also remove a link completely or reload the link from a different location. Notice the condo complex building model has been reloaded into its previous location. you may need to link projects that have Worksharing enabled.TIP In the Manage Links dialog. You can then specify the additional worksets you need opened. Linking a building model into multiple host projects: Although the same Worksharing-enabled building model can be linked within multiple host projects. Links consist of two parts: the link symbol and the link instance. link instances can be reassigned to different worksets. you can specify which worksets to open after the link is made. right-click c_Condo_Complex. A link is only loaded if the workset that the link instance is assigned to opens.

you can choose to use the coordinates of either the host project or the linked project. When you link a Revit Architecture 2009 project into another project (the host project). This lesson requires the completion of the lesson Linking Building Models on page 772. When used in conjunction with model linking. TIP You can also use shared coordinates with linked DWG files. name the file Site_Project. If you have not completed the previous lesson. When Revit project views are exported to DWG. you learn how to share coordinates between project files so that you can correctly locate building models with respect to each other. When you share coordinates between projects. you learn how to share the coordinates between the host and linked projects. The host file consists primarily of site components. you managed the linked files by unloading and reloading the townhouse project. Sharing Coordinates Between Building Models. In essence. you are deciding which coordinate system will be used by the two files. Sharing Coordinates Between Building Models In this lesson. it is important that this file exist in the same directory as the condo complex and townhouse projects. navigate to the Model Linking folder you created in the first exercise. Acquiring and Publishing Coordinates In this exercise.10 In the Save As dialog. leave the project file open in its current view. and the resulting project files. you can keep track of the multiple locations in which a linked building model may reside. you publish the coordinates from a host project file to two different buildings that are linked to that project. In the next lesson. NOTE If you intend to complete the next lesson. you are establishing a shared origin point. In this exercise. the host project Sharing Coordinates Between Building Models | 789 . In most cases where the host project consists primarily of site components and the linked projects contain the building models. do so before continuing. If you intend to complete the next lesson now. project or shared coordinates can be specified in the Export Options dialog. and save it as an RVT file.

open it before continuing. Linking Building Models on page 772. Publish coordinates 1 Verify that the floor plan Level 1 is the active view.coordinates are used. Select Site_Project. This sends the coordinate information to the linked project so that its internal coordinate system matches the host project.rvt and click Open. Navigate to the Model Linking folder you created in the first exercise of this tutorial. click the Condo Complex. Training File ■ ■ ■ On the File menu. you can publish the coordinates of the linked files. click Open. You may want to do this in a case when the link refers to a DWG that has an established coordinate system that you want the host project to adopt. 2 On the Tools menu. When you are working in the host project. As indicated in the Status Bar. you must now select a linked project to publish coordinates to. If you have closed the project. click Shared Coordinates ➤ Publish Coordinates. It is the building model in the upper center of the host project. do so before continuing. In this case. This ensures all the linked building models define their position with respect to the site data. You can also acquire coordinates when working in the host project. 790 | Chapter 23 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates . the host file acquires the coordinates of a specified linked file. and the resulting project files. If you have not completed the lesson. 3 In the drawing area. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous lesson.

even though both models originate from one linked file. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise within this lesson and the resulting project files. Relocating a Project with Shared Coordinates When a Revit Architecture 2009 model is linked into a host project. In this exercise. This makes it possible to use the same building file to represent identical buildings on a site. This location is defined as being a specified location with respect to the origin of the Host. and Lot C. if coordinates are published from the host to the linked project. However. NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise of this lesson. If you have not completed the exercise. click to select it. when the edges highlight. You have published the coordinates of the host project to the linked project. On the Status Bar. Lot B.4 In the Manage Place and Locations dialog. this location is not saved outside of the host project. Relocating a Project with Shared Coordinates | 791 . then the location becomes saved in the linked file. notice you are still in Publish Coordinates mode and Revit Architecture is waiting for you to select another link. it is placed at a specific location. but can have multiple additional locations. Both projects now share a coordinate system and can be linked to one another using this common coordinate system. click Modify to end the Publish Coordinates process. Specify a townhouse location 1 In the drawing area of the floor plan Level 1. Linked files using shared coordinates must have at least one defined location. An example of a linked file with many locations is a prototype model of a house that is placed on 3 different lots. Each of the locations can then be saved within the linked file for reference. You also relocate the shared origin of the project. do so before continuing. select Location 1. Until coordinates are shared between the link and the host. move the cursor over the left townhouse and. you need this project file open and in this view. 5 On the Design Bar. These three locations can be named Lot A. Each of these lots is simply a different position for the same house design. and click OK. you specify and save the two townhouse locations.

12 On the Options Bar. enter Lot A for New. This means that you need to choose which coordinate system will be shared by both files. When constraining a link to a location. click 13 In the Element Properties dialog. 5 In the Share Coordinates dialog: ■ ■ Select Publish the shared coordinate system. under Instance Parameters. In the Choose Location dialog. Record the current position as a location. notice the Shared Location value is Not Shared.2 On the Options Bar. changing the position of that instance can affect the definition of the location that is saved with the linked file. It is only necessary to reconcile coordinates once. Constrain a link to a specific location 11 Select the townhouse building model on the right side of the host project. 7 In the Rename dialog. 792 | Chapter 23 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates . 10 In the Element Properties dialog. click Not Shared for Shared Location. click Rename. under Instance Parameters. This is because the coordinates for this linked file have already been shared. you have only two choices: ■ ■ Move the instance to an existing location that is not already in use. 9 In the Select Location dialog. click Reconcile. select Move instance to. notice that you do not have an option to acquire or publish coordinates. Because this is the first time you are setting up the shared coordinates between the host and the linked models. click . After a link instance is assigned a shared location. and click OK. click Not Shared for Shared Location. Under Record selected instance as being positioned at location. 4 Under Value. click Change. 3 In the Element Properties dialog. and click OK. a dialog displays telling you to reconcile the coordinates. 6 In the Manage Place and Locations dialog. notice the Shared Location value is now Lot A. 8 In the Manage Place and Locations dialog. This is a one-time operation. 14 In the Choose Location dialog. . click OK.

click OK. ignore the warning. it is not automatically saved within the linked file. This is a two-click process. 24 In the Save Modified Linked Model dialog. 31 Click just north of the site topography and just below the North elevation symbol. Relocating a Project with Shared Coordinates | 793 . and click OK. 25 In the Manage Links dialog. 22 In the Manage Links dialog. 27 Select the townhouse on the right in Lot B and drag it a short distance in any direction. you essentially move the origin of the shared coordinates. click the Revit tab. although it may appear that the linked files are moving. select Save. The second click specifies the move endpoint. and then select the townhouse project. click Manage Links. 26 Click OK. or cancel the action. By relocating a project. To explicitly save a location. 17 In the Manage Place and Locations dialog. You can relocate an entire project with respect to all the linked files that are shared with it. 18 In the Manage Place and Locations dialog. the active location position is moved. When you release the mouse button. 20 In the Element Properties dialog. You created the Lot A location in previous steps. 16 Click Change. select the second option. When you create a location. 15 In the Choose Location dialog. 23 Click Save Locations. This is because you cannot choose a location where an instance link already exists. You now have two different locations for the townhouse building model: Lot A and Lot B. click Zoom ➤ Zoom to Fit. 28 Click Cancel to return the townhouse to Lot B. notice the Locations Not Saved option for the townhouse project is no longer selected. The first click specifies the move start point. You are given the opportunity to save the new location. make sure Lot B is selected. enter Lot B for Name. you are prompted to save the locations to the linked files. Save locations 21 On the File menu. you cannot redefine its location. click OK. Because Lot A is currently in use. 19 In the Select Location dialog. When you relocate a project. and click OK. NOTE If you attempt to close a host file without saving location changes made to linked files. 30 On the Tools menu. and click OK. a warning displays. Notice the OK button is still not active. click Duplicate. click Project Position/Orientation ➤ Relocate this Project. you must go to the Manage Links dialog and save the locations there. You are informed that you have attempted to move a linked file that has been saved to a specific location.Notice the OK button is not active. and the left townhouse resides at that location. Relocate a project 29 On the View menu. Record current position as.

In this exercise. 33 On the Edit menu. 35 In the Save Modified Linked Model dialog. 36 On the File menu. and click OK. 34 On the File menu. Notice the site topography and the linked building models no longer line up. you created and saved the locations of each townhouse. 794 | Chapter 23 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates . you work in one of the linked projects.32 Move the cursor horizontally to the left approximately 40' and click to relocate the shared origin. NOTE In the following exercise. click Close. click Undo to return the origin to its original position. select Save. click Save. and the linked projects are offset the distance that you moved the origin. You cannot work on a host file and one of its linked files simultaneously in the same session of Revit Architecture. You have also learned how to relocate the host project with respect to the linked projects.

Select c_Condo_Complex. In this exercise. Because this building model only has one named location. it is placed automatically within the host project. Working with a Linked Building Model | 795 . It is located in Lot A and Lot B within that project file. select Auto . 4 Zoom out to see the condo complex building model. For Positioning. you work on the townhouse building model and modify its location. The condo complex is positioned relative to the active location of the townhouse building model. 3 In the Import/Link RVT dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ Navigate to the Model Linking folder you created in the first exercise of this tutorial. the condo complex is linked within the Site_Project. click Open. you could link them in and have them retain their correct position.By Shared Coordinates. under Floor Plans.Working with a Linked Building Model After a file has been linked into a host and its coordinates are shared.rvt file. do so before continuing. The current active location is Lot A. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercises within this lesson and the resulting project files. Also. Training File ■ ■ ■ On the File menu. This project is currently linked to the Site_Project. In addition. click Import/Link ➤ Revit. double-click 1st Floor.rvt file. Click Open. Select c_Townhouse and click Open. When opening the linked file. If you have not completed the exercises. you can select which of the defined locations is the active location that you would like to work on. 2 On the File menu. Link a project 1 In the Project Browser. Navigate to the Model Linking folder you created in the first exercise of this tutorial. the linked file contains information about its location with respect to the host. if other models were linked into the same host.

do so before continuing. Orient a view to true north 5 On the View menu. click Manage Place and Locations. and use the Report Shared Coordinates tool. In the next exercise. click View Properties. In this exercise. enter Lot C. In the host file. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercises within this lesson and the resulting project files. Lot C now exists as a location although it has not been specified as an instance. If you have not completed the exercises. you worked within a project that is linked within another project. you need this project file open and in this view. you can select Lot C if necessary. and click Make Current. and click OK. 796 | Chapter 23 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates . You loaded a linked file into the townhouse project and then changed the active location to see how the project reacts to the changes. Notice that the condo complex link has repositioned itself as though the townhouse was on Lot B. 7 Click OK. under Graphics. click Manage Place and Locations. Manage locations 1 On the Settings menu. and click OK. select True North for Orientation. These new locations can be assigned later within a host file. Managing Shared Locations The Manage Place and Locations command allows you to quickly create new location names or rename existing ones. click OK. 4 In the Manage Place and Locations dialog.Change the active location 5 On the Settings menu. 6 Select Lot B. NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise of this lesson. 3 In the Name dialog. you create a new location. click Duplicate. Notice that Lot A is the current active location. In this exercise. you manage the shared locations. 6 In the Element Properties dialog. 2 In the Manage Place and Locations dialog. orient a view to true north.

click Open. Scheduling Components of Linked Files | 797 . NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercises within this lesson and the resulting project files. Select Site_Project. 9 Click any component or in any location on the drawing area. you schedule components of the host file and of all linked files.rvt and click Open. you created a new location using the Manage Place and Locations tool. Training File ■ ■ ■ On the File menu. This command allows you to determine the location of elements and points in the model with respect to the shared coordinate origin. You can save the file if you wish. do so before continuing. Create a door schedule 1 Verify that the floor plan Level 1 is the active view. Report shared coordinates 8 On the Tools menu. If you have not completed the exercise.7 Click View menu ➤ Zoom ➤ Zoom to Fit. Notice that the orientation of the model resembles the site project. On the Options Bar. Scheduling Components of Linked Files In this exercise. In this exercise. Navigate to the Model Linking folder you created in the first exercise of this tutorial. 10 On the File menu. You rotated a view to true north and used the Report Shared Coordinates tool to locate components in regards to the origin. click Close. notice the coordinates display in regards to the direction and distance to the origin. click Shared Coordinates ➤ Report Shared Coordinates.

2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 798 | Chapter 23 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates . and click OK. 6 Add the remaining fields in the following order: ■ ■ ■ Family and Type Comments Cost 7 Select Include elements in linked files. click Schedule/Quantities. and click Add. 5 Under Available fields. select Doors. under Category. select Count. 3 In the New Schedule dialog. click the Fields tab. Select the fields to display in the door schedule 4 In the Schedule Properties dialog.

and a grand total for the number of doors in the project buildings. In order to see a concise listing of all the doors in the campus project. 10 In the Element Properties dialog. you created a schedule of doors in the host file and all linked files of a project. click Edit for Sorting/Grouping. click Save. 12 Select Grand totals. under Other. In this exercise. click Close. You also sorted the schedule data to produce a consolidated listing of the components. clear Itemize every instance. you can sort the schedule data and display a single table entry per door type. the schedule lists the total count for each door type. select Family and Type for Sort by. 14 On the File menu. Scheduling Components of Linked Files | 799 . You have completed this tutorial. right-click Door Schedule. 11 In the Schedule Properties dialog. 13 On the File menu.8 Click OK. Sort schedule data 9 In the Project Browser. Because you did not itemize every instance of each door type. and then click OK twice. and click Properties. expand Schedules/Quantities.

800 .

Customizing Project Settings and Templates 801 .

802 .

Modifying System Settings In this lesson.rte. Notice that the drawing area is black. 803 . Set graphics settings 1 Click File menu ➤ Close to close all open projects. you modify project settings to control the appearance of components and subcomponents within that project. you modify the settings that control your local Revit Architecture working environment. Modifying General System Options In this exercise. selection default options. click the Graphics tab. and open Metric\Templates\m_Tutorial_Default. 10 In the Options dialog. 7 In the left pane of the Choose Template dialog.Modifying Project and System Settings 24 In this tutorial. click OK. click Training Files. journal cleanup options. click the Graphics tab. you learn how to modify your Revit Architecture 2009 working environment. click the value for Selection color. click Browse. 5 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Project to open a new Revit Architecture project. System settings are local to each computer and applied to all projects. and set it as your default template. they are not saved to project files or template files. 4 Under Colors. notification preferences. and click OK. select Invert background color. you learn how to control the system settings for Revit Architecture. you create an office template. under Template file. you modify the system environment. Finally. which is independent of the project settings. 9 Click Settings menu ➤ Options. 3 In the Options dialog. In the second lesson. and your username when using worksets. 6 In the New Project dialog. 11 Under Colors. 8 In the New Project dialog. In the first lesson. These settings control the graphics. 2 Click Settings menu ➤ Options.

16 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. select None. 21 Click File menu ➤ Close. 14 Under Notifications. 23 Click File menu ➤ Open. 20 Place the cursor over the wall but do not select it. 17 Sketch a straight horizontal wall in the center of the drawing area. 18 On the Design Bar. select One hour. the status bar displays information about the highlighted element. However.12 In the Color dialog. Notice that a tooltip is not displayed. and make the following changes: ■ ■ Under Colors. select yellow. 19 On the Design Bar. For Tooltip assistance. 15 Click OK. and open Metric\m_Settings. and click OK. When an error occurs.rvt. specify the following options: ■ ■ For Save reminder interval. 24 In the left pane of the Open dialog. and select the wall. NOTE You can also specify the Alert Color. click Modify. click No. 13 Click the General tab. 25 Click Settings menu ➤ Options. click Modify. click Wall. Notice the selected wall is yellow rather than the default red. select red. click Training Files. click the Graphics tab. Notice that the system settings apply to this project. the elements causing the error display using this color. 804 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . 26 In the Options dialog. 22 When prompted to save changes. clear Invert background color. For Selection color.

These are the family templates that you use to create new families. and click Open. select Normal. enter the name you want to use during worksharing. These settings control locations of important Revit Architecture files. 10 In the Places dialog. Journals can be run to detect a problem or recreate lost steps or files. click Browse. centralized. click Browse. select the folder to save your files to by default. family template files. click Places. Your login name displays by default. such as in a large. click Browse. 5 Under Default path for user files. Specifying File Locations on page 805. TIP To view a template. Notice that you can choose an industry-specific template as your default template. Journal files are text documents that record each step during your Revit Architecture sessions. 29 Click File menu ➤ Close. 4 Click Cancel. You can modify the existing Specifying File Locations | 805 . under Default path for family template files. 30 Proceed to the next exercise. Under Username. 7 In the Options dialog. 6 In the Browse For Folder dialog. Notice that the drawing area background colors are no longer inverted and that tooltips display when you place the cursor over any building component. This path is set automatically during the installation process. Journal files are deleted automatically after their number exceeds the value you specify.27 Click the General tab. notice the list of library names. However. Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Project. These files are used in the software support process. do not save the changes. It is unlikely that you would ever want to modify this path. select your preferred Save reminder interval. and click Browse to select a template. Specify library settings and create a new library 9 In the Options dialog. Set file locations 1 Click Settings menu ➤ Options. For Tooltip assistance. They are saved at the termination of each Revit Architecture session. and make the following changes: ■ Under Notifications. select values for When number of journals exceeds and Delete journals older than (days). click the File Locations tab. 3 Under Default template file. Each library path points Revit Architecture to a folder of families or training files. and family libraries. Specifying File Locations In this exercise. there are some circumstances where you may need to modify the path. If prompted. ■ ■ 28 Click OK. 8 Click Cancel. you can start a new project with that template. The list is dependent on the options that you selected during installation. Under Journal File Cleanup. including your default project template. you specify default file locations. 2 In the Options dialog. architectural firm where customized templates reside on a network drive.

and change the name to My Library. you can click on the library folder located in the left pane of the dialog. 806 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . 11 In the Places dialog. notice that the libraries display as icons in the left pane of the dialog. or families. TIP You may want to create a new folder first. saving. 13 Click in the Library Path field for My Library.library names and path. and Import dialogs. click (Add Value). Load. In the following illustration. templates. and you can create new libraries. Save. and select it as the library path. that displays on the right 14 Navigate to C:\My Documents or a folder where you want to create a personal library of Revit Architecture projects. or loading a Revit Architecture file. When you are opening. under Libraries. 12 Click in the Library Name field of the new library. and click Open. An icon for each library displays in the left pane of all Revit Architecture Open. and click the icon side of the field.

click My Library. 2 In the Options dialog. scroll down the list of building industry terms. This path specifies the location of the Render Appearance Library. The custom dictionary opens in your default text editor. click the Spelling tab. 7 Click File menu ➤ Exit. 27 Under Render Appearance Library Location. and click OK twice. enter sheetmtl-Cu. If you work in a large office. 21 Click the File Locations tab. 8 Under Building industry dictionary.The new library displays in the left pane of all Revit Architecture Open. Specify rendering settings 26 Click the Rendering tab. Load. specify the new location here. and decal image files. 9 In the text editor. 16 Click (Move Rows Up) until My Library is at the top of the list. you modify the spelling settings and the custom dictionaries for Revit Architecture. Specifying Spelling Options In this exercise. click the My Library icon. click Edit. 3 Under Settings. 29 Proceed to the next exercise. 5 In the text editor. you can specify the locations of other files used to define render appearances. Specifying Spelling Options | 807 . Specifying Spelling Options on page 807. 20 Click Settings menu ➤ Options. 4 Under Personal dictionary contains words added during spell check. If you want to relocate this path. 18 In the left pane of the Open dialog. 24 Click 25 Click OK. you may want to set up an office library on a network path to increase productivity and maintain office standards. Notice that Revit Architecture navigates directly to the library path. 19 Click Cancel. 10 Click File menu ➤ Exit. Save. such as bump maps. select Ignore words in UPPERCASE. 28 Click OK. This path is determined during installation. Modify spelling settings 1 Click Settings menu ➤ Options. The library icons display in the order in which they are listed in the Options dialog. Under Additional Render Appearance Paths. (Remove Value) to delete the library. 22 Click Places. 23 Select My Library. and Import dialogs. 6 Click File menu ➤ Save. 17 Click File menu ➤ Open. custom color files. 15 Under Library Name. view the current path. click Edit.

16 Click Tools menu ➤ Spelling. 2 In the New Project dialog. click Text. under Template file. Modifying Snap Settings In this exercise. 15 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar.11 In the Options dialog. Revit Architecture uses the largest increment that represents less than 2mm in the drawing area. work with snapping turned off. do not save the changes. click the Spelling tab. 17 Click Settings menu ➤ Options. 3 In the left pane of the Choose Template dialog. In this exercise. 808 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . you modify snap settings. and open Metric\Templates\m_Tutorial_Default. It allowed SHTMTL-CU because you set the spelling options to ignore words in uppercase. 19 Under Settings. 12 On the Standard toolbar. click default template. 25 Proceed to the next exercise. The custom dictionary opens in your default text editor. Snap settings are system settings that are applied to all projects and not saved within a project file. 14 Click in the drawing area. As you zoom in and out within a view. (New) to open a new Revit Architecture project using the 13 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. Modifying Snap Settings on page 808.rte. or use the shortcut keys to force a particular snap method. and then click File menu ➤ Exit. Notice that the spell checker allowed sheetmtl-Cu because you added it to the custom dictionary. Modify snap increments 1 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Project to open a new Revit Architecture project. You can turn snap settings on and off. 20 Under Personal dictionary. This command resets the spelling settings to their original configuration. you modify snap increments. 23 In the Options dialog. If prompted. delete sheetmtl-CU. click OK. click Edit. click File menu ➤ Save. click OK. click Modify. 21 In the text editor. click Training Files. 5 Click Settings menu ➤ Snaps. 4 In the New Project dialog. 24 Click File menu ➤ Close. 18 In the Options dialog. click Restore Defaults. and enter This is sheetmtl-Cu and SHTMTL-CU. click OK. You can add an increment by entering the value with a semicolon after it. and use shortcut keys to control snapping on an instance basis. Notice that you can modify both length and angular snap increments. click Browse. 22 In the text editor.

Notice that the listening dimension snaps at 1000 mm increments. Modifying Snap Settings | 809 . notice the 2-letter acronyms next to each object snap option. use the wheel button on your mouse. enter SM. 8 In the Snaps dialog. and enter 500 . 10 On the Options Bar. you can also use the zoom shortcut keys.6 Under Dimension Snaps. click Wall. you can right-click and select a zoom option from the shortcut menu. If it does not. click in the Length dimension snap increments box following the value 1000 . click OK. 7 Under Object Snaps. 9 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar.. For example. and move the cursor to the right. clear Chain. While sketching. such as ZO to zoom out. 11 Click in the center of the drawing area. After you click to place the object at the midpoint. snapping reverts to the system default settings. If you do not have a wheel button. if you want to snap an object to a wall midpoint. and only midpoint snaps are recognized until you commit an action. You can use these shortcut keys at any time when working on the design. This dimension reacts to the movement of the cursor and numerical keyboard entries. zoom out until it does so. TIP To zoom while sketching. A listening dimension refers to the dimension that displays while you are sketching.

19 Notice that the cursor now snaps only to the midpoint of the wall. 14 Click to set the wall endpoint. If you move the cursor along the wall. enter the shortcut key SO to turn snaps off. and move the cursor to the right. and do not save the file. Notice that snapping is once again active. This is the snap shortcut key that restricts all snapping to midpoints. the command is only active for one click of the mouse. 810 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . 20 Click to start the wall at the midpoint. This is the increment that you added previously. When you use shortcut keys to control snapping. 23 Under Dimension Snaps. the midpoint. and delete the value 500 . Sketch without snapping 13 While sketching the wall. 25 Click File menu ➤ Close. 26 Proceed to the next lesson. 17 Place the cursor over the horizontal wall you added previously. the listening dimension reflects the exact length of the wall as you move the cursor to the left or right. Notice that the cursor snaps to various points on the wall.. Notice that when snapping is turned off completely. Use snapping shortcut keys 16 On the Design Bar. Do not set the wall end point. 15 Click in the drawing area to start a second wall. 18 Enter SM. 22 Click Settings menu ➤ Snaps. and the wall edges. 21 Move the cursor downward. and specify the wall endpoint. it will snap to the endpoints. click in the Length dimension snap increments box. Make sure you also delete the semicolon. zoom in until the listening dimension snap increment shifts to 500 mm. 24 Click OK. and click Wall.12 While sketching a generic straight wall. click Modify. Modifying Project Settings on page 811.

You create and modify materials. Using these options. In the steps that follow. you modify the appearance of components and subcomponents in a project. you render a region to observe the changes. This building model has a generic roof and generic floor. lines. click Training Files. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. it defines the appearance of that element in shaded and rendered views. Creating and Applying Materials In this exercise. and open Metric\m_Settings. After you create a new fieldstone material and apply it to the exterior wall face. Modifying Project Settings | 811 . annotations. you modify the way the Project Browser organizes the project. you begin with a simple building model consisting of brick on CMU exterior walls. In the left pane of the Open dialog.Modifying Project Settings In this lesson. save the project file with a unique name. If you cannot complete the exercises in their entirety.rvt. you create a new material and apply it to a model element. Finally. and object styles. you learn how to control the project environment by using the options available on the Settings menu. and use it to complete the remaining exercises. Create a new material 1 Click Settings menu ➤ Materials. The exercises in this lesson should be done sequentially using the same project file. When you apply a material to an element. fill patterns. Well designed materials provide the foundation for photorealistic renderings.

the Render Appearance tab updates to display properties for the selected stone. and click OK. select Stone. 9 Click Apply. It is not stored in the read-only Render Appearance Library. 4 In the Duplicate Revit Material dialog. and click (Element Properties).Fieldstone. Apply the new material 12 In the Project Browser. In the Materials dialog. In the next exercise. You have created a new material that can be applied to any model element in this project. These details will display in rendered images. 10 Click the Graphics tab.Fieldstone. and click OK. 7 In the Render Appearance Library dialog. and double-click 02 Entry Level. When you change properties of a render appearance. This list includes all materials available for use on model elements. 6 Click Replace. Notice that the surface pattern is still blank. When a model element is loaded into a project. Notice that no surface pattern is defined for this material. 11 Click OK. you modify the material so that it displays correctly in a shaded or rendered view. However.Notice the materials listed on the left side of the dialog. Change the render appearance 5 Click the Render Appearance tab. 2 Scroll down the materials list. 13 Select the lower exterior wall. 3 Click (Duplicate). In the steps that follow.Fieldstone material. this material provides a starting point for the new material. and texture of the material. you create a fieldstone pattern and apply it to the Masonry .Stone. for Class. scale. 812 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . Masonry . Notice that the material settings have not changed from the material that you duplicated. and select Masonry . The list displays only render appearances that belong to the stone class. The Render Appearance Library is a local. enter Masonry . all materials that are part of that family are also loaded into the project. This command creates a new material using the selected material settings as the starting point. The properties describe the color. the modified render appearance is stored as part of the project file. 8 Select Riverstone Blue. expand Views (all) ➤ Floor Plans. read-only library for render appearances.

click Edit. 22 Select the left exterior wall.14 In the Element Properties dialog. 24 In the Type Selector. 20 In the Materials dialog. 19 On the right side of the Material field. select Basic Wall: Fieldstone on CMU. click Model Graphics Style. Fieldstone on CMU. 21 Click OK three times. 16 Enter the new wall name. 15 Click Duplicate. Creating and Applying Materials | 813 . and verify that Shading with Edges is selected. click in the Material field. 18 For Finish 1. and click OK. . 26 On the View Control Bar. and click OK.Fieldstone. It is currently assigned the material Masonry . Layer #1 is the exterior finish of the wall. click (Default 3D View). When you render a 3D view that includes the lower wall. All of the exterior walls of this project are now Fieldstone on CMU.Fieldstone. click Edit/New. select the rear exterior wall. the wall will display the render appearance specified for Masonry . 17 For Structure. 23 While pressing CTRL.Brick. 25 On the View toolbar. select Masonry . click This is the material that you created.

30 Zoom in on the render region so you can see the building more clearly in the drawing area. and there is no stone pattern applied in this view. 31 In the Rendering dialog. click Rendering Dialog. select Low or Medium. When finished. 814 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . and drag its blue grips to adjust the render region around the building. TIP If the Rendering tab is not available on the Design Bar. 28 In the Rendering dialog. Higher quality renderings require more time to generate. under Quality. This is because a surface pattern was not selected when the fieldstone material was defined. select Region. In the following exercise. 27 On the Rendering tab of the Design Bar. 32 In the Rendering dialog. click Render. for Setting.Notice that the exterior walls are no longer brick. you create a fieldstone pattern and apply it to this material. and click Rendering. right-click the Design Bar. The rendering process begins. select the render region (a red rectangle). Creating and Applying Fill Patterns on page 815. the rendered image displays fieldstone walls. 29 In the 3D view.

Model patterns are fixed and scale with the model. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise. Notice that a fieldstone pattern is not available. such as steel. Notice that no model surface pattern displays on the fieldstone wall. and clear Region. Then click Render again. 4 Scroll down the list of patterns. Drafting pattern density is fixed. 34 Close the Rendering dialog. Creating and Applying Fill Patterns on page 815.TIP If you want to see the material in greater detail. click Show the model.rvt. 2 Click Settings menu ➤ Fill Patterns. you create a new pattern called Fieldstone and apply it to the material you created in the previous exercise. click Import. Zoom into the model. expand Elevations. 36 Navigate to a folder of your preference. Drafting patterns represent material in symbolic form. select Custom. click Show the model. Create a new fill pattern 1 In the Project Browser. Both pattern types are created and applied in a similar way. 33 In the Rendering dialog. Use the project file that you saved at the end of that exercise. There are 2 types of fill patterns: model and drafting. and save the file as m_Settings-in progress. 5 Click New. 35 Click File menu ➤ Save As. and adjust the boundaries of the render region to describe a smaller area. 7 Under Custom. and double-click West. such as brick coursing or ceramic tile on a wall. 3 Under Pattern Type. in the Rendering dialog. choose Model. 6 In the Add Surface Pattern dialog. 37 Proceed to the next exercise. Creating and Applying Fill Patterns In this exercise.rvt. m_Settings-in progress. Model patterns represent actual element appearance on a building. Creating and Applying Fill Patterns | 815 . which consists of a double-diagonal hatching pattern.

22 Click OK three times. 21 In the Materials dialog. 11 Click OK. click 15 For Structure. click Edit. 13 On the Options Bar. click OK. The new model pattern is available in the Fill Patterns dialog. and open Common\Fieldstone_Model. click in the Material field. 19 In the Fill Patterns dialog. under Pattern Type. 20 Select the Fieldstone model pattern.Fieldstone material. select fldstn. click Training Files. enter . 10 For Name.pat. 23 On the Design Bar. notice that no surface pattern is applied to the Masonry .Fieldstone. 17 On the right side of the Materials field.56. 9 Under Custom. click to select a fill pattern. select Model. Apply the fieldstone pattern 12 Select the west exterior wall with windows. It is currently assigned the material Masonry . Finish 1 is the exterior finish of the wall. and click OK. 18 Under Surface Pattern. and for Import scale. click Edit/New. enter Fieldstone. The west wall of the building displays as solid fill. 14 In the Element Properties dialog. In the Materials dialog. click . for Finish 1. 24 Zoom into the model until the fill pattern appears. 816 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . and click OK.8 In the left pane of the Import Fill Pattern dialog. 16 In the Edit Assembly dialog. (Element Properties). click Modify.

The client may not be certain of the exact window frame color to use and may want to see renderings of various options. For example. 27 Proceed to the next exercise. and double-click 3 Windows. expand 3D Views. Apply object styles by category 1 In the Project Browser. Use the project file that you saved at the end of that exercise. Controlling Object Styles on page 817. m_Settings-in progress. TIP If the pattern does not display.rvt. use the shortcut keys ZR (Zoom in Region). click (Default 3D View). adjust your zoom settings as needed.25 On the View toolbar. You can then change the material in the Object Styles dialog and apply it to all window types. there are often multiple window types within a project. 2 On the keyboard. Controlling Object Styles | 817 . Object styles allow you to control the appearance of multiple component types. Rather than continually modify the type properties of each window type. 26 Click File menu ➤ Save. you can set the window frame material to By Category. Object styles are applied in every view and can be overridden in a particular view by modifying the Visibility/Graphics settings. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise. Controlling Object Styles You can use object styles to control the appearance of components and subcomponents. and drag a rectangle around the 3 windows facing you.

3 On the View Control Bar. under Materials and Finishes. click (Element Properties). 16 On the Design Bar. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges. 7 In the Type Properties dialog. click in the Value column. click Modify. Notice the exterior frames of all the windows are now gray. 13 In the Type Properties dialog. click By Category (located under the materials list). 14 In the Materials dialog. 6 In the Element Properties dialog. click in the Value column. under Materials and Finishes. click Edit/New. This means that the material is assigned by the Object Styles setting. 9 Click OK twice. click (Element Properties). 8 In the Materials dialog. 10 Select the arched window. 12 In the Element Properties dialog. for Trim Exterior Material. 5 On the Options Bar. for Trim Exterior Material. 11 On the Options Bar. 818 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . click By Category. . and click 15 Click OK twice. and click . 4 Select one of the rectangular windows. click Edit/New.

19 For Trim. select Trim. click in the Material column. 26 Select Paint Dark Red Glossy. select Use Render Appearance for Shading. descriptions.Change the render appearance 17 Click Settings menu ➤ Object Styles. When you render a 3D view. 28 Under Shading. Revit Architecture determines the average color for the render appearance. and click 22 Click the Render Appearance tab. 25 In the search field. 21 In the Duplicate Revit Material dialog. select Paint. 18 On the Model Objects tab. enter Trim . click OK. . 23 Click Replace. and click OK. The list displays render appearances that belong to the Paint class and whose names. and click OK. click OK. and select Trim. Change the color in shaded views 27 Click the Graphics tab. Notice that the red paint trim material is applied to all windows regardless of their type. for Class. 30 In the Object Styles dialog. It uses this color to represent the material in 2D and 3D views whose model graphics style is Shading or Shading with Edges. expand Windows. 24 In the Render Appearance Library dialog. (Duplicate). for Name. 29 In the Materials dialog. and click 20 In the Materials dialog. Controlling Object Styles | 819 . type red.red paint. the rendered image will show dark red paint for the window trim. or keywords include the word red.

Modifying Line Patterns and Styles In this exercise.rvt. 9 In the Object Styles dialog. 2 Click Settings menu ➤ Line Patterns. Use object styles to apply the change to all views. click 32 Click File menu ➤ Save. m_Settings-in progress. 3 In the Line Patterns dialog.31 On the View toolbar. is open with the 3D view active. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line. for Name. 4 In the Line Pattern Properties dialog. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise. you can apply it using either of the following methods: ■ ■ Use Visibility/Graphics settings to modify the roof appearance in a specific view.rvt. 5 Enter the Types and Values shown in the following illustration: 6 Click OK twice. Modifying Line Patterns and Styles on page 820. Use the project file that you saved at the end of that exercise. 820 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . select Red. you create a new line pattern and apply it to the fascia of the roof. 33 Proceed to the next exercise. select Roofs. under Category. enter Roof Line. 11 For Line Pattern. 7 On the View Control Bar. select Roof Line. Now that you have created a line pattern. Create a new line pattern 1 Verify that the project from the previous exercise. 8 Click Settings menu ➤ Object Styles. m_Settings-in progress. click New. 10 For Line Color. (Default 3D view). You then create a new line style to mark the zoning setback from the property line.

click Model Graphics Style. but not the line pattern. 14 On the View Control Bar. 13 In the Project Browser. under 3D Views. Modifying Line Patterns and Styles | 821 . and verify that Hidden Line is selected.12 Click OK. double-click to Building. The line style is applied to the roof in the view. Notice that the line color displays in this view.

for Visibility. 22 On the Model Categories tab. 20 Click OK. under Category. elevations. 16 Click Settings menu ➤ Object Styles. 21 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. sections. 18 For Line Color. under Floor Plans. This setting overrides the appearance of the roof only in the current view. For Pattern. select 5.NOTE The line pattern is most appropriate in plan views. 822 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . The pattern is not applied in a perspective or camera view where you expect to see a solid line. double-click 03 Roof. specify the following options: ■ ■ ■ For Weight. and orthogonal 3D views show line color and pattern. 23 For Projection/Surface Lines. select Solid. select Roof Line. Plans. select Black. select Roofs. 19 For Line Pattern. select Roofs. click Override. 15 In the Project Browser. 24 In the Line Graphics dialog. For Color. select Blue. 17 In the Object Styles dialog.

under Floor Plans. select Zoning Setback. select 2. 34 On the Options Bar. 33 In the Type Selector. and click OK. (Line). select Double dash. Notice the site topography and the property lines. specify the following values: ■ ■ ■ For Line Weight Projection. click Lines. 29 For Name. select Red. For Line Pattern. specify the following: ■ For Plane. This places the line above the topography. 30 For the Zoning Setback category. ■ ■ 35 Draw lines for the setback approximately as shown: Modifying Line Patterns and Styles | 823 . 27 Click Settings menu ➤ Line Styles. Click Click (Draw). click New. under Modify Subcategories. select Level: 02 Entry Level. 31 Click OK. 28 In the Line Styles dialog. For Line Color. 32 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. double-click Site.25 Click OK twice. enter Zoning Setback. Create a new line style 26 In the Project Browser.

Detail lines only show in the view where they are created. 37 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. 44 On the View toolbar. NOTE If Site is not selected. 46 Proceed to the next exercise. Expand Site. and clear Zoning Setback. This turns off the visibility of the Zoning Setback lines only in this view. double-click 02 Entry Level. use the Detail Lines command on the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 38 On the Model Categories tab.NOTE If you only want the setback to display on the site view. 41 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. 43 Click OK. Modifying Annotations on page 825. as if they are placed on an overlay of the view. 40 In the Project Browser. 36 On the View toolbar. and then clear Property Lines. select it. click (Default 3D View). 42 On the Model Categories tab: ■ ■ Expand Lines. and clear Property Lines. (Default 3D View). click 45 Click File menu ➤ Save. expand Lines. 39 Click OK. 824 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . under Floor Plans. Notice that the Zoning Setback lines display in this view. and clear Zoning Setback.

Create a new dimension style 1 Verify that the project from the previous exercise.Imperial and click OK. click Duplicate. To place a dimension. click the default value. Notice that the windows on the west wall are tagged. click Load a new window tag 12 In the Project Browser. for Units Format. click another wall. select Feet and fractional inches. and place a dimension on the floor plan. and then click outside the second wall.rvt. 5 Under Text. click one wall. click Modify. double-click 02 Entry Level. m_Settings-in progress. 11 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. You have created a new dimension style. 8 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. is open with the 02 Entry Level floor plan active. (Undo). m_Settings-in progress. and that the tags display the window type rather than the window instance number. 13 Select a tagged window in the west wall. You also load a new window annotation symbol and apply it to show the window instance number rather than the window type. For Units. 4 Enter the name Linear .Imperial. 7 Click OK twice. click Dimension. 10 On the Standard toolbar. select Linear .rvt. 9 In the Type Selector. 2 Click Settings menu ➤ Annotations ➤ Dimensions ➤ Linear. you create a new dimension style using units of measurement that differ from the project settings. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise.Modifying Annotations In this exercise. under Floor Plans. 6 In the Format dialog: ■ ■ Clear Use project settings. Use the project file that you saved at the end of that exercise. 3 In the Type Properties dialog. Modifying Annotations | 825 .

Notice that there is a window tag loaded and applied to windows. select the 3 window tags. and open Metric\Families\Annotations\M_Window Tag . 21 In the Tags dialog. clear Leader. The window tag used in this project is designed to display the type. In the preview image. 18 In the Tags dialog. Notice that you can choose between the two window tag types loaded into this project. This indicates this tag is designed to display the window instance value rather than the type value. A window instance tag displays on the selected window. notice the Mark value differs from the window tag value.Number as the assigned tag. In the steps that follow.rfa. click the bottom window. 24 While pressing CTRL. 20 In the left pane of the Open dialog. 25 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. notice that the label displays 1i.14 On the Options Bar. you load a new window tag that displays the window instance mark. scroll to Windows and notice that M_Window Tag . click Training Files. 15 In the Element Properties dialog. scroll down to Windows. click Tag ➤ By Category. 16 Click Cancel. 17 Click Settings menu ➤ Annotations ➤ Loaded Tags. 26 On the Options Bar. 826 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings .Number. and select the drop-down arrow that displays. 22 Under Loaded Tags. 23 Click OK.Number is now the assigned tag. 28 On the Design Bar. This tag is used when tagging windows By Category. 27 On the west wall. 19 Click Load.Number. click M_Window Tag . Leave M_Window Tag . Then press Delete. click Tag All Not Tagged. under Category. click (Element Properties).

29 Select the Window Tag category with the loaded tag. for Area. M_Window Tag . and click OK. click the default value. dimensions use these project settings. select To the nearest 100. you can have multiple views: one displaying window type tags and the other displaying window instance values. Unless overridden. 31 On the Design Bar.Number. you modify the temporary dimension settings. select Faces. Temporary Dimensions. 3 In the Format dialog. Use the project file that you saved at the end of that exercise. In the first section. Specify temporary dimension properties 7 Click Settings menu ➤ Temporary Dimensions. 30 Under Leader. and click OK. Modifications to area rounding are displayed in schedules and area tags. the other displays the instance value.Temporary Dimensions. TIP Using the techniques learned in the previous steps. Specifying Units of Measurement. dimension values display using this setting. Set units of measurement 1 Click Settings menu ➤ Project Units. m_Settings-in progress. The remaining untagged windows are tagged by instance value. 9 Under Doors and Windows.Temporary Dimensions. Specifying Units of Measurement. for Rounding. For Unit symbol. 34 Proceed to the next exercise. and Detail Level Options on page 827. select meters squared. select 0 decimal places. Each Window Tag category has a different loaded tag: one displays the type value. you modify the detail level assignments. for Length. and click OK. 6 Click OK. select Openings. verify that Create is clear. and Detail Level Options | 827 . click Modify. 5 In the Format dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Rounding. click 33 Click File menu ➤ Save. 32 On the View toolbar.rvt. Both window tag types can coexist within the same view. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise. and Detail Level Options In this exercise. Click OK. you modify 3 settings that have a broad impact on the project. Unless overridden. Specifying Units of Measurement. In the second section.Under Category. click the default value. 2 In the Project Units dialog. 4 In the Project Units dialog. notice Window Tags appears twice. (Default 3D View). you specify the project units of measurements. 8 Under Walls. In the final section.

Notice the 1 : 50 view scale moved to the Medium column. 13 Click File menu ➤ Save. To organize the views and sheets into sets of deliverables. Any new view created using this scale is automatically assigned the detail level Medium. the detail level is specified automatically according to the arrangement in the table. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open.In this project.rvt. and expand 3D Views. expand Floor Plans. click . 828 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . In this table. When you create a new view and specify its view scale. temporary dimensions now snap to the wall faces and to the door and window openings. you use the arrows between the columns to move view scales from one detail level to another. These drawings and sheets can become so numerous that navigating a lengthy Project Browser list can be cumbersome. expand Views (all). You do not select a view scale to move it. 14 Click File menu ➤ Close. In this exercise. you can use the Project Browser settings to instantly modify how the Project Browser groups and sorts. you modify the Project Browser organization and create new methods of grouping and sorting the views and sheets. 11 Between the columns Coarse and Medium. Modifying Project Browser Organization on page 828. Specify detail levels 10 Click Settings menu ➤ Detail Level. Modifying Project Browser Organization In a typical project. The location of temporary witness lines can be changed by clicking their controls. 12 Click OK. 15 Proceed to the next exercise. and open Common\c_Project_Browser. In the left pane of the Open dialog. click Training Files. Organize the Project Browser by views 1 In the Project Browser. you often produce multiple packages of related drawings. The view scale moves either from the bottom or the top of the column based on the direction. TIP You can override the detail level at any time by specifying the Detail Level parameter in the View Properties dialog or the Detail Level icon on the View Control Bar.

8 Select Phase. In the Project Browser. and click OK. 10 In the Project Browser. and click OK. Modifying Project Browser Organization | 829 .Phase 3-Structure Completed Project-Structure Completed Structure w/ Roof&Floors Completed Project Each of the 3D views varies by phase and discipline. 5 On the Views tab.Notice that the views are listed alphabetically. expand Sheets (all). and click Apply. and notice that each is grouped by discipline. Notice that the sheets are listed alphanumerically based on the sheet number. notice that Views are divided into Architectural and Structural disciplines. expand both the Architectural and Structural views. 9 In the Browser Organization dialog. notice that views are grouped by phase. select Discipline.Phase 2-Structure West Wing . 2 In the Project Browser. 3 Open each of the 3D views in the following order. 7 Click Settings menu ➤ Browser Organization. In the Project Browser. 4 Click Settings menu ➤ Browser Organization.Phase 1-Structure East Wing . select Type/Discipline. 6 In the Project Browser. expand each view type. and notice the progression of each view: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Main Bldg .

18 In the Browser Organization Properties dialog. Create a new browser organization name 15 Click Settings menu ➤ Browser Organization. and click OK. and click OK. click the Folders tab. 17 Enter Phase/Type/Discipline. under Sheets. 14 In the Project Browser. and click New. 16 Click the Views tab. 12 Click the Sheets tab. and specify the following: ■ ■ ■ Group by: Phase Then by: Family and Type Then by: Discipline 19 Click OK.Organize Project Browser by sheets 11 Click Settings menu ➤ Browser Organization. 830 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . 13 Select Sheet Prefix. expand each sheet set.

enter a unique file name. Creating an Office Template | 831 . dimensions styles. levels. Even if you choose not to base that project on a template. A well designed template will ensure that office standards are maintained and will reduce repetitive work. Choosing the Base Template In this exercise. certain baseline settings are still assigned to the new project. Whenever you create a new project or template. For example. In the lesson that follows. View Type (Family and Type). you can modify one template and use Transfer Project Standards to copy the changes to other templates. navigate to your preferred directory. You can also save these settings in a template file. In that case. and expand both Architectural and Structural. when you create a new project. a group of settings is used to specify the project environment. In this lesson. expand 3D Views. Review existing templates 1 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Project. Although Revit Architecture provides many templates to choose from. you modified various project settings that affect project appearance and organization. you create an office template. The template selection may vary depending on your installation. click Training Files. You can use an existing template as the baseline or use no template at all. The lesson begins with choosing the correct base template and progresses through many of the most common modifications that you should consider to make a template unique to your situation. The first step in creating your office template is deciding which template to use as your starting point. All the settings that you changed in this lesson are saved with the project. Notice that the Project Browser has reorganized all the views within this project according to Phase. you may decide to modify one or more of these templates to the specific needs of your company. under Views. When you create new projects. You can choose from several templates. Creating an Office Template In this lesson.rte template. select Phase/Type/Discipline as the current browser organization. and Discipline. 21 In the Project Browser. If you want to save this file. When you create a new template based on an existing template. and click OK. You should choose the option that will help you develop the best template with the least amount of work. 3 In the left pane of the Choose Template dialog. expand Complete. the same rules apply. you can select an existing template or begin the project with no template. You can save Project Browser organization schemes and named print settings in a template. you create a Revit Architecture template file and specify it as your default template. 2 Under Template file. Proceed to the next lesson. and click OK. and view names. you select the starting point for your office template. You may need to have a variety of office templates if your work requires it. and click Open. By saving these settings as a template and using it throughout the office. the project template is used to provide the initial project settings such as materials. 22 Click File menu ➤ Close. you maintain consistent standards and reduce the amount of repetitive work.20 In the Browser Organization dialog. Creating an Office Template on page 831. 4 Select the Construction-DefaultMetric. click Browse. and open Metric\Templates.

and double-click North. select Project. but the view properties have been modified to maximize the use of various tools. close them. 11 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Project. Other templates are simple in respect to the predefined views and schedules. 832 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . expand Views (all) ➤ Elevations. 12 Under Template File. Modifying Project Settings on page 832. When you create the material. If you have additional projects open. In this exercise. 6 Click OK. TIP This template is the starting point for your new template. To maintain office standards and reduce rework. you can dictate its appearance in all views and when rendered. 15 Under Create new. and patterns Annotations Project units Temporary dimensions Detail levels Project Browser organization In addition to the list above. you can establish settings that are common to most projects.5 In the New Project dialog. you can create the materials commonly used in most projects. Notice that there are more predefined levels than you normally see in the default template. Notice that the construction template is more complex than the default template. you can select it now. in the drawing area. The specifics regarding each of these are addressed at the end of this exercise. 8 Click View menu ➤ Zoom ➤ Zoom in Region and. you modify the project settings for your new template. weights. and click OK. 16 Proceed to the next exercise. drag a zoom region around the level heads. select Project template. for Create new. These settings control the appearance of components and their subcomponents within a project. you modify the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Materials Fill patterns Object styles Line styles. click Browse. navigate throughout the various views and schedules. there are additional commands under the Settings menu that allow modifications that can be saved in a template. If you want to use a template other than the default. 10 Click File menu ➤ Close. Modifying Project Settings In this exercise. 9 In the Project Browser. 7 In the Project Browser. For example. 13 Select the default template. 14 Click Open.

see a preview of the rendered material. and similar attributes. 5 Click OK twice to close the Render Appearance Library and Materials dialogs. For more details on modifying these settings. In the Object Styles dialog. You are merely pointed to each area where you can adapt the template to your needs. texture. and move model patterns. 8 Create new fill patterns as needed. 11 Click the Model Objects tab. it adopts the material assigned to its object styles category. Create and modify fill patterns 6 Click Settings menu ➤ Fill Patterns. you can specify its appearance in rendered images. 3 Click the Render Appearance tab.During this exercise. Specify object styles 10 Click Settings menu ➤ Object Styles. When you create or modify a material. Model patterns represent actual element appearance on a building. 12 Modify the properties of any existing categories as needed. or refer to the online help. 4 Click Replace. 9 Click OK when finished. Modifying Project Settings | 833 . rotate. transparency. You do this by defining the render appearance. Modifying System Settings on page 803. See Modifying Project Settings on page 811 for more information on creating new fill patterns. 2 Scroll down the materials list. create new subcategories. Any related files (such as image files or bump maps) should be stored in a location that is accessible to all users of the template. You can also dimension to model pattern lines. line patterns. 14 Click the Annotation Objects tab. Observe the materials that are already defined. line colors. 13 If necessary. see Modifying Project Settings on page 811. TIP For more information about creating new materials. For more information. Drafting patterns represent materials in symbolic form. annotation objects. and scroll through the list of categories. You may want to rename or modify some of the existing materials. the changes are saved as part of the project template. You can assign a different render appearance to a material. or refer to the online help. see the previous lesson. see Specifying File Locations on page 805. or modify existing patterns. you can set line weights. If you change render appearance properties. and materials for model objects. specific modifications are not dictated. You can align. including color. 7 Scroll through the list of model patterns and drafting patterns. Create and modify materials 1 Click Settings menu ➤ Materials. and change render appearance properties. not in the read-only Render Appearance Library. If certain materials are commonly used in your office or industry. create and modify them as needed. and imported objects. TIP When the material of an object is set to by category.

The arrowheads configured within this dialog can be applied to text notes. Modify line weights 21 Click Settings menu ➤ Line Weights. You can define the widths of 16 different pens for 6 different drawing scales. Modify line styles 17 Click Settings menu ➤ Line Styles. 33 Add and delete line patterns as needed. The Annotation Line Weights tab controls the line width of annotation symbols. name the style. modify the line weight. 37 Modify the properties of existing arrowhead styles if necessary. The Line Weights command controls the display of line widths for each scale of a view. 20 Click OK. 24 Add and delete view scales as needed. Modify line patterns 30 Click Settings menu ➤ Line Patterns. You can add and delete view scales. and dimensions. or line pattern as needed. 38 Click Rename if you want to rename an existing arrowhead. such as section lines and dimension lines. 31 Scroll through the list of line patterns. Modify arrowheads 35 Click Settings menu ➤ Annotations ➤ Arrowheads. To see the details of a particular style. ■ ■ 22 Click the Model Line Weights tab. 36 Select the Type drop-down list. 19 If necessary. The Perspective Line Weights tab controls the line width of model elements in perspective views. 39 If you need to create a new arrowhead style. 28 Modify existing line weights as needed. and notice the list of existing arrowhead styles. 29 Click OK. 25 Click the Perspective Line Weights tab. select it. and specify the properties. 16 Click OK to close the Object Styles dialog. tags. 32 To modify a line pattern. Annotation line widths are independent of the view scale. and click Edit. line color. select it from this list. create new line subcategories. The widths are dependent on the scale of the design. 27 Click the Annotation Line Weights tab. 18 For existing line categories. click Duplicate. The dialog has 3 tabs: ■ The Model Line Weights tab controls the line width of model elements (such as walls and windows) in orthographic views. 23 Modify existing line weights as needed. 26 Modify existing line weights as needed.15 Modify categories. 834 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . and create new subcategories as needed. 34 Click OK.

TIP In the drawing area. In the Tags dialog. and notice the list of existing linear dimension styles. 58 Click OK. The tag assignments in this dialog dictate the default tag for each category. name the style. 44 Click Rename if you want to rename an existing style. 54 Modify the unit settings if necessary. when you add a door with the tag option selected. angular. 45 If you need to create a new linear dimension style. make sure each category is assigned the desired tag. you can modify the location of temporary dimension witness lines. For example. 47 Repeat the previous 5 steps for angular and radial dimensions.40 Click OK. 43 Modify the properties of existing linear dimension styles if necessary. ■ ■ Click Settings menu ➤ Annotations ➤ Dimensions ➤ Angular. 62 Click OK. 46 Click OK. 56 Repeat the previous two steps for the Area. 55 Click OK. and specify the properties. select it from this list. specify the default location for temporary dimensions. Linear. Volume. Click Settings menu ➤ Annotations ➤ Dimensions ➤ Radial. specify where you want the temporary dimensions to measure from by default. and radial dimensions are modified separately. the last loaded tag becomes the default tag. click Duplicate. Modify dimension styles 41 Click Settings menu ➤ Annotations ➤ Dimensions ➤ Linear. To see the details of a particular style. click Load. 49 Scroll through the list of loaded tags. 42 Select the Type drop-down list. When more than one tag has been loaded for a category. 50 To load new annotation tags. and choose a decimal symbol. the door is tagged using the tag assigned to the Doors category in this dialog. Specify project units 52 Click Settings menu ➤ Project Units. click Format. 57 Specify the Slope option. 60 Under Walls. and Angle settings. Notice many categories do not have loaded tags. You can override tag assignment using the Type Selector. 51 After you have loaded the necessary tags. 53 For Length. Modify loaded tags 48 Click Settings menu ➤ Annotations ➤ Loaded Tags. 61 Under Doors and Windows. Modifying Project Settings | 835 . and click OK. You can have multiple tags loaded for any category. you can override the assignment by selecting a different tag from the drop-down list. Specify temporary dimensions 59 Click Settings menu ➤ Temporary Dimensions.

you may only want to add generic settings that would be applicable to most projects. 68 Delete. create new browser organization types. These views and sheets can become so numerous that navigating a lengthy Project Browser list can be cumbersome. The detail level is based on view scale. Additional project settings 74 The Settings menu offers several additional commands that control the project environment. the detail level of that view is automatically assigned using this table. Each of these areas is covered later in this lesson or in other tutorials. 64 Review the table. See Setting up If necessary. Links to associated tutorials are provided. To move the view scales. 71 Delete. you can use the Project Browser settings to instantly modify the grouping and sorting within the Project Browser. In a typical project. For example. Settings Menu Command Project Parameters Associated Tutorial Considerations This command is covered in an exercise later in this lesson. and make modifications in each area as necessary. click the arrows between columns. Modify project browser organization 66 Click Settings menu ➤ Browser Organization. 65 Click OK. see Modifying Project Browser Organization on page 828. View scales are organized under the detail level headings Coarse.Specify detail levels 63 Click Settings menu ➤ Detail Level. This could be useful 836 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . or edit existing organization types. 73 Click OK. you should consider each carefully before applying changes to a template. or edit existing organization types. You can find additional information in Help. 72 If necessary. or Fine. RELATED For more information on modifying browser organization. Each command is available on the Settings menu. you often produce multiple packages of related drawings. create new browser organization types. 70 Click the Sheets tab. you can add project (and shared) parameters to a template. To organize the views and sheets into sets of deliverables. If you routinely create the same documentation sets. rename. and move view scales as needed. Although these settings can be saved within a template. Use the table below as a checklist. you may want to modify the browser organization settings within the template. Medium. NOTE You cannot select specific scales in this dialog. 67 In the Browser Organization dialog. you must decide if the time investment is offset later by the reduction in repetitive work. you can save phases or named print settings in a template. click the Views tab. rename. you can move view scales from one detail level to another. When you create a new view. However. In such a case. You can override the detail level at any time by specifying the Detail Level parameter in the View Properties command. Using the arrows between the columns. 69 If necessary. The view scales move from the lower-left to the upper-right and vice-versa.

Although this is possible. You may want to modify wall types to add a more diverse selection within the template. Loading and Modifying Families and Groups In this exercise. You can also specify how room volumes are computed. and in the Basics tab of the Design Bar. In the steps that follow. you can set the default contour line interval. You can create area schemes if default settings apply to most projects. you could load detail components. there are some important thoughts to consider. the section cut material. or add to this selection. or electrical fixtures. Area and Volume Computations Area Analysis on page 593 View Templates This command is covered in an exercise later in this lesson. Modifying Contour Visibility and Site Settings on page 689 Site Settings If necessary. notice the list of doors already loaded. See Modifying Views and View Templates on page 839. Create and modify the view templates to control the appearance of default views and rendered images. you may want to load families into the template to save time later or ensure consistency throughout the office. title blocks. you can move onto the next component type. Although the options are endless. Loading and Modifying Families and Groups on page 837. You should think very carefully about what families or groups to load and modify within a template. click Door. In addition. 75 Proceed to the next exercise. Loading and Modifying Families and Groups | 837 . or use the Project Browser. This would be cumbersome and counterproductive. However. If this selection is satisfactory. For example. You can do this in several ways: select a component type and click Properties. it is not recommended because it would increase the file size significantly before the first component was added to the project. furniture. and the poche depth. modify. phase filters. you can set up the phases. 2 In the Type Selector. For example. and graphic overrides applicable to most projects. you must scroll through a lengthy list of windows every time you change a window in a project. do so before starting this exercise. If you have not completed the previous exercise. each component loaded will add to the length of the relative Type Selector list. and electrical fixtures. You should only load components that tend to be used in every project and are not likely to change. you may want to delete. Phases Project Phasing on page 761 for things such as hardware. You can load any family or group into a template. you load and modify families or groups into the template started in the previous exercise. if you load every available window type. If necessary. Depending on the intended use of this template. Load and modify families 1 Use the project started in the previous exercise. You should not load every conceivable family into a template file. you do both.Settings Menu Command Associated Tutorial Considerations Shared and Project Parameters on page 843.

838 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . and click OK. You can also load families and groups from the File menu.3 To modify. Loading from the library is the quickest when you know exactly what families you want to load. and click OK. click Bar. In the Element Properties dialog. You can use the Project Browser to modify family types. click Edit/New. Select it. Navigate to the directory containing the door type. and click OK. expand Families. click Load. and click Open. Click Duplicate. 5 Repeat the process for any component type that you want to modify. 6 Click File menu ➤ Load from Library. Modify type properties. or load a new door type. Goal: Load new door type Steps: In the Element Properties dialog. Notice that each family category is listed. Enter a name. You may want to open other Design Bar tabs and make modifications to components not available on this tab. In the Element Properties dialog. click Edit/New. Make modifications. (Element Properties) on the Options Use the instructions in the table below to load. Modify door type Create new door type 4 Click OK. Notice that you have the option to Load Family or Load File as Group. Use the Project Browser to modify families 8 In the Project Browser. create. or modify a door. 7 Press ESC twice to return to the template. create.

and the visibility Modifying Views and View Templates | 839 . The view inherits view properties such as View Scale. In addition. click Load. To load a title block. or modify any component families or groups as necessary. In this exercise.) 10 Expand the title block. and you noticed that each template had a unique set of predefined views. (Element Properties). View templates help standardize the look of all views by providing the initial settings for a view. 14 Using any of the techniques learned in previous steps. Modifying Views and View Templates At the beginning of this lesson. you can apply a template to an existing view at any time using the Apply View Template command. you create and apply the underlying view templates that control their initial appearance. load. and select the title block type. You can use the Project Browser to delete a component from the project or template. Discipline. View Range. In addition. 11 On the Options Bar. Notice that a title block symbol is loaded.9 Expand Annotation Symbols. To do so. You may want to load a title block applicable to your office and then delete this title block. This title block is currently part of the template. Detail Level. click 12 Click Preview. right-click the component. 13 Click OK. create. you created new projects using different templates. 15 Proceed to the next exercise. Notice it has Autodesk Revit in the upper-right corner. Modifying Views and View Templates on page 839. you create the views required for your template. (The title block name may vary depending on the template you started with. and click Delete.

12 In the Project Browser. 6 Click OK. 10 Select Apply automatically to new views of same type. 840 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . and then click OK. These settings are applied when you create a new plan view by adding a new level. 16 Click View menu ➤ Apply View Template. click Apply. select Site Plan. double-click Site. click Apply. In addition. After applying the template. select Architectural Plan. you will first modify view templates. Apply view templates 7 In the Project Browser. under Elevations. 3 Specify each value according to your needs. By modifying the view templates according to your specific needs. 11 Click Apply. open the view from the Project Browser. Subsequent modifications to the view template do not affect any current views unless you reapply the view template. 8 Click View menu ➤ Apply View Template. These values represent the starting point for each plan view. 14 Select the Architectural Plan template. expand Views ➤ Floor Plans. and click OK. Create and modify view templates 1 Click Settings menu ➤ View Templates. rename or duplicate the view template and make modifications. This would result in the Site Plan view template becoming the default template for all new plan views. 13 Click View menu ➤ Apply View Template. NOTE Do not select Apply automatically to new views of same type. Applying a view template to a view is a one-time action. 15 In the Project Browser. double-click South. there is no limit to the number of view templates that you can apply. In this exercise. double-click Level 2. and apply the appropriate template. and then create new views that will automatically use those templates. under Floor Plans. There is no limit to the number of times you can apply a view template to a view. the view is not linked to the template in any way. The view properties of the target view are instantly reset to match those of the template. 17 If you made modifications to the Site Plan template. and click OK. 4 If necessary. Every time a new plan view is created. and double-click Level 1. you can apply a view template to any view. under Floor Plans.settings of categories and subcategories. At any time. 2 Under Names. 18 If you modified any other view templates. Keep in mind that these settings are the default settings for this view type. 5 Repeat the steps above for each of the view templates in the list. Create and modify views 19 In the Project Browser. you reduce rework and increase consistency across projects. 9 Select the Architectural Plan template. it will use this view template to set the initial view properties.

notice that you have the option to rename. Blue level heads have associated plan views. 25 Add the new level within the elevation view. in the Project Browser. review the existing floor plans. Modifying Views and View Templates | 841 . and click Save View. enter a view name. By default. Create 3D views 28 To add 3D views to the template. right-click the ViewCube. and. The associated floor plan will use the Architectural Plan view template to set its initial view properties. under Floor Plans. and click Rename. Rename. click Schedule/Quantities. in the shortcut menu. Create and modify schedules 34 On the View tab of the Design Bar. click Orient to View. the ViewCube displays in the upper right corner of the drawing area for 3D views. 24 On the Options Bar. You can change the view orientation in many ways: ■ ■ Click a corner. 32 (Optional) To change the orientation of the 3D view. If it does not display. under 3D Views. click 29 In the Project Browser. on the View toolbar. Black level heads have no associated views. click Orient to a Direction. right-click the view name. select Make Plan View. on the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 21 In the Project Browser. right-click the ViewCube. and click Properties. 27 Create additional levels as needed. click Level.Notice the level names. right-click {3D}. To orient the 3D view to a direction. 30 In the Project Browser. ■ 33 To save the re-oriented view. 22 In the Project Browser. To orient the 3D view to another view. duplicate. ceiling plans. The view is listed in the Project Browser under Views (all) ➤ 3D Views. If you want to modify view properties. click Window menu ➤ ViewCube. a face. 23 To add more levels to the template. or delete this view. review the floor plans. (Default 3D View). and elevations. under Floor Plans. use the ViewCube. 26 Rename and reposition the level as needed. If prompted. right-click Level 1. 31 Rename the 3D View. or delete them as needed. 20 In the Project Browser. duplicate. expand 3D Views. or an edge of the ViewCube. and select the desired direction. right-click the ViewCube. and select the desired view. Make sure you are still in the South elevation view.

each layer in the file is assigned a line weight based on the pen number/line weight settings you created. Modifying Import/Export Settings In this exercise. TIP You can add sheets to the template and delete the title block. If you have already loaded your office title blocks into the template. To do so. The layer names are stored in a text file (exportlayers. modify settings as needed. On the Formatting tab. Revit Architecture presets the layer names to American Institute of Architects (AIA) industry standards. This can save significant time and ensure that office standards are maintained. assign filters. You are prompted to select a title block. select the default title block. 38 Repeat the steps above for each schedule type you add to the template. On the Filter tab.You can add schedules to a template. To later add a title block to a sheet. select the category type. and click Add View to Sheet. Modifying Import/Export Settings on page 842.txt for AutoCAD. click View menu ➤ New ➤ Place Titleblock. 35 If you want to add schedules to your template. 37 Click OK. click Add View. expand Sheets (all). You can still add views to the sheet. and modify their properties accordingly. The layer mapping files reside in the Data folder of the Revit Architecture program installation directory. You may want to consider adding the schedules that you use most often. Select a view. When you import a DWG or DXF file. or exportlayersdgn. You then set the import line weights for DWG/DXF. 40 To add views to the sheet. 36 In the Schedule Properties dialog. 41 To rename or renumber the sheet. Modify export layers for DWG and DXF 1 Click File menu ➤ Import/Export Settings ➤ Export Layers DWG/DXF. select one. and click OK. TIP You can also drag and drop views directly from the Project Browser onto the sheet. Add sheets to the template 39 On the View tab of the Design Bar. on the View tab of the Design Bar. On the Sorting/Grouping tab. in the Project Browser. and then are exported along with your project into the appropriate CAD program. 43 Proceed to the next exercise.txt for MicroStation). Right-click the sheet name. 842 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . 42 Create new sheets as needed. make the following modifications as needed: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ On the Fields tab. After the sheet is created. and click OK. click Sheet. Subsequent sheets are numbered consecutively based on the previous sheet. you modify the export layer settings for DWG/DXF and DGN files. modify settings as needed. and click OK. and click Rename. select and order required fields. On the Appearance tab. The Export Layers command maps Revit Architecture categories and subcategories to specific layer names that are available after exporting to other CAD programs. select the title block and delete it. modify settings as needed.

9 Click Save As. When scheduling. and click Save. Color ID corresponds to an AutoCAD or MicroStation color ID. When you import a DWG or DXF file. and related multi-category tags and schedules. 2 For each category. 5 For each category. Pen Number 1 to Line Weight Number 1. Setting up Shared and Project Parameters In this exercise. name the file. Pen Number 2 to Line Weight Number 2. specify the following: ■ ■ Projection Layer name and Color ID Cut Layer name and Color ID 3 If you modified the settings in this dialog. and click Save. You can import pen numbers from a DWG or DXF file and map them to a Revit Architecture line weight. You can add these shared parameters to any family regardless of category. When you create a multi-category schedule. Layer name corresponds to level name for MicroStation. you do not need to worry about where the text file is saved. you normally schedule a single category: rooms. windows. each layer in the file is assigned a line weight based on the pen number/line weight settings you created. select Save As. Modify export layers for DGN 4 Click File menu ➤ Import/Export Settings ➤ Export Layers DGN. 10 Proceed to the next exercise. You can save these mappings to a text file. you can use shared parameters to add specific parameters to an existing family component for scheduling and tagging when those parameters are not initially present by default. 8 In the dialog. specify the following: ■ ■ Projection Level Number and Color ID Cut Level Number and Color ID 6 If you modified the settings in this dialog. Modify import line weights 7 Click File menu ➤ Import/Export Settings ➤ Import Line Weights DWG/DXF. you continue the refinement of the template by setting up shared parameters. project parameters. Their definitions are stored in an external file ensuring consistency across families and projects. They cannot be shared with other projects. and they become the set mappings for the project. doors. name the file. therefore. and click Save. and they cannot be used to tag objects (as with shared parameters). Multi-category tags use shared parameters to permit tagging of any family component regardless of category. match the pen (DWG/DXF Color Number) to the appropriate line weight. These settings are retained within the project template. name the file. Setting up Shared and Project Parameters | 843 . Setting up Shared and Project Parameters on page 843. Their values may also be aggregated and reported using multi-category schedules.TIP In the Export Layers dialog. you can define additional parameters that are not included in the pre-defined instance and type parameters within family components or within the project template. it lists components regardless of category by using an external parameter as a filter. and so on. Using shared parameters. and so on. click Save As. Set as many pen-line weight mappings as desired. For example. for example. Project parameters are parameters (either instance or type) that are used within a single project for the purposes of scheduling information specific to that project.

and click OK. 11 For each parameter group. 23 Add project parameters as needed. under Groups. 17 Under Discipline. 844 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . 6 Create as many groups as needed. 16 Under Parameter Data. 25 Click Select. If a file already exists. select the group you want the parameter to be listed with in the Element Properties dialog. and the creation of multi-category tags and schedules. 2 Click Create. because each office has a unique set of needs. 5 Enter the group name. 22 Click OK. 8 Under Parameters. NOTE This procedure is for creating a new shared parameter file. If you do not need to make changes to shared or project parameters. 12 Click OK when you have finished creating shared parameters. Set up shared parameters 1 Click File menu ➤ Shared Parameters. 14 Click Add. and select Shared Parameter. 15 In the Parameter Properties dialog. 20 Choose whether the parameter is stored by instance or type. For each parameter group. 10 Click OK. add required parameters. you may want to save the file to a network location. you can browse to that file and modify it as needed. If this template will be used by multiple team members. 19 Under Group parameter under. select the element categories to which this parameter applies. click Add. click New. Create shared parameters 7 Under Parameter group. 18 Under Type of Parameter. 24 To add a shared project parameter. select a group to add parameters to. 21 Under Categories. click New. enter a parameter name. and choose a shared parameter. see Scheduling Shared Parameters on page 249 or Adding Project Parameters to a Window Schedule on page 226. project parameters. select Project parameter.This exercise does not provide detailed instructions. Set up project parameters 13 Click Settings menu ➤ Project Parameters. If you are unfamiliar with shared parameters. Create parameter groups 4 In the Edit Shared Parameters dialog. 26 Click OK. select a parameter value type. for Name. and specify its discipline and type. you can create a list of parameters. select a parameter discipline type. 9 Name the parameter. you can skip this exercise and move onto the last exercise of this lesson. Creating Named Print Settings on page 845. 3 Name and save the file.

Creating Named Print Settings | 845 . you can select the printer for each set of named settings in the Print Setup dialog. make minor modifications if necessary. and print. By going first to the Print command. In this exercise. By creating named settings within the template. you create named print settings. and click OK. select Multi-Category. and the percent of actual size. select the tag. After you have created the multi-category tags in the Family Editor. Notice that the shared parameters created in previous steps are available within the list of available fields. click Setup. indicate the group to which the parameter belongs. save the file as a template. 28 Click OK. see the tutorial referenced in the introduction of this exercise. enter a name for the print setting and click OK. 32 Navigate to the directory. 39 Proceed to the final exercise.27 Choose whether you want the shared parameter to be an instance parameter or a type parameter. 2 Under Printer. Creating Named Print Settings Depending on your office environment. enter a name for the schedule. 6 In the New dialog. 29 Add shared project parameters as needed. you can set options such as sheet sizes. Create multi-category schedules 33 On the View tab of the Design Bar. you need only select a setting. or refer to the online help. for Name. select a printer for which you want to create named settings. and click Open. 5 Click Save As. 37 When you have completed the schedule. Creating Named Print Settings on page 845. Create and load multi-category tags 30 Create required multi-category tags in the Family Editor. 38 Create additional multi-category schedules as needed. The tag is now part of the template. 36 Create the schedule as you did in the previous exercise. click OK. paper placement. This is especially true if you have numerous printers in a large networked office. 3 Under Settings. 4 Modify the printer settings. Click OK. Create named print settings 1 Click File menu ➤ Print. you can load them into the template. you may find it beneficial to add named print settings to the template. and assign the categories to which this parameter applies. 34 For Category. click Schedule/Quantities. 35 For Name. and make it your default template file. You can also create named settings for printing to DWF and to a PDF writer. For each printer. For information on creating multi-category tags. 31 Click File menu ➤ Load from Library ➤ Load Family.

select a different printer. 20 Click OK. and saved them to a template. Your template is complete. If you have a project. and click Open. and create new settings for this printer. 25 Click OK. 14 Under Save as type. you significantly reduce the amount of repetitive work that would be done by each employee for each project.rte). click Browse. 15 Name the template. and navigate to the location where you saved the template. select it. click Save as. The changes you made to the template are now the starting point for this project. 19 Select the template. 16 Click File menu ➤ Close. you can delete the model geometry and save the empty project as a template file. 22 Click the File Locations tab. Save the template 12 Click File menu ➤ Save. and click OK. Set the template as your default template file 21 Click Settings menu ➤ Options. loaded components. save it in a network location. you ensure that office standards are maintained. enter a new name for the printer. TIP There are other ways you can create a template. 11 Click Close when finished. 8 Click OK when you have finished creating named settings for this printer. TIP You can also create named settings for your DWF and PDF writer. 24 Navigate to the template location. 10 Repeat these steps as needed. 23 For Default template file. You can also set this template as your default template. In addition. If you need to share this file with others. In this lesson. select Template Files (*. By investing the time to individualize your template. you modified settings. 846 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . This can provide a good starting point for a template. 13 Navigate to the directory where you want to save the template. click Setup. you can use the Transfer Project Standards tool to move standards from one project to another. In addition. modify the printer settings.7 If you want to have multiple settings for this printer. Create additional settings as needed. 18 Click Browse. 9 In the Print dialog. Use the template 17 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Project. and click Open. The only remaining task is to save it. and click Save.

Sign up to vote on this title
UsefulNot useful